CP N-02 Vol.2 Sec.6 IB Technical Specifications 500

Procurement of Works
BIDDING DOCUMENT
for the Procurement of
The Malolos to Clark Railway Project
(MCRP)
VOLUME 2
Part II – Requirements
Section 6 – The Employers Requirements
Part 1 - The Specifications
Book 5 – TS 500
Architectural
Issued on :
Invitation for Bids No. :
OCB No. :
Employer : The Government of the Republic of the
Philippines through the Department of
Transportation
Country : Republic of the Philippines
Bidding Documents Part II – Requirements
Malolos – Clark Railway Project – Civil & Building Works Section 6 – Part 1
Package CP N–01 – CP N-05 Book 5 – TS 500
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TS 500 ARCHITECTURAL ................................................................................................................................ 40
LIST OF ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................................ 40
DEFINITION OF TERMS .................................................................................................................................. 44
GENERAL PROVISION ..................................................................................................................................... 58
501 ARCHITECTURAL COMPOSITE BUILDING SYSTEM (CBS) ................................................. 75

The Work .................................................................................................................................................. 75
General ...................................................................................................................................................... 75
501.2.1 Summary ............................................................................................................................................... 75
501.2.2 References ............................................................................................................................................. 75
501.2.3 Supplier’s Responsibilities .................................................................................................................... 75
501.2.4 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................................................. 75
501.2.5 Data and Equipment .............................................................................................................................. 76
501.2.6 Site Conditions ...................................................................................................................................... 76
Products ..................................................................................................................................................... 76
501.3.1 Manufacturers ........................................................................................................................................ 76
501.3.2 Materials ................................................................................................................................................ 77
Technical Data........................................................................................................................................... 77
501.4.1 EPS Specifications (ASTM C 578) ....................................................................................................... 77
501.4.2 CBS Coating .......................................................................................................................................... 77
501.4.3 Technical Data ....................................................................................................................................... 78
Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Perforated External Wall Panels (GRC) ............................................... 79
501.5.1 Design Conditions ................................................................................................................................. 79
501.5.2 Submission ............................................................................................................................................ 80
501.5.3 Materials ................................................................................................................................................ 80
501.5.4 Product Inspection at Panel Manufacturer ............................................................................................. 80
501.5.5 Execution ............................................................................................................................................... 80
Measurement and Payment ....................................................................................................................... 80
501.6.1 Method of Measurement ........................................................................................................................ 80
501.6.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................... 81
502 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE FINISHES................................................................................. 82

The Work .................................................................................................................................................. 82
502.1.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 82
502.1.2 Codes and Standards.............................................................................................................................. 82
TS 500 - 2
502.1.3 Environmental Conditions ..................................................................................................................... 82

502.1.4 Submittals .............................................................................................................................................. 82
Products ..................................................................................................................................................... 83
502.2.1 Manufacturers ........................................................................................................................................ 83
502.2.2 Materials ................................................................................................................................................ 83
Execution................................................................................................................................................... 83
502.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................... 86
503 GRAVEL WASHOUT FINISH.......................................................................................................... 88

The Work .................................................................................................................................................. 88
503.1.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 88
503.1.2 Submittals .............................................................................................................................................. 88
503.1.3 Delivery, Handling and Storage ............................................................................................................ 88
Products ..................................................................................................................................................... 88
503.2.1 Manufacturers ........................................................................................................................................ 88
503.2.2 Materials ................................................................................................................................................ 89
503.2.3 Gravel Washout Mixes .......................................................................................................................... 89
Execution................................................................................................................................................... 89
503.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................... 90
504 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PAVERS ................................................................................... 92

The Work .................................................................................................................................................. 92
504.1.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 92
504.1.2 Related Sections .................................................................................................................................... 92
504.1.3 References ............................................................................................................................................. 92
504.1.4 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................................................. 93
504.1.5 Submittals .............................................................................................................................................. 93
504.1.6 Mock-Ups .............................................................................................................................................. 93
504.1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling ........................................................................................................... 93
Products ..................................................................................................................................................... 94
504.2.1 Manufacturers ........................................................................................................................................ 94
504.2.2 Materials ................................................................................................................................................ 94
504.2.3 Bedding and Joint Sand ......................................................................................................................... 94
TS 500 - 3
504.2.4 Edge Restraints ...................................................................................................................................... 96

Execution................................................................................................................................................... 96
504.3.1 Examination........................................................................................................................................... 96
504.3.2 Installation ............................................................................................................................................. 97
504.3.3 Field Quality Control ............................................................................................................................. 98
504.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................... 98
505 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE ACCESSORIES ..................................................................... 100

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 100
505.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 100
505.1.2 Scope ................................................................................................................................................... 100
505.1.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 100
505.1.4 Quality Assurance ............................................................................................................................... 100
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 101
505.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 101
505.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 101
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 102
Floor Hardener ........................................................................................................................................ 102
505.4.1 Scope ................................................................................................................................................... 102
505.4.2 Products ............................................................................................................................................... 103
Resinous Floor Finishes .......................................................................................................................... 104
505.5.1 The Work ............................................................................................................................................. 104
505.5.2 General ................................................................................................................................................ 104
505.5.3 System Description .............................................................................................................................. 104
505.5.4 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 104
505.5.6 Project Conditions ............................................................................................................................... 105
505.5.7 Warranty .............................................................................................................................................. 106
505.5.8 Products ............................................................................................................................................... 106
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 107
505.6.1 Floor Hardener..................................................................................................................................... 107
505.6.2 Resinous Finish ................................................................................................................................... 108
Measurement and Payment ..................................................................................................................... 110
505.7.1 Method of Measurement ...................................................................................................................... 110
505.7.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 110
TS 500 - 4
506 METAL FABRICATIONS ............................................................................................................... 112

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 112
506.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 112
Handrails and Railings ............................................................................................................................ 112
506.2.1 Scope ................................................................................................................................................... 112
506.2.2 Submittal ............................................................................................................................................. 112
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 113
506.3.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 113
506.3.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 113
506.3.3 Miscellaneous Materials ...................................................................................................................... 114
506.3.4 Fabrication ........................................................................................................................................... 114
506.3.5 Metal Finishes, General ....................................................................................................................... 115
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 115
506.4.1 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 115
506.4.2 Field Measurements............................................................................................................................. 116
506.4.3 Installation, General ............................................................................................................................ 116
506.4.4 Field Welding ...................................................................................................................................... 116
506.4.5 Anchoring Posts................................................................................................................................... 116
Light Steel Framing System .................................................................................................................... 117
506.5.1 Scope ................................................................................................................................................... 117
Metal Works ............................................................................................................................................ 118
506.6.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 118
506.6.2 Products ............................................................................................................................................... 119
506.7.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 131
507 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES ............................................................................... 132

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 132
507.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 132
507.1.2 Work of this Section ............................................................................................................................ 132
507.1.4 Environmental Conditions ................................................................................................................... 133
507.1.5 Storage ................................................................................................................................................. 133
507.1.6 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 133
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 133
507.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 133
TS 500 - 5
507.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 133

Execution................................................................................................................................................. 134
507.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 136
508 FURRING AND METAL LATH ..................................................................................................... 137

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 137
508.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 137
508.1.2 Description of Work ............................................................................................................................ 137
508.1.4 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 138
508.1.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling .......................................................................................................... 138
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 138
508.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 138
508.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 138
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 140
508.3.1 Partition Installation ............................................................................................................................ 140
508.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 143
509 ROUGH CARPENTRY .................................................................................................................... 145

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 145
509.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 145
509.1.3 Codes and Standards............................................................................................................................ 145
509.1.6 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 146
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 146
509.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 146
509.2.2 General ................................................................................................................................................ 146
509.2.3 Timber ................................................................................................................................................. 146
509.2.4 Plywood ............................................................................................................................................... 147
509.2.5 Wood Particle Board ........................................................................................................................... 147
509.2.6 Hardboard ............................................................................................................................................ 147
509.2.7 Fasteners .............................................................................................................................................. 147
TS 500 - 6
509.2.8 Fire-Retardant Treatment .................................................................................................................... 148

509.2.9 Preservation Treatments ...................................................................................................................... 148
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 149
509.3.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 149
509.3.2 Nailing and Screws .............................................................................................................................. 149
509.3.3 Ming Anchors ...................................................................................................................................... 150
509.3.4 Bolts and Screws ................................................................................................................................. 150
509.3.5 Studding and Framing ......................................................................................................................... 150
510 FINISH CARPENTRY ..................................................................................................................... 153

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 153
510.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 153
510.1.5 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 154
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 154
510.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 154
510.2.2 Timber ................................................................................................................................................. 154
510.2.3 Glued Laminate Timber....................................................................................................................... 155
510.2.4 Plywood ............................................................................................................................................... 155
510.2.5 Fire-Retardant Treatment .................................................................................................................... 155
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 156
510.3.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 156
510.3.2 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 156
510.3.3 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 156
510.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 158
511 CABINETRY ..................................................................................................................................... 160

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 160
511.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 160
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 160
511.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 160
511.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 160
511.2.3 Fabrication ........................................................................................................................................... 160
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 163
TS 500 - 7
511.3.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 163

511.3.2 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 163
511.3.3 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 163
511.4.2 Bases of Payment ................................................................................................................................ 164
512 METAL ROOF PANELS AND ACCESSORIES ........................................................................... 165

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 165
512.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 165
Sheet Metal Roofing ................................................................................................................................ 165
512.2.2 General ................................................................................................................................................ 165
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 166
512.3.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 166
512.3.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 166
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 168
512.5.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 170
513 INSULATED METAL PANELS ..................................................................................................... 171

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 171
513.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 171
513.1.2 References ........................................................................................................................................... 171
513.1.3 Performance Requirements .................................................................................................................. 171
513.1.4 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 171
513.1.5 Shop Drawings .................................................................................................................................... 171
513.1.6 Certificates........................................................................................................................................... 172
513.1.7 Regulatory Requirements .................................................................................................................... 172
513.1.8 Mockups .............................................................................................................................................. 172
513.1.10 Environmental Requirements .............................................................................................................. 172
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 172
513.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 172
513.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 173
513.2.3 Accessories .......................................................................................................................................... 173
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 173
513.3.1 Examination......................................................................................................................................... 173
TS 500 - 8
513.3.2 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 173

513.3.3 Field Quality Control ........................................................................................................................... 174
513.3.4 Cleaning............................................................................................................................................... 174
513.3.5 Protection............................................................................................................................................. 174
513.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 175
514 WATERPROOFING ........................................................................................................................ 176

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 176
514.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 176
514.1.3 References ........................................................................................................................................... 176
514.1.4 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 177
514.1.8 Warranty .............................................................................................................................................. 179
514.1.9 Qualifications ...................................................................................................................................... 180
514.1.10 Pre-Installation Meeting/ Waterproofing Conference ......................................................................... 180
514.1.11 Environmental Requirements .............................................................................................................. 181
514.1.12 Environmental Limitations: ................................................................................................................. 181
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 181
514.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 181
514.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 182
514.2.3 Waterproofing Types ........................................................................................................................... 183
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 184
514.3.1 Examination......................................................................................................................................... 184
514.3.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 185
514.3.3 Waterproofing Application .................................................................................................................. 187
514.3.5 Curing, Protecting and Cleaning.......................................................................................................... 189
514.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 190
515 DAMP-PROOFING .......................................................................................................................... 192

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 192
515.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 192
TS 500 - 9
515.1.2 Scope ................................................................................................................................................... 192

515.1.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 192
515.1.4 Samples ............................................................................................................................................... 192
515.1.5 Delivery and Storage ........................................................................................................................... 192
515.1.6 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 193
515.1.7 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 193
515.1.8 Application .......................................................................................................................................... 193
516 SPRAYED AND AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS ............................................... 194

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 194
516.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 194
516.1.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 194
516.1.5 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 195
516.1.6 Conditions ........................................................................................................................................... 196
516.1.7 Warranty .............................................................................................................................................. 197
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 198
516.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 198
516.2.2 Concealed Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials ....................................................................................... 198
516.2.3 Exposed Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials .......................................................................................... 199
516.2.4 Auxiliary Fire-Resistive Materials ...................................................................................................... 200
516.2.5 Stone Wool Products and Cement Base Fire Protective Materials ...................................................... 200
516.2.6 Thermal Stone Wool (Blanket) ............................................................................................................ 201
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 201
516.3.1 Examination......................................................................................................................................... 201
516.3.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 202
516.3.3 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 202
516.3.5 Cleaning, Protection and repair ........................................................................................................... 204
517 FIRESTOP ......................................................................................................................................... 205

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 205
517.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 205
517.1.2 Summary ............................................................................................................................................. 205
517.1.3 References ........................................................................................................................................... 205
TS 500 - 10
517.1.5 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 208

517.1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling ......................................................................................................... 209
517.1.9 Warranty .............................................................................................................................................. 210
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 210
517.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 210
517.2.2 Scope/Application ............................................................................................................................... 210
517.2.3 Through Penetration Firestop Products ............................................................................................... 211
517.2.4 Fire-Resistive Joint Products ............................................................................................................... 215
517.2.5 Fire-stopping for Single Membrane Penetrations ................................................................................ 216
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 216
517.3.1 Examination......................................................................................................................................... 216
517.3.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 217
517.3.3 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 217
517.3.5 Cleaning and Protection....................................................................................................................... 218
518 FIREPROOFING .............................................................................................................................. 219

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 219
518.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 219
518.1.4 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 219
518.1.5 Samples ............................................................................................................................................... 220
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 220
518.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 220
518.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 220
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 221
518.3.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 221
518.3.2 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 221
518.3.3 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 222
518.3.4 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 222
518.3.5 Inspection of Thickness ....................................................................................................................... 222
518.3.6 Cleaning............................................................................................................................................... 222
TS 500 - 11
518.4.2 Bases of Payment ................................................................................................................................ 223
519 INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING ............................................................................................... 224

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 224
519.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 224
519.1.2 Related Documents .............................................................................................................................. 224
519.1.3 Summary ............................................................................................................................................. 224
519.1.4 Pre-installation Meetings ..................................................................................................................... 224
519.1.5 Action Submittals ................................................................................................................................ 224
519.1.6 Informational Submittals ..................................................................................................................... 225
519.1.8 Field Conditions .................................................................................................................................. 226
519.1.9 Product................................................................................................................................................. 226
519.1.10 Substrates and Surface Preparation: .................................................................................................... 227
519.1.11 Performance Data: ............................................................................................................................... 227
519.1.12 Mixing and Thinning: .......................................................................................................................... 227
519.1.13 Application Equipment Guidelines: .................................................................................................... 228
519.1.14 Application Procedures: ...................................................................................................................... 228
519.1.15 Application Conditions: ....................................................................................................................... 229
519.1.16 Curing Schedule: ................................................................................................................................. 229
519.1.17 Cleanup and Safety: ............................................................................................................................. 229
519.1.18 Maintenance: ....................................................................................................................................... 229
519.1.19 Testing/Certification/Listing: .............................................................................................................. 229
519.1.20 Packaging, Handling and Storage: ....................................................................................................... 230
519.1.21 Performance Data ................................................................................................................................ 230
519.1.22 Mixing and Thinning: .......................................................................................................................... 231
519.1.23 Application Equipment Guidelines: .................................................................................................... 231
519.1.24 Application Procedures: ...................................................................................................................... 231
519.1.25 Application Conditions: ....................................................................................................................... 232
519.1.26 Curing Schedule: ................................................................................................................................. 232
519.1.27 Cleanup and Safety: ............................................................................................................................. 232
519.1.28 Maintenance: ....................................................................................................................................... 232
519.1.29 Testing/Certification/Listing: .............................................................................................................. 233
519.1.30 Packaging, Handling and Storage: ....................................................................................................... 233
519.1.32 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 234
519.1.33 Mastic and Intumescent Fire-Resistive Coatings................................................................................. 234
519.1.34 Auxiliary Materials .............................................................................................................................. 235
TS 500 - 12
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 235
519.2.1 Examination......................................................................................................................................... 235
519.2.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 236
519.2.3 Application .......................................................................................................................................... 236
519.2.5 Cleaning, Protecting, and Repairing .................................................................................................... 238
520 RIGID INSULATION ....................................................................................................................... 239

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 239
520.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 239
520.1.5 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 239
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 239
520.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 239
520.2.2 Insulation ............................................................................................................................................. 240
520.2.3 Adhesive .............................................................................................................................................. 241
520.2.4 Vapor Barrier ....................................................................................................................................... 241
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 241
520.3.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 241
520.3.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 241
520.3.3 Installation under Slab on Grade ......................................................................................................... 241
520.3.4 Installation against Perimeter Foundation Walls ................................................................................. 241
520.3.5 Installation in Cavity Walls ................................................................................................................. 242
520.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 242
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 244
520.5.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 244
520.5.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 244
520.5.3 Installation of Generic Sealant ............................................................................................................ 245
520.5.4 Installation of Premium Sealer for Stone, Tile and Grout ................................................................... 245
520.5.5 Installation of Back Coat/ Pre-Sealer .................................................................................................. 246
520.5.6 Installation of Water Repellents .......................................................................................................... 247
TS 500 - 13
521 SEALANT .......................................................................................................................................... 249

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 249
521.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 249
521.1.6 Storage ................................................................................................................................................. 250
521.1.7 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 250
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 251
521.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 251
521.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 251
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 254
521.3.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 254
521.3.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 254
521.3.3 Installation of Generic Sealant ............................................................................................................ 254
521.3.4 Installation of Premium Sealer for Stone, Tile and Grout ................................................................... 255
521.3.5 Installation of Back Coat/ Pre-Sealer .................................................................................................. 256
521.3.6 Installation of Water Repellents .......................................................................................................... 257
522 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE MATERIAL ...................................................................................... 259

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 259
522.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 259
522.1.2 Scope ................................................................................................................................................... 259
522.1.3 References ........................................................................................................................................... 259
522.1.4 Product Composition and Material Properties ..................................................................................... 259
522.1.5 Coating ................................................................................................................................................ 260
522.1.6 Photo-catalyst Coating......................................................................................................................... 260
522.1.7 Fire Performance ................................................................................................................................. 260
Aluminum Honeycombed Panel.............................................................................................................. 261
522.2.1 Product Description ............................................................................................................................. 261
522.2.2 Conditioning Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 261
522.2.3 General Test Results ............................................................................................................................ 261
522.2.4 Test Conducted .................................................................................................................................... 262
522.2.5 Specific Test Results ........................................................................................................................... 262
522.2.6 Classification ....................................................................................................................................... 263
TS 500 - 14
522.2.7 Annex to Classification ....................................................................................................................... 263

Products ................................................................................................................................................... 265
522.3.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 265
522.3.2 Material ............................................................................................................................................... 266
522.3.3 Product Dimension and Tolerance....................................................................................................... 266
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 266
522.4.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 266
522.4.2 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 266
522.4.3 Adjusting and Cleaning ....................................................................................................................... 266
522.5.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 267
523 TENSILE MEMBRANE ROOF STRUCTURE (TMRS).............................................................. 268

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 268
523.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 268
523.1.2 References ........................................................................................................................................... 268
523.1.3 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 269
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 269
523.2.1 Material ............................................................................................................................................... 269
523.2.2 Design and Engineering....................................................................................................................... 269
523.2.3 Fabrication ........................................................................................................................................... 270
523.2.4 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 270
523.2.5 Warranty .............................................................................................................................................. 271
523.2.6 Emergency ........................................................................................................................................... 271
523.2.7 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 271
523.3.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 272
524 ROOF ACCESSORIES .................................................................................................................... 273

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 273
524.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 273
524.1.2 Scope ................................................................................................................................................... 273
524.1.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 273
524.1.4 Product Handling ................................................................................................................................. 273
524.1.5 Guarantee............................................................................................................................................. 273
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 274
524.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 274
TS 500 - 15
524.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 274

Execution................................................................................................................................................. 274
524.3.1 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 274
524.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 274
525 WOODEN DOORS ........................................................................................................................... 276

General .................................................................................................................................................... 276
525.1.1 Scope of Works ................................................................................................................................... 276
525.1.2 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 276
525.1.3 Drawings ............................................................................................................................................. 276
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 277
525.2.3 General ................................................................................................................................................ 277
525.2.4 Suitable Timbers .................................................................................................................................. 277
525.2.5 Decorative Plastic Laminate ................................................................................................................ 277
525.2.6 Pressure Impregnation ......................................................................................................................... 277
525.2.7 Fixing Materials................................................................................................................................... 278
525.2.8 Finish Hardware .................................................................................................................................. 278
525.2.9 Quality Requirements .......................................................................................................................... 278
525.2.10 Veneering ............................................................................................................................................ 279
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 279
525.3.1 Erection ............................................................................................................................................... 279
525.3.2 Fixing Materials................................................................................................................................... 279
525.3.3 Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC) ..................................................................................... 279
525.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 280
526 METAL DOOR AND FRAMES (AND WINDOWS) .................................................................... 281

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 281
526.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 281
526.1.2 References ........................................................................................................................................... 281
526.1.5 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 282
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 282
526.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 282
526.2.2 General ................................................................................................................................................ 282
TS 500 - 16
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 283
526.3.1 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 283
526.3.2 Steel Door and Frame .......................................................................................................................... 284
526.3.3 Hollow Metal Doors ............................................................................................................................ 287
Automatic Sliding Doors ......................................................................................................................... 290
526.4.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 290
526.4.3 System Description .............................................................................................................................. 291
526.4.4 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 291
526.4.6 Products ............................................................................................................................................... 293
526.4.7 Glazing ................................................................................................................................................ 294
526.4.8 Hardware ............................................................................................................................................. 294
526.4.9 Door Operation .................................................................................................................................... 294
526.4.10 DOOR OPERATOR SENSOR CONTROL SYSTEMS ..................................................................... 295
526.4.11 Accessories .......................................................................................................................................... 295
526.4.12 Fabrication ........................................................................................................................................... 295
526.4.13 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 296
526.4.14 Cleaning............................................................................................................................................... 297
526.5.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 298
527 METAL LOUVERS .......................................................................................................................... 305

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 305
527.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 305
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 305
527.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 305
527.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 305
527.2.3 Architectural Louvers .......................................................................................................................... 306
527.2.4 Fabrication ........................................................................................................................................... 306
527.2.5 Finish ................................................................................................................................................... 306
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 307
527.3.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 307
527.3.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 307
527.3.3 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 307
527.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 307
TS 500 - 17
528 ALUMINUM & GLASS DOORS AND WINDOWS ..................................................................... 310

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 310
528.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 310
528.1.2 Section Includes................................................................................................................................... 310
528.1.3 Related Sections .................................................................................................................................. 310
528.1.4 References ........................................................................................................................................... 310
528.1.5 Design/Performance Requirements ..................................................................................................... 311
528.1.6 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 311
528.1.9 Sequencing .......................................................................................................................................... 313
528.1.11 Warranty .............................................................................................................................................. 313
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 313
528.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 313
528.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 313
528.2.3 Fabrication ........................................................................................................................................... 314
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 314
528.3.1 Examination......................................................................................................................................... 314
528.3.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 315
528.3.3 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 315
528.3.4 Protection............................................................................................................................................. 315
Aluminum Windows and Frames ............................................................................................................ 315
528.4.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 315
528.4.2 Products ............................................................................................................................................... 320
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 323
528.5.1 Examination......................................................................................................................................... 323
528.5.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 323
528.5.3 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 323
528.5.4 Protection............................................................................................................................................. 323
528.6.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 324
529 INTERIOR FIRE-RESISTANT SAFETY GLASS DOORS AND WINDOWS .......................... 331
The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 331
TS 500 - 18
529.1.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 331

529.1.4 Products and Handling ........................................................................................................................ 332
529.1.6 Warranty .............................................................................................................................................. 332
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 332
529.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 333
529.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 333
529.2.3 Components ......................................................................................................................................... 333
529.2.4 Hardware ............................................................................................................................................. 334
529.2.5 Fabrication ........................................................................................................................................... 334
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 335
529.3.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 335
529.3.2 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 335
529.3.3 Adjustment and Cleaning .................................................................................................................... 335
529.3.4 Protection............................................................................................................................................. 335
529.4.1 Measurement and Payment .................................................................................................................. 335
530 GLAZING .......................................................................................................................................... 336

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 336
530.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 336
General .................................................................................................................................................... 336
530.2.4 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 337
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 338
530.3.1 Glass (for Station Buildings) ............................................................................................................... 338
530.3.2 Glass (for Depot Buildings) ................................................................................................................. 341
530.3.3 Putty .................................................................................................................................................... 342
530.3.4 Sealants ................................................................................................................................................ 342
530.3.5 Pre-formed Strip Materials .................................................................................................................. 343
530.3.6 Pre-formed Compression Gaskets ....................................................................................................... 343
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 343
530.4.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 343
530.4.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 343
530.4.3 Field Measurement and Tolerance....................................................................................................... 343
TS 500 - 19
530.4.4 Storage ................................................................................................................................................. 344

530.4.5 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 344
530.4.6 Extra Stock .......................................................................................................................................... 344
530.4.7 Cleaning............................................................................................................................................... 344
530.5.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 345
531 GLASS DOORS ................................................................................................................................. 347

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 347
531.1.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 347
531.1.4 Products and Handling ........................................................................................................................ 348
531.1.6 Warranty .............................................................................................................................................. 348
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 348
531.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 348
531.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 349
531.2.3 Components ......................................................................................................................................... 349
531.2.4 Hardware ............................................................................................................................................. 349
531.2.5 Fabrication ........................................................................................................................................... 350
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 350
531.3.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 350
531.3.2 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 350
531.3.3 Adjustment and Cleaning .................................................................................................................... 350
531.3.4 Protection............................................................................................................................................. 351
531.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 351
532 ROLL-UP SHUTTER DOORS ........................................................................................................ 352

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 352
532.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 352
532.1.2 Summary ............................................................................................................................................. 352
532.1.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 352
TS 500 - 20
532.1.7 Warranty .............................................................................................................................................. 353

Products ................................................................................................................................................... 353
532.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 353
532.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 354
532.2.3 Shop Finish .......................................................................................................................................... 356
532.2.4 Application & Design .......................................................................................................................... 356
532.2.5 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 356
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 356
532.3.1 Examination......................................................................................................................................... 356
532.3.2 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 356
532.3.3 Cleaning............................................................................................................................................... 356
532.3.4 Protection............................................................................................................................................. 357
532.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 357
533 ACCESS DOORS .............................................................................................................................. 360

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 360
533.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 360
533.1.4 Fire-Resistance Ratings ....................................................................................................................... 361
533.1.5 Size Variations..................................................................................................................................... 361
533.1.6 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 361
533.1.7 Products Handling ............................................................................................................................... 361
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 361
533.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 361
533.2.2 Materials and Fabrication .................................................................................................................... 362
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 363
533.3.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 363
533.3.2 Coordination ........................................................................................................................................ 363
533.4.1 Method of Measurement and Payment ................................................................................................ 363
534 FINISH HARDWARE ...................................................................................................................... 364

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 364
534.1.2 Supplying Finish Hardware ................................................................................................................. 364
534.1.3 Providing Hardware Templates ........................................................................................................... 364
TS 500 - 21

534.1.6 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 365
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 365
534.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 365
534.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 365
534.2.3 Keying ................................................................................................................................................. 365
534.3.2 Bases of Payment ................................................................................................................................ 366
535 PLASTICS ......................................................................................................................................... 367

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 367
535.1.1 Related Work ....................................................................................................................................... 367
535.1.2 References ........................................................................................................................................... 367
535.1.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 367
535.1.6 Sequencing .......................................................................................................................................... 368
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 368
535.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 368
535.2.2 Materials and Components .................................................................................................................. 369
535.2.3 Accessory Materials ............................................................................................................................ 370
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 370
535.3.1 Examination and Preparation............................................................................................................... 370
535.3.2 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 370
536 INTERIOR/EXTERIOR STONE .................................................................................................... 372

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 372
536.1.1 Codes and Standard ............................................................................................................................. 372
536.1.2 General ................................................................................................................................................ 372
536.1.6 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 373
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 373
536.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 373
TS 500 - 22
536.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 373

536.2.3 Mortar Mixes ....................................................................................................................................... 374
536.2.4 Stone Fabrication ................................................................................................................................. 374
536.2.5 Tolerances ........................................................................................................................................... 374
536.2.6 Storage, Handling and Protection ........................................................................................................ 375
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 375
536.3.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 375
536.3.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 375
536.3.3 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 375
536.3.4 Installation Tolerance .......................................................................................................................... 376
536.3.5 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 376
536.3.6 Protection and Cleaning....................................................................................................................... 376
536.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 377
537 TILES (CERAMIC, QUARRY AND TERRAZZO TILE) ........................................................... 379

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 379
537.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 379
537.1.5 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 380
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 380
537.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 380
537.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 380
537.2.4 Furnish spare tile as specified in the Contract ..................................................................................... 383
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 383
537.3.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 383
537.3.2 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 383
537.3.3 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 383
537.3.4 Bedding Method .................................................................................................................................. 384
537.3.5 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 385
537.3.6 Spare Material ..................................................................................................................................... 386
TS 500 - 23
537.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 386
538 RESILIENT FLOORING ................................................................................................................. 388

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 388
538.1.2 General ................................................................................................................................................ 388
538.1.7 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 389
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 389
538.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 389
538.2.2 Acceptable Products ............................................................................................................................ 389
538.2.3 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 390
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 390
538.3.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 390
538.3.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 390
538.3.3 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 390
538.3.5 Spare Materials .................................................................................................................................... 391
538.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 392
539 CARPET TILES ................................................................................................................................ 393

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 393
539.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 393
539.1.2 Scope ................................................................................................................................................... 393
539.1.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 393
539.1.5 Single Source Responsibility ............................................................................................................... 394
539.1.7 Sequencing & Scheduling ................................................................................................................... 394
539.1.8 Warranty .............................................................................................................................................. 394
539.1.9 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 394
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 395
539.2.1 Manufacturer ....................................................................................................................................... 395
539.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 395
539.2.3 Carpet Tile Accessories ....................................................................................................................... 395
TS 500 - 24
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 396
539.3.1 Pre-Installation Requirements ............................................................................................................. 396
539.3.2 Pre-Installation Requirements ............................................................................................................. 396
539.3.3 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 396
539.3.4 Cleaning............................................................................................................................................... 397
539.3.5 Protection............................................................................................................................................. 397
539.3.6 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 397
539.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 397
540 LIGHT GAUGE METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS ......................................................................... 399

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 399
540.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 399
540.1.2 Reference ............................................................................................................................................. 399
540.1.3 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 399
540.2.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 400
541 DRYWALL BOARD SYSTEM........................................................................................................ 401

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 401
541.1.2 General ................................................................................................................................................ 401
541.1.3 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 401
541.1.4 Rockwool Insulation ............................................................................................................................ 401
541.2.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 402
542 GYPSUM BOARD ............................................................................................................................ 403

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 403
542.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 403
542.1.4 References ........................................................................................................................................... 403
542.1.5 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 404
TS 500 - 25
542.1.9 Sequencing .......................................................................................................................................... 406

Products ................................................................................................................................................... 406
542.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 406
542.2.2 Moisture-Resistant and Fire-Resistant Gypsum Board........................................................................ 406
542.2.3 Interior Ceiling Gypsum Board ........................................................................................................... 406
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 407
542.3.1 Examination......................................................................................................................................... 407
542.3.2 Applying and Finishing Panels, General ............................................................................................. 407
542.3.3 Applying Interior Gypsum Board ........................................................................................................ 408
542.3.4 Installing Trim Accessories ................................................................................................................. 410
542.3.5 Finishing Gypsum Board ..................................................................................................................... 410
542.3.6 Protection............................................................................................................................................. 411
542.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 411
543 FIBER CEMENT BOARD ............................................................................................................... 413

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 413
543.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 413
543.1.2 Reference ............................................................................................................................................. 413
543.1.3 Scope ................................................................................................................................................... 413
543.1.4 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 413
543.1.6 Delivery, Handling and Storage .......................................................................................................... 413
Product .................................................................................................................................................... 414
543.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 414
543.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 414
543.2.3 Steel Framing ...................................................................................................................................... 414
543.2.4 Fasteners .............................................................................................................................................. 414
543.2.5 Miscellaneous Framing and Supports .................................................................................................. 414
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 415
543.3.1 Examination......................................................................................................................................... 415
543.3.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 415
543.3.3 Installation of Steel Framing General .................................................................................................. 415
543.3.4 Installation of Steel Framing ............................................................................................................... 416
543.3.5 Methods of FCB Panel Application ..................................................................................................... 416
543.3.6 Installation of Trim Accessories .......................................................................................................... 417
TS 500 - 26
543.3.7 Finishing of FCBs................................................................................................................................ 417

543.3.8 Protection............................................................................................................................................. 417
543.4.1 Method of Measurement and Payment ................................................................................................ 417
544 METAL CEILING ............................................................................................................................ 418

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 418
544.1.1 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 418
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 418
544.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 418
544.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 418
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 419
544.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 420
545 ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM ............................................................................................... 421

The Works ............................................................................................................................................... 421
545.1.2 General ................................................................................................................................................ 421
545.1.6 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 422
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 422
545.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 422
545.2.2 Suspension System .............................................................................................................................. 423
545.2.3 Lay-in Panels ....................................................................................................................................... 423
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 423
545.3.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 423
545.3.2 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 423
545.3.3 Extra Stock .......................................................................................................................................... 424
545.3.4 Clean Up .............................................................................................................................................. 425
545.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 425
546 PLASTERING ................................................................................................................................... 426

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 426
TS 500 - 27
546.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 426

546.1.2 Work of This Section........................................................................................................................... 426
546.1.4 Allowable Tolerances .......................................................................................................................... 427
546.1.5 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 427
546.1.7 Protection............................................................................................................................................. 427
546.1.8 Replacements ....................................................................................................................................... 427
546.1.9 Conditions ........................................................................................................................................... 428
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 428
546.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 428
546.2.2 Metal Plastering Accessories and Reinforcement................................................................................ 428
546.2.3 Portland Cement/Lime Stucco System ................................................................................................ 428
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 429
546.3.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 429
546.3.2 Installation of Plastering Accessories .................................................................................................. 429
546.3.3 General Plastering Requirements ........................................................................................................ 430
546.3.4 Cement Stucco Application ................................................................................................................. 430
546.3.5 Cutting and Patching ........................................................................................................................... 431
546.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 431
547 PROTECTIVE COATINGS ............................................................................................................ 433

Anti-Graffiti Coating ............................................................................................................................... 433
547.1.1 The Work ............................................................................................................................................. 433
547.1.2 General ................................................................................................................................................ 433
547.1.3 Summary ............................................................................................................................................. 433
547.1.4 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 433
547.1.6 Delivery Storage and Handling ........................................................................................................... 434
547.1.8 Special Warranties ............................................................................................................................... 435
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 435
547.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 435
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 435
547.3.1 Examination......................................................................................................................................... 435
TS 500 - 28
547.3.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 435

547.3.4 Application .......................................................................................................................................... 436
547.3.5 Cleaning............................................................................................................................................... 436
547.3.6 Completion .......................................................................................................................................... 436
Chemical-Resistant Coating .................................................................................................................... 437
547.4.1 The Work ............................................................................................................................................. 437
547.4.2 General ................................................................................................................................................ 437
547.4.3 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 437
Section Protection Coating (Aliphatic Urethane) .................................................................................... 437
547.5.1 The Work ............................................................................................................................................. 437
547.5.2 General ................................................................................................................................................ 437
547.5.3 Summary ............................................................................................................................................. 437
547.5.4 References ........................................................................................................................................... 438
547.5.5 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 438
547.5.9 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 439
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 439
547.6.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 439
547.6.2 Materials - Primers .............................................................................................................................. 439
547.6.3 Materials - Coatings ............................................................................................................................ 440
547.6.4 Accessories .......................................................................................................................................... 441
547.6.5 Mixes ................................................................................................................................................... 441
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 441
547.7.1 Application .......................................................................................................................................... 441
547.7.2 Adjusting ............................................................................................................................................. 441
547.7.3 Cleaning............................................................................................................................................... 442
547.7.4 Schedule .............................................................................................................................................. 442
547.8.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 442
548 PAINTING ......................................................................................................................................... 444

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 444
548.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 444
548.1.2 Works of this Section .......................................................................................................................... 444
TS 500 - 29
548.1.3 Materials and Equipment Not to Painted ............................................................................................. 445

548.1.5 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 446
548.1.7 Protection............................................................................................................................................. 446
548.1.8 Replacements ....................................................................................................................................... 447
548.1.9 Extra Stock .......................................................................................................................................... 447
548.1.10 Conditions ........................................................................................................................................... 447
548.1.11 References ........................................................................................................................................... 447
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 447
548.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 447
548.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 448
548.2.3 General Standards ................................................................................................................................ 449
548.2.4 Schedule of Finishes ............................................................................................................................ 450
548.2.5 Piping and Mechanical Equipment Exposed to View.......................................................................... 450
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 450
548.3.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 450
548.3.2 Workmanship ...................................................................................................................................... 450
548.3.3 Surface Preparation ............................................................................................................................. 451
548.3.4 Metal Surfaces ..................................................................................................................................... 452
548.3.5 Plaster Surfaces ................................................................................................................................... 452
548.3.6 Gypsum Drywall Surfaces ................................................................................................................... 452
548.3.7 Wood Surfaces..................................................................................................................................... 453
548.3.8 Block Masonry Surfaces:..................................................................................................................... 453
548.3.9 Testing for Moisture Content .............................................................................................................. 453
548.3.10 Touch-Up............................................................................................................................................. 453
548.3.11 Materials Preparation........................................................................................................................... 453
548.3.12 Application .......................................................................................................................................... 453
548.3.13 Post-Application Inspection (for Painting of Designated Steel Members) .......................................... 455
548.3.14 Protection............................................................................................................................................. 456
548.3.15 Clean up ............................................................................................................................................... 456
548.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 457
549 ACCESS FLOORING ....................................................................................................................... 459

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 459
549.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 459
TS 500 - 30

549.1.5 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 460
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 460
549.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 460
549.2.2 Design Criteria..................................................................................................................................... 460
549.2.3 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 461
549.2.4 Fabrication ........................................................................................................................................... 461
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 462
549.3.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 462
549.3.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 462
549.3.3 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 462
549.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 463
550 FOLDING PARTITIONS ................................................................................................................. 464

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 464
550.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 464
550.1.3 General ................................................................................................................................................ 464
550.1.6 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 464
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 465
550.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 465
550.2.2 Design Criteria..................................................................................................................................... 465
550.2.3 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 465
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 466
550.3.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 466
550.3.2 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 466
550.3.3 Cleaning............................................................................................................................................... 466
550.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 466
TS 500 - 31
551 MOVABLE PARTITIONS ............................................................................................................... 468

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 468
551.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 468
551.1.4 Related Work by Others ...................................................................................................................... 468
551.1.5 References ........................................................................................................................................... 468
551.1.6 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 469
551.1.8 Pre-Installation Meetings ..................................................................................................................... 470
551.1.11 Sequencing .......................................................................................................................................... 470
551.1.12 Warranty .............................................................................................................................................. 470
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 471
551.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 471
551.2.2 Top-Supported Panel Partitions ........................................................................................................... 471
551.2.3 Frameless Glass Panel Systems ........................................................................................................... 483
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 485
551.3.1 Examination......................................................................................................................................... 485
551.3.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 485
551.3.3 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 485
551.3.4 Cleaning............................................................................................................................................... 485
551.3.5 Protection and Training ....................................................................................................................... 485
551.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 486
552 TOILET PARTITIONS .................................................................................................................... 487

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 487
552.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 487
552.1.2 Scope ................................................................................................................................................... 487
552.1.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 487
552.1.4 Delivery and Storage ........................................................................................................................... 488
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 488
552.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 488
552.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 488
552.2.3 Toilet Enclosures ................................................................................................................................. 488
TS 500 - 32
552.2.4 Finish ................................................................................................................................................... 488

Execution................................................................................................................................................. 488
552.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 489
553 TOILET AND SHOWER ACCESSORIES .................................................................................... 490

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 490
553.1.2 General ................................................................................................................................................ 490
553.1.5 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 491
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 491
553.2.1 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 491
553.2.2 General ................................................................................................................................................ 491
553.2.3 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 491
553.2.4 Fabrication ........................................................................................................................................... 492
553.2.5 Finishes ................................................................................................................................................ 492
553.2.6 Delivery, Storage and Protection ......................................................................................................... 492
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 493
553.3.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 493
553.3.2 Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 493
553.3.3 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 493
553.3.4 Cleaning............................................................................................................................................... 493
553.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 494
554 FURNISHINGS ................................................................................................................................. 495

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 495
554.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 495
Blinds ...................................................................................................................................................... 495
554.2.1 Scope of Work ..................................................................................................................................... 495
554.2.2 Qualifications ...................................................................................................................................... 495
554.2.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 495
554.2.4 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 495
554.2.5 Execution ............................................................................................................................................. 496
Entrance Floor Mats and Frames ............................................................................................................. 496
TS 500 - 33
554.3.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 496

554.3.2 Products ............................................................................................................................................... 498
554.3.3 Execution ............................................................................................................................................. 499
554.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 500
555 SIGNAGES ........................................................................................................................................ 503

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 503
555.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 503
555.1.2 Description .......................................................................................................................................... 503
555.1.3 Specifications ...................................................................................................................................... 503
555.1.4 Manufacturers ...................................................................................................................................... 503
555.1.5 Painted Signs on Pavements ................................................................................................................ 504
555.1.6 Billboard Signs .................................................................................................................................... 504
555.1.7 Illuminated Signs ................................................................................................................................. 504
555.2.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 505
556 WALK-THROUGH METAL DETECTOR (SECURITY SYSTEM) - Not Used ....................... 508
557 ELEVATORS .................................................................................................................................... 509

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 509
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 510
557.2.1 Elevator Equipment ............................................................................................................................. 510
557.2.2 Piping .................................................................................................................................................. 511
557.2.3 Electric Circuit Wiring ........................................................................................................................ 511
557.2.4 Two- Stop Automatic Operational....................................................................................................... 511
557.2.5 Wiring .................................................................................................................................................. 512
557.2.6 Cylinder and Plunger ........................................................................................................................... 512
557.2.7 Pumping Unit ...................................................................................................................................... 513
557.2.8 Pump .................................................................................................................................................... 513
557.2.9 Motor ................................................................................................................................................... 513
557.2.10 Storage Tank........................................................................................................................................ 513
557.2.11 Low Oil Control .................................................................................................................................. 513
557.2.12 Leveling Devices ................................................................................................................................. 513
557.2.13 Piping .................................................................................................................................................. 514
557.2.14 Controller............................................................................................................................................. 514
TS 500 - 34
557.2.15 Car Stall Protective Circuit .................................................................................................................. 515

557.2.16 Muffler................................................................................................................................................. 515
557.2.17 Sound Reducing Enclosure .................................................................................................................. 515
557.2.18 Hoistway Operating Devices ............................................................................................................... 515
557.2.19 Car Platform ........................................................................................................................................ 515
557.2.20 Car Frame ............................................................................................................................................ 515
557.2.21 Guides .................................................................................................................................................. 516
557.2.22 Door Operations .................................................................................................................................. 516
557.2.23 Light Ray Device ................................................................................................................................. 516
557.2.24 Car Enclosure ...................................................................................................................................... 516
557.2.25 Car Direction Lanterns ........................................................................................................................ 517
557.2.26 Public Address ..................................................................................................................................... 517
557.2.27 Fire Detection ...................................................................................................................................... 517
557.2.28 Car Position Indicator .......................................................................................................................... 517
557.2.29 Car Operating Panel ............................................................................................................................ 517
557.2.30 Emergency Car Lighting ..................................................................................................................... 518
557.2.31 Telephone Compartment ..................................................................................................................... 518
557.2.32 Sight Guards ........................................................................................................................................ 518
557.2.33 Elevator Lobby .................................................................................................................................... 518
557.2.34 Terminal Limit Switches ..................................................................................................................... 519
557.2.35 Illuminated Hall Buttons ..................................................................................................................... 519
557.2.36 Illuminated Car Buttons ...................................................................................................................... 519
557.2.37 Hoistway Entrances ............................................................................................................................. 519
557.2.38 Pit Emergency Stop Switch ................................................................................................................. 519
557.2.39 Work Light .......................................................................................................................................... 519
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 519
557.3.1 Elevator Installation............................................................................................................................. 519
557.3.2 Jack Unit Excavation ........................................................................................................................... 520
557.3.3 Guide Installation ................................................................................................................................ 520
557.3.4 Wiring Installation ............................................................................................................................... 520
557.3.5 Hoistway Entrances Erection ............................................................................................................... 520
557.3.6 Painting ................................................................................................................................................ 520
557.3.7 Maintenance Service ........................................................................................................................... 520
557.3.8 Maintenance Data Requirements ......................................................................................................... 521
557.3.9 Instruction Manuals ............................................................................................................................. 521
TS 500 - 35
557.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 522
558 ESCALATORS .................................................................................................................................. 524

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 524
General Description ................................................................................................................................. 524
558.2.1 Compliance to Basic Safety ................................................................................................................. 524
558.2.2 Material ............................................................................................................................................... 524
Product .................................................................................................................................................... 524
558.3.1 Main Specification............................................................................................................................... 524
558.3.2 Truss .................................................................................................................................................... 526
558.3.3 Oil Pan ................................................................................................................................................. 526
558.3.4 Track.................................................................................................................................................... 526
558.3.5 Drive Unit (Rise < 10m) ...................................................................................................................... 527
558.3.6 Drive Unit (Rise >= 10m) .................................................................................................................... 527
558.3.7 Step ...................................................................................................................................................... 527
558.3.8 Step Chain (Rise < 10m) ..................................................................................................................... 528
558.3.9 Step Chain Sprocket (Rise < 10m) ...................................................................................................... 528
558.3.10 Step Link (Rise =>10m) ...................................................................................................................... 529
558.3.11 Step Link Sprockets (Rise =>10m) ..................................................................................................... 529
558.3.12 Balustrade ............................................................................................................................................ 529
558.3.13 Handrail ............................................................................................................................................... 530
558.3.14 Comb Plate .......................................................................................................................................... 530
558.3.15 Landing Plate and Manhole Cover ...................................................................................................... 530
558.3.16 Lubrication .......................................................................................................................................... 531
558.3.17 Controller............................................................................................................................................. 531
558.3.18 Electrical Wiring ................................................................................................................................. 531
558.3.19 Illumination ......................................................................................................................................... 531
558.3.20 Safety Device ...................................................................................................................................... 532
Measurement of Payment ........................................................................................................................ 533
558.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 533
559 SURFACE WATER DISPOSAL ..................................................................................................... 535

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 535
559.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 535
559.1.3 General ................................................................................................................................................ 535
TS 500 - 36
559.2.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 537
560 CONCRETE PAVING ...................................................................................................................... 538

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 538
560.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 538
560.1.2 Scope ................................................................................................................................................... 538
560.1.3 Summary ............................................................................................................................................. 538
560.1.4 References ........................................................................................................................................... 538
560.1.5 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 538
560.1.8 Concrete............................................................................................................................................... 539
560.1.9 Concrete for Concrete Proportions and Consistency, Formworks, Methods of Placing Concrete
Compaction, Finishing and Curing Concrete ...................................................................................... 539
560.2.1 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 541
561 FLAGPOLES ..................................................................................................................................... 542

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 542
561.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 542
561.1.2 Description .......................................................................................................................................... 542
561.1.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 542
561.1.4 Applicable Publications ....................................................................................................................... 542
561.1.5 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): ....................................................................... 542
561.1.6 Manufacturer ....................................................................................................................................... 542
561.1.7 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 543
561.1.8 Fabrication ........................................................................................................................................... 543
561.1.9 Finish ................................................................................................................................................... 543
561.1.10 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 544
561.1.11 Lightning Rod ...................................................................................................................................... 544
561.2.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 544
562 WIRE NET FENCING ..................................................................................................................... 545

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 545
562.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 545
562.1.2 Scope ................................................................................................................................................... 545
562.1.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 545
562.1.4 Manufacturer ....................................................................................................................................... 545
TS 500 - 37
562.1.5 Concrete Hollow Blocks ...................................................................................................................... 545

562.1.6 Concrete Post ....................................................................................................................................... 545
562.1.7 Wrought Iron Grilles ........................................................................................................................... 545
562.1.8 Fence Gates ......................................................................................................................................... 546
562.1.9 Accessories .......................................................................................................................................... 546
562.1.10 Site Preparation ................................................................................................................................... 546
562.1.11 Laying of Concrete Hollow Blocks ..................................................................................................... 546
562.1.12 Erection of Post ................................................................................................................................... 546
562.1.13 Installation of Wrought Iron Bar Grilles.............................................................................................. 547
562.1.14 Painting ................................................................................................................................................ 547
562.2.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 547
563 SOFTSCAPE ..................................................................................................................................... 548

Description .............................................................................................................................................. 548
General .................................................................................................................................................... 548
The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 548
563.3.2 Quality Assurances .............................................................................................................................. 548
563.3.3 Personnel ............................................................................................................................................. 549
563.3.4 Machinery and Equipment................................................................................................................... 549
563.3.5 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 549
563.3.6 Site Conditions .................................................................................................................................... 550
563.3.7 Warranty .............................................................................................................................................. 551
Products ................................................................................................................................................... 551
563.4.1 Growing Media .................................................................................................................................... 551
563.4.2 Tree Materials...................................................................................................................................... 552
563.4.4 Accessories .......................................................................................................................................... 552
Execution................................................................................................................................................. 553
563.5.1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 553
563.5.2 Tree Pruning ........................................................................................................................................ 553
563.5.3 Equipment ........................................................................................................................................... 553
563.5.4 Appearance .......................................................................................................................................... 553
563.5.5 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................ 553
563.5.6 Removal of Branches .......................................................................................................................... 553
563.5.7 Repair of Bark Wounds ....................................................................................................................... 554
TS 500 - 38
563.5.8 Removal of Dead Wood from the Crown ............................................................................................ 554

563.5.9 Crown Thinning................................................................................................................................... 554
563.5.10 Crown Lifting ...................................................................................................................................... 554
563.5.11 Cavity Filling: Water Pockets in Forks ............................................................................................... 554
563.5.12 Digging and Transportation Procedures .............................................................................................. 554
563.5.13 Lifting and Transporting or Planting of Trees/Palms .......................................................................... 555
563.5.14 Tree Planting: Preliminary................................................................................................................... 555
563.5.15 Planting Operations ............................................................................................................................. 556
563.5.16 Watering .............................................................................................................................................. 556
563.5.17 Setting Palms/Trees ............................................................................................................................. 556
563.5.18 Hormone Treatment ............................................................................................................................. 556
563.5.19 Planting Maintenance .......................................................................................................................... 556
563.6.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 557
564 HARDSCAPE (External Works) AND RELATED FACILITIES ................................................ 559

The Work ................................................................................................................................................ 559
564.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 559
564.1.2 Manufacturer ....................................................................................................................................... 559
564.2.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 560
LIST OF TABLES
Table 504.2.3-1 Grading Requirements for Joint Sand ASTM C 144 STM C 144 CSA A82.56M, Natural Sand,
Manufactured Sand ................................................................................................................................................. 95
Table 504.2.3-2 Grading Requirements for Bedding Sand ASTM C 33 CSA A23.1-M94.................................... 95
Table 505.5.8-1 Cured System Properties ............................................................................................................ 106
Table 530.3.1-1 Tolerance on Glass Thickness (mm) .......................................................................................... 340
Table 530.4.3-1 Minimum Edge Clearance of Glass............................................................................................ 343
TS 500 - 39
TS 500 ARCHITECTURAL
LIST OF ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
” inch
# number
% percent
d diameter
°C degrees Centigrade
AA aluminum alloy
A/C alternating current
AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers
AAD Aluminum Association Designation
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers’ Association
ACI American Concrete Institute
ACM aluminum composite material
ACP aluminum composite panel
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act (USA)
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (for Buildings
and Facilities)
AHJ Authority Having Jurisdiction
AIM Architectural, Industrial and Maintenance
AISI American Iron & Steel Institute
AISI American Iron & Steel Institute
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning
Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AW architectural window
AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry (USA)
AWS American Welding Society
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (USA)
BKH backing sheet, horizontal
BNBC Bangladesh National Building Code/ ESCAP
BOQ Bill of Quantities
TS 500 - 40
BTU British thermal unit

CAD computer-aided drafting
CBS composite building system
CFM cubic feet per minute
cfm/sf cubic feet per minute per square foot
CLS cabinet liner, standard
cm centimeter
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (USA)
CPVC chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
CRC cold-rolled channel
CRF Condensation Resistance Factor
CRI Carpet and Rug Institute
CRS cold-rolled steel
CSA Canadian Standards Association
DC direct current
DFT dry film thickness
DHI Door & Hardware Institute (USA)
DP design pressure
EPA Environmental Protection Agency (USA)
EPS expanded polystyrene
ESP electrostatically-applied paint
ft foot/ feet
ft²/gal feet squared per gallon
FBC Florida Building Code (USA)
FCB fiber cement board
FCP Fire Code of the Philippines
FEA Finite Element Analysis
FM Factory Mutual
FSI flame-spread index
FT fully-tempered
g/cm3 grams per cubic meter
g/l grams per liter in/lbs inch per pounds
g/cm2 grams per square centimeter
TS 500 - 41
g/sq.m grams per square meter

GA Gypsum Association
ga. Gage
galv. galvanized
GS General Specification
GSA General Services Administration (USA)
GI galvanized iron
HC heavy commercial
HGP horizontal general purpose, post-forming
HGS horizontal general purpose, standard
HOA homeowner’s association
HPL high-pressure laminate
hrs. hours
HVHZ high velocity hurricane zones
hz hertz
m meter
IBC International Building Code
ICC International Code Council
ICC-ES International Code Council Evaluation Service
ICPI Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute
IDLH Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health limits
IgCC integrated gasification combined cycle
IFC International Fire Code
IMC International Mechanical Code
ISO International Standards Organization
JASS Japanese Architectural Standard Specification
JIS Japan Industrial Standards
kg/cu.m kilogram per cubic meter
kN kilonewton
2
kN/m kilonewtons per square meter
KPA kilopascal
lb/cu.ft pounds per cubic foot
m/sec. meters per second
TS 500 - 42
m2/l meters squared per liter

MAF manually-applied force
Max. maximum
MET methyl ethyl ketone
MIBK methyl isobutyl ketone
MLIT Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism (Japan)
mm millimeter
mod. Modified
MoM Method of Measurement
MPa megapascal
mph miles per hour
MPI Master Painters Institute
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NBCP National Building Code of the Philippines
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NFSI National Floor Safety Institute
No. number
o.c. on center
Pa pascal/s
PAMW premium acrylic masonry waterproofing
pcf pound-force per cubic foot
PIAJ Photocatalysis Industry Association of Japan
PNS Philippine National Standards
psi pounds per square inch
psf pounds per square foot
PU/ Pu polyurethane
PVA polyvinyl acetate
PVC polyvinyl chloride
RC reinforced concrete (structural); or restricting collar (fire protection)
RTV room temperature vulcanization
SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District (California, USA)
TS 500 - 43
SDI smoke-developed index; or Steel Door Institute (USA)

SFRM Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials
SHGC solar heat gain coefficient
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
SPC Society for Protective Coatings
sq.m. square meter
STC sound transmission class
TMR Tensile Membrane Roofing
UL Underwriters’ Laboratories
ULC Unlimited Liability Corporation (Canada)
UPS uninterruptible power supply
US United States (of America)
V volt
VDC voltage direct current
VGP vertical grade, post-forming
VOC volatile organic compounds
VT, visible transmittance
WDMA Window and Door Manufacturers Association
WFT wet film thickness
DEFINITION OF TERMS
Term Definition
“AFSU” Amenities, facilities, services and utilities, whereby:
• An amenity may be a feature that increases
attractiveness or value of a site or a building / structure
or its grounds / site. This may include but are not
limited to a special space of a highly public nature but
which require huge investments in material and
equipment such as an urban designed plaza, fountain,
public sculpture, an auditorium, an infinity pool, a lush
deck roof garden, a revolving restaurant, an executive
lounge, an entertainment area and similar upscale
provisions or spacious but expensive architectural
design features such as oversized spaces, full
automation including closed-circuit television
(CCTV), very tall ceilings, large insulated or light-
sensitive windows, glass floors, embedded luminaires
TS 500 - 44
on walls and floors, use of high-grade finishing

materials such as very expensive alloys such as
titanium, furniture/ fixtures/ fittings/ equipment, large
slabs of natural granite, and the like;
• A facility may be a site and / or building / structure
provision to serve a particular function and to make
movements in and out of a site and / or a building /
structure faster but also comfortable for the user /
occupant e.g. Place marker / identifier, wayfinding
devices, signages, covered parking and driveways,
loading ramps / platforms, freight / service elevators,
paved walks under a canopy of shade or ornamental
trees, graphics and way-finding devices, adequate
lighting for all envisioned tasks and for general safety
and security, and the like;
• A service is a site and/or building/ structure provision
to serve a particular function and to make movements
in and out of a site and/or a building/ structure faster
but also comfortable for the user/occupant e.g.
Covered parking and driveways, loading ramps/
platforms, freight/ service elevators, paved walks
under a canopy of shade or ornamental trees, graphics
and way-finding devices, adequate lighting for all
envisioned tasks and for general safety and security,
and the like; and
• Utilities are the outdoor and/or indoor electrical,
electronics, mechanical, sanitary, plumbing and
related components of a building/ structure as
supported by their external counterpart components
introduced on the grounds/ site and linked to other
counterpart components found at the RROW/ street.
“AMBF” (Allowable Maximum Building Footprint): the resultant area
established at grade level upon which the proposed building /
structure may be erected.
“Architectural Design” A development or redevelopment concept that focuses on the
components or elements of a building, structure or system and
unifies them into a coherent and functional whole, utilizing the
principles of strength, harmony and aesthetics in arriving at a
solution to a spatial problem through the deft application of
the arts and sciences, according to a particular approach, to
achieve the development / redevelopment objective / s under
the given constraints / limitations.
“Architectural Refer to architectural plans / designs, drawings, specifications
Documents” and other outputs of a registered and licensed Architect
TS 500 - 45
(RLA), that only a RLA can sign and seal and consisting,
among others, of vicinity maps, site development plans,
architectural program, perspective drawings, architectural
floor plans, elevations, sections, ceiling plans, schedules,
detailed drawings, technical specifications and cost estimates,
and other instruments of service in any form, appearing in
drawing sheets / pages denominated as architectural (A) or
architectural interior (AI) or site development plan (SDP).
“Architectural Interiors” Means the detailed planning and design of the indoor /
enclosed areas of any proposed building / structure, including
retrofit or renovation work and which shall cover all
architectural and utility aspects, including the architectural
lay-outing of all building engineering systems found therein,
as forming part of the scope of work of rules by law.
“Architectural Plan” A two (2)-dimensional representation reflecting a proposed
development / redevelopment of an enclosed / semi-enclosed
or open area showing features or elements such as columns,
walls, partitions, ceiling, stairs, doors, windows, floors, roof,
room designations, door and window call-outs, the
architectural layout of equipment, furnishings, furniture and
the like, specifications callouts, elevation references, drawing
references and the like; the architectural plan is the
representation of a lateral section for a building / structure
(running parallel to the ground) and at a height of from 1.0 to
1.5m above the finished floor; the term may also collectively
refer to other architectural designs such as cross / longitudinal
sections, elevations, roof plan, reflected ceiling plan; detailed
sections and elevations showing architectural interiors,
detailed architectural designs, door and window schedules,
other architectural finishing schedules and the like.
“Authority Having An individual, organization, office or agency responsible for
Jurisdiction (AHJ)” enforcing the requirements of a law, standards, codes and for
approving device, equipment, materials and installation.
(Important Notes: The term AHJ may also refer to the Local
Building Official (LBO) and the Fire Marshal (FM) and
Mayor of the Local Government Unit (LGU) where the Project
shall be erected, use/occupied, maintained and operated. The
term AHJ may also apply to officials of the Philippine
National Government who may exercise jurisdiction over the
planning/design, erection, use/ occupancy, maintenance and
operation of the facility.)
“BHL (Building Height Means the maximum height to be allowed for a building /
Limit)” structure based on their proposed use / occupancy. The BHL
is generally measured from the established grade line to the
topmost portion of such a building / structure, inclusive of a
TS 500 - 46
non-mobile billboard mounted on top of such a building /

structure. The BHL is generally determined after the
application of other development controls (DC) and certain
other parameters i.e. Considerations of site conditions, view,
etc. If applicable, the BHL must be subject to clearance
requirements of the Civil Aviation Authority of the
Philippines (CAAP) or of the concerned military / security
authorities. The BHL excludes the height of permitted /
allowed projections above the roof of the building / structure
e.g. Signage, mast, antenna, telecom tower, beacons and the
like.
“Building” Any structure built for the support, shelter or enclosure of
persons (for the purpose of human habitation), animals,
chattels or property of any kind, consisting of two (2)
archetypes, viz:
1) Any structure built for the support, shelter or enclosure
of persons (for the purpose of human habitation),
animals, chattels or property of any kind, consisting of
two (2) archetypes, viz:
2) Non-habitable Building: a building mainly for non-human
activity or for the support of non-human activity, to be
based in such a building, for which the building plan /
design is prepared, signed and sealed by the appropriate
RLP
“Building Bulk” A volume quantity that is generally determined by the
application of the Floor-Lot Area Ratio (FLAR), vertically
projecting the Allowable Maximum Building Footprint
(AMBF), establishing the Outermost Faces of Building (OFB)
and quantifying the Allowable Maximum Volume of Building
(AMVB). The building bulk may be ultimately governed by
the width of the RROW and other applicable provisions for
light and ventilation (including incremental setbacks as a
result of satisfying natural light and ventilation requirements
for RROW and front yards.
“CLUP / CLWUP / An LGU-wide short- through medium-term development plan
CLWAUP based on the data contained in the LGU Comprehensive
(Comprehensive Land Development Plan (CDP), and which is the primary basis for
Use Plan / the LGU Zoning Ordinance (ZO);
Comprehensive Land and
Water Use Plan /
Comprehensive Land,
Water & Air Use Plan)”
“Contractor” The Constructor/s of the Project, and as currently defined
under FIDIC documents.
TS 500 - 47
“Copyright (or Copyright Shall refer to the intellectual proprietary rights (IPR) retained
Ownership)” by an Architect over any architectural documents / work that
he / she prepares unless there is a written stipulation to the
contrary; copyright in a work of architecture shall include the
right to control the erection of any building which reproduces
the whole or a substantial part of the work either in its original
form or in any form recognizably derived from the original;
however, the copyright in any such work shall not include the
right to control the reconstruction or rehabilitation in the same
style as the original of a building to which the copyright
relates.
“Development” The acts of a Developer relating to assessing, planning,
designing, managing, constructing / finishing and delivering a
building / structure, including its site / grounds and its fit-out
(furniture / fixtures / fittings / equipment, as applicable) to the
intended user / occupant / beneficiary, and the subsequent acts
relating to the administration, operation and maintenance of
such a building / structure by its lawful Owner / s.
“Development Controls The body of State and local laws and the pertinent executive
(DCs)” issuances that altogether limit the building bulk for any
building / structure on a given project site. These include this
Act, planning and environmental laws, development and
construction laws, and their respective irrs and drs
“Disaster” A natural or man-made hazard that has come to fruition,
resulting in an event of substantial extent causing significant
physical damage or destruction, loss of life, or drastic change
to the environment. A disaster is also defined as any tragic
event with great loss of lives and properties, stemming from
events such as earthquakes, floods, catastrophic accidents,
fires, or explosions
“Disaster Preparedness An interdisciplinary field of human endeavor dealing with the
(or Emergency strategic organizational management processes used to protect
Management)” critical assets of from hazard risks that can cause disasters or
catastrophes, and to ensure the continuance of the organization
within their planned lifetime. Assets are categorized as either
living things, non-living things, cultural or economic. Hazards
are categorized by their cause, either natural or human-made.
The entire emergency management process is divided into
four (4) sub-fields to aid in identification of the processes,
normally dealing with risk reduction, preparing resources to
respond to the hazard, responding to the actual damage caused
by the hazard and limiting further damage e.g. Emergency
evacuation, quarantine, mass decontamination, etc., and
returning conditions as close as possible to the state before the
TS 500 - 48
hazard incident. The definition necessarily encompasses the

concepts of disaster response and mitigation
“Disaster Resilience” The quality of a building / structure and its grounds / site or by
its plans and designs, generally characterized by the reduced
probability of failure of its architectonics, the reduced
consequences due to the failure of its architectonics, and
reduced time to the restoration of the architectonics to full
operating / beneficial status
“Dispersal Area, Safe” An area which will accommodate a number of persons equal
to the total capacity of the stand and building / structure it
serves, in such a manner that no person within the area need
be closer than fifteen meters (15.0 m) from the stand or
building / structure. Dispersal areas shall be based upon the
area of not less than 0.28 m2 per person
“Environment, Built” Refers to the man-made surroundings that provide the setting
for human activity, ranging in scale from personal shelter and
buildings / structures to neighborhoods, communities, towns
or cities that often include their supporting infrastructure, such
as water supply or energy networks
“Employer (Owner)” The Philippine Government, the public owner of the Project,
and as currently defined under FIDIC documents.
“Engineer” The Engineer and Architect who will be selected by the
Government to perform the Services required for project
implementation (and as currently defined under FIDIC
documents).
“Environment, Natural” The aggregate of the natural external surroundings and
conditions, in contrast to the built environment;
“Footprint (or Building The surface area of a building where it meets the natural
Footprint)” ground or the finished grade i.e. The outer perimeter of a
building, usually defined by the outer face of the building
envelope at the ground floor / level; it is also defined as the
surface area of the ground floor / level slab inclusive of the
thickness of the building envelope that fully encloses said
ground floor / level; except for arcades (where there are fully
enclosed spaces constructed directly above such arcades), the
building footprint shall exclude all other partially enclosed or
unenclosed areas that are paved / semi-paved and that are
directly attached to the outer perimeter of the building i.e.
Porches, patios, lanais, covered walk, carports, and the like.
“GFA (Gross Floor The total floor space within the perimeter of the permanent
Area)” external building walls (inclusive of the main and auxiliary
buildings) such as office areas, residential areas, corridors,
lobbies and mezzanine level/s. The GFA shall also include
building projections which may serve as floors or platforms
TS 500 - 49
that are directly connected to / integrated with areas within the

building / structure e.g. Balconies. The GFA specifically
excludes the following:
• Covered areas used for parking and driveways,
services and utilities;
• Vertical penetrations in parking floors where no
residential or office units are present; and
• Uncovered areas for helipads, air-conditioning cooling
towers or air-conditioning condensing unit (ACCU)
balconies, overhead water tanks, roof decks, laundry
areas and cages, wading or swimming pools,
whirlpools or Jacuzzis, terraces, gardens, courts or
plazas, balconies exceeding 10m2, fire escape
structures and the like
“GPRA” (Government Procurement Reform Act): otherwise known as
R.A. No. 9184 of 2003, its 2009 IRR, and drs promulgated by
the GPPB for its implementation and enforcement; the
procurement of consulting services is required for buildings
funded by the annual General Appropriations Act (i.e. The
national budget) or funds generated by Government-Owned
and Controlled Corporations (goccs);
“Green Building” A building that is sustainably planned, designed, used/
occupied, managed and maintained. The passive design
features of a Green Building require it to use less energy
resources while maintaining a comfortable lifestyle for its
occupants. Its active design features imply the use of
equipment that run on renewable resources such as wind
turbines, solar panels, and the like, that help conserve natural
and non-renewable resources. The key principles of Green
Buildings revolve around its site and surroundings, energy/
water/ material efficiency, indoor air quality, waste reduction
and low operating/ maintenance costs
“Green Wall” Also known as living walls, bio-walls, eco-walls, or vertical
gardens, is a wall or similar vertical support/ element, that may
be either free-standing or attached to an existing wall, and that
may be partially, substantially or fully covered with vegetative
cover, which may include a vegetation growth medium, such
as soil, and which may also feature an integrated water
delivery or controlled irrigation system.
“Local Code/s” Shall specifically refer to P.D. No. 1096, the 1977 National
Building Code of the Philippines (NBCP), its latest
implementing rules and regulations (IRR), its referral codes
(rcs) and its derivative regulations (drs), as applicable. In the
vent that the desired building or construction standard cannot
TS 500 - 50
be found therein, international standards shall apply in a

suppletory manner.
“Low-e (glass)” Architectural glass with a microscopically-thin, transparent
coating for low emissivity and which reflects long-wave
infrared energy (or heat); some low-e glass are also able to
reflect significant amounts of short-wave solar infrared
energy.
“Lux” The System International (SI) unit of illuminance, equal to one
lumen per square meter.
“MLE (mandated legal Are open spaces from the natural grade line (NGL) upward, as
easement)” mandated by the P.D. No. 1067, the 1976 Water Code of the
Philippines and by P.D. No. 1096, the 1977 NBCP, that form
part of the public domain and is therefore not intended for any
form of private use or enjoyment; these easements shall be
mainly along the banks of waterways, beaches and similar
locations and shall be for public use and enjoyment as well as
for use as a security provision for the landside and as a
maintenance access-way for the waterside; its width shall be
as prescribed under the 2 laws mentioned;
“NBCP” The 1977 National Building Code of the Philippines
(otherwise known as Presidential Decree/ P.D. No. 1096), its
2004 Revised implementing rules and regulations (IRR),
referral codes (rcs) and derivative regulations (drs); the NBCP
is a national development control; it is implemented and
enforced by the DPWH through Acting Local Building
Officials (albos) at the LGU level; reference supplied
definitions of IRR, RC and DR;
“NBO (National Building The Secretary of the Department of Public Works and
Official)” Highways (DPWH), the implementor and enforcer of
Presidential Decree (P.D.) No. 1096, the 1977 National
Building Code of the Philippines (NBCP), its implementing
rules and regulations (IRR), its referral codes (rcs) and its
derivative regulations (drs);
“NBZ (no-build zone)” Refer to areas above the public domain (such as rrows, rows
and mles) and to areas above the adjoining front yards of
properties, for which no part of any building are permitted; the
nbzs are determined by setbacks (including incremental
setbacks) and the BHL and are so designated to preserve the
amount of natural light and ventilation that reaches the
surfaces areas of the public domain and the front yards of
properties (refer also to Annexes 1 and 2);
“Ownership” Shall refer to proprietary rights to an architectural work such
as plans, designs and other documents by a person / juridical
entity who commissions the Architect and whose ownership
TS 500 - 51
of an architectural work by such a person / juridical entity shall

only be confined to the use of the architectural documents for
executing / implementing the work described therein for one
(1) or the original project; ownership shall not apply to the use
of a part of or of the entire architectural work / architectural
documents to repetitions or to subsequent projects.
“Physical Planning” The activities pertaining to the preparation of a physical layout
of land or property on which vertical structures such as
buildings, monuments and / or structures and horizontal
developments such as rights-of-way (rows), open spaces and
recreational/sports / establishments / tourism and related
facilities are to be proposed.
“Referral Code (RC)” Are laws or regulations that are in direct support of the NBCP,
consisting of but not limited to the following laws, codes or
their successor laws / codes:
• R.A. No. 9514, otherwise known as the Fire Code of
the Philippines (FCP) of 2008 and its latest
implementing rules and regulations (IRR) and
derivative regulations (drs);
• B.P. Blg. 344, An Act to Enhance the Mobility of
Disabled Persons by Requiring Certain Buildings,
Institutions, Establishments and Public Utilities to
Install Facilities and Other Devices, and its latest IRR
and drs;
• Latest (applicable) version of the Architectural Code
of the Philippines and its drs;
• Latest version of the Structural Code of the Philippines
and its drs;
• Latest version of the Philippine Electrical Code and its
drs;
• Latest version of the Mechanical Code of the
Philippines and its drs;
• P.D. No. 856, Code on Sanitation and its latest IRR and
drs;
• P.D. No. 1067, A 1976 Presidential Decree Instituting
a Water Code, Thereby Revising and Consolidating
the Laws Governing the Ownership, Appropriation,
Utilization, Exploitation, Development, Conservation
and Protection of Water Resources, otherwise known
as The Water Code of the Philippines, and its latest
IRR and drs;
TS 500 - 52
• R.A. No. 9275, The Philippine Clean Water Act of

2004, and its latest IRR and drs;
• R.A. No. 9003, The Ecological Solid Waste
Management Act of 2000, and its latest IRR and drs;
• R.A. No. 8749, The Philippine Clean Air Act of 1999
and its latest IRR and drs;
• P.D. No. 1586, Establishing an Environmental Impact
Statement System, Including Other Environmental
Management Related Measures and for Other
Purposes, and its latest IRR and drs;
• The ICAO SARP and the CAAP mos for Aerodromes
in the case of airport (or heliport / helipad, as
applicable) selection, planning, design, construction,
administration, operation and maintenance; and
• The various Professional Regulatory Laws (prls) such
as R.A. No. 9266 (The Architecture Act of 2004), R.A.
No. 544 (The Civil Engineering Law of 1950, as
amended by R.A. No. 1582 of 1956), etc., including
R.A. No. 8981, otherwise known as the Professional
Regulation Commission (PRC) Modernization Act of
2000, and their latest IRR and drs
“RLA (Registered and A State-Registered and Licensed Architect under R.A. No.
Licensed Architect)” 9266, the Architecture Act of 2004, its 2004 IRR and
derivative regulations.
“RLP (Registered and A State-regulated development and / or construction
Licensed Professional)” professional who is a holder of a Certificate of Registration
and of a license in the form of a professional identification
(ID) card duly issued by the Professional Regulation
Commission (PRC) for practice in the Philippines, in full
accordance with the pertinent Professional Regulatory Law
(PRL), its IRR and derivative regulations (drs). The rlps for
certain classes / types of buildings / structures and their
grounds / sites are as follows:
• RLA: Registered and Licensed Architect;
• RLAE: Registered and Licensed Agricultural
Engineer;
• RLCE: Registered and Licensed Civil Engineer;
• RLEE: Registered and Licensed Electronics Engineer;
• Rlenp: Registered and Licensed Environmental
Planner;
TS 500 - 53
• RLGE: Registered and Licensed Geodetic Engineer;

• RLID: Registered and Licensed Interior Designer;
• RLLA: Registered and Licensed Landscape Architect;
• RLPE: Registered and Licensed Plumbing Engineer
(or Master Plumber);
• RLPEE: Registered and Licensed Professional
Electrical Engineer;
• RLPME: Registered and Licensed Professional
Mechanical Engineer; and
• RLSE: Registered and Licensed Sanitary Engineer.
“ROW (right-of-way)” A public space that forms part of the public domain, including
the airspace above such a ROW:
• Drainage ROW: a dedicated land area reserved for the
purpose of introducing and maintaining and drainage
line leading to an outfall;
• Private / Public ROW: a dedicated land area which
may or may not be secured, and primarily reserved for
the passage of persons, animals, vehicles, utilities,
drainage and the like.
• Railroad ROW (RRROW): consists of the railway /
tramway / tracks on which trains pass, the buffer areas
on either side of the railway for operational safety and
fixed facilities for passenger exchanges, inclusive of
the airspace above such a RRROW;
• Utility ROW (UROW): the area on which public utility
lines e.g. Power, telecommunications, water supply,
drainage, sewer, gas, etc. Are allowed to pass,
including buffer / safety zones, service / maintenance
areas and the airspace above such a UROW;
• Water ROW (WROW): found in inland waterways
such as rivers, streams, lakes, canals and the like and
consisting of the waterway / vessel-way on which
boats / ships / barges pass, the embankments and
portions of the shore areas used to access the waterway
/ vessel-way, including the airspace above such a
WROW.
“RROW (road right-of- The surface / area existing between two (2) or more defined
way)” activity spaces / properties that afford such areas direct
pedestrian and vehicular access. The RROW / street usually
lies between two (2) or more parallel properties and its width
TS 500 - 54
is horizontally measured from opposite property lines. In

particular, the RROW / street shall consist of the sidewalk, the
curb and gutter (where present), the carriageway (roadway)
and all of the other hard-scapes (including street furniture) and
soft-scapes that may be initially introduced within the RROW
limits; also defined as a public open space for the continuous
flow of pedestrian and vehicular traffic, including the air space
above such RROW, that must be free of all forms of prohibited
physical obstructions:
• Public RROW: Any access-way sited on a roadlot,
which is designated as a public space and which has
been dedicated or deeded to the public for continued
use by both pedestrians and vehicles. A public RROW
is part of the public domain and is usually paved and
complete with the requisite facilities and elements, all
financed by public funds. As such, the public RROW
cannot be used for private use and enjoyment of any
form, nor can it be used for any private commercial or
business purposes. If temporary private use on the
public RROW such as hourly parking is permitted, the
appropriate parking fees shall apply and all collected
fees shall accrue to the appropriate Government
agency tasked with its maintenance;
• Private RROW: Any access-way sited on a roadlot,
which is designated as a public space and which has
been dedicated or deeded for continued use by both
pedestrians and vehicles. A private RROW, while
considered part of the public domain, is usually paved
and complete with the requisite facilities and elements,
all financed by private funds. As such, certain portions
of the private RROW may be used for duly-permitted
private use and enjoyment, commercial or business
purposes. If temporary private use on the private
RROW such as hourly parking is permitted, the
appropriate parking fees shall apply and all collected
fees shall accrue to the entity that financed its
construction and / or that spends for its maintenance
“Shall” Indicates a mandatory requirement.
“Should” Indicates a recommendation.
“Substantial Completion Percentage (%) of the Work accomplishment by the
of the Work” Contractor as defined in the FIDIC documents.
“Sustainable Design” Is the philosophy of designing physical objects, the built
environment and services to substantially comply with the
principles of economic, social and ecological sustainability,
TS 500 - 55
without compromising natural and other resources that must

be bequeathed to future generations
“TGFA (Total Gross The total floor space within a building (inclusive of extensions
Floor Area)” / additions to such a building / enclosed area) and its auxiliary
buildings; the TGFA consists of the GFA and all other
enclosed / partially enclosed support areas that are built up and
/ or paved (with an impervious surface) together with all other
usable horizontal areas / surfaces above and below the finished
grade line (FGL) that are all physically attached to such a
building; areas such as open / semi-covered parking, walks /
covered walks, courts, pools, ponds / grotto, generator shed /
pump room / s and elevated platforms / view decks all form
part of the TGFA; the TGFA also defined as the total floor
space within the main and auxiliary buildings primarily
consisting of the GFA and all other enclosed support areas
together with all other usable horizontal areas / surfaces above
and below established grade level that are all physically
attached to the building / s which shall consists of the
following:
• Covered areas used for parking and driveways,
services and utilities. The TGFA specifically excludes
provisions for courts above grade level;
• Vertical penetrations in parking floors where no
residential or office units are present;
• Uncovered areas for helipads, air-conditioning cooling
towers or ACCU balconies, overhead water tanks, roof
decks, laundry areas and cages, wading or swimming
pools, whirlpool or jacuzzis, terraces, gardens, courts
or plazas, balconies exceeding 10m2, fire escape
structures and the like; and
• Other building projections which may additionally
function as floors or platforms if properly reinforced
e.g. The top surfaces of roof extensions / eaves, sun-
breakers, large roofed or cantilevered areas such as
porte cocheres, canopies and the like;
“TLA (total lot area)” The total surface area of a lot / property as generally
determined by the lengths of its frontage (usually along a
RROW / street), sides and rear, with the area measurement
taken at a common right angle and not parallel to the surface
of the lot / property, particularly if the same is sloping (at an
incline).
“U-value” Also known as the U-factor or coefficient of heat transmission,
a measure of the rate of non-solar heat loss or gain through a
TS 500 - 56
material or assembly; U-values are often quoted for windows

and doors.
“Urban Design” Physical and systemic design undertaken by an Architect on a
community and urban plane, more comprehensive than, and
an extension of the architecture of buildings, spaces between
buildings, entourage, utilities and movement systems.
“ZO (zoning ordinance)” A local development control in the form of a local law for a
specific LGU and its jurisdiction.
TS 500 - 57
GENERAL PROVISION
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this Section, the Works shall be conforming to the
following General Provisions.
1) Fireproof Covering and Fire Preventive Covering Works (Depot Area Building)
Item Specification Fire Rating
Main Steel Columns Solvent – Based Intumescent Coating 2 HRS
Main Steel Beam / Solvent – Based Intumescent Coating 2 HRS

Girders
Secondary / Solvent – Based Intumescent Coating 2 HRS

Intermediate Beam &
Columns
Steel Decking Solvent – Based Intumescent Coating 2 HRS

(Underside)
Steel truss Solvent – Based Intumescent Coating 2 HRS

Intumescent Sealant
Masonry Walls 2 HRS
Intumescent Sealant
Reinforced Concrete 2 HRS
Note:
a) Application of Fireproofing shall be carried out by accredited fireproofing
specialist.
b) 2 Hrs Fire rating shall be applied on exposed steel members, on equipment
Rooms / areas storing high explosive/ combustible materials
c) 4 Hrs Fire rating shall be applied at Substations/ Areas storing high
explosive/ combustible materials.
d) Electrical Room in Depot area shall be 4 Hrs Fire rating.
e) Intumescent sealant/ Fire seal shall be applied at all joints where fire
compartment are required.
f) For exterior and interior surfaces, finishing shall be fluororesin paint.
2) Site Work
Item Specification
Concrete pavement with single layer wire mesh, thickness=200mm
Pavement
Station Plaza: 150mm Wide granite stone with chamfered edge,
Curb
25mm chamfer.
90 x 90 x 90mm, Granite brick pavement
Walkway
TS 500 - 58
Reinforced concrete with Stainless Steel grating

Stormwater Trench
Termite control shall be card out after completion of backfilling
Termite Control
3) Concrete Block, Brick and Lightweight Concrete
Type of Walls Thickness Description / Specification

150mm 150mm Thk. CHB plastered on exterior side only +
External Walls
MACRO wall air SABS 100mm thk.
200mm 150mm Thk. CHB with 25mm thk. Plaster on both sides
External Walls
150mm 150mm Thk. CHB plastered on both side / 150mm
Internal Walls
MACRO wall (including of 20mm coating both sides)
100mm Thk. CHB with 25mm thk. Plaster on both sides
200mm 200mm Thk. Reinforced concrete wall, 4hrs fire rated.
Retaining Walls
200mm Thk. Reinforced concrete wall with waterproofing
admixture
Note:
a) Dimension of the materials shall be investigated and confirmed at the
local market.
b) Local fire code and its requirements shall be referred in case the wall is a
part of fire compartment.
c) In order to prevent odor leak out of the wet area, walls surrounding the
toilet wall shall be continued to beam or roof.
d) Concrete lintel over doors and windows, within 12m2
e) Concrete beam over Rollup Shutter doors and wide windows, within 12m2
4) Precast Concrete Works
Location Thickness Description / Specification

AVG 170mm 1Precast concrete wall to withstand wind speed of
External Walls
270KPH
I50mm Composite wall system consisting of Expanded poly
External Walls
sterene (EPS) and SABIE Alternative Building System
(Macrowall)
(SABS) Structural coating.
100mm Composite wall system consisting of Expanded poly
Interior Walls
sterene (EPS) and SABIE Alternative Building System
(Macrowall)
(SABS) Structural coating.
TS 500 - 59
5) Waterproofing and Sealants
Waterproofing
Location Type of Material Thickness Method of Supplication
External Walls Cementitious type +/- 2.0mm Liquid, cold-applied with fiber mesh
Waterproofing
Roof Deck Asphalt type +/- 5.0mm Torch - applied

waterproofing
Concourse Level Elastomeric Type +/- 5.0mm Liquid, cold-applied

Waterproofing
Toilet & Shower Cementitious type +/- 2.0mm Liquid, cold-applied with fiber mesh
Room Floor Waterproofing
Toilet & Shower Cementitious type +/- 2.0mm Liquid, cold-applied

Room Walls Waterproofing
Pipe Chase/ Shaft Cementitious type +/- 2.0mm Liquid, cold-applied

Walls Waterproofing
Platform Level Elastomeric Type +/- 5.0mm Liquid, cold-applied

Waterproofing
Concrete Gutters Elastomeric Type +/- 5.0mm Liquid, cold-applied

Waterproofing
Parapet Walls/Top Elastomeric Type +/- 3.0mm Liquid, cold-applied

Waterproofing
Note:
a) Space of gutter, roof drain and Downspout shall be referred to exterior
finishing schedule.
b) Concrete covering of waterproofing for roofs shall be T=70mm with wire
mesh, 3.2 x 100 x 100mm.
c) Construction joint of the topping covering shall be readymade sulphide-
free butyl rubber.
d) Waterproofing admixture shall be applied on ground level concrete slab,
below ground level concrete slab and RC wall below ground with
provisions of extruded PVC type waterstops.
Vapour Proofing
Location Type of Material Thickness Method of Application
Underground Slab Polyethylene Sheet 6MLS Overlapped at sheet joint by 400mm
TS 500 - 60
Underground Wall Polyethylene Sheet 6MLS Overlapped at sheet joint by 400mm

(Ext.)
Underground Walls Elastomeric type +/- 5.0mm Liquid, cold-applied

(Int.) Waterproofing
Note:
a) 10mm Protection board / face board shall be applied on underground wall
vapour-proofing.
b) Duct tapes shall be used at protection board / Facemboard joints.
Sealant
Sealant Specification
Joints
Silicon (SR-2) / Polysulfide (PS-2)
Aluminum to Aluminum
Silicon (SR-1G)
Aluminum to Glass
Aluminum to Aluminum Composite Panel (ACP)
Aluminum to Concrete
Aluminum to Granite
Silicon (SR-1G)
Glass to Glass
Silicon (SR-1G)
Glass to Aluminum Composite Panel (ACP)
Glass to Concrete
Glass to Granite
Aluminum Composite Panel (ACP) to Aluminum
Composite Panel (ACP)
Aluminum Composite Panel (ACP) to Concrete Silicon (SR-2) / Polysulfide (PS-2)
Aluminum Composite Panel (ACP) to Granite Silicon (SR-2) / Polysulfide (PS-2)

Polysulfide (PU-2)
Concrete to Concrete
Polysulfide (PU-2)
Concrete to Granite
Polysulfide (PU-2)
Granite to Granite
Metal to Aluminum
Metal to Concrete Polysulfide (PU-2)
Concrete to Steel Polysulfide (PU-2)

Glass to Steel
Steel to Concrete
Note:
a) Avoid using silicon sealant in exterior area where it may be contaminated.
TS 500 - 61
b) Silicon sealant shall be used for the above specified Glazing related joint
only and shall not be used for the other joint.
c) Color of sealant shall be decided by submitting samples to the Engineer.
d) Confirm the turn of sealing apply and surface position in joint (Depth of
joint) with the Engineer.
e) Confirm intensity for SSG (Structural Sealant Glazing) System.
f) Sealant shall be of Silicon Polymer (Polydimrthyl Siloxane, PDMS) as
base material.
6) Stone Flooring
Location Type of Stone Finished Dimension

Honed Granite (Juparana Colombo) 900 x 1200 x30mm
Entrance Hall, Reception,
Local granite, stone-honed 600 x 600 x 30mm
Hallway
Concourse, Platform Honed Granite (Juparana Colombo) 900 x 1200 x30mm
Entrance Hall Stair Steps Honed Granite (Juparana Colombo) 900 x 1200 x30mm
Ramps (PWD) Honed Granite (Juparana Colombo) 900 x 1200 x30mm
Ramps Pebble washed out # 05
Baseboard Honed Granite (Juparana Colombo) 150 x 600 x30mm

Local granite, stone-honed
Precast Concrete 300 x 800 x30mm
Non-slip Tile
Stainless Steel 300 x300mm
Tactile Studs
Note:
a) The back and side edges of all Marble and Granite slabs shall be coated
with back coat / pre-sealer.
b) Sealant materials for joint, as a general rule, shall be polysulfide sealant
(non-phenol).
c) Low VOC water-based high-penetrating / impregnating sealer shall be
applied on granite stones.
d) Stone shall be selected by submitting samples to the Engineer, especially
in case of marble, dots pattern shall be selected by the Engineer.
e) Size of Joint
Granite Floor: 1.0mm
TS 500 - 62
f) Color of joint shall be selected by the Engineer.

g) All piers of Viaduct / box girder under slab / bottom shall be applied with
stone sealer top coat finish.
7) Ceramic Tile Works
Location Type/Surface Finish Dimension Joint Pointing
Toilet & Shower Floor Vitrified, Non-skid 600x600mm Ceramic, Local +/- 3mm
Standard
Double Charged
Kitchen/Pantry Floor Vitrified, Non-skid 600x600mm Ceramic, Local +/- 3mm

Standard
Double Charged
Toilet & Shower Wall Glazed, 50% Hexagonal, Local Standard +/- 3mm
Kitchen Wall Glazed, 50% 300x600mm Ceramic, Local +/- 3mm

Standard
Locker Room Floor Vitrified, Non-skid 600x600mm Ceramic, +/- 3mm

Double Charged Homogeneous
Baseboard Glazed, 50% 150x600mm Ceramic, +/- 3mm

Homogeneous
Note:
a) The tile at soffit, window lintel Etc. which face downward shall be fixed
with stainless steel wire.
b) Tile and joint material shall be determined by the Engineer by submitting
samples to the Engineer.
c) Construction joint of tile shall be aligned with that of exterior concrete
wall.
d) Tolerance of physical dimension of material shape shall be Supplier’s
Standard.
8) Carpentry and Wood Works
Item Specification
S4S any Philippines hardwood, EG, lauan, Tanguile or approve
Wooden Door & Door Frames
equivalent.
19mm Thk. Marine plywood, Termite-treated with fire retardant.
Built-in Counter and Cabinet
S4S any Philippines hardwood, EG, lauan, Tanguile or approve
Baseboard & Trimmings
equivalent.
Note:
a) Kind of wood
① Local Wood (Engineer’s Selection), Spruce, lauan or equivalent.
TS 500 - 63
② Plywood made of lauan or equivalent.

b) Moisture Content (percentage): Not more than 20%
c) Grade of Finishing Surface
① OSCL (Oil-stain Clear Lacquer)
② SOP (Synthetic Oil Paint)
③ Paint wipe out Finish
④ Epoxy Resin-based Floor Coating Paint.
d) Special kind of wood shall be referred to the Drawing.
e) Finish and grain of wood shall be decided by presenting samples to the
Engineer.
f) Anti-termite and fire retardant treatment shall be carried out.
9) Roofing Works and Exterior Finishing

Station Building
Item Specification Location

Spanish tile roofing; Alzinc steel Sheet T=0.6mm, Tutuban Station
Metal Roof
H=35mm, 300mm tile module
4mm thk. Aluminum Composite Material (ACM) with
Canopy/Edge
photocatalyst and PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride)
coating, and mineral fiber core (fire-rated) on All Station
reinforced concrete.
Tension Membrane Fiberglass fabric with PTFE coating and TI2 coating,
Roofing thickness=0.80mm, weight=1300G/m2
All Station
ACP Roofing 20mm Thk. Aluminum Composite Material (ACM)

with photocatalyst and PVDF (Polyvinylidene
Extended Fire Exit
Fluoride) coating (fire rated)
way
Roof Deck Plain Mortar steel troweled finish with 100mm thk.
Expanded polystyrene (XPS) and polyurethane
All Substations
membrane waterproofing
Wall Cladding 4mm thk. Aluminum Composite Material (ACM) with

photocatalyst and PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride)
All Stations
coating, and mineral fiber core (fire-rated)
Sun Control Louvers Folded plate- aeroscreen in aluminum (hot-dip zinc-

(Aeroscreen) coated steel sheet + polyester resin electrostatic powder
All Stations
coating)
Stationary Louvers Extruded with Aluminum with PVDF (Polyvinylidene

Fluoride) coating storm proof, (as per manufacturer
Station Fire Exits5
Spec.)
Dept Area Building
TS 500 - 64
Specification
Item
Composite roofing panels: Top & bottom skin alzinc steel sheet T=0.6mm,
Metal Roof
H=108mm. Polyisocyanurate (PIR), density=32-35kg/m3
Alzinc steel sheet T=0.6mm, H=25mm
Metal Canopy
Composite wall panel; Top $ bottom skin alzinc steel sheet T=0.6mm,
Metal Walls
H=102mm polyisocyanurate (PIR) density=32-35kg/m3
Glass Canopy: 10+10mm laminated Glass wit Safety Film
Canopy (Depot OCC
Building)
Plain Mortar steel troweled finish with 100mm thk. Expanded polystyrene
Roof Deck (Depot
(XPS) and Asphalt membrane waterproofing
OCC Building)
Plain Mortar steel troweled finish with hardener and crystalline cementitious
Roof Slab (other Depot
waterproofing/ Polyurethane membrane system waterproofing
Buildings)
Laminated glass with safety wire mech
Skylight
Accessories for roof:

a) Roof Gutter: 1.2mm thk. ZAM Steel, Post-formed, Welded Joints with
Polyurethane membrane coating and metal panels fascia cover.
b) Gutter flashing: 1.2mm thk. ZAM Steel, post-formed, welded joint.
c) Downspout: Stainless Steel, grade 630.
d) Metal flashing: 1.5mm thk. Stainless steel
Note:
a) Roof drain shall be baked with coal-tar and shall be cast in concrete slab.
b) Stainless steel made overflow shall be provided in the case of the flat roof
has only one roof drain outlet.
c) Basic wind pressure: 270 KPH
d) ZAM steel sheet shall be installed by using seam machine.
e) Roofing shall be interlocking installed with self-drilling screw with
neoprene washer
f) PTFE roofing shall be installed by the PTFE Specialist.
10) Miscellaneous Metal Works (Except Structural Steel Works)
Item Specification
Steel frame and hot-dipped galvanized steel graitings, steel pipe
Steel Staircase
handrail and baluster, weap hole for drain
Hot-dipped galvanized steel with safety hoop
Maintenance Ladder
Steel pipe 150∅ h=1200, SOP painted finish on rustproof paint sealer
Guard Post
38mm∅ Stainless steel top & bottom rail, Railing post 32mm∅
External Handrail
stainless steel balusters.
38mm∅ Stainless steel seamless pipe sched, #40, GR. 630 top &
Internal Handrail
bottom rail, Railing post 32mm∅ stainless steel seamless pipe
sched #40, GR. 630 balusters.
TS 500 - 65
38mm∅ Stainless steel seamless pipe sched, #40, GR. 630

Service Gates
Stainless steel
Opening Edge Protection
Hot-dipped galvanized
Expanded Metal Lath
200mm Extruded aluminum plate, continues
Expanded Joint Floor Cover
100mm Extruded aluminum plate, continues
Expanded Joint Wall Cover
9mm Thk. Mild steel checkered plate on steel frame
Service Pit Cover
Hot-dipped galvanized steel grating on steel frames with handrail
Maintenance Catwalk
Stainless steel (2mm∅ mesh aperture 40mm)
Wire Net Fencing
GA#18 galvanized steel on steel frames, flourourethane baked finish
Louver, stationary
GA#18 galvanized steel on steel frames, flourourethane baked finish
Louvers, Modular intake
Note:
a) Rust proof for steel
① Hot-dip galvanized steel
Place of Apply: Exterior steel as specified.
Quantity of coating: More than 350 G/M (Without paint finish)
More than 550 G/M (for euimury with
sulfur oxidize protection paint)
11) Plastering
Item Specification
Topping concrete shall be more than 50mm thk. where floor outlets
Leveling Concrete for Toilets
will be buried.
40mm Mortar troweled base
Ceramic tile finish floor,
T=100mm
Skimcoat 5mm on mortar finish, Total 20mm steel troweled
Wall Mortar
20mm Mortar troweled base
Granite Stone Finish, T=30mm
Note:
a) Apply primer type adhesive to dry surface prior to cement mortar is
troweled.
b) Apply cement paste mixed with adhesive to wet surface.
c) Allowable tolerance for flat surface shall not exceed 3mm in 3000mm for
BOW or WARP
① Plaster ceiling and soffit, Assemble shall be fabricated and installed
so that deflection of plaster surfaces dose not exceed L/360.
② Plaster wall assembles shall be fabricated and installed so that
deflection of plaster surface dose not exceed L/360 when subject to a
lateral load of 14360PA for interior and 50 PSF for exterior.
TS 500 - 66
12) Spray Paint Works
Location Type/Surface Finish Finish Material Finishing

Type
Exterior Walls Steel troweled Mortar with Acrylic Rubber base SEMI-Gloss
Acrylic Cement modifier
on brick or Concrete
Cabinet Doors Wood Synthetic Oil based Gloss
Note:
a) Provide construction joint properly on mortar or fair-faced concrete
substratum.
b) Spray topcoat only on sealant filled in joint, in case spray paint on it.
c) Surface finishing type and color shall be decided by presenting samples
to the Engineer
13) Painting Works
Location Substratum Finish Material Gloss/Matte

Ratio (%)
Exterior Walls Mortar, Concrete Self-priming, Elastomeric 30%

coating system
Acrylic Water-based
Interior Walls Mortar, Gypsum Board Acrylic Water-based 0%
Interior Ceiling Gypsum Board Acrylic Water-based 0%
Exterior Ceiling Fibercement Acrylic Solvent-based 30%
Exterior Ceiling Metal Alkyd Type on Rustproof 30%

Primer
Exterior Steel Structure Steel Fluororesin Paint on 70%

Intumescent coating
Synthetic oil paint on rustproof
paint primer
Interior Steel Structure Steel Fluororesin Paint on 30%

Intumescent coating
paint primer
Wooden Door & Frame Wood Synthetic Oil based 30%
TS 500 - 67
Steel Staircase Steel Fluororesin Paint on Rustproof 30%

Paint Primer
paint primer
Maintenance Platform Galvanized Steel Epoxy Resin based Acid Proof 30%
Paint
Note:
a) Anti-rust paint on structural steel shall be referred to Structural
Specification.
b) Surface finishing type and color shall be submitted samples to the
Engineer for his selection.
c) Moisture content of concrete to be applied Epoxy Paint should be less
than 5%.
d) Surface with high acid exposure shall be applied self-primer modified
water-based siloxane.
e) Appropriate preparation and primer coating shall be applied prior to finish
paint application
14) Doors and Windows
Item Specification
1.2mm Thk, Hot-dip Galvanized steel. Flurourethane baked finish.
Hollow-core Steel panel
1.2mm Thk. Galvanized steel, fluoro urethane baked finish
1.6mm Thk, Hot-dip Galvanized steel. Flurourethane baked finish.
Fire Rated Steel Door Panel
1.2mm Thk. Galvanized steel, fluoro urethane baked finish
1.2mm Thk, Hot-dip Galvanized steel Louver on 50x150x 3mm
Louver Door
tubular steel frame, Flurourethane baked finish.
Grille type stainless steel with guild rail, gasket at the bottom with
Roll-up Door
emergency stop device (See Schedule of doors)
1.6mm thk. Stainless steel with guide rail, gasket at the bottom with
emergency stop device
16mm Tempered glass panel with 4MLS Security film (See
Glass Door
Schedule of doors)
Power coated aluminum (PVDF)
Window Frames
Stainless steel
Galvanized steel
(Large Panels)
1.6mm Thk. Steel door frame: Flurourethane baked finish. (See
Door Frame
Schedule of doors)
Note:
a) Timber Doors
TS 500 - 68
Hard wood type (Door frame)

b) Steel Door/ Stainless steel doors
① Design wind values: Not less than 50kg/m (500N2 /M (PA)
② Air Tightness: Not less than 1.1M3/hr xM2 (100PA)
③ Water tightness: Not less than 300 PA
c) Aluminum Window / Stainless
② Air Tightness: Not less than 1.1M3/hr xM2 (100PA)
③ Water tightness: Not less than 300 PA
④ Material: Ready-made extruded aluminum alloy
④ Finishes: Power coated aluminum with PDF coating (Verify with The
Engineer)
Mock-up model shall be provided for approval of the Engineer and check
detail of joint and rain-drain system
d) Special Doors and Windows
① Anti-panic open system for emergency staircase door
② Door facing to outside shall be filled with foamed insulation.
③ Doors of machine and electrical rooms (For noise proof) shall be semi
air-tight and filled with rockwool insulation and incest screen.
e) Shutters
② Material and Finish: Slat-Stainless steel T=1.2mm
Lintel and Guide Rails: Stainless steel
③ Operation System: Electrical operation system with
emergency stop function.
f) Note:
① Fill-Formed insulation in the cavity space between frame and sub-
status.
② Design wind values shall comply with local building codes and
regulations.
③ Provide recessed window sill for retaining condensation.
15) Glass and Glazing
Item Specification
Low-E laminated glass, double-panel with tint assembly (See
Exterior, Framed Window in Depot
schedule of doors & windows)
Area (Workshop, ETC, Except OCC)
Low-E laminated glass, double-panel with tint assembly (See
Exterior, Framed Window in Depot
schedule of doors & windows)
Area OCC Building
TS 500 - 69
Low-E, single-panel with security film (See schedule of doors

Interior, Framed Window in Depot Area
& windows)
(OCC Building)
Low-E laminated glass, double-panel with tint assembly,
Exterior, Framed Window
6:12:6 (See schedule of Doors and Windows)
Low-E laminated glass, double-panel with inert gas assembly,
Exterior Glass Panels
16:6:16 (See schedule of Doors and Windows)
Low-E tempered glass panels with security film, (See
Interior, Framed Window
schedule of Doors and Windows)
10mm Thk. Safety glass laminated, (See schedule of Doors
Interior, Door Viewing Panel (All
and Windows)
Doors as Specified)
16mm Thk. tempered glass panels with security film on
Glass Doors
Stainless steel patch fittings, (See schedule of Doors and
Windows)
2Hrs. Fire rated and as per manufacturers specification
Fire Glass
12mm Tempered glass panels with security film
Glass Railings
Insulated Tempered glass panels with spider glass fittings and
Curtain Wall (Elevator shaft)
security film 16:6:16 double glass or laminated glass
Note:
a) Adjust reflective images on heat reflective glass.
b) Apply anti-rust treatment on the edge of wired glass.
c) Silicon sealant shall be applied to fixing glass to frame and glass joints.
d) Thermal stress analysis result shall be submitted.
16) Interior Finishing
Item Specification
Moisture and fire-resistant gypsum board T=12mm, 9.0mmwith
Gypsum Board
chamfer for butt joint and flush finish with patty.
Gypsum board T=12mm with foil backing on power-coated
600 x 600mm Ceiling Board
aluminum tee-runners, submit samples for the Engineer’s approval.
0.50mm Thk. Pre-painted metal on light metal frames
Spandrel Metal Ceiling
0.50mm Thk. Oven-baked pre-painted metal on light metal frames
Liner Type Ceiling
0.50mm Thk. G.I. metal pre-painted metal on light metal frames
Exposed Underside of Metal
Roofing
Fluoro-resin-based paint finish
Exposed Underside of Slab
Ribbed type aluminum lightweight ceiling on metal frames
Waterproofing Ceiling
160 x 40 (52) – 24 x 3 mesh, 7.2 kg/m2, 16mm thk., 15% frontal open
Aluminum Expanded Metal
area, flouroresin baked finish on hot-dip galvanized metal frames and
Ceiling/Walls
hangers for ceiling, hot-dip galvanized steel angles for walls.
AISI type 316 SS, rigid. Open area:35%. 1.4 LBS/SQFT. 0.197” Thk.
Stainless Steel Mesh Acoustic
On galvanized frames and hangers.
Ceiling
TS 500 - 70
600 x 600mm power coated aluminum clip on ceiling on galvanized

Clip-on Type Metal Ceiling
frames and hangers
600 x 600mm Alzinc metal ceiling; Pre-painted finish on fire rated
Lay-in Metal Ceiling
ceiling frames; Exposed tee and galvanized frames and hangers
Fluororesin based paint finish
Exposed Underside of Slab
0.40 x 600 x 600mm Alzinc metal ceiling: Pre-painted finish on
Light weight Metal Ceiling
galvanized frames and hangers
500 x 500mm x 7mm Carpet tile
Carpet Tile
600 x 600 x 7mm Homogeneous Vinyl Tile/Carpet Tile, (verify with
Raised Flooring, Office
Engineer) Anti-Static Raised Flooring System, 500kg/m2
High density calcium sulphate core cooled air circulation type raised
Raised Flooring, Equipment
flooring system with 600 x 600 x 38mm, 1000kg/m2
Room
Self-leveling Epoxy Painted
Two (2) Component water-based self-leveling epoxy; as per
Flooring with Hardener manufacturers Spec. with cold applied concrete hardener on
mortar troweled finish.
Plain Concrete Troweled Finish

Cold applied concrete hardener on mortar steel troweled finish
Flooring
Baseboard 150mm Vinyl Baseboard strip
150mm Stainless steel strip
Note:
a) Carpet/vinyl shall be of Anti-static type.
b) Epoxy glue shall be used for PVC tile.
c) Self-leveling flooring shall be carried out by the Specialist Contractor.
17) Miscellaneous Works (Special Works)
Item Specification Location/Area

Fiber-reinforced plastic (FRP) or moisture resistant All Toilets in Depot
Toilet Both Partition
phenolic board, 25mm thk. Laminated finish Building
(Depot)
4mm Thk. Aluminum composite material (ACM) Depot OCC Building
Exterior Cladding
with photocatalyst & PVDF (Polyvinylidene
difluoride) coating and mineral fiber core (fire
rated)
Fire barrier with 20mls Vapour barrier and extruded Depot
Expansion Joint
aluminum cover WS Building
LRS Building
21 PAX capacity, center opening, 2.5m/sec. speed Depot
Elevator
OCC building
WS Building
Extruded aluminum with PVDF (polyvinylidene Depot
Sun Control Louver
fluoride) coating & manual control device OCC building
(horizontal Louver)
TS 500 - 71
Chequered plate carbon steel, zinc coating hot- WS Building

Maintenance Platform
dipped galvanized LRS Building
Stainless steel type 304 not less than 0.8mm thk.
Toilet Both Partition
Vibration finish, laminated to honeycomb core. All Station toilet
partition
Exterior Cladding 4mm Thk. Aluminum composite material (ACM)

with photocatalyst & PVDF (Polyvinylidene
Exterior walls
difluoride) coating and mineral fiber core (fire
rated)
Tension Membrane Fiberglass fabric with PTFE coating and TI02 Station roof
Roofing coating, T=0.8mm, weight=1300G/m2
Elevator (Type 1) 14PAX / 1050kg capacity, Center opening, 1m/sec. All Station
speed, scenic rear view and side.
See through doors, frame, car walls, transom panel,
Operating panel; stainless Steel vibration finish,
Car floor; honed granite,
Jamb type: Lintel and narrow jamb
Elevator (Type 2) 21PAX / 1600kg capacity, Center opening, 1m/sec. All Station
normal elevator. (As per manufacturers Spec.)
See through doors, frame, car walls, transom panel,
Operating panel; stainless Steel vibration finish,
Car floor; honed granite,
Jamb type: Lintel and narrow jamb
Expansion Joint Fire barrier with 20mls Vapour barrier and extruded All Station
aluminum cover
Expansion Joint Cover Extruded aluminum plate, continuous type. Concourse Floor and
wall, platform floor
Escalator (Type 1) EN115 code (EN115-1: 2008 + 2010), All Station

Semi-Outdoor
3∅-60HZ, +/-9000 PAX/hr, 3 flat steps, glass
panel with Under-handrail, lighting semi
outdoor type.
Escalator (Type 2) EN115 code (EN115-1: 2008 + 2010), All Station

Indoor
3∅-60HZ, +/-9000 PAX/hr, 3 flat steps, glass
panel with Under-handrail, lighting semi
outdoor type.
TS 500 - 72
18) Insulation
Item Specification Remarks

Freon-free, closed-cell polyisocyanurate (PIR) Integrated on steel
Steel Roof
foam insulation confirming to ASTM E84, UL roofing panels
CLASS 1 on incombustible characteristics and
ASTM C165, produced from continuous rigid
urethane form line, thickness=100mm.
Rockwool 50kg/m2 , T=50 Between metal frame
Dry-Lining Interior
Freon-free, closed-cell polyisocyanurate (PIR) Integrated on steel
Steel Wall
foam insulation confirming to ASTM E84, UL roofing panels
CLASS 1 on incombustible characteristics and
ASTM C165, produced from continuous rigid
urethane form line, thickness=100mm.
Interior Drywall Rockwool 60kg/m2 , T=50 Between metal frame
Ceiling Rockwool 60kg/m2 , T=50 Above ceiling board
Bottom of Slab Rockwool 60kg/m2 , T=100 With wire mesh provision
Roof Deck Extruded polysterene (XPS), 32kg/m2, T=100, Above waterproofing of

300kpa roof slab
Steel Doors /windows Rockwool, As per manufacturers Spec. Rooms with acoustic
treatment
19) Others
Item Specification
Stainless steel
Down Spout & Strap
Stainless steel letter box, with paint, stainless steel bolts, RC
Wall Mounted Logo Mark
reinforcement with LED lighting.
Reinforced concrete with cast iron grating
Storm Water Trench
Stainless steel anchored on roof beam @ every 3.0 on center.
Roof/ Wall Anchor
Stainless steel, T=3mm minimum
Skirting, Trimmings
20) Sanitary Fixtures and Accessories

Ceramic base, floor-mounted elongated type, Station Toilet
Water Closet
wall discharge, tank-less system & with auto
flushing sensor
Urinal Ceramic base, wall-mounted with integral trap Station Toilet
&auto flushing sensor
Lavatory Ceramic base, undercounter mount with rear Station Toilet, GAD
overflow & auto sensor system Room, BFR Room
TS 500 - 73
Faucet Single hole sensor basin faucet Station Toilet
Soap Dispenser Wall mount, stainless steel Station Toilet
Toilet Paper Holder Wall mount, stainless steel Station Toilet
Floor Drain Cover Polish brass/ decorative tile drain cover Station Toilet
L Shape Grab Bar 32mm standard size, stainless steel/ satin finish Station PWD Toilet
Diaper Changing Rectangular, floor standing type, veneer panel, GAD Rom
diaper caging station
Hand Bidet Spray Stainless steel All Toilets
Mirror 4mm Thk. Glass All Toilets
Note:
a) Location of fixtures and specification shall be referred / verified with
plans & Schedules.
21) Signages

Acrylic/Plexi glass with graphic film on Rooms & Offices
aluminum box
General Signages
Station Plaza, Substation,
Water Pumphouse
Reflective graphic film on aluminum box
Directory Signages Acrylic/Plexi glass with graphic film on Station Platform &
aluminum box with LED light concourse Directory
Wayfinding Signages Acrylic/Plexi glass with graphic film on Station Platform &
aluminum box with LED light concourse Directory
Photoluminescent on aluminum box Emergency Exit

Emergency Exit Signages
Acrylic/Plexi glass with graphic film on
aluminum box with LED light and battery pack
Emergency Exit
Exterior Signages Built-up acrylic / plexiglass with graphic film Station Main Entrance
(Building Name on ACM box with LED lighting
Indicator)
Stainless steel wall mounted built-up letters
with concealed LSD lighting
Note:
Location and Specifications of Signages shall be referred /verified with plans and schedules.
TS 500 - 74
501 ARCHITECTURAL COMPOSITE BUILDING SYSTEM (CBS)
The Work
The works in this section shall consist of the manufacture/supply, delivery and
installation onsite of architectural composite building system (CBS), including all
anchorage provisions, in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with
the Drawings or as established by the Engineer.
General
The works of this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the Drawings and Specifications, and includes all labor, materials,
equipment and services necessary to complete the required CBS as shown on the
Drawings and/or as specified herein.
501.2.1 Summary
The requirement is for a CBS with structural coatings consisting of premixed
concrete, sand, additives and water as the main components. A specific type of
additive is added to create a structural wall system for interior, exterior, slab, ledge
and other building applications. The extent of the required work is shown on the
Drawings and the partition schedule. The cutting and fitting for work of other trades
is scheduled as work of this section.
501.2.2 References
ESR 1638 (Evaluation Service Report): This is a report published by the ICC
(International Code Council), under the International Building Code (IBC). These
reports are used by US governing bodies as a guide to review and approve structures
built within their jurisdiction. This report classifies CBS as type V-B construction.
This report permits the CBS to be used as wall system for interior, exterior, slab,
ledge and other building applications.
501.2.3 Supplier’s Responsibilities

The following items shall be the supplier’s responsibility.
Calculation of wind and other loads from information supplied on the contract
drawings and considering local conditions;
Detailed design of secondary steel parts for fixing of panels to the structural
steel and properly transferring the load of the panels to the structural steel;
Detailed design of panel shop drawings and patterning;
501.2.4 Quality Assurance

1) Factory Inspection of all Composite panels will be conducted by the
Employer/Engineer.
2) Requirements: To ensure that CBS is manufactured and installed in accordance
with requirements stipulated, a CBS Quality Control Manual must define all
TS 500 - 75
the processes of quality control and instruction to be followed by the

manufacturer, contractor, and quality control inspector.
3) Testing: Conforms to the requirements specified in ESR-1638.
4) Inspections: Employer will provide special inspections where required by
applicable codes.
5) Fire-rated Materials: Provide a building system that conforms to the fire and
safety requirements of the National Building Code of the Philippines (NBCP)
and the Fire Code of the Philippines (FCP), whichever is more stringent.
6) Mock-up: 2000mm x 2000mm Mock-up of Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete
Perforated External Wall Panels, 2000mm x 2000m in size shall be provided
for the Engineer’s review and approval prior to commencement of manufacture.
501.2.5 Data and Equipment

1) Computer-Aided Drafting (CAD): Provides a three-dimensional model that
will be used for the Finite Element Analysis (FEA).
2) Finite Element Analysis (FEA): This structural analysis shall determine the
allowable load and stress that structure can withstand. This shall also determine
the expanded polystyrene (EPS) density, EPS thickness, coating thickness and
all other material specification and takes the three (3)-dimensional solid object
created by CAD software and imports it to FEA software. In this digital
environment, the model is subjected to various loads that are dictated by the
loading requirement of the IBC for a given area. These loads may also represent
specific situations that may arise due to unique building processes.
3) Product Data: Provides the manufacturers certificates that the CBS conforms
to all the specified standards.
4) Certificate of Conformance: The CBS provider shall submit test certificate
attesting that the materials conform to specification.
501.2.6 Site Conditions

All materials shall be delivered in appropriate packaging and stored in a safe and dry
place in accordance with the material requirements. Proper handling and storage
must be followed as stated in the material safety data sheet.
Products
501.3.1 Manufacturers
Subsequent to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering the products
that may be incorporated in the work includes those whose products satisfy ESR
1) The Contractor shall submit to Engineer the pertinent manufacturer and/or
supplier/ installer names and contact information at least one (1) month before
the intended use at the Site in the case of non-indent (locally-sourced/ supplied
TS 500 - 76
materials/items) and three (3) months before the intended use at the Site in the
case of indent (imported materials/items).
2) Substitution is not permitted, unless officially authorized (i.e. in writing) by the
Employer and/or Engineer.
501.3.2 Materials
1) Expanded Polystyrene (EPS): The EPS is in accordance with ASTM C-578
standard. Normal EPS density is either 0.90 pct or 1.5 pct (14.4kg/m 3 to
24kg/m3) nominal shaped into various configurations such as rectangular,
curved, or 1- shapes. The thickness ranges from 2 inches to 16 inches (51mm
to 406mm) depending on the end use and design considerations. Surface
burning characteristics are a flame-spread index (FSI) of 25 or less and a
smoke-developed index (SDI) of 450 or less when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 84 at a 4-inch (102mm) thickness. The EPS is supplied by sources
described in the approved quality control documentation.
2) CBS Structural Coatings: The CBS structural coatings are composite materials
consisting of premixed concrete, sand, additives, and water. Flexural strength
and modulus of elasticity must be determined by tests in accordance with
ASTM C 947, and compressive strength must be determined by test in
accordance with ASTM C 109. The thicknesses of these structural coatings
ranges from 6 to 50mm, depending on the required loads imposed on the
structural components as described in the structural design documentation. The
structural coating is a Class A interior finish with a flame-spread index of 25
or less and a smoke-developed index of 450 or less when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 84 at a 6mm thickness.
3) Adhesives: The adhesive are used to adhere with EPS segments to create walls
prior to structural coating with the CBS proprietary structural coating, using
single or two (2)-part foam plastic adhesive.
Technical Data
501.4.1 EPS Specifications (ASTM C 578)
Classification F14 F24

Density, min
lb/ffl 0.90 1.50
(kg/m;j) 14.40 24.00
Compressive Resistance min @
10%
Psi 10 15
(kPa) 69 104
501.4.2 CBS Coating
TS 500 - 77
Test Items ASTM Value Units Remarks

Compression Strength @ 28 days C109 2,667 psi ESR 1638 requirements
Flexural @ 28 days C947 667 psi ESR 1638 requirements
Density 1,952 kg/m"3
501.4.3 Technical Data
NOTE 1 – The values for properties listed in this table may be affected by the presence of a surface skin which is a
result of the manufacturing process.
The values for Type XII properties listed in this table must be generated on material with the surface skin removed.
Where products are tested with skins-in-place, this condition shall be noted in the test report.
NOTE 2 – Type III has been deleted because it is no longer available.
NOTE 3 – Classifications are used to cross-reference Fed. Spec. HH-I-524C (see XI.7.1).
NOTE 4 – In addition to the thermal resistance values in Table 1, values at mean temperatures of 25 + 2°F (-4 +
1°C), 40 + 2°F (4 + 1°C) and 110 + 2°F (43 + 1°C) are provided in X1.8 for information purposes.
NOTE 5 – For Type XIII, in addition to the Thermal resistance property requirements shown in Table 1, there are
Apparent Thermal Conductivity property values shown for informational purposes in Table X1.2 of Appendix X1.
Classification Type Type I Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
XI VIII XII X II XIII IV IX VI VII V
Compressive 5.0 10.0 13.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 25.0 40.0 60.0 100.0
resistance at (3.5) (69) (90) (104) (104) (104) (138) (173) (173) (276) (414) (690)
yield or 10%
deformation,
whichever
occurs first
(with skins
intact), min,
psi (kPa)
Thermal
resistance of
1.00-in.
(25.4-mm)
thickness,
min.
F.ft2.h/Btu
(Km2/W)
Mean 3.10 3.60 3.80 4.60 5.00 4.00 3.86 5.00 4.20 5.00 5.00 5.00
Temperature: (0.55) (0.63) (0.67) (0.81) (0.88) (0.70) (0.68) (0.88) (0.74) (0.88) (0.88) (0.88)
75 + 2°F (24
+ 1°C)
Flexural 10.0 25.0 30.0 40.0 40.0 35.0 45.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 75.0 100.0
strength, min, (70) (173) (208) (276) (276) (240) (310) (345) (345) (414) (517) (690)
psi (kPa)
TS 500 - 78
Water vapor 5.0 5.30 3.5 1.1 1.1 3.5 1.5 1.1 2.0 1.1 1.1 1.1
permeance of (287) (287) (201) (63) (63) (201) (86) (63) (115) (63) (63) (63)
1.00-in.
(25.4-mm)
thickness,
max, perm
(ng/Pa.s.m2)
Water 4.0 4.0 3.0 0.3 0.3 3.0 0.5 0.3 2.0 0.3 0.3 0.3
absorption by
total
immersion,
max, volume
%
Dimensional 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
stability
(change in
dimensions),
max, %
Oxygen 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0
index, min,
volume %
Density, min, 0.70 0.90 1.15 1.20 1.30 1.35 1.60 1.55 1.80 1.80 2.20 3.00
lb/ft3 (kg/m3) (12) (15) (18) (19) (21) (22) (26) (25) (29) (29) (35) (48)
Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Perforated External Wall Panels (GRC)
501.5.1 Design Conditions

The Panel Manufacturer or Specialist Sub-contractor approved the Engineer shall design
the Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Perforated External Wall Panels in accordance with
the following design conditions for the Engineer’s approval.
1) Deign Wind Pressure: P=2000 N/m2.
2) Seismic Factor
a) Horizontal Seismic Coefficient: KH=1.0
b) Vertical Seismic Coefficient: Kv=1.0
3) Thickness of GRC Louver: 300mm.
4) Configuration
a) Perforated Panel: (Refer to Panel Sketch Xxxxxxx)
b) Panel Thickness: 300mm
c) Panel Sizes: W=1390mm, H=6300mm
d) Holes Size: 300mm∅ 350mm pitch
e) Holes pitch: 350mm pitch center to center
TS 500 - 79
501.5.2 Submission
The Contractor shall submit the following documents for the Engineer’s review and
approval in accordance with requirements of Section 119, GS100: General
Specifications.
1) Design Drawings with design calculation.

2) Shop Drawings
3) Method Statement.
4) Warranty to certify at panels life span of at least 20 years.
501.5.3 Materials
Materials for the Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Perforated External Wall Panels
shall be mixed with the following materials:
1) Long period shrinkage ratio Portland Cement: Less than 350μ
2) Alkaline Resistance Glasswool fiber, ratio by weight of cement: More than 3%
3) Panel Surface: Urethane Paint (Factory paint)
4) Bottom and top fasteners: SUS340 or approved equal
5) Panel Joints Sealant: Silicon Sealant
501.5.4 Product Inspection at Panel Manufacturer

Product Inspection shall be carried out at Panel Manufacturer by the Engineer.
501.5.5 Execution
Installation of Panels shall be supervised by the Specialist Sub-contractor having
experience of the said works at least 10 years.
Measurement and Payment
501.6.1 Method of Measurement

1) Fire Resistant Partition is measured as the “Square Meter” and rates shall be
included the following items:
a) Fire Resistant Rating shall be 2hores.

b) 13mm Dia. Floor dowels anchor and top dowels @ 1200mm O.C. and
Fire stop sealant on top of and panel vertical joints
c) Polyurethane sealant at back of panels for 100mm thick Macro Air Sabs.
d) The area/room where required rate of fire resistant is specified in the
Finishing Schedule Drawings.
2) Composite Aluminum Wall Panels is measured as the “Square meter” and rate
shall be included panel fixing fasteners and all required accessories to complete
all Composite Aluminum Wall Panels installation works as shown on the
Drawing.
TS 500 - 80
3) Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Perforated External Wall Panels is measured

as the “Square meter” and rate shall be included panel fixing fasteners and all
required accessories to complete all GRC Panels installation works as shown
on the Drawing.
501.6.2 Basis of Payment

Amount of interim payment shall be determined by multiplying the approved
progressed quantity by the rate.
The payment shall full compensation for installation including all materials, labor,
equipment, tools, consumables and incidentals necessary to complete the works
prescribed in the item.
Payment shall be made under:
Stations
Building
Description Unit of Measurement
Pay Item
Number
501(3) 2hrs Fire Resistant Partition (with Coatings on both Square meter
sides)
501(5) T=100mmm, Composite Precast Concrete Wall Panels Square meter
501(6) T=50mm, Composite Aluminum Wall Panels Baking Square meter

Fluroresin Paint Finish with Metal Framing
501(7) T=300mm, Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Perforated Square meter

External Panel with Mounting Metal Fitting (GRC)
501(8) T=300mm, Fiber Reinforced Concrete Perforated Square meter

External Wall Panels with Mounting Metal Fitting
(GRC) and Glass for openings
501(9) T=100mm, Composite Precast Concrete Wall Panels Square meter

with Semi-transparent Water Repellent Finish
-END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 81
502 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE FINISHES
The Work
This works on this section shall consist of the manufacture/ supply, delivery and
installation onsite of finishing concrete, including all anchorage provisions, in
accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the Drawings or as
established by the Engineer.
502.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required finishing concrete and
finishing concrete fill and topping as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified
herein, to wit:
1) Protect exposed concrete surfaces from damage caused by construction
equipment, materials, or methods, and from running water.
2) Protect exposed concrete at openings used for passage of materials or
equipment.
3) Protect concrete adjacent to material lifts.
4) Protect all concrete surfaces indicated to remain exposed in completed work
from damage to surfaces from paints, oils, plaster, mortar, or other stains or
abrasions, all mortar or plaster droppings, oil, grease, or other materials which
will stain or soil the concrete finish.
5) Maintain protection as required. Remove when approved by the Engineer.
6) Termite control and damp-proofing under the Architectural Concrete on grad
shall be carried.
502.1.2 Codes and Standards

ACI-301, Chapter 10 and 11, Specification for Concrete Finishes for Buildings.
502.1.3 Environmental Conditions

Limit temperature changes in the concrete to 3oC per hour.
502.1.4 Submittals
1) The Contractor shall submit his proposed protection methods of special finishes
of concrete to the Engineer for approval.
2) The Contractor shall submit manufacturers’ literature and application
directions for additive/sealer in conformance with GS100 “General
Specification”.
3) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer samples of the formwork material
to be used for concrete finishes as required on the Drawings.
TS 500 - 82
4) Mock-up: The Contractor shall provide Insitu Terrazo finish Bench of 600mm
x 2500mm with materials on the reinforcement concrete base at the Site
After approval of the formwork materials, the Contractor shall supply as many
concrete finish samples, at least 450 x 450mm in size, as may be required by the
Engineer for his approval.
On approval of samples, they shall be kept on site and used as standard against which
the finished work is judged.
The Contractor shall allow in its price for the samples specified, and shall be paid for
any additional samples which may be required by the Engineer.
Products
502.2.2 Materials
502.2.2.1 Sealer
Wax-free, resin-free and varnish-free compound compatible with subsequent
coatings, paints, or adhesives.
502.2.2.2 Insitu Terrazzo

1) Insitu Terrazzo material shall be of Tinted Portland cement and Green Marble,
Red Marble, and Yellow Marble chippings and particles of an approved quality
color and ratio. The particles shall be minimum 50mm x 50mm in size.
2) Metal joint Strip shall be of 5mm width brass strip.
3) The Contractor shall supply at least five samples each, at least 1000 x 1000mm
in size.
Execution
1) Finishing Concrete
The Contractor shall:
a) Conform to the requirements of ACI-301, Chapter 10 and 11.
b) Refer to the Drawings and finish schedules for the locations of the various
finishes.
TS 500 - 83
c) Provide a grout clean down for concrete indicated to be painted.

d) Mix one (1) part Portland cement and one and half parts of sand passing
a 0.83mm mesh, with sufficient water to produce a grout of thick paint
consistency. Apply the grout on freshly-hardened concrete. Wet the
surface of concrete to prevent absorption of water from grout, and apply
with a trowel or brush, completely filling all air bubbles and holes.
Immediately after application of grout, float surfaces with a cork float,
scouring vigorously. While grout is still plastic, finish with a sponge
rubber float, removing all excess grout, being careful that grout is not
pulled from holes or depressions. Allow surface to dry until it takes on a
powdery appearance, then rub vigorously with dry burlap to completely
remove dried grout to obtain a smooth, plaster-like surface.
e) Flatwork Concrete Finishes
i) Schedule of Finishes - Generally as follows but conform to
schedules and notes on drawings.
ii) Scratched finish - required for concrete flatwork surfaces that will
receive concrete or cement fill or a finish material set with cement
mortar or surfacing materials.
iii) Floated finish - required for concrete flatwork surfaces that will
receive waterproof membranes.
iv) Trowel finish - required for concrete flatwork surfaces that will be
exposed, or that will receive resilient flooring, carpeting, or any
other floor coverings requiring a smooth base slab.
v) Broom finish - required for exposed concrete ramps and walks.
vi) Trowel-floated finish - required for site concrete (borders, bands,
curbs, paving, steps).
vii) Hardener and dust-proofer - required for all exposed interior
concrete floor surfaces and for interior concrete floor surfaces that
will receive carpeting.
viii) Non-slip finish - at stair treads and landings.
ix) Scratched Finish - After the concrete has been placed, struck off,
consolidated, and leveled, the surface shall be roughened by the
Contractor with stiff brushes or rakes before taking a final set.
x) Floated Finish - After the concrete has been placed, struck off,
consolidated, and leveled, the Contractor shall not work it further
until the water sheen has disappeared, and/or when the mix has
stiffened sufficiently to permit the proper operation of a power-
driven float. The surface shall then be consolidated by the
Contractor with power-driven floats. Hand-floating with wood or
cork-faced floats shall be used by the Contractor in locations
inaccessible to the power-driven machine. All high spots shall be
cut down by the Contractor and all low spots filled to within a
tolerance of 1/1000.
The surface shall then be refloated immediately by the Contractor
to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
TS 500 - 84
xi) Trowel Finish - The surface shall be finished first by the Contractor
with power floats as specified above for "Floated Finish", then with
power trowels, and finally with hand trowels.
The finished surface shall be dense and smooth, free of any trowel
marks, uniform in texture and appearance and shall be in a true
plane with a tolerance of 3mm in 3.05m. On surfaces intended to
receive resilient floor coverings, any defects that would show
through the floor covering shall be removed by the Contractor by
grinding.
xii) Broom Finish - Immediately after the concrete has been floated, as
specified above under "Floated Finish" to a true plane the surface
shall be given a scored texture by the Contractor, at right angles to
the direction of traffic, by lightly drawing a broom across the
surface. The Contractor shall use a stiff broom for ramps.
xiii) Trowel-Floated Finish - The surface shall be finished first by the
Contractor as specified above for "Trowel Finish", then the surface
shall be finished with a wood float to obtain a uniform, non-
directional grainy or sandy texture.
xiv) Hardener and Dust-proofer - After the concrete surface has been
finished and cured for at least 28 days, the Contractor shall apply 3
coats of hardener and dust-proofer in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions. Allow to dry between coats.
xv) Non-slip Finish - Trowel abrasive aggregate into the surface at the
floating stage at the rate of 1.2 kg/sq.m, in accordance with
manufacturer's directions.
f) Installing and Finishing Concrete Fill and Topping
i) Floor fill – The Contractor shall clean base slab, wet slightly, brush
on cement grout, and place concrete fill immediately. The
Contractor shall tamp and roll fill, and finish as indicated for
specified floor finish.
ii) Floor topping - (same as for floor fill)
iii) Concrete fill over roofing and waterproofing – The Contractor shall
clean surface of membrane, pour fill on carefully, and slope to
drains. The Contractor shall finish with a steel trowel for roofs and
finish over waterproofing as indicated for specified floor finish.
iv) Concrete fill under roofing and waterproofing- (Same as for floor
fill) The Contractor shall slope fill to drains and finish with a wood
float.
v) Concrete base for mechanical equipment– The Contractor shall
clean base slab, brush in pure cement grout, immediately place
normal weight concrete fill to within 25mm of finished platform or
foundation elevation, and place cement topping monolithically
before normal weight concrete fill has set. The Contractor shall
trowel cement topping to a dense, smooth finish. The Contractor
shall tool exterior corners and set anchor bolts during pouring of
normal weight concrete fill, accurately located by templates.
TS 500 - 85
2) Insitu Terrazzo
a) Metal joint Strip shall be securely installed at 1000mm both vertical and
horizontal direction or as shown on the Drawing, prior to placement of
terrazzo mix.
b) Place 30mm terrazzo mix and cure until sufficiently harden the terrazzo
prior to finishing polish to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
c) Finished terrazzo shall be protected until completion of the Works.

1) Quantity of Cinder Concrete False Floor is measured as the “Square Meters” and
rate shall be included Epoxy Coating Finish with Concrete hardener.
2) Quantity of Concrete Finish and Insitu Terrazzo are the net surface laid
multiplying area measured by the number of “Square Meters”.
3) Where the Groove are indicated on the Drawings or directed by the engineer,
Rate of W=25mm and D=30mm Butylene sealant shall be allowed.
The rate of concrete on grad shall be included termite control and damp-proofing.

prescribed in the Item.
Stations
Unit of
Building Pay Description
Measurement
Item Number
T=300mm, Cinder Concrete False Floor including 6mm Dia.
502(1) 100mm O/C Wire Mesh, in Epoxy Coating Finish with Square Meter
Concrete hardener
502(2) T=100mm, Plain Cement Troweled Finish Square Meter
502(8) T=20mm, Insitu Terrazzo Finish Bench (Marble) Square meter
Depot Building
Unit of
Pay Item Description
Measurement
Number
D502(2) T=100mm, Plain Cement Troweled Finish Square Meter
TS 500 - 86
T=200mm, Tampered Concrete including wire mesh with

D502(6) Square Meter
Hardener
D502(7) T=20mm, Insitu Terrazzo Finish Bench (Marble) Square meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 87
503 GRAVEL WASHOUT FINISH
The Work
The works in this section shall consist of the manufacture/ supply, delivery and
installation onsite of gravel washout finish, in accordance with this Specification and
in conformity with the Drawings or as established by the Engineer.
503.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required gravel washout finish as
shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.
503.1.2 Submittals
Samples: Prior to delivery of materials to the site, the Contractor shall submit and
receive approval of the following samples:
1) Gravel washout finish. Two (2) 300mm by 300mm sample panels of each type
finish or color combination.
2) Divider Strip. Two (2) 150mm lengths.
503.1.3 Delivery, Handling and Storage

The Contractor shall deliver materials in the manufacturer’s original unopened
containers marked with the manufacturer’s name and brand. Deliver, handle and
store materials in a manner that will prevent contamination or deterioration.

Ambient temperature and temperature of cementitious mixtures shall be not less than
10 degrees C from the item mixture are placed until completely cured.
Products
1) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the pertinent manufacturer and/or
TS 500 - 88
503.2.2 Materials
1) Cement: ASTM C150, type 1 gray or white to match the pebbles indicated or
specified.
2) Gravel: Gravel shall be Selected No. 10 for floors. Color shall be as indicated.
Gravel shall have abrasive hardness not less than 8% when tested in accordance
with ASTM C241.
3) Curing Materials:
a) Curing Materials shall be liquid – forming compound.
b) Water: Water shall be clean, clear, potable.
4) Sealer: Sealer shall be penetrating type, free from harmful alkali or content.
The sealer shall not discolor the pebbles nor leave a tacky or sticky finish on
the surface after buffing.
5) Sand ASTM C33 for line aggregate:
6) Transparent Waterproofing: Vinyl acrylic emulsion paint. Use an emulsified
paint that produces a durable weather resistant decorative paint with good
exterior and interior color retention. Meet or exceed Federal Specs TTP-295 &
TT-P-19D.
503.2.3 Gravel Washout Mixes

Gravel topping shall be composed of 90.7 kilos of gravel per 44.6 kilos bag of
Portland cement. Thoroughly mix dry ingredients before adding water in the amount
of 18.925 liters per bag of cement.
Execution
1) Preparation:
a) Concrete Surfaces: The Contractor shall clean concrete surfaces of all
foreign matter. The Contractor shall saturate cleaned surfaces with water
and after removing excess water, slush with a coating of neat cement
immediately ahead of placing under-head.
b) Under-head: One (1) part Portland cement, and 4-½ parts sand by volume
with sufficient water to produce workability, spread to a level of 12mm to
approximately 30mm. Vertical surfaces shall have 30mm under-head.
2) Installation of Gravel Washout
Apply washout pebbles with the colors indicated on the Drawings.
a) Placing: The Contractor shall thoroughly moisten, but not saturate the
under-head and slush with neat cement of the same type as that used for
topping. The Contractor shall apply washout pebble uniformly over the
surface. The quantity used shall be not less than one quarter per square
foot area. Pebbles shall be thoroughly dampened before spreading and
shall be tamped flush with the surfaces using a steel trowel, care shall be
TS 500 - 89
taken by the Contractor not to completely bury the particles; pebbles shall
be worked into a level and uniform surfaces. The compacted topping shall
be not less than 16mm thick.
b) Curing: The Contractor shall keep the completed washout pebble moist
and free of traffic during a 6-day period. The Contractor shall cure the
concrete finish by covering the same with liquid membrane-forming
compound, covering with sheet materials, or sprinkling with water.
c) Brushing: Following the curing period, the Contractor shall wire-brush or
rub the concrete finish with an abrasive brick and water sufficiently to
bare slightly the washout pebbles.
3) Cleaning and Sealing
The Contractor shall wash gravel finish surfaces with water to remove stains
or cement smears. The Contractor shall rinse the cleaned surfaces when
thoroughly dry, apply a sealer as buff, in accordance with the manufacturer’s
direction.
4) Finishing
The Contractor shall finish wall surfaces with two (2) coats of natural color,
elastomeric type waterproofing compound. Waterproofing compound shall be
as specified under Sections entitled “Waterproofing”.
5) Protection
The Contractor shall cover and protect the washout pebble finish work from
damage until completion of the work of all other trades.

Pebble Washout Finish shall be measured by the number of “Square Meter” laid and
accepted.

prescribed in the Item
Stations
Unit of
Measurement
Item Number
503(2) T=50mm, Pebble Washout Finish Square Meter
TS 500 - 90
Depot Building Description Unit of

Pay Item Measurement
Number
D503(2) T=50mm, Pebble Washout Finish Square Meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 91
504 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PAVERS
The Work
installation onsite of architectural concrete pavers, in accordance with this
Specification and in conformity with the Drawings or as established by the Engineer.
504.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required architectural concrete
pavers as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.
The works in this section includes:
1) Interlocking concrete paver units (including concrete paver edge units)
2) Bedding and joint sand
3) Edge restraints
504.1.2 Related Sections

TS 100 – Civil Works
504.1.3 References
1) American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a) C 33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
b) C 136Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregate
c) C 140, Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Concrete
Masonry Units and Related Units
d) C 144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
e) C 936, Standard Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving
Units
f) C 979, Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored
Concrete
g) D 698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristic
of Soil Using Standard Effort 5.600kN-m/m^3
h) D1557, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 or 2,700
kN-m/m3)
i) D 2940, Standard Specification for Graded Aggregate Material for Bases
or Subbases for Highways or Airports.
TS 500 - 92
2) Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute (ICPI)

Tech Spec Technical Bulletins.

1) Installation shall be by the Contractor and crew with at least one (1) year of
experience in placing interlocking concrete pavers on projects of similar nature.
2) The Contractor shall hold current Basic Level Certificate from the ICPI
contractor certification program.
3) The Contractor shall conform to all local and national licensing and bonding
requirements.
504.1.5 Submittals
1) Shop or product drawings, and product data.
2) Full size samples of concrete paving units to indicate color and shape selections.
Color will be selected by the Engineer from Manufacturer’s available colors.
3) Sieve analysis for grading of bedding and joint sand.
4) Test results from an independent testing laboratory for compliance of paving
unit requirements to ASTM C 936 or other applicable requirements.
5) Manufacturer’s certification of concrete pavers by ICPI as having passed
applicable ASTM standards.
6) Indicate layout, pattern, and relationship of paving joints to fixtures and project
formed details.
504.1.6 Mock-Ups
1) The Contractor shall install a 2m x 2m paver area as described elsewhere in
this section.
2) This area will be used to determine surcharge of the bedding sand layer, joint
sizes, lines, laying pattern/s, color/s, and texture of the job.
3) This area shall be the standard from which the work will be judged and shall it
be incorporated into the work.
504.1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

1) Deliver concrete pavers to the site in steel-banded, plastic-banded, or plastic-
wrapped cubes capable of transfer by forklift or clamp lift; and unload pavers
at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product.
2) Cover sand with waterproof covering to prevent exposure to rainfall or removal
by wind. Secure the covering in place.
3) Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal
use of buildings adjacent to paving.
TS 500 - 93

The Contractor shall
1) Not install sand or pavers during heavy rain.
2) Not install sand and pavers over drenched/ water-logged base materials.
3) Not install drenched sand.
Products
504.2.2 Materials
Concrete pavers may have spacer bars on each unit. These are recommended for
mechanically-installed pavers. Manually installed pavers may be installed with or
without spacer bars.
1) Product shape/s, color/s, overall dimensions, and thickness:
a) Shape: 300mm x 300mm
b) Color: Shall be approved by the Engineer.
2) Meet the following requirements set forth in ASTM C 936, Standard
Specification for Interlocking Concrete Paving Units:
a) Average compressive strength of 8,000 psi (55 MPa) with no individual
unit under 7,200 psi (50 MPa).
b) Average absorption of 5% with no unit greater than 7% when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 140.
3) Pigment shall conform to ASTM C 979.
504.2.3 Bedding and Joint Sand

The type of sand used for bedding by the Contractor shall be concrete sand.
Screenings and stone dust that are unevenly graded and have material passing the No.
200 (0.075mm) sieve e.g. bedding sands with these characteristics should not be used
by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact paver contractors local or
manufacturers to the project and confirm sand(s) successfully used in previous
similar applications.
TS 500 - 94
1) The Contractor shall use clean, non-plastic materials, free from deleterious or
foreign matter, natural or manufactured from crushed rock. The Contractor
shall not use limestone screenings or stone dust that do not conform to the
prescribed grading requirements under Table 504.2.3-1 hereafter. When
concrete pavers are subject to vehicular traffic, the sand shall be as hard as
practically available.
If the hardness of the bedding sand is not sufficient or questionable for the
application (e.g. a heavily-trafficked thoroughfare), the Contractor shall
contact the ICPI for information and specifications on assessing bedding sand
durability under heavy traffic loads.
2) Sieve according to ASTM C 136.
3) Conform to the grading requirements of as shown in Table 504.2.3-1 below.
Use ASTM standards as applicable.
Table 504.2.3-1 Grading Requirements for Joint Sand ASTM C 144 STM C 144 CSA
A82.56M, Natural Sand, Manufactured Sand
Percent
Sieve Size Percent Passing Sieve Size
Passing
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 100 5mm 100
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 95 to 100 2.5mm 95 to 100
No. 16 (1.18 mm) 70 to 100 1.25mm 90 to 100
No. 30 (0.600 mm) 40 to 100 0.600mm 35 to 80
No. 50 (0.300 mm) 20 to 40 0.300mm 15 to 50
No. 100 (0.150 mm) 10 to 25 0.150mm 2 to 15
No. 200 (0.075 mm) 0 to 10
Table 504.2.3-2 Grading Requirements for Bedding Sand ASTM C 33 CSA A23.1-M94
Percent
Sieve Size Percent Passing Sieve Size
Passing
3/8 in.(9.5mm) 100 10mm 100
No. 4 (4.75mm) 95 to 100 5mm 95 to 100
No. 8 (2.36mm) 85 to 100 2.5mm 80 to 100
No. 16 (1.18mm) 50 to 85 1.25mm 50 to 90
No. 30 (0.600mm) 25 to 60 0.630mm 25 to 65
No. 50 (0.300mm) 10 to 30 0.315mm 10 to 35
No. 100 (0.150mm) 2 to 10 0.160mm 2 to 10
Bedding sand may be used by the Contractor for joint sand. However, extra
effort in sweeping and compacting the pavers may be required in order to
completely fill the joints. If joint sand other than bedding sand is used, the
TS 500 - 95
gradations shown in Table 504.2.3-2 are recommended. Joint sand should

never be used by the Contractor for bedding sand.
4) The joint sand shall conform to the grading requirements as shown in Table
504.2.3-2 above. The Contractor shall use ASTM standards as applicable.
504.2.4 Edge Restraints

The Contractor shall refer to ICPI Tech Spec 3, “Edge Restraints for Interlocking
Concrete Pavements,” for guidance on selecting edge restraints for various
applications.
Edge restraints shall be concrete or pre-cast concrete and shall conform to
manufacturer standards.
Execution
504.3.1 Examination
For installation by the Contractor on a compacted aggregate base and soil subgrade,
the top surface of the pavers may be 1 /8 to 1 /4 in. (3 to 6mm) above the final
elevations after compaction. This difference in initial and final elevation is to
compensate for possible minor settling.
1) The Contractor shall verify that subgrade preparation, compacted density and
elevations conform to the Specifications.
Compaction of the soil subgrade is recommended to be at least 95% standard
Proctor density per ASTM D 698 for pedestrian areas and driveways for light
vehicles. Compaction to at least 95% modified Proctor density per ASTM D
1557 is recommended for areas subject to heavy vehicular traffic. Stabilization
of the subgrade and/or base material may be necessary with weak or saturated
subgrade soils. The Engineer shall inspect subgrade preparation, elevations,
and conduct density tests for conformance to Specifications.
2) The Contractor shall verify that geotextiles, if applicable, have been placed
according to Specifications and Drawings.
3) The Contractor shall verify that aggregate base materials, thickness,
compaction, surface tolerances, and elevations conform to the Specifications.
Local aggregate base materials typical to those used for highway flexible
pavements are recommended, or those conforming to ASTM D 2940.
Compaction is recommended to not less than 95% Proctor density in
accordance with ASTM D 698 and is recommended for pedestrian areas and
driveways for light vehicles. Compaction is recommended to not less than 98%
modified Proctor density according to ASTM D 1557 and is recommended for
vehicular areas.
The aggregate base should be spread and compacted by the Contractor in
uniform layers not exceeding 6 in. (150mm) thickness.
TS 500 - 96
Recommended base surface tolerance should be plus or minus 10mm over a

3m straight edge. The Engineer shall inspect geotextile materials and
placement (if applicable), base preparation, surface tolerances, elevations, and
conduct density tests for conformance to specifications. The Contractor shall
refer to ICPI Tech Spec 2, “Construction of Interlocking Concrete Pavements”
for further guidance on construction practices.
Mechanical tampers are recommended for compaction of soil subgrade and
aggregate base around lamp standards, utility structures, building edges, curbs,
tree wells and other protrusions. In areas not accessible to large compaction
equipment, the Contractor shall compact to specified density with mechanical
tampers.
The Contractor shall verify location, type, installation and elevations of edge
restraints around the perimeter area to be paved.
4) If applicable, the Contractor shall install edge restraints per the Drawings
and/or per manufacturer’s recommendations and at the indicated or prescribed
elevations.
5) The Contractor shall verify that base is dry, uniform, even, and ready to support
sand, pavers, and imposed loads.
6) Beginning of bedding sand and paver installation by the Contractor shall mean
acceptance of base and edge restraints.
504.3.2 Installation
1) Spread the bedding sand evenly over the base course and screed to a nominal
1 in. (25mm) thickness, not exceeding 40mm thickness; the screeded sand shall
not be disturbed by the Contractor.
2) Place sufficient sand to stay ahead of the laid pavers;
3) Not use the bedding sand to fill depressions in the base surface;
4) Ensure that pavers are free of foreign material before installation;
5) Lay the pavers in the pattern(s) as shown on the Drawings and maintain straight
pattern lines; points between the pavers on average shall be between 2 mm to
5 mm wide while some paver shapes may require a larger joint;
6) Consult manufacturer for recommended joint widths;
7) Fill gaps at the edges of the paved area with cut pavers or edge units; units cut
no smaller than one-third of a whole paver are recommended along edges
subject to vehicular traffic;
8) Cut pavers to be placed along the edge with a double blade paver splitter;
9) Use a low amplitude plate compactor capable of at least 22 kN compaction at
a frequency of 75 hz –100 hz.
TS 500 - 97
10) Compact the pavers, sweeping dry joint sand into the joints and vibrating until
these are full; this will require at least two or three passes with the compactor;
11) Not compact within 1.0m of the unrestrained edges of the paving units;
12) Work to within 1m of the laying face which must be left fully compacted with
sand-filled joints at the end of each day;
13) Cover the laying face with plastic sheets overnight if not closed with cut and
compacted pavers;
14) Sweep off excess sand when the job is complete;
15) Ensure that the final surface elevations shall not deviate more than 10mm under
a 3m long straightedge; and
16) Ensure that the surface elevation of pavers shall be 3 to 6mm above adjacent
drainage inlets, concrete collars or channels.
504.3.3 Field Quality Control

After removal of excess sand, the Contractor shall check final elevations for
conformance to the Drawings.

1) Concrete pavers (interlocking) are measured the net surface are to be laid as a
“Square Meters” without wastage factor.
2) Quantity of wastage factor is not considered for the Concrete pavers
(interlocking) work without wastage factor.

Stations
Unit of
Measurement
Item Number
504(1) 90 x 90 x 90mm, Granit Brick Paving Square Meter
Depot Area Pay Unit of

Description
Item Number Measurement
TS 500 - 98
D504(1) 90 x 90 x 90mm, Granit Brick Paving Square Meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 99
505 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
The Work
installation onsite of architectural concrete accessories, in accordance with this
505.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required architectural concrete
accessories as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.
505.1.2 Scope
This Specification covers the furnishing of materials including equipment and
performing labor necessary to complete the installation of epoxy or epoxy-based
flooring as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
505.1.3 Submittals
1) Product Data
The Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s technical information including
basic materials analysis and application instructions for each coating material
specified.
2) The Contractor shall provide samples of each color and material to be applied,
with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the
actual substrate. The Contractor shall resubmit samples as requested by the
Engineer until the required sheen, color and texture is achieved.

1) Single Source Responsibility
Obtain primary chemical-resistant seamless, epoxy coating materials including
primers, resins, hardening agents, finish or sealing coats from a single
manufacturer with not less than three (3) years of successful experience in
supplying principal materials for work of type described in this section. Provide
secondary materials only of type and from source recommended by
manufacturer of primary materials.
2) Prime Coat
Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer’s recommended
spreading rate. Coordinate timing of primer application with application of
topping mix to insure optimum adhesion between chemical-resistant epoxy
coating materials and substrate.
3) Finish or Sealing Coat
TS 500 - 100
After topping mix has cured sufficiently, apply finish or sealing coat of type
required by the manufacturer to produce required finish indicated and in
number of coats and spreading rates recommended by manufacturer.
4) Field Quality Control
a) The Employer reserves the right to invoke the following material testing
procedure at any time, and any number of times during period of epoxy
application.
b) The Employer shall engage service of an independent testing laboratory
to sample materials being used. Samples of material will be taken,
identified and sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor.
Products
505.2.2 Materials
1) Shall conform to the respective specification and
a) Epoxy coating shall be two (2) component epoxy resins and polyamide
curing agent and shall be used as follows:
b) Epoxy coating shall be solvent-free two (2) components colored epoxy
for self-smoothening screeds or approved equal.
i. Self-smoothening floor: (2-3mm layer thickness)
(a) Primer: Self-smoothening floor:
(b) Color and texture shall be as approved by the Engineer and
Employer.
2) Epoxy-based floor coating for color-coding industrial floors (also for
wayfinding purposes) shall be eco-friendly, and shall possess the following
characteristics/ properties:
a) Adjustable to nearly any surface or demand;
b) With individual design possibilities;
c) Mechanically hard-wearing;
d) Self-leveling and great spreading properties on even surfaces;
e) High abrasion resistance;
TS 500 - 101
f) Excellent durability to attain product economy;

g) Safe and easy to process;
h) Chemical-resistant; and
i) Seamless and edgeless.
Execution
1) Installation
The Contractor shall comply with epoxy coating manufacturer’s written
instructions for installation of epoxy coating system, including surface
preparation, joint treatment, flashing, reinforcement, accessory items and
surfacing. The Contractor shall apply materials by methods as instructed by
epoxy manufacturer to provide uniform thickness.
a) Coordination
The Contractor shall proceed with epoxy work only after substrate
construction, including curbs, spill dams and equipment pads, and
penetrating work through substrate have been completed. No phased
construction shall be permitted by the Engineer.
2) Adjusting, Cleaning and Protection
a) Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall repair surfaces that
have been permanently stained, marred, or otherwise damaged. The
Contractor shall replace work that is damaged or cannot be adequately
cleaned as directed.
b) Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove unused
materials, debris, containers and equipment from the site. In addition to
the initial cleaning procedure required, the Contractor shall clean the work
before acceptance by the Engineer.
c) The Contractor shall protect the work during the construction period so
that it will be without any indication of use or damage at the time of
acceptance.
Until the epoxy coating is fully cured and protected with a temporary covering during
the construction period, the Contractor shall keep the coating areas free from traffic
and other trades. The Engineer shall provide necessary temporary protection to
prevent damage, such as that caused by traffic, gouging, scraping, spillage of
deleterious substances, excessive heat, or other manner.
Floor Hardener
505.4.1 Scope
Furnish all labor and materials to complete floor hardener work indicated, as
specified herein.
TS 500 - 102
505.4.1.1 General Requirements

Deliver hardener in bags or bulks for the building site with the label intact and seals
unbroken, subject to inspection by the Engineer before being opened.
505.4.1.2 Submittals
1) Catalog cuts
2) Samples: 300mm square panel of each type of finish
505.4.2 Products
505.4.2.1 Manufacturers
505.4.2.2 Materials
Clear, odorless, non-toxic, non-combustible, non-flammable. Contains no volatile
organic compounds (VOCs).
1) Functions:
Densifies, dustproofs, hardens and cures. Protects against dusting, pitting,
spalling, efflorescence and surface crazing.
2) Uses:
Concrete, heavyweight concrete block, exposed aggregate and other
sand/aggregate Portland cement combinations. New or old concrete,
rough or smooth surfaces.
3) Packaging:
a) 55-gallon drums/208 liters
b) 5-gallon pails/19 liters
4) Storage Life:
Indefinite. Agitate before use.
5) Coverage:
Approximately 5m2/L. Coverage may depend on the temperature and
porosity of the concrete.
6) Surface Preparation:
Freshly Finished Concrete: No preparation required.
TS 500 - 103
7) Portland Cement
Available brand in the local market in conformity with ASTM
requirements.
8) Hardener finish color shall be as selected by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide materials conforming to Specifications and
the requirement specified.
Resinous Floor Finishes
505.5.1 The Work

installation onsite of resinous floor finishes, in accordance with this Specification
and in conformity with the Drawings or as established by the Engineer.
505.5.2 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required resinous floor finishes,
as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.
505.5.3 System Description

1) Roller-applied 100% solids, penetrating epoxy primer and optional mid-coat,
followed by a topcoat of a 100% solids 48-series or 49-series epoxy.
2) This system shall be applied to the prepared substrate(s) as defined by the
Drawings strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
505.5.4 Submittals
1) Product Data
Current edition of manufacturer’s product literature including physical data,
chemical resistance, surface preparation, and application instructions.
2) Samples
A hard sample of the proposed system shall be submitted to represent the
finished floor.
3) Warranty
a) Manufacturer’s standard warranty
b) Applicator’s standard warranty

1) Qualifications
TS 500 - 104
a) The manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years’ experience in

the production, sales, and technical support of polymer-based floor
coatings.
b) The applicator shall have a minimum of three (3) years’ documented
experience in the application of polymer floor coatings to concrete floors.
c) Proposed suppliers shall provide certification that they have ten (10) years’
experience in the production of polymer floor coatings and be required to
meet all provisions of this specification as well as provide evidence for
compatibility between components to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2) Pre-Bid Conference
A pre-bid conference should be held between prospective applicators and the
Engineer to review surface preparation, application, clean-up procedures, and
design issues.
3) Packing and Shipping
All materials are to be delivered to the job site in the manufacturer’s original
packaging. The product code and other identification marks should be clearly
marked and visible.
4) Storage and Protection
a) All material is to be stored in a cool, dry place out of the direct sunlight
and away from any ignition sources. The applicator should refer to the
manufacturer’s literature and material safety data sheets for more
information.
b) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are to be kept on site and made
readily available for all personnel.
c) Keep containers sealed and ready for use.
505.5.6 Project Conditions

1) Environmental Requirements
a) Optimum air and substrate temperature for product application is between
13°C and 35°C. For temperatures outside of this range, consult the
manufacturer for product application suggestions.
b) Verify the work environment is properly equipped with vapor barriers and
perimeter drains.
c) Maintain proper lighting throughout the work environment; the lighting
should be comparable to the final lighting level of the space.
d) Store and dispose of any waste in accordance with regulations of local
authorities.
2) Safety Requirements
a) “No Smoking” signs shall be posted throughout the work area prior to
application.
TS 500 - 105
b) The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any foodstuffs from the
work area.
c) Open flames, spark producing tools/items, and ignition sources shall be
removed from the work area prior to application.
d) Only work-related personnel shall be allowed within the work area.
505.5.7 Warranty
Coordination
The manufacturer offers a full, one (1)-year warranty against defects in materials.
Warranties concerning the installation of the material are solely the responsibility of
the applicator.
505.5.8 Products
1) Manufacturers
a) The Contractor shall submit to Engineer the pertinent manufacturer and/or
supplier/ installer names and contact information at least one (1) month
before the intended use at the Site in the case of non-indent (locally-
sourced/ supplied materials/items) and three (3) months before the
intended use at the Site in the case of indent (imported materials/items).
b) Substitution is not permitted, unless officially authorized (i.e. in writing)
by the Employer and/or Engineer.
2) Materials
a) Primer
The primer shall be the appropriate manufacturer- and applicator-
recommended primer.
b) Optional Intermediate
The optional coat shall consist of a manufacturer- and applicator-
recommended product.
c) Topcoat
The topcoat shall consist of a manufacturer- and applicator-recommended
product.
d) Properties
The coating system should meet the following physical properties:
Table 505.5.8-1 Cured System Properties
Chemical Properties Self-Levelling Epoxy
Sward Hardness, ASTM D2240 40
Compressive Strength ASTM C579 11,200 psi
Tensile Strength, ASTM D2370 7,300 psi
TS 500 - 106
Abrasion Resistance,
Taber Abrader CS-17 Wheel,
1000 gm. load, 1000 cycles, ASTM D4060 7 mg loss
Coefficient of Friction,
James Friction Tester, ASTM D2047 0.65
Percent Elongation, Coating, ASTM
D2370 5%
Percent Elongation, Resin Only, ASTM
D2370 6%
Execution
505.6.1 Floor Hardener

1) Application
Only one (1) permanent application is required. Apply with high-volume, low
pressure sprayer and spread with a fine soft-bristled broom (reference also the
Spec Data Sheet or Application Specifications for specific details). Keep the
entire surface wet with hardener for 30 minutes. Then when the hardener
becomes slippery, flush completely with water and squeegee dry.
2) Temperature Limits:
Apply in temperatures up to 46°C or as low as 1.7°C and protect from water
for a period of six (6) days.
3) Drying Time:
One (1) to three (3) hours. The surface may be used as soon as the application
is complete and the surface is dry to the touch. Newly placed concrete requires
the normal hardening period.
4) Surface Appearance:
On smooth troweled concrete, a sheen develops within 4-12 months. All other
surfaces retain their natural appearance. The sheen can be accelerated by
burnishing the floor. A spiff coat can also be used to enhance the initial sheen.
5) Equipment Clean-Up:
Use soap and water before the hardener dries.
6) Painting:
Allow twenty-eight (28) days for proper curing before painting new concrete
or allow at least seven (7) drying days before applying paint on existing
concrete.
Notes:
Apply to colored concrete only after the slab is fully cured, unless installed by
a factory certified applicator.
TS 500 - 107
Do not allow to dry on finished surfaces (glass, aluminum, stainless steel, walls,
etc.) as permanent etching may occur.
Application should be performed by qualified contractors with a clear
understanding of hardener application and uses (reference Spec Data Sheet or
Application Specifications for specific details).
7) Maintenance Program:
An effective maintenance program that includes routine scrubbing with stiff
bristle brushes, ample down pressure, and proper amounts of water and
detergent will enhance the floor’s performance significantly. Implementation
of the following maintenance program will allow the hardener to continue to
react with the concrete, lifting contaminants away from the concrete and
allowing the marble-like sheen to develop.
Scrub floor often: Minimum routine cleaning 2-3 times per week with cleaners,
detergents and protectors provides superior results.
Clean Spills quickly: After densification is complete, concrete will resist
contamination and moisture penetration of most liquids. Corrosive or
aggressively staining contaminants should be removed quickly to avoid
possible staining.
8) Recommended Supplies:
a) Automatic Scrubber - capable of 57-68 kg of downward pressure;
b) Black Stripping Pads or Medium-Aggressive Nylon Brushes -
accelerates the sheen and creates a more uniform appearance;
c) Detergent: performance-enhancing detergent specifically designed to
clean densified and densified-polished concrete flows; regular use
helps decrease the visibility of minor scratches and blemishes and
helps maintain the concrete sheen;
d) Large Volumes of Water - water used while cleaning the concrete
surface will actually accelerate the reaction between hardener and the
concrete;
e) Oil Emulsifier & Acrylic Stripper: use directly on stain for spot
treatment;
f) Polypropylene or Stiff-Poly Brushes – regular maintenance after
sheen develops.
505.6.2 Resinous Finish

1) Inspection
a) General
Examine the areas and conditions where the system is to be installed and
notify the Engineer of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
TS 500 - 108
conditions have been corrected by the Contractor in a manner acceptable

to the Engineer.
2) Preparation
a) Patching and Joint Preparation
Before application, the floor shall be examined for spalls, pits, holes,
cracks, non-functional joints, etc. These must be treated after preparation
and before application with the suitable manufacturer- and applicator-
recommended products. For functional or expansion joints, these shall be
treated with 100% solids elastomeric resin having a minimum elongation
of 150%.
b) Concrete Surfaces
Shot-blast, diamond grind or power scarify as required to obtain clean,
open porous concrete. Remove sufficient material to provide a sound
surface, free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, and any bond-inhibiting
curing compounds or form release agents. Remove grease, oil, and other
penetrating contaminants. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete to
acceptable condition; leave surface free of dust, dirt, laitance, and
efflorescence.
c) Materials
Mix components when required, and prepare materials according to
flooring system manufacturer’s instructions.
3) Application
a) General
The system shall be installed in the order described below:
i) Substrate Preparation
ii) Primer/Optional mid-coat Application
iii) Topcoat Application
iv) Concrete surfaces on grade shall have been constructed with a vapor
barrier to protect against the effects of vapor transmission and
possible de-lamination of the system. Refer to manufacturer’s
concrete preparation instructions for additional recommendations.
v) The surface should be dry prior to application of any of the
aforementioned steps. Furthermore, the substrate shall always be
kept clean, dry, and free of any contaminants.
vi) The handling and mixture of any material associated with the
installation of the system shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations and approved by the Engineer.
vii) The system shall follow the contours of the substrate unless
otherwise specified by the Engineer.
TS 500 - 109
viii) A neat finish with well-defined boundaries and straight edges shall
be provided by the applicator.
b) Priming
i) All areas considered for the application shall be primed with the
manufacturer’s primer to seal and penetrate the substrate in
preparation for applying the topcoat.
ii) Porous concrete substrates may require additional applications of
primer followed by an intermediate coat.
c) Optional Intermediate
The optional coat shall consist of the manufacturer’s approved epoxy.
d) Topcoat
i) The topcoat shall consist of the manufacturer’s approved epoxy
topcoat to seal the surface and give the floor improved wear
resistance.
ii) No traffic or equipment shall be permitted on the floor during the
curing period.
4) Field Quality Control
a) Tests & Inspection
The following tests shall be performed by the applicator and recorded
during application to submit to the Engineer:
i) Temperature during installation
ii) Air
iii) Substrate
iv) Dew Point
v) Cleaning
b) Disposal
Properly remove and dispose of any excess materials.

Architectural Concrete Accessories are measured the net surface are to be laid as a
“Square Meters” including Self-Levelling Epoxy Paint with Hardener.

TS 500 - 110
Stations Building
Pay Item Number
505(4) Self-Levelling Epoxy Paint with Hardener Square meter
Depot Building
Pay Item Number
D505(4) Self-leveling Epoxy Paint with Hardener Square meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 111
506 METAL FABRICATIONS
The Work
installation onsite of fabricated metal work, including floor maintenance hatches and
ladders, in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the Drawings
or as established by the Engineer.
506.1.1 General
The works of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the
equipment and services necessary to complete the required fabricated metal work e.g.
handrails, railings, and the like, including floor maintenance hatches and ladders, as
shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein
Handrails and Railings
506.2.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing of materials and labor including equipment
necessary to complete the installation of handrails and railings as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein.
506.2.2 Submittal
1) Product Data
Manufacturer’s technical data for products and processed used in handrails and
railing systems, including finishes and grout.
2) Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall show details of fabrication and installation for each type
and material of handrail and railing system required including plans, elevations,
sections, profiles of rails, fittings, connections, and anchors.
3) Samples
The Contractor shall prepare samples of each type of metal handrails & railings
stainless steel hairline finish and automotive paint finish as required on
galvanized iron pipe (GIP) metal. Where finish involves normal color and
texture variations, the Contractor shall include sample sets composed of two
(2) or more units showing limits of such variations expected in completed
works.
a) Include 150mm long samples of each distinctly different railing member
including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters. The Contractor shall
include samples of fittings and brackets if requested by Engineer.
TS 500 - 112
b) Include samples of typical welded connections.

4) Mock-up: The Contractor shall provide the following mock-up samples in
accordance with direction of the Engineer.
a) 3meter length of the Stainless Steel Railing.
b) Aluminum Expand Metal
c) 2000mm x 2000mm Aluminum Ceiling

The Contractor shall obtain handrails and railing systems of each type and
material from a single manufacturer.
506.2.3.1 Storage
1) Store handrails and railing systems in clean, dry location, away from uncured
concrete and masonry, protected against damage of any kind; and
2) Cover materials and equipment with waterproof paper, tarpaulin, or
polyethylene sheeting, and allow for air circulation inside the covering.
Products
506.3.2 Materials
General
The Contractor shall comply with standards indicated for forms and types of metals
indicated or required for handrail and railing system components.
1) Stair Railings: 50 x 8mm thk GI pipe, or as indicated on Drawings.
2) Stair Handrail: 50 x 10mm thk pipe, stainless steel or as indicated on Drawings.
3) Stair Tread: 6mm thk bended checkered plate.
4) Fastenings: commercial types, except where special types are shown or
required. Fastenings for all exterior work shall be non-ferrous, unless otherwise
TS 500 - 113
shown. Fastenings for steel and aluminum and for all other interior work, where
exposed, shall match the fastened metal.
5) Miscellaneous: miscellaneous materials or accessories not listed above shall be
provided by the Contractor as specified hereinafter the various items of work
and/or indicated on the Drawings, or in accordance with manufacturer’s
specifications.
506.3.3 Miscellaneous Materials

1) Non-shrink Non-metallic Epoxy Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-
staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous grout. The Contractor shall provide grout
specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior
applications of type specified in this section.
2) The Contractor shall use welding electrodes as recommended by producer of
metal to be welded, complying with applicable AWS Specifications, and as
required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.
3) Fasteners
a) Use fasteners of same basic metal as the fastened metal, unless otherwise
indicated;
b) Not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined;
c) Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of handrail and railing
components and for their attachment to other work, except where
otherwise indicated; and
d) Provide Philips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless
otherwise indicated.
506.3.4 Fabrication
1) General
a) Fabricate handrails and railing systems to design, dimensions and details
shown; and
b) Provide handrail and railing members in sizes and profiles indicated, with
supporting posts and brackets or size and spacing shown, but not less than
required to comply with requirements indicated for structural
performance.
2) Shop Assembly
a) Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly;
TS 500 - 114
b) Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling

limitations; and
c) Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
3) Welded Connections
a) Fabricate handrails and railing systems of materials indicated below for
interconnections of members of welding;
b) Use a welding method, which is appropriate for metal and finish, indicated
and develops strength required to comply with structural performance
criteria; and
c) Finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth, flush, and blended to match
adjoining surfaces.
4) The Contractor shall form changes in the direction of railing members by
bending members by metering, or as indicated on the Drawings, as approved
by the Engineer.
a) Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and
railing systems to concrete or masonry work;
b) Fabricate anchorage devices, which are capable of withstanding loading
imposed by handrails and railing systems, and coordinate anchorage
devices with supporting structure; and
c) Provide pre-chiseled openings and insert posts as indicated on drawings
for railing posts set in concrete; and
d) Fill openings with non-shrink, non-metallic grout.
506.3.5 Metal Finishes, General

The Contractor shall comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for
recommendations and designations of finishes, except as otherwise indicated.
Execution
506.4.1 Preparation
1) Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions
for installation of anchorages, such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts,
and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in
concrete and masonry construction; and
2) Coordinate the delivery of such items to site.
TS 500 - 115
506.4.2 Field Measurements

The Contractor shall take field measurements prior to fabrication.
506.4.3 Installation, General

1) Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints;
2) Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of handrails and
railing systems;
3) Set work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, plumb, level, true,
and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels.
506.4.4 Field Welding

1) Comply with the applicable AWS specification for procedures of manual
shielded metal-arc welding, for appearance and quality of welds made, and for
methods used in correcting welding work;
2) Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop
welded because of shipping size limitations;
3) Grind exposed welded joints smooth and restore finish to match finish of
adjacent rail surfaces;
4) Adjust handrails and railing systems to ensure matching alignment at abutting
joints, prior to anchoring; and
5) Space posts at interval indicated but not less than that required by design
loading.
506.4.5 Anchoring Posts

1) Concrete-Anchored Posts:
a) Provide chiseled opening on concrete base as indicated on the Drawings
to receive railing posts and required anchoring system; and
b) Clean holes of all loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space
between post and concrete with non-shrink, non-metallic epoxy grout,
mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer’s directions.
2) Railing Connections
Welded Connections:
a) Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components
by welding; and
TS 500 - 116
b) Cope or butt components to provide 100 percent contact or use

manufacturer’s standard fittings designed for this purpose.
3) Anchoring Railing Ends
a) Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with manufacturer’s standard
fittings using concealed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated; and
b) Anchor railing ends to concrete or masonry, use drilled-in expansion
shields and concealed hanger bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
4) Protection
a) Protect finishes of railing systems and handrails from damage during
construction period by use of temporary protective coverings approved by
railing manufacturer;
b) Remove protective covering at time of substantial completion;
c) Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so
that no evidence remains of correction work; and
d) Return items which cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make
required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as
required.
Light Steel Framing System
506.5.1 Scope
This section includes light steel framing system for ceiling assemblies.
506.5.1.1 Storage of Materials

Materials shall be stored out of contact with the ground to minimize contamination,
corrosion and deterioration.
506.5.1.2 Light Steel Framing

Sizes are manufacturer’s standard.
506.5.1.3 Ceiling Framing

1) Ceiling metal framing assemblies shall be as follows:
a) Hangers shall be pre-punched, hot-dipped galvanized steel 1.0mm thick.
b) Suspension rod shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel 6.0mm diameter.
c) Carrying channel clip shall be spring steel clip 0.6mm thick.
d) Furring channel joiner and furring clip shall be galvanized steel, gauge 24
thick.
TS 500 - 117
e) Furring member shall have double cradling, galvanized steel 5.0m long;
0.40m thick, configuration and size as shown hereinafter.
f) Carrying channel and wall angle shall be 5.0m long, gauge 19 and 2.4m
or 3.0m long, and gauge 24 thickness respectively, configuration and sizes
as shown hereinafter.
2) Fasteners.
a) Bolts and nuts shall be as recommended by the framing manufacturer,
steel and zinc-coated.
b) Expansion shields shall be of the type and class applicable.
c) Powder-driven fasteners may be used only when approved in writing.
d) Screws for board attachment shall be shouldered flat-head design for use
with special power-driven tools.
e) Wood screws shall be not less than 1-1/8” long.
f) Metal screws shall be not less than 25mm long with self-tapping threads
and self-drilling points.
Toggle bolts shall be of the type and class best suited for the purpose.
506.5.1.4 Structural Strength

Structural strength shall conform to ASTM 446 and PNS 67: 1986.
Basic steel is hot-dipped galvanized to G-60 to G-90 of ASTM A525. The zinc
coating is testing to the lock-forming quality and conforms to ASTM A597.
Metal Works
506.6.1 General
1) The contents of this section are intended to cover all work, which is to be
executed in any alloy of metal excluding structural steel.
2) Proprietary and standard metal components which can be fixed without any
knowledge or skill in metal work are not necessarily specified in this section.
Metal fabrications forming an integral part of a joinery fitting are specified in
the appropriate Sections. Other standard metal items are generally specified
with the trade involved in their fixing.
3) The Contractor shall furnish and install miscellaneous metal items required
including sub-structure for form work complete the required work in
accordance with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications.
506.6.1.1 Contractor’s Responsibility Regarding Grades of Metals

When a price grade or alloy of material is not specified, the Contractor shall obtain
the metal from a specialist supplier or fabricator who shall be informed of the
particular application of the metal in the Works. By this method, or by otherwise
TS 500 - 118
obtaining specialized advice from reliable sources, it shall be the Contractor’s

responsibility to use correct material suited to its application in the Works.
506.6.2 Products
506.6.2.2 Materials
1) General
The Contractor shall submit samples of all wrought materials and other
materials such as fastener, coating materials and the like as specified in GS100
“General Specification” of these Specifications.
All materials shall be in conformity with the standers specified hereunder or
equivalent approved by the Engineer.
2) Metal
The materials shall be complied with specified Standards or equal standers and
quality approved by the Engineer.
a) Steel
The terms “steel” or “mild steel” mean steel comply with following or
equivalent ASTM approved by the Engineer:
i) Rolled for General Structure: JIS G 3101 or equivalent to ASTM
ii) Rolled Steel for Welded Structure: JIS G 3106 or equivalent ASTM
iii) Hot-rolled Atmospheric Corrosion-Resistant Steel for Welded
Structure: JIS G 3114 or equivalent to ASTM
iv) Carbon Steel Pipe for General Structural Purpose: JIS G 3444 or
equivalent to ASTM
v) Square Steel Pipe for General Structural Purpose: JIS G 3466 or
equivalent to ASTM
vi) Light Gauge Steel for General Purpose: JIS G 3350: or equivalent to
ASTM
vii) Centrifugally-Cast Steel Pipes for Welded Structure: JIS G 5201 or
equivalent to ASTM
b) Stainless steel
TS 500 - 119
i) Stainless steel shall be of authentic steel comply with JIS G 4305 or

equal ASTM and surface finish as specified on the Drawings.
ii) The grade of surface finish shall be subject to approval of the
Engineer.
c) Aluminum: The term “aluminum” means “wrought aluminum alloys for
general supervising purposes” in accordance with JIS H 4000 and JIS H
4100 or equivalent to ASTM.
d) Copper: Copper shall comply with ASTM B 251
3) Other Products
a) Watertight and airtight decorative floor access hatch: Extruded aluminum
with stainless steel strip, silicone rubber waterproofing packing and fixing
bolts.
Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings, the allowable load of
watertight and airtight decorative floor access hatch shall be as follows;
Size Load Capacity
450 x 8,300N (850kgf)
450mm
600 x 6,800N (700kgf)
600mm
b) Ceiling Access Hatch: Extruded aluminum with latch and sizes as shown
on the Drawings.
c) Non-Slip Nosing: Non-Slip nosing shall be of stainless steel or aluminum
with tire, the color shall be selected by the Engineer. Non-Slip nosing
sizes shall as shown on the Drawings.
d) Watertight and airtight decorative manhole cover: Watertight and airtight
decorative manhole cover shall be made of cast iron with stainless steel
frame and 40mm thick tile finishing depth as approved by the Engineer.
e) Aluminum Expanded Metal with Steel Framing: 160 x 40 (52) – 24 x 3
Mesh, 7.2kg/m2, 16mm Thk. 15% Frontal opening Area
4) Mechanical Fastenings
a) General: Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer, all
fastening materials shall be of the same metal and finish as the work being
fixed.
b) Bolts, screws and nuts: Bolts, screws and nuts shall comply with JIS B
1180 and JIS B 1181 or equivalent standard approved by the Engineer.
c) Expanding bolts: A preparation fixing comprising corrosion-resistant
expanding insert and removable bolt or threaded stud to suit the Work
being fixed.
TS 500 - 120
d) Set screws: Set screws shall comply with JIS B 1013 or equivalent to
ASTM, unless specified otherwise.
e) Self-tapping screws: Steel thread forming or thread cutting screws to JIS
B 1122 or equivalent standard approved by the Engineer.
5) Coating Materials
a) General: In addition to specified surface finishes, the Contractor shall
treat or seal the permanently hidden parts of metal work from
deterioration and corrosion.
b) Primer: Primer shall be as specified in “Painting” section of these
Specifications.
6) Storing and Handling
a) Generally comply with requirement of GS100 “General Specification”.
Metal work fabrication and components shall be warped, taped or
otherwise protected by the Contractor from any self-finished work with
non-absorbent coverings.
506.6.2.3 Workmanship
1) General
All metal work shall be carried out by the Contractor in full accordance with
sound supervising and smithy practices as follows:
a) Undertake as much metal work as possible in properly-equipped
workshops;
b) Restrict site work to fixings and other operations that cannot be undertaken
as last stated;
c) Remove burrs, sharp edges and angles, coarse file marks, excess weld metal
and similar imperfections from all classes of work;
d) Shall not permit work to rust or otherwise deteriorate between fabrication
and final treatment;
e) Prevent damage due to incorrect temperature when carrying out work
requiring heat; if necessary, undertake heat treatment to provide stress
relief; and
f) Fix in the work in a manner that prevents corrosion due to contact which
incompatible metal and other materials.
2) Preliminary Work
a) Supply to the appropriate trades, items to be cast into concrete or embedded
in masonry, complete with necessary setting templates;
b) Supervise the installation and verify the correct location of items after
installation; and
TS 500 - 121
c) Where the work of this section is intended to fit closely to work of other
sections, take field measurements prior to the preparation of shop drawings
and fabrication; allow for trimming and fitting.
d) Furnish all bolts, anchors and inserts required for this work for building into
or fastening to the adjacent construction;
e) Deliver items to the appropriate sub-contractor or trade in sufficient time to
install properly; and use self-drilling anchor bolts in cured concrete; toggle
bolt items to be used for concrete block and gypsum board.
3) Drawings
The Contractor shall submit complete shop drawings for all items of work of
this section, showing materials, thickness, dimensions, bending detail,
construction, and relation to adjoining construction, erection details, finishes,
and all other details to fully illustrate all items of work.
4) Welding
a) Welding shall be in accordance with the appropriate practice for the type
of metal being joined.
b) Welding shall be carried out by licensed welder and shall be done with
electrodes and methods recommended by the manufacturers of the metals
being welded.
c) Weld shall be continuous, except where spot welding is specifically
permitted.
d) Welds exposed to view shall be ground-flushed and dressed smooth to
match the finish or adjoining surfaces. All welds on or behind surface,
which will be exposed to view shall be done so as to prevent distortion of
the finished surface.
e) Surfaces, on surface unseen in the finished work the welds may be left as
is.
5) Cutting and Bending
a) Cut metal by sawing, shearing or blanking; flame cutting will be permitted
only if cut edges are ground smooth; and
b) Make cuts accurate, clean and sharp, without deforming or bending the
metal; bending by the Contractor shall be machine-bend, press, cold roll,
forged or otherwise sharp metal without weakening or otherwise
damaging.
6) Joining
TS 500 - 122
a) Make connections with tight joints, capable of developing the full strength
of the member, flush (unless indicated otherwise) and form to exclude
water where exposed to the weather;
b) Locate joints where least conspicuous; unless indicated otherwise, the
Contractor shall weld or bolt shop connections and bolt or screw field
connections; The Contractor shall provide expansion and contraction
joints where required; and
c) Use a suitable joint coating for bolted or screwed connections; joint faces
shall be free from debris or dirt for joints to fit accurately when in full
contact.
7) Coating
a) Protective coating: Wherever dissimilar metals will be in contract, and
wherever galvanized steel or aluminum will be in contact with concrete,
cement, mortar, plaster, or masonry, the Contractor shall separate the
contact surface by coating each contact surface (prior to assembly or
installation) with one coat of specified bituminous paint or zinc chromate
primer, in addition to the specified shop prime paint or galvanizing. The
Contractor shall mask off those surfaces not required to receive protective
coating.
b) Priming
i) All ferrous metal, except galvanized steel and stainless steel, shall
be cleaned and shop-painted with one coat of red lead primer. All
ferrous metals, except galvanized steel and stainless steel, exposed
to the weather or attached to the exterior of the building shall receive
one coat of zinc chromate metal primer. No shop prime paint is
required on galvanized steel, stainless steel or aluminum.
ii) The Contractor shall not apply any primer by spray.
iii) The Contractor shall apply the shop prime coat immediately after
cleaning the metal. Apply paint in dry weather or under cover; metal
surface shall be free from moisture when painted. The Contractor
shall paint all metal surface including edges, joints, holes, corners,
etc. And shall apply paint in full accordance with approved paint
manufacturer’s printed instructions. Thinner, adulterants or
admixtures shall be used by the Contractor only as stated in said
instructions. Paint shall uniformly and completely cover the metal
surfaces. No work shall be shipped until the shop primer coat has
dried.
iv) In the shop (after assembly), and in the field (after installation), the
Contractor shall touch up damaged or abraded portions of shop
primer paint with the specified metal primer.
c) Galvanizing
TS 500 - 123
i) Thoroughly clean steel surface of rust, scale grease and any foreign
matter by sandblasting or picking prior to galvanizing; and
ii) Apply the hot dip process in full compliance with JIS H 8641 or
equivalent to ASTM.
d) Sherardizing
The Contractor shall zinc-coat all small articles such as bolts etc.
associated with galvanized work in accordance “Painting” section of these
Specifications.
e) Stove enameling
A hardwearing coating of full gloss enamel, resistant to weak acids and
detergents. Ferrous articles shall be phosphated by the Contractor before
stoving. Coating to extend into concealed area to afford adequate
protection.
f) Anodizing
Unless otherwise specified all anodizing by the Contractor shall conform
to JIS H 861 or equivalent to ASTM.
8) Metal Work Fabrication and Components
a) Fabrication
i) Provide light steel framing, bracing, supports, framing, clip angles,
shelf angles, plates, etc. which shall be of shapes and sizes indicated
on the Drawings and details or as required to suit the condition.
Provide all the necessary supports and reinforcing required to
properly support and rigidly fasten the same in place or to
connecting and adjoining work.
ii) Fit and assemble the work in the shop as far as practical. Work that
cannot be permanently shop-assembled shall be completely
assembled, marked and disassembled by the Contractor in the shop
before shipment (in the largest practical sizes). It is the
responsibility of the Contractor to assure himself that the shop-
fabricated miscellaneous metal items will properly fit the field,
transportation, handling and storage conditions.
iii) Fabricate items to the form and dimensions shown. Generally,
fabricate straight, flat, smooth and square. Make exposed
mechanically-fastened joints flush, butt type, with hairline joints.
iv) Countersink screws and bolts.
v) Furnish castings in one piece, where practical, of uniform thickness
sufficient to insure the required strength for the designed use.
Furnish castings true to dimensions and pattern, free from defects,
and of the best quality, with all surfaces and edges clean, and
smooth.
TS 500 - 124
vi) Accurately fit, the work of this section to the work of other trades.
Furnish (or obtain) as applicable, templates and drawings to (or
from) applicable trades for the proper coordination of this work.
vii) Ensure that all surfaces exposed to view shall be free of scratches,
distortions, waves, dents, buckles, tool marks, burrs, and other
defects that would mark the appearance of the furnished work.
viii) Fabricate, assemble, install and adjust after installation all operating
devices, mechanisms and hardware used in connection with this
work, so that these will operate smoothly, freely noiselessly and
without excessive friction.
ix) Fabricate metal work with assembly joints that will permit the work
to be dismantled after workshop assembly into sections small
enough for transport and site handling or imposed size limits.
Unless such joints are shown on the Drawings, design them to
incorporate the following characteristic;
(1) Unobtrusive appearance
(2) Strength not less than the un-joined member.
(3) Ease of assembly without damage to the surface treatment.
b) Components
i) Provide (and deliver to the appropriate contractor or trade for
installation) metal access doors of the types and sizes shown on the
Drawings. The manufacturer’s standard cylinder locks shall all be
keyed alike, with lock release handle on shaft side of door.
ii) Provide (and deliver to the appropriate sub-contractor for
installation) metal ladders and rungs as sized and detailed. Deliver
in sufficient time to avoid delaying the work. Provide required
anchors for attachment.
iii) Fabricate steel pipe handrails as shown and detailed. Miter corners
and close ends. Provide sleeves for post indicated to be set into
concrete or masonry. Fill joints between posts and sleeves with lead
wool. Provide metal spaces (of the same thickness as the gypsum
board or plaster) at attachment points at gypsum board or plastered
walls. Return ends of wall-mounted handrails to within 3mm of the
wall (without connecting).
iv) Metal saddles
(1) Cut and/or drill saddles as required to fit door hardware. Metal
saddles shall be of sizes, materials, and profiles indicated on
the Drawings, in one piece, considers the full width of the
door jamb, shaped to fit the jambs and other adjoining work.
TS 500 - 125
Saddles for exterior doors shall have weather-stop rabbet

(unless indicated otherwise).
(2) The ends of the saddles shall be tightly fitted to the profile of
the doorframes. Saddles shall be secured in place with 10mm
flathead countersunk screws in lead expansion shields, not
more than 100mm from the ends of saddles and not more than
300mm apart. Stainless steel saddles shall be secured (same
spacing as for other saddles). Exterior saddles shall be set in
polysulphide sealant.
v) Steel gratings
(1) Electro-pressured welded steel gratings, with rectangular,
plain bearing bars and rectangular, plain crossbars. Interior
gratings shall be factory prime-painted with rust-inhibitive
alkyd primer. Exterior gratings shall be hot-dipped galvanized,
factory epoxy prime-painted, and factory finish-painted with
2 coats of flat black epoxy enamel, baked-on.
(2) Gratings, interior and exterior shall have bearing bars spaced
17.5mm o.c. and cross bars spaced 100mm o.c. with edge
bands at all sides.
(3) Gratings shall be capable of supporting a uniform live load of
7.18 kN/m2 (or 14.4kN/m2 where subject to vehicular traffic).
Provide gratings complete with frame corners mitered and
flush-welded. The Contractor shall secure gratings to frames
using fasteners that allow the grating to be removed, and
provide a minimum 1m long, heavy, galvanized chain for
each section of grating anchored to grating and adjoining
concrete.
vi) Light gauge Galvanized Steel Walls Stud and Framing
(1) General
The Contractor shall supply and install a complete vertical
framing system as indicated on the Drawings, to provide a
wall and partition framing system to receive gypsum
plasterboard panels. The system shall comprise light gauge
galvanized steel members with all necessary compatible
fittings, accessories, connectors, bolts, fasteners and fixings
obtained, where possible, from a common manufacturer.
(2) Materials
(a) Runners - galvanized steel channel size following the
Drawings.
(b) Studs - galvanized steel channel size following the
Drawings.
(c) Horizontal Supports - galvanized steel channel size
following the Drawings.
TS 500 - 126
(d) Accessories - to comply with framework member

manufacturer’s recommendations.
(3) Installation
(a) The Contractor shall erect the framing system to the lines
and levels shown on the Drawings, and to details
approved on the shop drawings. Generally, vertical studs
will be fixed at maximum 450mm centers to top and
bottom runners which are securely fixed to the building
structure by methods approved by the Engineer.
Horizontal supports will be provided by the Contractor at
maximum 1200mm vertical centers and additional
supports, runners and studs will be provided at openings
for doors, windows, hatches and the like.
(b) The Contractor will provide sufficient additional framing
members to ensure the strength and stability of the wall
or partition framing system and in particular, additional
framing members will be provided, as required, to fit
around projections and obstructions, and at corners 2,
studs fastened together, will be provided.
(c) Where concrete infill between the top of window sashes
and structure above is not shown on the Drawings, such
infill will be framed up complete in light gauge
galvanized steel as specified above.
vii) Steel Panel/ Metal Pan
Material: As shown in the Drawings
Small screw for installation shall be the optimal material.
viii) Roof Drain Outlet
(1) The Contractor shall supply and install roof drain outlet at the
locations shown on the Drawings, in accordance with the
requirements of appropriate section of the Specification, the
Drawings.
(2) This item should also be read in conjunction with “Finishing
Work” section of these Specifications.
(3) Roof drain outlet shall conform to JIS A 5522 or equivalent
to ASTM and shall be to the diameters as shown on the
Drawings.
(4) The Contractor shall supply and install the proprietary baked
coal tar finish cast iron roof drain in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
(5) The installation of the roof drain outlet includes all associated
work to the roof finishing consisting of but not limited to:-
(a) Dishing and troweling that falls under in-situ roof
finishing
TS 500 - 127
(b) Cutting and forming roof insulation around roof outlet

(c) Cutting and forming waterproof membrane around roof
outlet
(d) Framing out and providing support or mounting for roof
drain
(e) Providing sealants to the perimeter of the drain outlet
recess
(f) The Contractor shall connect roof drain outlet to vertical
rainwater pipe and shall ensure that the installation of the
drain and connection provides a complete watertight
assembly.
ix) Manhole Covers
(1) The Contractor shall supply and install manhole covers and
frames at the locations shown on the Drawings, in accordance
with the requirements of appropriate section of the
Specification, the Drawings.
(2) The manhole covers and frames shall be manufactured in cast-
iron and shall be of sizes and shape as shown on the Drawings.
(3) The manhole covers and frames shall be installed into
prepared openings and shall be complete including all fittings,
fixings, accessories, seals and finishing to top surface of cover
where required.
(4) Lifting mechanisms such as handles etc. should be provided
with suitable spares for handing over to Employer.
x) Trench and Duct Cover and Frame
(1) The Contractor shall supply and install trench and duct covers
and frames at the locations shown on the Drawings and as
detailed on Drawing and in accordance with the requirement
of appropriate section of the Specification, the Drawings.
(2) The covers shall be 4.5mm thick checkered plate steel and the
frames mild steel, and the components shall be either custom
fabricated or standard proprietary items, to the Engineer’s
approval.
(3) The covers and frames shall be installed into prepared
openings and shall be complete with all steel supports,
framework, fittings, fixings and accessories and finishing to
top surface of cover where required.
(4) Lifting mechanisms such as handles etc. should be provided
with suitable spares for handing over to Employer.
9) Assembling and Installation
TS 500 - 128
a) Notify the Engineer in writing of defects in the work of other trades that
will affect the proper installation and operation of the work of this section.
b) Install the work of this section square, level or plum, straight, flat and true
to line or radius, accurately located, with flush, tight, hair-line joints work
exposed to review shall be smooth, with arises and angles sharp, miters
formed in true alignment, profiles accurately intersecting, and with joints
carefully matched to produce continuity of line, texture, color, and design.
c) Fabricate items with provisions to exclude water where exposed to the
weather, and with all attachment devices required for a secure and rigid
installation.
d) Anchor metal work as follows (unless indicated otherwise):
i) Work to be built into concrete or masonry shall be anchored with
shop-welded steel anchors;
ii) Work to be attached to concrete or masonry shall be anchored by bolts
into embedded inserts or with expansion shields;
iii) Work attached to structural steel shall be anchored by welds or bolts;
iv) Work attached to metals other than structural steel shall be anchored
by bolts and screws; powder-actuated fasteners shall not be permitted,
unless approved by the engineer.
e) Ensure that all attachment devices shall be of a type, size and spacing to
suit the condition and as shown on the approved shop drawings.
f) Provide shims, slotted holes, or other means necessary for leveling,
plumbing and other required adjustments.
g) Ensure that steel attachment devices for exterior steel work and for
galvanized steel work shall be galvanized.
i) Conceal attachment devices for work exposed to view, unless
indicated otherwise; all other attachment devices shall be located
where least conspicuous. Where bolts or screws are exposed to view,
these shall be flat and countersunk, with projecting ends cut off with
nuts or adjacent materials.
h) Do all necessary drilling, tapping, cutting or make other preparation of
surrounding construction in the field accurately, neatly and as necessary
for the attachment and support of work of this section. Obtain Engineer’s
approval prior to such preparation to the work of others.
i) Cooperate with other trades to insure the orderly progress of the work.
Install the work in accordance with the approved shop drawings. Protect
and accommodate the work of other trades. Schedule the work to avoid
cutting and patching complete work.
i) Accurately measure, cut and fit all work, set in position to required
lines and levels, and secure in place. Install items free from distortion
TS 500 - 129
or defects. Prevent erection stresses by using temporary bracing as

necessary. Keep work in alignment.
ii) Replace items damaged in the course of installation. Perform field
welding. Touch-up field welds and scratched and damaged prime-
painted surfaces after installation.
10) Inspection
Carefully examine and test all works in which strength forms a critical factor
after final fixing.
11) Protection and Cleaning
a) Provide general protection as specified in GS100 “General Specification”
of these Specifications.
b) Protect self-finished metal work from all likely forms of damage.
c) Remove all temporary protection after the completion of the work of this
section and the work of adjacent trades, (particularly stone work, tile work,
plastering), and at such time as directed by the Engineer. Clean and leave
fee of smears, scratches and abrasions all exposed surfaces of all metal
work, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any damages to finishes shall
be repaired at no additional cost to the Employer. In the event that damage
is beyond repair, remove the work and replace such items at no additional
cost to the Employer.
Clean and polish the metal work after removal of protection.

1) The quantity of Stainless Steel Railings of H=1000mm, 12mm Hot Dip
Galvanized Steel Handrail and Maintenance Ladder to be paid for shall be
measured as the “Lineal Meters” of specified railing actually completed and
accepted.
2) Steel Checkered Plate, stainless steel baseboard, Aluminum Expanded Metals
and H=1000mm, 12mm Hot Dip Galvanized Steel Handrail and Stainless Steel
Gratings are measured as the “Square Meters”.
3) Quantity of the H=1000mm, Galvanized Maintenance Access Stairs with Handrail is
measured as the “Each”
4) Rate of Stainless steel Sun Shade Louver for OCC Building in Depot shall be
refer to the Drawing No. MCRP-DRW-OCC-AR-3311.
The rate of the above pay items shall be included:
1) Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the height of rail shall be 1000mm.
2) All necessary supports, hangers, anchors, escutcheons, painting (except
stainless steel and aluminum) including paint and all necessary accessories to
complete each railing as shown on the appropriated Drawings.
TS 500 - 130
3) 32mm Dia. handrail, post and bottom rail with 25mm Dia. balustrades

Stations Description Unit of
Building Pay Measurement
Item Number
506(9)b H=1000mm, Maintenance Access Stairs with Handrail Each
506(20) H=1000mm, Stainless Steel Railings Linear meter
506(46) T=3mm, Stainless Steel Baseboard, Square meter
T=6mm, Aluminum Expanded Metal with Steel Framing
506(48) Square meter
(Walls), Baking Fluro resin Paint Finish
T=6mm, Aluminum Expanded Metal with Steel Framing
506(49) Square meter
(roof), Baking Fluro resin Paint Finish
H=1000mm, 12mm Hot Dip Galvanized Steel Handrail, with
506(50) Linear meter
Steel Flat Bar Ribs, Fluro resin Paint Finish
506(52) Steel Access Ladder with safety Hoop Linear meter
506(84) T=19mm, Stainless Steel Grating Square meter

Number
D506(1)d Stainless Steel Railing; (Furnished, Fabricated & Installed) Linear meter
D506(46) T=3mm, Stainless Steel Baseboard Linear meter
D506(52) T= 6mm, Steel Checkered Plate Square meter
D506(53) Steel Access Ladder with safety Hoop Linear meter
D506(84) T=32mm, Stainless Steel Gratings Square meter
D506(99) Stainless Steel Sun Shade Louver Linear meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 131
507 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
The Work
installation onsite of all forms of expansion joint cover assemblies at walls, floors
and roofs, including all anchorage provisions, in accordance with this Specification
507.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required expansion joint cover
assemblies as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.
507.1.2 Work of this Section

1) Sealants
2) Joint Preparation
1) Furnish and install all sealants and required accessories for the project that are
not furnished under other sections.
2) Comply with local requirements regarding the use of flammable materials.

1) The Contractor shall employ only skilled tradesmen experienced in the work
of this section.
2) The work and material shall be inspected (and tested if necessary) by the
Testing agency approved by the Engineer.
a) The Contractor shall correct or remove and replace unacceptable work
and material at no expense to the Employer.
b) The Contractor shall patch test areas as required to re-establish insulating
and waterproofing integrity.
3) Testing by an independent testing laboratory or review of data by the Engineer
shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for the performance of
the work as specified, nor relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to
verify that the work conforms to the requirements of the contract documents.
4) The Engineer reserves the right to reject materials and/or workmanship not
conforming to the Specifications at any time before final acceptance.
The Engineer's acceptance of materials or workmanship shall not prevent its
subsequent rejection if defects are discovered later.
TS 500 - 132

1) Not apply sealants to surfaces that are wet or damp. Allow wet concrete or
masonry surfaces to receive sealants to dry for five (5) days before applying.
2) Not apply sealants during periods of wind driven sand. Maximum wind
velocity is 10m/sec.
3) Not apply sealants when the temperature of the surfaces which receive sealant
is below 5°C or above 50°C, with relative humidity as recommended by the
manufacturer.
507.1.5 Storage
The Contractor shall store sealants under the conditions of temperature of minimum
5°C and maximum 25°C and a relative humidity at a maximum 85% before
application or as recommended by the manufacturer.
507.1.6 Submittals
1) Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's technical literature, product data, and full
installation instructions.
2) Provide a written warranty to the Employer, providing for repairing and
replacing, at no cost to the Employer, sealants that fail to perform as required
because of leaking, crumbling, hardening, shrinkage, bleeding, sagging,
staining or loss of adhesion, within a minimum period of five (5) years from
date of Substantial Completion of the Works as certified by the Engineer.
Products
507.2.2 Materials
1) General
Unless other specified hereinafter, all components materials for the Expansion
Joint Cover Assemblies shall be of extruded aluminum, and details shall be as
shown on the Drawings.
TS 500 - 133
2) Types of Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies

a) Floor-to-floor;
b) Floor-to-wall;
c) Ceiling-to-ceiling;
d) Interior wall-to-wall;
e) Ceiling to ceiling (at viaduct); and
f) Exterior wall-to-wall.
3) Sealants
Polyurethane base, multi-component, chemical curing; non-sagging type for
application in vertical joints; capable of being continuously immersed in water,
withstand movement of up to 15% of joint width and satisfactorily handled
throughout temperatures of 4 to 35°C: uniform, homogeneous, and free from
lumps, skins and coarse particles when mixed; color selected by the Engineer.
4) Primer
Non-staining type recommended by sealant manufacture to suit application.
5) Joint Cleaner
Non-corrosive type recommended by sealant manufacture; compatible with
joint forming materials.
6) Joint Filler
Round, closed-cell foamed polyurethane, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyvinyl
chloride (PVC), or synthetic rubber foam rod, oversized by 30-50%.
7) Bond Breaker
Pressure sensitive type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
8) Testing
Testing of sealing materials shall be executed by the Contractor as follows:
a) Prepare a base plate of real materials, concrete steel, aluminum or others.
b) Adhere cellophane tapes and apply primer.
c) Set a cord of sealing materials both on cellophane tapes and on primer.
d) Leave them as they are in the Site at least 10 days.
e) Pick the head of the cord and draw it down.
If the cord is sufficiently attached to its base from bottom to top or is broken
by the force, the sealing materials will be accepted.
Execution
1) Inspection
TS 500 - 134
The Contractor shall inspect the surfaces to receive sealants and notify the
Engineer in writing of defects in the work of other trades that will affect the
proper installation of the work of this section. Starting the installation work
shall constitute acceptance by the Contractor of the base or adjoining work.
2) Preparation
a) Clean and prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
b) Use joint cleaner where required.
3) Installation
a) Install joint filler as required to provide proper joint depth. Do not twist,
brand, or stretch joint fillers. Use bond breakers where required.
b) Install sealants in accordance with manufacture’s installation instructions;
apply only within recommended temperature range. Form joints as
detailed, free of air pockets, embedded matter, ridges, gaps, wrinkles, and
sags.
c) Mixing 2 Components as follows:
i) Maximum volume: 3 liters
ii) Min. mixing period: 10 minutes
iii) Temperature for mix.: min. 10°C ambient temperature

Quantity of Expansion Joint is measure as the “Linear Meter” and rate
shall be included the following items.
1) The Width of the Structural Expansion Joint on Concourse Leve,
Platform Level and OCC Building in Depot shall be as follows:
a) Concourse Level: 150mm
b) Platform Level: 300mm
2) Expansion Joint accessories shall be provided for floor to floor,
wall to wall, ceiling to ceiling and interior wall to wall, floor to
wall, wall to ceiling.
3) Size, Thickness and Dimension of all necessary accessories, such
as Joint cover plate, joint filler, vapor barrier, vinyl gasket, fire
barrier, etc. shall be in accordance with proposed Expansion Joint
Manufacturer approved by the Engineer.
TS 500 - 135

Item Number
507(1) W=150mm Expansion Joints for Concourse Level and Joint Linear Meter
Cover Assemblies (all types for floors, walls and roofs)
507(2) W=300mm Expansion Joints for Platform Level and Joint
Cover Assemblies (all types for floors, walls and roofs)
Depo Building Description Unit of

Number
D507(1) W=100mm Expansion Joints and Joint Cover Assemblies (all Linear Meter
types for floors, walls and roofs)
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 136
508 FURRING AND METAL LATH
The Work
installation onsite of furring and metal lath, including all anchorage provisions, in
508.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required furring and metal lath as
508.1.2 Description of Work

Extent of lath and plaster work is shown on the Drawings and Schedules. Types of
work included are:
1) Framing for partitions, ceilings, furring, etc.
2) Metal lath, gypsum lath, and related components.
Coordinate with all trades required to install work on or into work of this section.
Related work specified elsewhere. Include additional related sections as pertinent.

(Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
1) ASTM C-645 Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing
Members
Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw
Application of Gypsum Board.
2) ASTM C-754 Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing
Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Board, Backing Board, or
Water-Resistant Backing Board.
3) ASTM C-841 Standard Specification for Installation of Interior Lathing and
Furring.
4) ASTM C-842 Standard Specification for Application of Interior Gypsum
Plaster
5) ASTM C-1002 Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the
Application of Gypsum Board.
6) ASTM C-847 Standard Specification for Metal Lath
Fire-Resistance Rating: Where fire resistance rating is required, provide
materials and installation which are identical with those of applicable
TS 500 - 137
assemblies tested per ASTM E119 by fire testing laboratories acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.
Unit Responsibility: Obtain lath and plaster materials from a single
manufacturer to ensure consistency in quality of performance and appearance.
508.1.4 Submittals
Product Data: The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's product specifications and
installation instructions for systems used.
Certificates: The Contractor shall submit certification of compliance with fire and
sound requirements indicated.
Samples: The Contractor shall furnish one standard sample of each linear or
continuous product, one standard hand sample of sheet product, and one sample of
all other components required for project.
Shop drawings required.
508.1.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling

Handling: The Contractor shall handle materials to avoid damage.
Delivery: The Contractor shall deliver materials to the jobsite in original unopened
packages, containers, or bundles bearing the brand name and manufacturer's
identification.
Storage: The Contractor shall store materials in dry locations with adequate
ventilation, free from water, and in such a manner to permit easy access for
inspection and handling. The Contractor shall remove damaged or deteriorated
materials from the site.

The Contractor shall protect adjacent work of other trades from moisture damage,
soiling, physical distress, etc.
Products
508.2.2 Materials
1) Steel Studs and Runners:
TS 500 - 138
(158ST25) (158CR25) (212ST25) (212CR25) (358ST25)

(358CR25) (400ST25) (400CR25) (600ST25) (600CR25)
(212ST22) (212CR22) (358ST22) (358CR22) (400ST22)
(400CR22) (600ST22) (600CR22) (212ST20) (358ST20)
(358CR20) (400ST20) (400CR20) (600ST20) (362SJ20)
(40SJ20)
Use other studs for increased height conditions
2) Metal Furring Materials:
(Metal Furring Channels and Clips)
(Adjustable Wall-Furring Brackets)
(Cold-Rolled Channels, minimum at 3/4")
(Z-Furring Channels)
For cold-rolled channels specify standard painted or galvanized coating
3) Utility Angles: Nominal 2"x2"x24ga., corrosion-resistant steel, lengths as
required.
4) Hanger Wire: Galvanized, 8-ga.
Tie Wire: Galvanized, 18-ga.
5) Corner Bead: - (1-A Expanded) (Double X)
6) Casing Beads: - (#66 Expanded Flange)
1/2" minimum (#66 Short Flange)
1/2" minimum (galv.) (zinc)
7) Control Joint: (Zinc Control Joint
#50 minimum (Double-V Expansion Joint
1/2" minimum (galv.) (zinc)
8) Screws:
SIZE: 1/2" minimum
Style: (framing - Type S-12) (drywall - Type S)
(Self-drilling - Type S-12) (Laminating - Type G)
Head: low-profile
Coating: corrosion-resistant
9) Insulation: Sound Attenuation Fire
Blankets minimum 1" thick, minimum16" wide
Insulation required for exterior walls for use with Z-Furring Channels if to be
installed under this section
TS 500 - 139
10) Reinforcement: - (Strip lath)

11) Lath Attachment Clip: Field Clip
12) Metal Lath:
*(Junior Diamond Mesh, minimum 1.75#)
Execution
508.3.1 Partition Installation

1) Stud System Erection:
a) Attach steel runners at floor and ceiling to structural elements with
suitable fasteners located 2" from each end and spaced 24" o.c. max. Use
toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors spaced 16" o.c. maximum for
suspended ceilings.
b) Position studs vertically, with open side facing in same direction,
engaging floor and ceiling runners, spaced as shown on Plan. Place studs
in direct contact with all door frame jambs, abutting partitions, partition
corners and existing construction elements. Install asphalt felt strips
between studs and wall surface where studs are installed directly against
exterior walls.
c) Anchor all studs for shelf-walls and those adjacent to door and window
frames, partition intersections, corners and free-standing furring to floor
and ceiling runners with metal-lock fastener tool or screws.
d) Securely anchor studs to jamb and head anchors of door or borrowed-light
frames by bolt or screw attachment.
e) Place a horizontal cut-to-length section of runner, with a web-flange bend
at each end, and secure to strut studs with two screws in each bent web,
over metal door and borrowed-light frames. Position a cut-to-length studs
as necessary over door frame header.
2) Metal Lath Application
The Contractor shall place self-furring diamond mesh lath with long dimension
perpendicular to studs and over previously applied plaster base. Secure metal
lath to steel studs with 1-1/4" screws spaced 8" o.c. Ends shall be lapped 1" and
staggered in adjacent courses and sides lapped 1/2".
Above application of metal lath is required for two (2)-hour partition, UL
Design U-484.
3) Chase Wall Erection
a) Steel Stud System
TS 500 - 140
i) Align two parallel rows of floor and ceiling runners spaced apart as
shown on the Drawings. Attach runners to concrete slabs with
concrete stub nails or power-driven anchors 24" o.c.; Attach runners
to suspended ceilings with toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors 16"
o.c.
ii) Position studs vertically in runners 24" o.c. with flanges in same
direction, and with studs on opposite sides of chase directly across
from each other.
iii) Place cross-bracing made of gypsum base, minimum 12" high by
chase wall width, between rows of studs and attach to stud webs with
six 1" type S screws per brace. Space braces 48" o.c. vertically.
iv) Anchor web at each end of steel brace to stud web with two 3/8" pan
head screws. Bracing of 2-1/2" steel studs may be used in place of
gypsum panels. When chase wall studs are not opposite, install steel
stud cross-braces 24" o.c. horizontally and securely anchor each end
to a continuous horizontal 2-1/2" runner screw-attached to chase wall
studs within the cavity.
b) Channel Stud/Metal Lath System:
i) Secure two rows of 3/4" cold-rolled channel studs vertically to floor
and ceiling structure with appropriate fasteners, and spaced 16" o.c.
Install horizontal 3/4" cold-rolled channel braces at third points)
securely wire-tied to the back flange of each vertical channel with 18-
ga. tie wire. Connect between horizontal braces with 3/4" cold-rolled
channel brackets spaced 30" o.c.
ii) Add other partition systems, e.g. solid Metal Lath/Plaster, as required.
iii) Install Metal Lath with long dimension across supports and with end
joints staggered in adjacent rows. Lap ends of lath 1" at supports; lap
side joints at least 1/2". Secure lath to furring channels with 18-ga.
tie wire. Between supports, wire tie side laps together at intervals not
exceeding 9-inches.
4) Ceiling Installation
a) Grillage Erection
i) Space 8-ga. hanger wires 48" o.c. along carrying channels and within
6" of ends of carrying channel run.
ii) Anchor hangers by attachment to reinforcing steel, by loops
embedded at least 2", or by approved inserts, for concrete. Wrap
hanger around or through beams or joists for steel construction.
Constructor shall not fasten hangers to steel roof
TS 500 - 141
iii) Install 1-1/2" carrying channels (48") (36") o.c. and within 6" of walls,
positioned for proper ceiling height. Level and secure with hanger
wire saddle-tied along channel. Provide 1" clearance between runners
and abutting walls. Overlap ends 12" and secure each end with
double-strand 18-ga. tie wire at channel splices/ interlock flanges.
iv) Erect 3/4" metal furring channels at right angles to 1-1/2" carrying
channels.
v) Space furring at a minimum of 16" o.c. and within 6" of walls; secure
to furring channels by wire-tieing with double-strand 18-ga. wire.
Nest furring channels 8" and securely wire-tie each end with double-
strand 18-ga. wire at splices.
vi) Install the necessary reinforcement to insure lateral stability of
grillage at light troffers or any openings that interrupt the carrying or
furring channels.
b) Metal Lath Installation
i) Apply lath with long dimension across supports and with end joints
staggered in adjacent rows. Lap ends of Junior Diamond Mesh Lath
1" at supports and at least 1/2" between supports. Lap sides of rib lath
by nesting outside ribs. Secure lath to furring channels with 18-ga. tie
wire at intervals not exceeding 6"; securely tie end-laps at supports
with 18-ga. wire.
ii) Wire-tie side laps together at intervals not exceeding 9-inches
between supports.
5) Wall Furring Installation
a) Direct Furring Channel Attachment:
i) Attach metal furring channels vertically spaced at a minimum of 16"
o.c. to masonry or concrete surfaces with concrete stub nails or
power-driven fasteners staggered 24" on opposite flanges.
ii) Install asphalt felt protection strip between furring channel and wall
on exterior walls.
b) Z-Furring Channels
i) Install insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-Furring
Channels spaced at a minimum of 16" o.c.
ii) Attach narrow flanges of furring channels to wall with concrete stub
nails or power-driven fasteners spaced 24" o.c. Attach wide flange to
wall with short flange extending beyond corner, at exterior corners.
Attach short flange of channel to web of attached channel, on
TS 500 - 142
adjacent wall surface screw. Start from this channel with standard
width insulation and continue in regular manner. Space second
channel no more than 12" from corner and cut insulation to fit, at
interior corners. Hold insulation in place until gypsum base is
installed with 10" long staple field-fabricated from 18-ga. tie wire
inserted through slot in channel.
c) Channel Stud Furring:
i) Secure adjustable wall furring brackets to masonry or concrete wall
surface using appropriate fasteners. Space brackets 36" o.c. vertically
and 4'-6" horizontally. Wire-tie plumbed horizontal 3/4" cold-rolled
furring channel to bracket and bend excess of bracket down.
Horizontal channels shall be spaced not more than 6-inches from the
floor and ceiling and not more than 54" o.c. Wire-tie vertical 3/4"
cold-rolled channels to the horizontal members with 18-ga. tie wire
and space as required for the type of metal lath utilized.
ii) Install metal lath with long dimension across supports and with end
joints staggered in adjacent rows. Lap ends of lath 1" at supports and
at least 1/2" between supports. Secure lath to furring channels with
18-ga. tie wire. Wire-tie side laps together at intervals not exceeding
9-inches, between supports.

Quantity of Expanded Metal lath is measured as the “Linares meter” and rate shall
be included Furring and fixing accessories.


Number
D508(4) Expanded Metal Lath on metal frame Square meter
TS 500 - 143
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 144
509 ROUGH CARPENTRY
The Work
installation onsite of rough carpentry, including all anchorage provisions, in
509.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required rough carpentry as shown
on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.
1) Comply with local codes and ordinances regarding requirements for fire-rated
construction.
2) The Contractor shall so arrange his program of work as to ensure that as far as
possible, the requirement of all other trades involved are respected.

This Specification covers the furnishing of materials and labor including equipment
necessary to complete the installation of the following items, as shown on the
1) Non-Structural Wall, Floor, and Roof Framing
2) Furring and Blocking
3) Preservative and Fire-Retardant Wood Treatments
4) Framing Hardware

In accordance with the Local Codes.

1) Identify all timber and plywood by grade mark and inspecting agency symbol
showing mill name or number, timber grade, species (or species grouping),
rules under which graded (where applicable), and condition of seasoning at
time of manufacture/ production.
2) If unusual expansion and contraction occurs resulting in damage within twelve
(12) months, the Contractor shall undertake replacement or repair at its own
expense.
3) Treat wood with preservative or fire retardant before delivering to the Site.
TS 500 - 145
4) Provide applicator's certification that the products have been treated in

compliance with manufacturer's treatment instructions.

Protect all timber and plywood from rain and standing or dripping water.
509.1.6 Submittals
1) The Contractor shall submit shop drawings and samples indicated by the
Engineer and in accordance with appropriate section of GS100 “General
Specification” of these Specifications.
2) Where required or if called for by the Engineer, the Contractor shall at his own
cost produce whatever additional drawings are necessary to indicate the
Engineer the constructional processes or to ensure such processes are carried
out by the workmen on site.
Products
509.2.2 General
1) Manufacture all timber and plywood in accordance with specified grading rules.
2) Facilities shall be given to the Engineer to inspect all materials and components
intended for the works, and all work in progress, whether on site or elsewhere.
3) All timbers shall be of termite treated.
509.2.3 Timber
1) The type of wood shall be specified on the Drawings, however, all timber used
in the permanent work shall be of the first class quality and equal to samples
approved by the Engineer.
2) All timber shall be treated with preservative as specified.
3) All timber shall be properly seasoned for at least one year by the air drying
process so that the moisture content does not exceed 20% that of live timber
before being incorporated into the Works and shall be straight grained and true
so that grain will be parallel to the length of the member.
TS 500 - 146
4) Unless specifically indicated otherwise, all cross-sectional sizes quoted for

concealed timber are nominal sizes but the sizes stated shall be the minimum
sizes to be used in the works. The surface texture of concealed timber need not
be planed, and sawn or hewn faces will be acceptable provided accurate
connections can be made where required. In all other instances, the sizes quoted
are the smooth, plane-finished sizes and timber shall hold to the sizes given.
5) Planed timber shall be square and angular and except where special situations
indicate otherwise, each face shall be at right angles to the next.
509.2.4 Plywood
1) Plywood shall be of the species and type shown on the Drawings.
2) Plywood generally shall be multiply construction and the grain of each layer
shall be at right angles to the ones adjacent to it and the ply layers shall be fully
and continuously bonded one to another with synthetic resin adhesive which is
moisture resistance.
3) The plywood shall be manufactured under controlled conditions and be highly
compressed so that the board is of the stated thickness which shall be constant
throughout its whole area.
4) Where plywood is to be concealed or to receive a painted finish, the face
veneers shall be free from obvious defects but the veneers need not necessarily
be color-matched. Where plywood is exposed and is to receive a clear finish,
the face veneers shall be selected and unblemished.
5) The Contractor shall not be allowed to make up thickness by gluing together
sheets of thinner plywood.
6) All plywood used externally shall be exterior grade approved by the Engineer.
509.2.5 Wood Particle Board

Composed of wood chips, shavings or flakes, made with waterproof resin binders of
grade to suit application, with sanded faces.
509.2.6 Hardboard
Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered service grade.
509.2.7 Fasteners
509.2.7.1 Nails
Standard commercial quality, sizes and spacing as shown on the Drawings, and as
required to adequately transmit design forces.
509.2.7.2 Other Fasteners

As shown on the Drawings, galvanized for exterior locations and fire-resistive treated
wood, cadmium or nickel-plated for interior locations.
TS 500 - 147
Use toggle bolts for anchorage to hollow masonry, expansion shields and lag bolts
for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete, and bolts or power activated studs for
anchorage to steel.
509.2.8 Fire-Retardant Treatment
509.2.8.1 Standards
1) Pressure impregnation with single fire-retardant of secondary ammonium
phosphate or mixed fire-retardant of chrome zinc chloride, minaris and pisolate
will be acceptable.
2) Painting with fire-retardant paint shall be in conformity to JIS K5661 or
equivalent to ASTM.
509.2.8.2 Location
The Contractor shall execute fire-retardant treatments in compliance with local codes
and ordinances or as specified on the Drawings.
509.2.9 Preservation Treatments
509.2.9.1 Standards
Painting or spraying (twice in each case) of creosote oil will be acceptable.
509.2.9.2 Location
Execute preservative treatments for all lumbers, timbers and plywood that will be
subject to moisture penetration.
509.2.9.3 Job Site Treatment

The Contractor shall provide a bulk supply of the same preservative chemicals as
used for the original treatment, and apply two brush coats to all cuts, holes, notches,
and cut faces in plant treated wood members. Fully saturate such areas. Particular
attention shall be given by the Contractor to the tops and backs of members which
may be inaccessible after erection. As far as is possible, treatment should be carried
out by the Contractor after cutting to size and shaping especially when cutting for
joints and connection is involved and if necessary on additional application shall be
given to and around connections after, they are made. The treatment material shall
be allowed to dry before further works are carried out hereon.
509.2.9.4 Delivery, Storage and Protection

1) Generally in accordance with GS100 “General Specification”.
2) All timber, plywood and other materials to be incorporated into the work shall
be unnecessarily exposed to the weather.
3) All timber shall be transported and stored on site by the Contractor in level
conditions, on cross patterns, etc., to prevent undue bending and bowing. Items
TS 500 - 148
of small cross section shall be selected and handled by the Contractor to

eliminate warping and bowing.
Execution
509.3.1 General
1) Construct walls straight and plumb, with cuts accurately made for full bearing
of members. Set joints and rafters crown-up at correct level.
2) Accurately space members and securely nail, screw, bolt, bridge, block and
truss as detailed or required to produce a rigid structure. Use continuous pieces
of the longest possible length.
3) Not cut or notch members, except as detailed on drawings, as permitted by the
engineer for specific conditions, or as hereinafter specified.
a) Notches or holes in joists or rafters shall not be over 1/6 the depth of the
member, provided the notch or hole is a minimum of 3 times the depth of
the member from the end.
b) Notches in sill plates shall not be over 1/3 the width of the member and
only if anchorage is provided on each side of the notch as required for
ends of pieces.
c) Holes for pipes, shall be drilled at the center line of the stud or top plate.
Pipes exceeding 1/3 plate width are not permitted in bearing walls, except as detailed
on Drawings.
Openings or holes of any kind are not permitted in shear panels, except as detailed
on Drawings.
509.3.2 Nailing and Screws

1) Drill pilot holes slightly smaller than the diameter of nail being used where
nailing has a tendency to split wood. Remove and replace structural members
that have been split or otherwise materially damaged.
2) Provide nailing for structural connections as indicated on Drawings, and of
sufficient size to draw up and rigidly secure members in place.
3) Use finishing nails for exposed finish members. Set heads for puttying. Nails
shall be different lengths and sized dependent on their location and function
but generally the overall length shall be 2-3 times the thickness of the timber
through which the nails or screws first pass.
4) Drive nails at a right angle to the neutral axis but screws will normally be at
right angle to the face of woods. Nailing or screwing into the end-groin of
timber shall not be permitted and proper joints or strapped connections shall be
formed in those positions.
TS 500 - 149
5) Unless otherwise specified, screws shall be of a length to engage all pieces

being fixed and give a point side penetration of not less than 7 times the
diameter of the screw.
6) Lead holes of diameter not greater than 90% of the diameter of the root of the
thread adjacent to the shank and depth shall be 2/3 of screw length.
7) Coach screws shall be of the length and diameter specified in the Drawings. A
washer of suitable diameter and thickness shall be fitted under the head of all
coach screws. Lead holes shall be bored not more than 1.5mm greater than
shank diameter for shank portion, and threaded portion shall be 40-60% of
diameter for softwoods and 60-80% for hardwoods.
509.3.3 Ming Anchors

1) Provide framing anchors as indicated on Drawings and as required to complete
work. Timber surfaces shall be flat and in the correct plan to receive the anchors.
2) Fill all holes with proper size nails.
509.3.4 Bolts and Screws

1) Install bolts in holes bored 1mm larger than the diameter of the bolt.
2) Provide washers under head and nut of all bolts. Provide steel plate washers
when indicated on the Drawings; otherwise, provide standard steel cut washers.
3) Where bolted connections occur, the nuts are to be fully tightened but not over-
tightened to the point where the timber is crushed under the washers.
Nevertheless in all work, jointing etc. is to be carried out by the Contractor
such that shrinkage in any part and in any direction shall not impair the strength
or mar the appearance of finished work.
509.3.5 Studding and Framing
509.3.5.1 Studs
1) Provide sizes called for on Drawings, spaced as indicated. Provide double studs
at openings, and triple studs at corners, all full length.
2) Select studs at shear panels for straightness and erect so a stud is centered at
each plywood joint.
3) Bolt studs against concrete or masonry walls with 13mm bolts; one at 225mm
from each end and remainder at 15cm o.c.
509.3.5.2 Plates
TS 500 - 150
1) Provide double plate at top and single plate at bottom for non-bearing walls (or
as detailed on Drawings).
2) Lap plates as far as practical, but not less than 120mm at lap corners.
509.3.5.3 Stud and Plate Nailing

As indicated on the Drawings.
509.3.5.4 Lintels
1) Provide lintel beams as indicated on Drawings, for openings 100cm and over.
2) Provide min. of one cripple stud under each end of lintel.
509.3.5.5 Soil Blocking

1) Provide 50mm continuous solid blocking between rafters and joists at all
bearings.
2) Nail as indicated on Drawings.
509.3.5.6 Bridging
1) Provide 50mm x 70mm wood "X" bridging between joists at spacing indicated
on Drawings.
2) Cut ends on diagonal for full bearing.
3) Omit bridging for rafters and ceiling joists 200cm or less in depth.
4) Nail each end of each piece with 2-10d nails.
5) Not nail bottom ends until dead loads above joists are in place.
509.3.5.7 Bracing
1) Brace stud partitions (not braced with sheathing or let-in braces) at intervals of
7m in two directions, with cut-in bridging (same size as studs) at approximately
45 degrees.
2) Toe-nail each end of cut-in bridging with 2-10d. nails.
509.3.5.8 Fire Blocking

1) Provide 50mm solid wood fire blocking at mid-height of all partitions.
Maximum distance in any direction between fire blocking shall be 240cm.
TS 500 - 151
2) Toe-nail each end of blocking with 2-10d.nails.
509.3.5.9 Blocking
1) Provide solid wood blocking for all fixtures, appliances, furniture, cabinets, or
other items to be secured to walls. Nailing strips and blocking shall have nuts
and washers countersunk.
2) Provide double joists (or rafters) and double headers at all openings (exceeding
one joist spacing in width) in floors and roofs.
509.3.5.10 Sheathing
1) Install plywood sheathing for walls, roof, shear panels, and sub-flooring at
locations indicated on Drawings. Install sheathing joints parallel to and
centered over supports.
2) Stagger joints by at least one bearing. Maintain minimum 1.6mm and
maximum 3.2mm joint width. Erect sheathing with long dimension
perpendicular to framing members.
509.3.5.11 Furring and Stripping

1) Provide wooden furring and stripping at locations as necessary for installation
of fittings on the Dry Walls.
2) Nail to wood studs at 400mm center; shim stripping as required to obtain a
plumb and flat working plane.

Rough carpentry is not measured under this Section and rates of the Rough carpentry
are deemed to be included in the appropriate pay items of other Section.
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 152
510 FINISH CARPENTRY
The Work
installation onsite of finish carpentry, including all anchorage provisions, in
510.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required finish carpentry, as shown
1) Comply with local codes and ordinances regarding requirements for fire-rated
construction.
2) To arrange its program of work to ensure as far as possible, that the requirement
of all other trades involved are respected.
3) Refer to the drawings for a schedule of finish carpentry items indicating the
wood species and grades required and the intended finishes.
4) Stock trim items and shop-fabricated items shall have exposed surfaces
machined, planed, or sanded to a smooth finish ready to receive the specified
finish.
5) Facilities shall be given to the engineer to inspect all materials and components
intended for the works, and all work in progress, whether on site elsewhere.

This Specification covers the furnishing of materials and labor including equipment
necessary to complete the installation of the following items, as shown on the
1) Interior Wood Trim;
2) Handrails;
3) Soffits;
4) Wood Door Frames and Sills;
5) Wall Paneling;
6) Wood Shelving;
7) Plastic Laminate Work; and
8) Installing Doors and Finish Hardware
TS 500 - 153

All works shall be in accordance with the Local Codes.
510.1.4.1 Contractor’s Qualification

All finish carpentry work shall be carried out by an approved contractor having
specialized in the work as its primary business for at least ten (10) years, and having
performed satisfactorily work of this type and magnitude.
510.1.4.2 Environmental Conditions

The Contractor shall install finish carpentry work in areas where appropriate
temperature and relative humidity can be maintained.
510.1.5 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings and samples as indicated by the Engineer
and in accordance with appropriate section of GS100 “General Specification” of
these Specifications.
Where required or if called for by the Engineer, the Contractor shall at its own cost
produce whatever additional drawings are necessary to indicate the Engineer the
constructional processes or to ensure such processes are carried out by the workmen
on site.
Products
510.2.2 Timber
The type of wood shall be specified on the Drawings, however, all timber to be used
in the permanent work by the Contractor shall be of the first class quality and equal
to samples approved by the Engineer.
Unless specifically indicated otherwise all cross-sectional sizes quoted for concealed
timber are nominal sizes but the sizes stated shall be the minimum sizes to be used
in the works. The surface textures of concealed timber need not be planed, and sawn
or hewn faces will be acceptable provided accurate connections can be made where
TS 500 - 154
required. In all other instances the sizes quoted are the smooth, planed finished sizes
and timber shall holed to the sizes given.
All timber shall be without the following characteristics:
1) Knots in any exposed surface;
2) Decayed or dead knots;
3) Sapwood and pitch pockets;
4) Decay and insect attack;
5) Grain splits exceeding 1/4 of the thickness of the timber; and
6) Ring splits.
All timbers shall be of termite treated.
510.2.3 Glued Laminate Timber

The materials and shape of Glued Laminate Timber shall be as specified on the
Drawings.
510.2.4 Plywood
1) Plywood shall be of the species and type shown on the Drawings.
2) Plywood generally shall be multiply construction and the grain of each layer
shall be at right angles to the ones adjacent to it and the ply layer shall be fully
and continuously bonded one to another with synthetic resin adhesive which is
moisture-resistant.
3) The plywood shall be manufactured under controlled conditions and be highly
compressed so that the board is of the stated thickness which shall be constant
throughout its whole area.
4) Where plywood is to be concealed or to receive a painted finish, the face
veneers shall be free from obvious defects but the veneers need not necessarily
be color-matched. Where plywood is exposed and is to receive a clear finish,
the face veneers shall be selected and unblemished.
5) The Contractor shall not be allowed to make up thickness by gluing together
sheets of thinner plywood.
6) All plywood used externally by the Contractor shall be of an exterior grade
510.2.5 Fire-Retardant Treatment
510.2.5.1 Standards
1) Pressure impregnation with single fire-retardant of secondary ammonium
phosphate or mixed fire retardant of chrome zinc chloride, minaris and pisolate
will be acceptable.
TS 500 - 155
2) Painting with fire-retardant paint shall be in conformity to JIS K5661 or

equivalent ASTM or Philippine Standers approved by the Engineer.
510.2.5.2 Location
Execute fire-retardant treatments in compliance with local codes and ordinances or
as specified in the Drawings.
510.2.5.3 Fabrication
1) Shop fabricate finish carpentry items to the greatest extent practical. Work to
field measurements, with allowance for cutting and scribing.
2) Apply fire retardant and preservative treatments in the shop. Deliver treated
materials cut to correct sizes as far as practical to minimize field cutting.
3) Obtain templates or printed dimensions for work of other trades to be attached
to carpentry items.
510.2.5.4 Protection
1) Deliver, store, and protect materials and fabricated items generally in
accordance with appropriate section of GS100 “General Specification” of these
Specifications.
2) Back prime wood trim and fabricated finish carpentry items immediately upon
delivery. Items with marred surfaces, and cracked, checked, split and warped
materials will be rejected.
Execution
510.3.1 General
1) Coordinate the work of this section with other trades to insure the installation
of required anchors, inserts, receptacles, etc.
2) Employ only skilled carpenters experienced in installing finish carpentry.
510.3.2 Inspection
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of defects in the work of other
trades that will affect the proper installation of the work of this section. Starting the
installation work shall constitute acceptance of the base or adjoining work.
1) Install the work in accordance with approved shop drawings;
TS 500 - 156
2) Cut and fit finish carpentry items accurately; set items plumb or level, true to
line, and with tight joints; conceal fasteners and set finishing nails for putting;
cut joints to exclude water where the work is exposed to the weather; miter
external corners; cope or miter internal corners; and splice running trim with
scarf joints;
3) Ensure that all mechanical and electrical items affecting this work are properly
placed, complete, and have been inspected by the engineer prior to starting
installation;
4) Prime paint surfaces of wood in contact with cementitious materials;
5) Fit plywood shelving and site-made casework with 10 mm thick hardwood
edging; width governed by the thickness of the plywood;
6) Install hardware fixtures and accessories supplied under other sections; install
in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions;
7) Apply plastic laminate where indicated; adhere over entire surface; make joints
and corners hairline; match patterns; slightly bevel arises; cap exposed edges
with plastic laminate of same finish and pattern; and apply laminate backing
on reverse side of plastic laminate-finished surfaces;
8) Provide and install 15mm thick fire retardant treated plywood backboards at
the electric service main switchboard, telephone service entrance, air-
conditioning, ventilating, and/or refrigeration control panels, motor controllers,
contactors, and remote control switches or where indicated on the drawings;
9) Install wood doors furnished under the “Wooden Doors” section; trim wood
doors to fit their openings with the following clearances:
Hinge side : 27cm
Lock side : 54cm
Top : 54cm
Bottom : 75cm maximum, except over applied thresholds, or where
indicated on the drawings.
10) Install wood door frames plumb and square in locations shown, with a
maximum diagonal distortion of 2mm; shim and fasten securely to wall
construction as detailed; and protect from damage or soiling.
11) Erect hollow metal door frames furnished under “Metal Doors and Frames (and
Windows)” section in accordance with SDI-100, and brace securely in place
plumb, square (max. diagonal distortion of 2mm), and without twist; install
glazed light and interior screen frames with welded glass stops on security side;
and co-ordinate the installation of glass and glazing.
12) Install hardware furnished under section on “Finish Hardware”.
a) Hardware location:
Unless otherwise specified on the Drawing, the hardware locations shall
be as follows;
TS 500 - 157
i) Hinges: 130mm from top of door to top of hinge; 250mm from floor
to bottom of hinge. Intermediate hinge (or hinges) spaced
equidistant between top and bottom hinges;
ii) Locks and latch sets: 100cm from floor to centerline of knob;
iii) Panic bolt cross bar: 90 to 120cm above floor; verify with
manufacturers template;
iv) Cylinder dead lock: 150cm from floor to centerline of cylinder;
v) Push-pulls: 112cm from floor to centerline; and
vi) Closers: Per manufacturer’s template.
b) Mortise type hardware: Machine cut door following manufacturer's c)
c) Surface type hardware: Drill pilot holes for screws, using hardware
templates.
d) Attach hardware using screws furnished with hardware. Drive hole firmly,
using appropriate screwdriver. Take care not to mar the finished surface
of hardware.
e) Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
f) Remove hardware, (except hinges) prior to painting. Reinstall and adjust
after field applied finishing has been completed.
13) Sand work smooth and leave finish surfaces ready for finish treatment
(specified in “Painting” section). Finish surfaces shall be free of tool or
machine marks, warp, wind, cracks, checks, and dirt or stains.

1) Wooden Louvers is measured as the “Square Meter” and rate shall be included
Hot Dip Galvanizes Steel Supports and all necessary fixing accessories, and
sealant.
2) Quantity of Wooden Doors is measured as the “Square Meter” and rate shall
be included wooden door frame and louvers and/or glass as shown on the
Drawing, door configuration shall be refer to the Doors and Windows Schedule.
3) Wooden doors shall be included in the TS525.

TS 500 - 158

Item Number
510(9) High Impact Laminate Sheet Square meter
510(10) Wooden Louvers Square meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 159
511 CABINETRY
The Work
installation onsite of cabinetry, including all anchorage provisions, in accordance
with this Specification and in conformity with the Drawings or as established by the
Engineer.
511.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required cabinetry as shown on
the Drawings and/or as specified herein.
1) Refer to the Drawings for a schedule of finish carpentry items indicating the
wood species and grades required and the intended finishes.
2) Ensure that stock trim items and shop-fabricated items shall have exposed
surfaces machined, planed, or sanded to a smooth finish ready to receive the
specified finish.
Products
511.2.2 Materials
See the Drawings.
511.2.3 Fabrication
511.2.3.1 General
1) Fabricate all work in accordance with AWI Specifications, and approved shop
drawings. Shop-fabricate finish carpentry items to the greatest extent practical;
work to field measurements, with allowance for cutting and scribing;
TS 500 - 160
2) Shop-assemble cabinetwork, and finish carpentry items for delivery to site in

sizes easily handled and to ensure passage through building openings;
3) Where tops are to be jointed in the field, the method of jointing shall be as
indicated on the approved shop drawings;
4) Accurately fit and align the separate parts of sectional construction; provide
means of fastening to render the work substantial, rigid, and permanently
secured in the proper position;
5) Conceal joints and connections wherever possible with no intermediate joints
between supports;
6) Provide sufficient additional material to permit scribing to walls, floors, and
related work;
7) Cut and fit the work of this section as necessary to clear, receive, engage, or
support other parts of the work, and as needed for interface with electrical,
plumbing or other units; and
8) Obtain templates or printed dimensions for work of other trades to be attached
to carpentry items.
511.2.3.2 Framing and Blocking

1) Assemble with bolted and screwed connections, securing to structural backings
with cinch anchors, expansion screws, or toggle bolts as appropriate for the
anchorage condition;
2) Mortise and tenon all rails and stiles, neatly mitered and member throughout,
make butt joints flush and smooth, and make up permanent joints with water-
resistant glue; and
3) Assemble fixtures without face screws or nails, except as needed to attach trim;
countersink face nails and face screws, fill with plastic wood or wood plugs,
and sand smooth.
511.2.3.3 Cabinets
1) General:
use solid stock for frames, jambs, heads, stops, and edges; use plywood for
body construction of cabinets where members are more than 11 in. wide; trim
exposed edges with hardwood without face nailing, where plywood is used;
2) Drawers:
Slip dovetail construction, well glued; flush fronts: solid stock, or not less than
1.88cm thick 5-ply veneer-core plywood with edges banded with wood
matching the face;
3) Panel Fronts, Sides, Backs and Bottoms:
TS 500 - 161
Solid stock or stile-and-rail construction; on thick sides and backs of solid

Philippine hardwood, without defects, patches, or plugs; provide extension
slides at all drawers; bottoms at a minimum 1.25cm thick;
4) Doors:
For flush slab design, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, construct of
five (5)-ply veneer-core plywood, with exposed edges banded with wood
matching the face.
For laminated plastic covered doors, provide matching plastic on exposed
edges, and provide cabinet liner (or other suitable material approved by the
Employer) on semi-exposed sides to achieve balanced construction.
Provide rubber stops at ends and backs of doors. Fit and adjust as required to
provide smooth and noiseless operation.
5) Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes. Corners and joints: hairline. Slightly bevel arises. Locate
counter butt joints at least 600mm from sink cut-outs. Cap exposed plastic
laminate edges with material of same finish and pattern. Apply laminate
backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished panels. Arrange
adjacent parts of continuous laminate work to match in color and pattern.
6) Edge-band plywood shelving with 10mm thick hardwood edging; width
governed by the thickness of the plywood;
7) Prepare surfaces as necessary to properly and firmly install all finish hardware
and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Install hardware, fixtures and accessories supplied under other sections. Attach
hardware using screws furnished with hardware. Drive home firmly using
appropriate screwdriver. Take care not to mar the finished surface of hardware.
Adjust hardware for smooth operation. Remove hardware, (except hinges)
prior to finishing.
Reinstall and adjust after finishing has been completed.
511.2.3.4 Preparation for Finishing

1) Putty open joints, cracks, and nail holes full, smooth, and flush with
surrounding surfaces. Use putty tinted to match the color of the wood.
2) Seal pitch pockets and knots.
3) Apply approved wood filler in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation, on open-grain wood.
4) Apply two coats if needed. Sand thoroughly after each coat.
5) Sand work smooth and leave surfaces ready for finish treatment. Surfaces shall
be free of tool or machine marks, warp, wind, cracks, checks, dirt and stains.
6) Apply fire retardant and preservative treatments in the shop.
TS 500 - 162
7) Deliver treated materials cut to correct sizes as far as practical to minimize field
cutting.
1) Deliver, store, and protect materials and fabricated items generally in
accordance with GS100 “General Specification”. Items with marred surfaces,
and cracked, checked, split and warped materials will be rejected.
2) Back prime items immediately upon delivery.
Execution
511.3.1 General
1) Coordinate the work of this section with other trades to insure the installation
of required anchors, inserts, receptacles, etc.
2) Employ only skilled carpenters experienced in installing cabinet work.
511.3.2 Inspection
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of defects in the work of other
trades that will affect the proper installation of the work of this section. Starting the
installation work shall constitute acceptance of the base or adjoining work.
1) Install the work in accordance with approved shop drawings.
2) Ensure that all mechanical and electrical items affecting this work is complete,
properly placed, and have been tested and approved by the Engineer prior to
starting installation.
3) Install all work under the direct supervision of a foreman trained in the field
assembly, fitting and installation of architectural casework and fixtures.
4) Install items level or plumb and true to line. Scribe casework and cabinets to
walls and abutting surfaces.
5) Securely attach the work to building elements in accordance with the approved
shop drawings. Provide fasteners appropriate for the condition of use.
6) Cut and fit fixtures as required accommodating electrical work.
7) Install all finish work using concealed fasteners to the fullest extent possible.
Where surface nailing is unavoidable, set nail heads approximately 2mm below
surface.
8) Cut joints accurately to a hair-line fit. Miter external corners; cope or miter
internal corners.
9) Provide all finish work free from open joints, hammer and machine marks and
other surface blemishes.
TS 500 - 163
10) Coordinate the installation with other trades in making the required utility
connections. Provide access panels as required for the connection and
maintenance of utilities. Design electrical installations to terminate in junction
boxes located as closely as practicable to the building junction boxes.
11) Anchor units in position, and anchor sectional units together firmly in
accordance with the approved shop drawings.
12) Adjust all operating hardware for correct alignment and operation in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Identify keys for locking
hardware, and deliver the keys to the Engineer.
13) Prime-paint surfaces of wood in contact with cementitious materials.
14) Clean all surfaces. Remove dust, stains, and dirt. Surfaces that are damaged,
stained, distorted or otherwise disfigured, shall be repaired, refinished or
replaced by the Contractor to match the original work in every respect.

Cabinetry is measured as the “Each”
511.4.2 Bases of Payment
Station Building Description Unit of

Number
511(1) Kitchenet and overhead Cabinet Set

Number
D511(1) Kitchenet and overhead Cabinet Set
- END OF SECTION –
TS 500 - 164
512 METAL ROOF PANELS AND ACCESSORIES
The Work
installation onsite of metal roof panels, including all anchorage provisions, in
512.1.1 General
The work of this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the
equipment and services necessary to complete the required metal roof panels, as
Sheet Metal Roofing

1) Metal Roofing
2) Gutters, Down-spouts, and Flashing
512.2.2 General
See the Drawings for material thickness, configuration, finish, etc.
512.2.2.1 Codes and Standards

1) ASTM A167: Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate
2) ASTM A525: Steel Sheet, Zinc-coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
ASTM B209 : Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
3) ASTM D226: Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt
4) FS O-F-506: Flux, Soldering, Paste and Liquid
5) FS QQ-S-571: Solder, Tin Alloy
6) AA - Aluminum Construction Manual: Aluminum Sheet Metal Work and
Building Construction
7) AISI - Stainless Steel: Use in Architecture
8) NAAMM: Metal Finishes Handbook
9) SMACNA: Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
10) JIS G3322:2012 or equivalent ASTM: Pre-painted Hot-Dip 55% aluminum-
zinc alloy-coated steel sheet and strip. (AZ 150)
11) Fireproof Certification: Philippines Regulation
TS 500 - 165
512.2.2.2 Quality Assurance

1) The work of this section shall be carried out by an approved contractor having
specialized in the work as its primary business for at least ten (10) years, and
having performed satisfactorily work of this type and magnitude.
2) Employ only craftsmen who are thoroughly skilled in the various crafts, and
who are completely familiar with the specified requirements. Provide the
services of a competent foreman or supervisor who shall be available at all
times during the progress of the work of this section and who shall be
designated as the single point of contact within the subcontractor's organization
for matters in connection with the work of this section.
1) Submit shop drawings and manufacturers' product data in accordance with
appropriate section of GS100 “General Specification” of these Specifications,
including, but not limited to, material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details,
fastening methods, and installation details.
2) Submit manufacturer's installation instructions in accordance with appropriate
section of GS100 “General Specification” of these Specifications.
3) Submit 2 samples (minimum 1.0m square) of metal roofing mounted on
plywood backing, illustrating typical construction, finish, and all typical seams,
joints and details.
Products
512.3.2 Materials
1) Sheet Metal Materials
(See the Particular note on the Drawings for metals, thickness, finishes, etc.)
a) Roof Gutter: zinc, aluminum, magnesium (ZAM), 1.2mm thick sheet,
post-formed, welded joints with asphalt coating and metal sheet fascia
cover; and
b) Downspout: stainless steel, grade 630.
2) Accessory Materials
TS 500 - 166
a) Fasteners: Roofing manufacturer's standard, compatible with roofing

metal, with soft neoprene washers.
b) Felt under layer: Asphalt-saturated roofing felt.
c) Solder: FS-QQ- S- 571
d) Flux: FS O-F-506
e) Sealant: As specified in section on “Sealants”.
3) Fabrication
a) Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as roofing sheet. Size
and configuration as detailed shown on the Drawings.
b) Form pieces in the longest practical lengths.
c) Hem-exposed edges on the underside 13mm; miter and seam corners.
Form material for standing seam, batten seam, flat lock seam, or Bermuda
seam as detailed.
d) Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint.
4) Storage and Handling
a) Generally, in accordance with GS100 “General Specification” of these
Specifications.
b) Stack preformed and pre-finished material to prevent twisting, bending,
or abrasion, and to provide ventilation.
c) Prevent contact with materials or metals during storage that may cause
discoloration or staining.
5) Seam Locking Type Roofing
a) Seam-Locking Type Roof with insulation: Fluorine-resin painted
aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel plate, 0.6mm thickness with
interlocking joints, corrugations not more than 69mm high, 360mm wide
panels, factory bent to curve where applicable.
b) Insulation: Rockwool 50mm thickness, density = 48kg/m3
c) Gutter: Zinc-Aluminum-Magnesium (ZAM), 1.2mm thickness, post-
formed, welded joints
d) Roof verges, closures and all integral flashings shall be designed and
provided by the same manufacturer to ensure a complete and integrated
roofing system.
e) Color: Standard color selected by Engineer
f) Other application: as per manufacturer’s recommendation
g) Accessories, as generally shown on the Drawings, are to be
manufacturer’s standard items or custom fabricated where necessary.
h) Sealant: Modified Silicon sealant with primer
TS 500 - 167
i) Butyl tape along interlocking joints
Execution
1) Inspection
a) Inspect the roof deck to verify that the deck is clean and smooth, and free
from depressions, waves, or projections, and properly sloped to drains,
valley, or eaves.
b) Verify that roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through
the roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips
are located.
c) Verify that the deck is dry and free of water, moisture, humidity or organic
material. Flutes in steel deck shall be clean and dry. Joints in wood deck
shall be solidly supported and nailed.
2) Installation
a) General
i) Execute metal work in accordance with applicable published sheet
roofing recommendations and manufacturer's instructions. Use PIR-
insulated roofing sheets; 2-hour fire-rated and self-extinguishing.
ii) Apply felt under-lay in single layer. Weather lap edges 50mm and
fasten in place using only special T&G screws.
iii) Lap, lock, cleat, seam, and seal all joints as applicable. Use rubber
asphalt bedding compound for joints between metal and bitumen or
metal and felts.
iv) Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation of
roofing sheets.
v) Stagger or align joints of roofing joints as specified.
vi) Provide metal pans for protrusions through the roof. Fill pockets with
plastic cement.
vii) Back paint surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials.
viii) Solder and seal metal roofing joints as detailed. After soldering, wash
metal clean with neutralizing solution, and rinse with water.
b) Flat Seam Roofing
i) Notch corners and turn up pretend edges 19mm.
ii) Lay sheets with long dimension parallel to eaves.
iii) Lock cleats into seams and flatten in the direction of drainage.
iv) At eaves and gable ends, terminate roofing by hooking over an edge
strip.
c) Standing Seam Roofing
TS 500 - 168
i) Space standing seams as detailed.

ii) Fold the lower end of each pan under 19mm. Slit the fold 25mm away
from the corner to form a tab where the pan turns up to make the
standing seam. Fold the upper end of each pan over 50mm. Hook the
fold on the lower end of the upper pan into the fold on the upper end
of the underlying pan.
iii) Apply pans beginning at eaves. Loose lock the pans to the valley
flashing and edge strips at eaves and gable rakes.
iv) Finish standing seams 25mm high on flat surfaces. Bend up one side
edge 38mm and the other 44mm. Make first fold 6mm wide (single
fold), and second fold 13mm wide, providing locked portion of
standing seam with 5 plies in thickness. Fold over the lower ends of
seams at eaves at a 45 degree angle. Terminate standing seams at the
ridge and hips by turning down in tapered fold.
v) Form valleys of sheets not exceeding 3m in length. Lap joints 150mm
in direction of drainage. Extend valley sheet a minimum of 150mm
under roofing sheets. At the valley, double fold the valley and roofing
sheets, and secure with cleats spaced 400mm center.
d) Seam Locking Type Roofing
i) All work shall be carried out in full conformity of the approved shop
drawings, manufacturer’s requirements and to the approval of the
Engineer.
ii) End joints within the roof shall be avoided and roofing and cladding
shall comprise single continuous sheets all as approved by the
Engineer.
iii) Layout of roof and cladding sheets shall be uniform, symmetrical and
meet completed appearance as specified
iv) Each sheet shall be securely attached in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations and to the Engineer’s approval.
v) Adjacent roof sheets shall be securely interconnected at joints using
fasteners uniformly spaced in between fasteners at bearings; spaced
as per manufacturer’s instructions.
vi) Joints shall be interlocking, fixed dry but only with the use of butyl
tape
vii) Installation shall be complete with all accessories shown on the
Drawings or required by the manufacturer’s instructions and shall
include all ancillary fixings such as galvanized mild steel flats and
angles, bolts, brackets, anchors and any other item necessary for the
watertight and secure installation of the roofing system.
TS 500 - 169

1) Pre-painted zinc-aluminum-magnesium (ZAM) Gutter and Pre-painted G.I.
Flashing are measured as a “Linear Meter” including all gutter supports and
sealant and all necessary accessories.
2) Pre-painted Metal Sheet Roofing (ZAM) is measured as a “Square Meter” and
rate shall be included fastening accessories, metal sub-fames, sealant and all
necessary accessories.
3) Main Steel Structural Roof Frame shall be included TS408

Station Building Description Unit of
Number
512(4)a Pre-painted Hi-Rib Zinc--aluminum-magnesium (ZAM) Square meter
Roofing

Number
D512(4)a Pre-painted Hi-Rib Zinc--aluminum-magnesium (ZAM) Square meter
Roofing
D512(4)b Pre-painted zinc-aluminum-magnesium (ZAM) Gutter, Lineal meter
D512(5) Pre-painted G.I. Flashing Lineal meter
D512(6) Pre-painted Seam Locking Type Metal Roof Panels with Square meter
Rockwool Insulation
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 170
513 INSULATED METAL PANELS
The Work
installation onsite of insulated metal panels (using non-combustible rigid foam board
insulation, 2-hour fire-rated and self-extinguishing), including all anchorage
provisions, in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the
Drawings or as established by the Engineer.
513.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required insulated metal panels
(using non-combustible rigid foam board insulation, 2-hour fire-rated and self-
extinguishing), as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.
Section includes:
Rigid foam board insulation, complete with retaining clips, trim, tape and fasteners.
513.1.2 References
1) Hot-Dip 55% aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet and strip.
2) Fireproof Construction qualified by the NFPA or Standard of Philippines.
513.1.3 Performance Requirements

This section primarily covers performance specifying for thermal insulation, vapor
retarder and air barrier materials.
513.1.4 Submittals
1) The Contractor shall submit product data and manufacturer’s installation
instructions.
2) Product Data
a) Provide manufacturer’s technical data for each type of insulation.
b) Include product characteristics and performance criteria: aged thermal
resistance values, fire performance characteristics, moisture vapor
permeance, water absorption ratings, compressive strengths, evaluation
reports showing conformance to applicable codes for insulation].
3) Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures for preparation
and installation specific to the work of this section.
513.1.5 Shop Drawings

1) The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings for prefabricated work and details
as directed by the Engineer.
TS 500 - 171
2) Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details in accordance with

performance requirements, and for attachment to other portions of the Work.
Indicate degree of slope and layout of sloping insulation on roof surfaces.
Ensure positive drainage to roof drains.
513.1.6 Certificates
1) The Contractor shall submit a manufacturer’s certificate to the Engineer.
2) Manufacturer’s Certificate: stating that Products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
513.1.7 Regulatory Requirements

Conform to applicable code for flame spread and smoke developed performance
requirements of foam insulation.
513.1.8 Mockups
1) The Contractor shall provide mockup as specified by the Engineer.
2) Mockup insulation to establish construction techniques.
3) Engineer-approved mockup may remain as part of the Work.

1) The Contractor shall deliver Product as specified by the Engineer.
2) Store and handle Product as specified by the Engineer.
3) Protect Product from moisture.
513.1.10 Environmental Requirements

The Contractor shall not apply adhesives or sealants when substrate and ambient air
temperatures are below 4 degrees C.
Products
TS 500 - 172
513.2.2 Materials
1) Composite Roofing Panels: top and bottom skin aluminum zinc (ALZINC)
steel sheet T=0.6mm, H=108mm, polyisocyanurate (PIR) density=32-
35kg/m3; and
2) Composite Wall Panels: top and bottom skin aluminum zinc (ALZINC) steel
sheet T=0.6mm, H=102mm, polyisocyanurate (PIR) density=1,300g/m2
513.2.3 Accessories
1) Adhesive: single-component, polyurethane adhesives tested to:
a) Underwriters Laboratory Inc. (UL) 1897 Standard for Safety for Uplift
Tests for Roof Covering Systems
b) Approval for fire and wind uplift resistance for roof deck applications by
Engineer.
2) Joint Closure Strips - Clip Strip Type: rigid PVC construction, J-channel shape,
(25mm) (38mm) (50mm) (62mm) nominal size; PVC Clip Strip Joint Closures
3) Joint Closure Strips - Interlocking Type: rigid PVC construction, two pieces
male-to-female connection, 25mm nominal size; female profile completes with
pre-drilled holes spaced at 300mm on center, both sides of attachment flange
4) Joint Tape: 0.051mm thick aluminum tape, 75mm wide, white-coated finish.
Board joints must be clean prior to applying tapes.
5) Mechanical Fasteners - Screw Type or similar fastener with a 1-1/4 inchs
plastic washer.
6) Mechanical Fasteners - Impalement Type.
7) Sealant: One-part, flexible polyurethane-based elastomeric sealant; moisture
curing and non-sagging; to ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.
8) Foam Insulation kit (Class A) – for sealing roof to wall juncture.
Execution
513.3.1 Examination
1) Inspect existing conditions to ensure they are suitable for work to begin.
2) Not proceed until unacceptable conditions are corrected.
3) Ensure substrates are solid, clean, dry and free of any contaminants.
4) Ensure Products are dry prior to installation.
5) Replace damaged Products.
TS 500 - 173
1) Install rigid foam board insulation system in accordance with manufacturer’s

installation guidelines.
2) Install boards with long axis perpendicular to supports. Ensure end joints are
fully supported.
3) Install insulation boards to ensure board width spans not less than 3 framing
supports.
4) Cut and fit boards to suit project requirements.
5) Secure boards to framing supports with mechanical screw-type fasteners, of
sufficient length to penetrate framing support a minimum depth of 19mm.
Space fasteners at maximum 300mm on center.
6) Apply continuous 10mm beads of joint sealant to both sides of joint closure
strip and install joint closure strip over exposed edge of insulation boards.
7) Not fasten adjacent board to substrate until joint closure strip is installed.
8) Install adjacent boards into the exposed joint closure strip’s sealant bead and
then secure to substrate.
9) Mechanically fasten female portion of interlocking joint closure to [concrete]
[masonry] substrate with pneumatic fasteners spaced at 300mm on center.
Align closure strip 3mm from insulation board edge.
10) Apply continuous 10mm beads of adhesive to substrate between closure strips
spaced at maximum 400mm on center. Press boards firmly into place.
11) Apply continuous 10mm beads of joint sealant to both sides of insulation
boards and insert male portion of closure strip into the female slots over beads
of sealant. Ensure male closure strip secures board in place.

1) Jointly with Engineer and manufacturer’s representative, visually inspect the
rigid foam insulation system application and confirm that the installation is in
strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
2) Ensure exposed or visible applications meet the manufacturer’s standards for
uniform appearance.
3) Correct identified defects and irregularities.
513.3.4 Cleaning
Clean adjacent surfaces, levels and ground level areas of debris and excess Products.
513.3.5 Protection
1) Adequately protect Products and work from damage by weather, traffic and
other causes.
TS 500 - 174
2) At the end of each Working Day, seal exposed edges to be weather tight.
3) Protect adjacent Work from damage. Repair damage.

Pre-painted Insulated roof and wall panels are measured as the “Square Meters” and
rate shall be included sub-frame, fasteners, sealant and all necessary accessories to
complete the works as shown on the Drawings.


Number
D513(6) Pre-painted Insulated Roof Panels with PIR Insulation Square meter
D513(7) Pre-painted Insulated Wall Panels with PIR Insulation Square meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 175
514 WATERPROOFING
The Work
This Item shall consist of the manufacture/ supply, delivery and installation onsite of
waterproofing, in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the
Drawings or as established by the Engineer. Waterproofing under this section shall
be of the following types:
1) Cementitious Waterproofing; and
2) Elastomeric Fluid-Applied Cold Membrane Waterproofing.
514.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required cementitious
waterproofing as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.
This section includes:
1) Crystallization Admixture Waterproofing for retaining walls, basement walls
and slab.
2) Waterproofing membrane, including:
a) Cementitious waterproofing for water tanks such as potable tanks,
domestic and fire tanks, waste water tanks and swimming pools.
b) Flexible cementitious waterproofing for toilet & bathrooms, wet kitchens,
pools, planter boxes and ponds.
c) Acrylic polymer waterproofing for fire walls, concrete slab roofs, and
gutters.
d) Liquid-applied polyurethane waterproofing for decks, balconies, and roof
slabs.
e) Elastomeric coating for heat-reflective, weather-shield and waterproofing
for concrete, metal, and all kinds of walls.
f) Asphalt Waterproofing for underground Concrete Surface.
3) Elastomeric fluid-applied cold membrane waterproofing as shown on the

Waterproofing System: Capable of resisting water under pressure and preventing
moisture migration and seepage
514.1.3 References
1) ASTM C109-92 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Hydraulic Cement
TS 500 - 176
2) ASTM D4541 -Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using
Portable Adhesion Testers, 2009.
3) ASTM D836 – Standard Test Methods for Crack Bridging, 2006.
4) ASTM D2240-05 - Standard Test Methods for Durometer Hardness.
5) ASTM D638 - Standard Test Methods for Elongation at break.
6) ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials; 2005.
7) ASTM E154 - Standard Test Methods for Puncture Resistance.
8) ASTM G53 – Standard Test Methods for Weather Resistance
9) ASTM G26 - Standard Test Methods for Weatherometer.
10) ASTM 2369 - Standard Test Methods for Solid Content.
514.1.4 Submittals
1) Cementitious Waterproofing
a) Product Data: For each type of waterproofing specified submit
manufacturer's printed technical data, tested physical and performance
properties, instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrates,
and installation instructions; with temperature range for application;
b) Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified
performance characteristics and physical properties;
c) Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that:
d) Materials comply with (or exceed) specified performance characteristics
and physical requirements.
e) Installer is qualified and approved by manufacturer.
f) Manufacturer's report on field inspection of substrates, prior to
installation;
g) Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and
conditions of interface with other materials;
h) Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and
perimeter conditions requiring special attention; and
i) Guarantee: Furnish Guarantee to Employer per requirements of the
Engineer for water-proofing work for ten (10) years after the date of final
acceptance of the building against leaks; and Closeout: executed
warranties;
2) Elastomeric Fluid-Applied Cold Membrane Waterproofing
a) Certificates of Compliance: Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance
attesting that fluid membrane materials are physically and chemically
compatible with each other.
TS 500 - 177
b) Manufacturer’s Data: Includes material description and physical

properties, application details, and recommendations regarding shelf life,
application procedures, and precautions on flammability and toxicity.
Submit for:
i) Fluid-applied membrane component, including primers
ii) Elastomeric sheets
iii) Cleaner, activating solvent
iv) Asphalt membrane waterproofing.
3) Samples: Submit mock-up samples for each waterproofing type.

1) Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified in
writing and approved by waterproofing manufacturer for the installation of the
specified waterproofing system;
2) Mock-Up: Apply waterproofing system to 1.0 sq.m. of surface to demonstrate
surface preparation, joint and crack treatment, thickness, texture, and standard
of workmanship.
a) Notify the Engineer one week in advance of the dates and times when
mock-up will be prepared.
b) If the Engineer determines that mock-up does not meet requirements,
reapply waterproofing until mock-up is approved.
c) Retain and maintain approved mock-up during construction in
undisturbed condition as standard for judging completed waterproofing.
Undamaged mock-up may become part of the completed work.
3) Pre-installation Meeting: Hold a pre-installation meeting prior to application of
waterproofing system to ensure proper substrate and installation conditions;
require attendance of contractor and applicator; invite the Engineer and special
inspector, if any.

a) Deliver materials to site labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand
name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for storing
and mixing with other components;
b) Store materials as required by waterproofing manufacturer in clean, dry,
protected location and within temperature range required by
waterproofing manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight;
and
c) Remove and replace material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf
life.
TS 500 - 178

a) Deliver manufactured waterproofing materials in manufacturer’s original,
unopened containers, with labels intact and legible. Containers of
materials covered by referenced specification number shall bear the
specification number, type, and class of the contents.
b) Store and protect materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions, and use within their indicated shelf life. Promptly remove
from the site materials or incomplete work adversely affected by exposure
to moisture. Use pallets and canvas tarpaulins to cover stored materials
top to bottom.
3) Asphalt membrane waterproofing
Store and protect materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions,
and use within their indicated shelf life. Promptly remove from the site
materials or incomplete work adversely affected by exposure to moisture. Use
pallets and canvas tarpaulins to cover stored materials top to bottom.

a) Protect adjacent areas not to be waterproofed. Where necessary, apply
masking to prevent staining of surfaces to remain exposed wherever
membrane abuts to other finish surfaces; and
b) Perform work only when existing and forecast weather conditions are
within manufacturer's recommendations for material and application
method used; minimum ambient temperature is 7 degrees C.
a) Apply materials when there is no surface moisture, or visible dampness
on the substrate surface. Ensure the air temperature remains above the
temperature recommended by the manufacturer.
b) Moisture test for substrate is specified under Field Tests. Work may be
performed within heated enclosures, provided the surface temperature of
the substrate is maintained at a minimum temperature recommended by
the manufacturer, for 24 hours prior to the application of the
waterproofing, and remains above that the temperature during the cure
period recommended by the manufacturer.
514.1.8 Warranty
1) Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard warranty document
executed by authorized company official; warranty period: ten (10) years
commencing on Date of Substantial Completion;
2) Installer's Warranty: Provide warranty signed by installer as follows:
TS 500 - 179
a) Installer warrants that, upon completion of the work, surfaces treated with
waterproofing will remain free of water leakage resulting from defective
workmanship or materials for a period of Ten (10) years from Date of
Substantial Completion;
b) In the event that water leakage occurs within the warranty period from
such causes, the installer shall, at his own expense, repair, replace, or
otherwise correct such defective workmanship and materials;
c) Installer shall not be liable for consequential damages;
d) Installer's liability shall be limited to repair, replacement, or correction of
defective workmanship and materials; and
e) This warranty excludes leaks or other defects due to causes beyond the
installer's control, including but not limited to structural failure,
movement of the structure, fire, earthquakes, tornadoes, hurricanes, and
work done by other trade.
514.1.9 Qualifications
1) Waterproofing Material Manufacturer: Company specializing in waterproofing
membrane with minimum three (3) years documented experience.
2) Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three (3) years documented experience; and approved and certified
by manufacturer.
514.1.10 Pre-Installation Meeting/ Waterproofing Conference

a) Administrative Requirement: Pre-installation meeting.
b) Convene minimum one (1) week prior to commencing work of this
section.
a) Prior to starting application of the waterproofing system arrange a pre-
waterproofing conference to ensure a clear understanding of drawings and
specifications. Give the Employer seven (7) days advance written notice
of the time and place of meeting.
b) The Contractor, mechanical and electrical sub-contractor, flashing sheets
metal sub-contractor, and other trades that may do other types of work on
or over the membrane after installation shall attend this conference.
Inspect the base surface to ensure that the base surface is dry, clean, and
smooth, free of projections. Ensure that all openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves
drains through the base surface are solidly set, and cant strips and regulates
are in place.
TS 500 - 180
514.1.11 Environmental Requirements

1) Product Requirements.
2) Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater
than can be weatherproofed during the same day
3) Maintain ambient temperatures above -9.4 degrees C during application and
until liquid or mastic accessories have cured.
514.1.12 Environmental Limitations:

1) The Contractor shall apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and
substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
2) The Contractor shall not apply waterproofing during rain, fog or mist, or when
such weather conditions are imminent during application.
3) Minimum Application Temperature: -9.4 degrees C.
4) Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing
materials.
Products
a) The Contractor shall submit to Engineer the pertinent manufacturer and/or
supplier/ installer names and contact information at least one (1) month
before the intended use at the Site in the case of non-indent (locally-
sourced/ supplied materials/items) and three (3) months before the
intended use at the Site in the case of indent (imported materials/items).
c) Single Source: Obtain all waterproofing materials and system components
from a single manufacturer.
a) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the pertinent manufacturer
and/or supplier/ installer names and contact information at least one (1)
month before the intended use at the Site in the case of non-indent
(locally-sourced/ supplied materials/items) and three (3) months before
the intended use at the Site in the case of indent (imported
materials/items).
TS 500 - 181
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the pertinent manufacturer and/or
514.2.2 Materials
General: Provide waterproofing systems that prevent the passage of liquid water
under hydrostatic pressure and that comply with specified physical requirements as
demonstrated by testing performed by independent testing agency on manufacturer's
current waterproofing formulations and system design; use materials specified below.
a) Crystallization Admixture Cementitious Waterproofing in all these
locations:
i) Ground or basement slab
ii) Portable water storage structures
iii) Cement sand creed/ plaster
iv) Foundations and basements/ sub-grade structures
b) Cementitious Waterproofing in all these locations:
i) Water tanks
ii) Sewage tanks
iii) Retaining walls
iv) Lift pits
v) Balconies
vi) Concrete slabs
vii) Underground shafts
viii) Foundation and basements/ sub-grade structures
c) Flexible Cementitious Waterproofing in all these locations:
i) Toilets
ii) Planter boxes
iii) Pools
iv) Concrete gutter/ roofs
v) Wet kitchens
vi) Ponds
d) Acrylic Polymer Waterproofing in all these locations:
i) Firewalls
TS 500 - 182
ii) Concrete slab roofs

iii) Roof decks/ terraces
iv) New roofs/ walls
v) Gutters
e) Liquid Applied Elastomeric (PU) Waterproofing in all these locations:
i) Roof slab
ii) Balconies
a) Fluid-Applied Membrane ASTM C 836
b) Membrane Primer
Primers, unless specifically prohibited by the manufacturer of the fluid-
applied membrane, are required and shall be as recommended by the
fluid-applied membrane.
c) Sealant
As specified in section on “Sealants”.
d) Sealant Primer
e) Joint Filler
ASTM D1751 or D1752
f) Bond Breaker
As recommended by the manufacturer of the fluid-applied membrane.
The bond breaker shall not interfere with the curing process or other
performance properties of the fluid-applied membrane.
g) Elastomeric Sheet
Preformed sheet as recommended by the fluid-applied membrane
manufacturer. The bond strength between the fluid-applied membrane
and the preformed elastomeric sheet shall be not less than 6.9 MPa when
tested in accordance with ASTM C836.
h) Elastomeric Sheet Adhesive
As recommended by the elastomeric sheet manufacturer.
514.2.3 Waterproofing Types

1) Crystallization Admixture Waterproofing: shall be cementitious waterproofing
which is made integral to parts of concrete through crystallization process. Its
chemical agents will react with water, a non-soluble crystalline, which will then
be generated throughout the capillary voids in the concrete. This crystalline is
highly resistant to water, and it performs well even under extreme conditions
TS 500 - 183
such as pressures or aggressive chemicals. Cracks or voids up to a width of

1mm can be seal up anytime through the crystallization process.
2) Cementitious Waterproofing: is a concrete waterproofing system formulated
from Portland cement, fine quartz sand and active chemicals. It is a
crystallization product that offers durable waterproof protection to concrete.
When applied, it penetrates into the structure and becomes an integral part of
the concrete, creating a completely waterproof barrier from within to the
external surface of the structure. It is ready to mix with water and applies as
slurry of mortar consistency. It can be conveniently brushed, sprayed or
broadcasted to various concrete structures and surfaces.
3) Flexible Cementitious Waterproofing Membrane: is a two (2)-component
flexible, cement- based, polymer-modified waterproofing coating. Its 2
components consist of Portland cement, well graded sand and plasticizer. It is
formulated with specially graded fine quartz and high quality polymer to create
a brushable smooth slurry with excellent bonding and adhesion properties to
most substrates.
4) Acrylic Polymer Waterproofing Membrane: consists of a very elastic polymer
with inherent flexibility of allowing the membrane to accommodate
movements in the substrate. It is formulated to seal, waterproof and decorate
exterior surfaces and roofs. Can be applied by brush or roller.
5) Liquid-Applied Elastomeric (PU) Waterproofing: ideally to be used between
slabs to protect them against the penetration and lateral movement of water. It
is a waterproofing membrane that is cold-applied, seamless, elastomeric single
component moisture curing bitumen modified polyurethane, specially
formulated for hand application by using squeeze or roller to vertical or
horizontal surface.
6) Elastomeric Coating for Heat-Reflective, Weather Shield Waterproofing: is an
excellent energy-conserving elastic coating designed for roof, walls and
substrates that requires heat reflective & waterproofing protection. It is a “green”
product that is eco-friendly and is safe for both the applicator and the
environment. It is recommended for exterior use for all commercial buildings
and is a water-based styrene acrylic co-polymer resin system and filled with
minute heat shield cells which act as a thermal resistant blanket covering the
whole treated structure. It is a heat-reflective coating and when applied, the
ultraviolet and heat rays are reflected and emitted from the surface, reducing
the thermal conductivity between the substrate and the coating.
Execution
514.3.1 Examination
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which waterproofing systems will
be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
TS 500 - 184
514.3.2 Preparation
a) Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's
recommendations. Provide clean, dust-free, and where applicable dry
substrate for waterproofing application.
b) Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent
spillage or over spray affecting other construction.
c) Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and
migration of waterproofing fluids.
d) Remove grease, oil, form release agents, paints, and other penetrating
contaminants from concrete.
e) Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate
pockets, grout joints, tie holes, and other voids with joint detailing mastic,
hydraulic cement, or rapid-set grout.
f) Prepare and treat vertical and horizontal 90 degrees terminations, edge
terminations, penetrations through waterproofing material, expansion
joints, cracks, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898 and
manufacturer's recommendations.
g) At each area to be treated, apply two coats of joint detailing mastic; embed
joint reinforcing strip in first coat and apply second coat entirely covering
the embedded joint reinforcing strip ensuring complete saturation.
i) 90 degrees Terminations, Vertical and Horizontal: 300mm on each
side.
ii) Penetrations, Drains, Sleeves: 150mm radius around penetration and
75mm onto penetrating object.
iii) Joints and Cracks: 150mm wide on each side of joint/crack.
iv) Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks in accordance with
ASTM D 4258 prior to coating surfaces.
v) Joints and Cracks greater than 1.5mm in width: Prior to applying joint
detailing mastic, rout out joint/crack, install backer-rod and sealant to
bring flush to surface.
h) Secure and protect plumbing, electrical, mechanical and structural items
to be under or passing through waterproof membrane prior to membrane
application.
i) When it is not possible to install waterproofing before placement of
reinforcing steel, exposed reinforcing steel shall be masked by Contractor
prior to membrane application.
Coordinate the work with that of other trades to assure that components to be
incorporated into the waterproofing system are available when needed. Inspect
TS 500 - 185
and approve surfaces immediately before the application of the waterproofing

materials. Free concrete surfaces of laitance, loose aggregate, sharp projections,
grease, oil, dirt, curing compounds, and other contaminants that could
adversely affect the complete bonding of the fluid-applied membrane to the
concrete surface.
a) Flashings
The Contractor shall not begin application until penetrations through the
structural slab are in place, and until sleeves are placed through the slab
and are made watertight.
b) Drains
Drain flanges shall be flush with the surface of the structural slab. Apply
a full elastomeric sheet around the drain, with edges fully adhered to the
drain flange and to the structural slab. Do not adhere the elastomeric sheet
over the joint between the drain and the concrete slab. Take care not to
plug any drainage of weep holes. Cover the elastomeric sheet with fluid-
applied waterproofing during waterproofing application. The elastomeric
sheet shall be adhered a minimum of 100mm into the horizontal deck.
Cover this portion of the elastomeric during waterproofing application.
c) Other Penetration and Projections
Flash penetrations and projections, including vents and service pipes,
through the structural slab with an elastomeric sheet adhered to the
concrete slab and the penetration. Leave the elastomeric sheet un-adhered
for 25mm over the joint between the penetration and the concrete slab.
The elastomeric sheet shall be adhered a minimum of 100mm onto the
horizontal deck. Cover the elastomeric sheet with fluid-applied
waterproofing during the waterproofing application.
d) Walls and Vertical Surfaces
Flash wall intersections which are not of monolithic pour or constructed
with reinforced concrete joints with an elastomeric sheet adhered to both
the vertical wall surface and the concrete slab. Intersections that are
monolithic pour or constructed with reinforced concrete joints with an
elastomeric sheet adhered to both the vertical wall surface and the
concrete slab can be flashed with a vertical grade of fluid-applied
waterproofing membrane. Leave the sheet un-adhered for a distance of
300mm from the corner on both the vertical and horizontal surfaces.
Cover the elastomeric sheet with fluid-applied waterproofing during
waterproofing application.
e) Cracks and Joints
Prepare visible cracks and joints in the substrate to receive application of
the waterproofing membrane by separating these joints from the
waterproofing membrane by placing bond breaker and an elastomeric slip
between the membrane and the substrate. Cracks that show movement
shall receive a 50mm bond breaker followed by an elastomeric sheet
TS 500 - 186
adhered to the deck. Non-moving cracks shall be double coated with the
fluid-applied waterproofing.
f) Priming
Prime surfaces to receive the fluid-applied waterproofing membrane.
Apply the primer as required by the membrane manufacturer’s printed
instructions.
a) Protect waterproofing materials during transport and application.
b) Do not dilute primers and other materials, unless specifically
recommended by materials manufacturer
c) Keep containers closed except when removing contents.
d) Do not permit equipment on the project site that has residue of materials
used on previous projects.
e) Use cleaners only for cleaning, not for thinning primers or membrane
materials.
514.3.3 Waterproofing Application

a) Mix and apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
b) Do not start waterproofing installation until manufacturer's technical
representative is present.
c) Apply waterproofing to surfaces according to manufacturer's
recommendations and details and as indicated in Contract Documents.
d) Apply waterproofing by brush, unless otherwise indicated, achieving a
seamless membrane free of entrapped gases.
e) If clearance from surfaces is less than 610mm, making spray application
difficult, roller application is acceptable.
f) Spray Application: Apply one spray coat to achieve full specified
thickness
g) Roller Application: Apply minimum of two (2) coats to achieve full
specified thickness.
i) Install fiber mesh courses over nominally cured fluid-applied
membrane no later than recommended by manufacturer and before
starting subsequent construction operations.
ii) Overlap fiber mesh course seams and treat overlap as
recommended by manufacturer and secure with specified tape;
attach fiber mesh to sheet flashing as recommended by
manufacturer.
TS 500 - 187
iii) Drainage Panels: Place and secure panels to substrate according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives and adhesive
strips (sheet flashing that does not penetrate waterproofing) as
recommended by manufacturer. Overlap edges of dimpled core and
ends of fiber mesh to maintain continuity. Protect installed panels
during subsequent construction.
iv) Install drainage strip at foot of each wall, on top of footing,
extending to sub-drainage system or to daylight at lower grade
elevation.
Over the primed surfaces, provide a uniform, monolithic coating of fluid-
applied membrane, 60 mils thick, plus or minus 5 mils thick, by following the
manufacturer’s printed instructions. Apply material by trowel, squeegee, roller,
brush, spray apparatus, or other method acceptable to the membrane
manufacturer. Check wet film thickness as specified under Field Tests, and
adjust application rate as necessary to provide a uniform coating of the
thickness specified. Where possible, mark off the surface to be coated in even
units to facilitate proper coverage. At expansion joints, control joints, prepared
cracks, and termination, carry the membrane over the preformed elastomeric
sheet in uniform 60 mils thick, plus or minus 5 mils, wet thickness to provide
a monolithic coating. When work has stopped long enough for the membrane
to cure, begin the next application by wiping the previously applied materials
with a solvent so that accumulated dirt and dust, which could inhibit adhesion
of the overlapping membrane coat, is removed. Use solvent recommended by
the membrane manufacturer, as approved.
a) Work Sequence
Perform the work so that protection board is installed prior to using the
waterproofed surface. Do not permanently install protection board until
the membrane has passed the flood test specified under Field Tests. Move
material storage areas as work progresses to prevent abuse of the
membrane and overloading the structural deck.
b) Protection Board
Protect the fluid-applied membrane by placing protection board over the
membrane. Timing of placement shall fall within the parameters
established by the fluid-applied membrane manufacturer. Protect
membrane application if the protection board is not placed immediately.
Butt protection boards together and do not overlap.

1) Verify thickness of membrane using a lightly oiled, needle nose depth gauge,
taking four (4) readings over a 25mm square area in every meter square area.
Record the minimum reading. Mark test areas for repair if minimum reading is
below minimum specified thickness.
TS 500 - 188
2) Patch deficient test areas with additional waterproofing to achieve specified

minimum dry thickness, extending minimum of 25mm beyond the test
perimeter.
514.3.5 Curing, Protecting and Cleaning

1) Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's recommendations, taking care
to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing.
2) Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3) Special Precautions
Protect components during transport and application of waterproofing
materials. Do not dilute primers and other materials, unless specifically
recommended by the materials manufacturer. Keep containers closed except
when removing the contents. Do not allow contact of various materials through
mixing of remains and dual use of application equipment for mixing and
transporting materials. Do not permit equipment on the site that has residue of
materials on previous projects. Use cleaners for cleaning, not for thinning
primers of membrane materials. Ensure that workers and other who walk on
the cured membrane wear clean, soft-soled shoes to avoid damaging the
waterproofing materials.
4) Field Tests
a) Moisture Test
Prior to application of the waterproofing, check moisture content of
substrate with moisture meter. An acceptable device is the Delmhorst
Moisture Meter, Model BD7/2E/CS, Type 21 E. Similar meters by other
manufacturers, which are suitable for the purpose, may be used as
approved. Do not begin application until the meter reading indicates “dry”
range or similar reading indicating that substrate is suitably dry.
b) Film Thickness
Check wet film thickness every 10 square meters (sq.m.) during
application by placing flat metal plates on the substrate or using a mil-
thickness gauge especially manufactured for the purpose.
c) Flood Test
After application and curing is complete, plug drains and fill the
waterproofed area with water to a depth of 50mm. A minimum 48-hour
cure time shall be required prior to flood testing in order to ensure full
cure of the membrane and adhesive prior to subjecting them to full flood
test of water. Allow water to stand 24 hours. Test water tightness by
carefully measuring the water level at the beginning and end of the 24-
hour period. In the event that the water level falls drain the water, allow
the installation to dry, and inspect. Make repairs or replace as required
TS 500 - 189
and repeat the test. Work shall not proceed before approval of repairs of
replacement.
5) Areas of Application
a) 5-ply Elastomeric Membrane Waterproofing or approved equal, buried
type waterproofing.
i) 60mils for all roof deck areas as required & indicated in the
drawings with 50 x 50 x 3mm wire mesh reinforcement and
50mm thk. concrete topping.
ii) 40mils for all upper floor toilets as required & indicated in the
drawings.
b) 3-ply elastomeric membrane waterproofing or approved equal, exposed
type elastomeric waterproofing.
i) 32mils for roof deck areas with minor pedestrian traffic.
ii) 25mils for concrete gutters and deck areas with minimal to no
pedestrian traffic.

1) Waterproofing is measured as the “Square Meters”.
Rate of Waterproofing shall be included the following:
a) All required base surface preparatory works as specified in the Section.
b) Water leakage test after completion of the Waterproofing works and
approval by the Engineer.
c) Field Tests
d) Protect completed waterproofing surface and carry out water leakage test
and approved by the Engineer.

Item Number
514(1) Crystalline Cementitious Type Waterproofing Square meter
514(2) Polyurethane Membrane System Waterproofing Square meter
TS 500 - 190
514(3) Asphalt Waterproofing Square meter

Number
D514(1) Crystalline Cementitious Type Waterproofing Square meter
D514(2) Polyurethane Membrane System Waterproofing Square meter
D514(3) Asphalt Waterproofing Square meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 191
515 DAMP-PROOFING
The Work
installation onsite of damp-proofing, in accordance with this Specification and in
conformity with the Drawings or as established by the Engineer.
515.1.1 General
Work of this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the
equipment and services necessary to complete the required damp-proofing as shown
515.1.2 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing and supply of materials including equipment,
and performing labor necessary to complete the installation of damp-proofing as
shown on plans and specified herein.
Damp-proofing shall be installed under the Concrete slab-on-grad within the Station
Building and all building I the Depot.
515.1.3 Submittals
Submit the materials to the Engineer for his approval.
515.1.3.1 Certificates of Compliance

Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance attesting that damp-proofing materials are
physically and chemically compatible with each other.
515.1.3.2 Manufacturer’s Data

Includes material description and physical properties, application details, and
recommendations regarding shelf life, application procedures, and precautions on
flammability and toxicity.
515.1.4 Samples
Submit mock-up samples for damp-proofing.
515.1.5 Delivery and Storage

The Contractor shall: Deliver manufactured damp-proofing materials in
manufacturer’s original, unopened containers, with labels intact and legible.
Containers of materials covered by referenced specification number shall bear the
specification number, type, and class of the contents. Deliver materials in sufficient
quantity to continue work without interruption. Store and protect materials in
sufficient quantity to continue work without interruption. Store and protect materials
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, and use within their indicated
TS 500 - 192
shelf life. Promptly remove from the site materials or incomplete work adversely
affected by exposure to moisture. Use pallets and canvas tarpaulins to cover stored
materials top to bottom.
515.1.7 Preparation
Coordinate the work with that of other trades to assure that components to be
incorporated into the damp-proofing system are available when needed. Inspect and
approve surfaces immediately before the application of the damp-proofing materials.
515.1.8 Application
Over the 100mm thick gravel bed, carefully cover it with the polyethylene sheet, at
400mm overlaps.
1) Work Sequence
Perform the work so that protection board is installed prior to using the
waterproofed surface. Do not permanently install protection board until the
membrane has passed the flood test specified under Field Tests. Move material
storage areas as work progresses to prevent abuse of the membrane and
overloading the structural deck.

Quantity of Damp-proofing is no measured under this Section, but rate shall be
deemed to be included in the appropriate Pay Items, such as Concrete slab on Grad,
Architectural Concrete and other Sections.
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 193
516 SPRAYED AND AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
The Work
installation onsite of sprayed fire-resistive materials, including all anchorage
516.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required sprayed fire-resistive
materials, as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.

requirements of the contract documents.
The Work of this section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services
necessary to complete the sprayed fire-resistive materials as shown on the drawings
and/or specified herein, including but is not necessarily limited to the following:
1) Spray-on fireproofing for structural steel and metal deck.
2) Seal coat over fireproofing in special areas.
3) Preparation of surfaces.
4) Field quality control.
516.1.3 Submittals
516.1.3.1 Product Data

For each fire-resistive product specified.
516.1.3.2 Shop Drawings

Submit structural framing plans indicating the following:
1) Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying sprayed
fire-resistive material.
2) Extent of sprayed fire-resistive material for each construction and fire-
resistance rating, including the following:
3) Applicable fire-resistive design designations of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
4) Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance ratings of
structural components and assemblies.
TS 500 - 194
516.1.3.3 Product Certificates

Signed by manufacturer of sprayed fire-resistive material certifying that the products
furnished comply with requirements.
516.1.3.4 Installer Certificates

Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements.
516.1.3.5 Qualification Data

For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" section to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names
and addresses, names and addresses of Engineers and Employers, and other
information specified.
If primer is used on steel or metal deck, submit certifications by supplier of primer
that primer is compatible with materials, and will not impair the required
performance of the installed fireproofing. Such certification shall be accompanied by
evidence that the primer was successfully used in conjunction with the fireproofing
material in a UL test applicable to the construction.
516.1.3.6 Product Test Reports

Indicate that physical properties of proposed sprayed fire-resistive materials comply
with specified requirements based on comprehensive testing of current product
formulations by a qualified testing and inspecting agency according to requirements
specified by Engineer.
516.1.3.7 Research/ Evaluation Reports

Evidence of sprayed fire-resistive material's compliance with building code in effect
for Project.
516.1.4.1 Installer Qualifications

Engage an experienced installer certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by sprayed
fire-resistive material manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and
training to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. A
manufacturer's willingness to sell its sprayed fire-resistive materials to the Contractor
or to an installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on
the buyer.
TS 500 - 195
516.1.5.1 Source Limitations

Obtain each type of sprayed fire-resistive material from one source and by a single
manufacturer.
Provide only products containing no detectable asbestos.
516.1.5.2 Mockups
After processing of initial submittals and before delivery and installation of
fireproofing materials, prepare a sample installation of fireproofing work,
approximately 9 sq. m in area; providing an example of each type required, applied
on each different substrate, to produce each different rating as required and
reasonably representative of entire sprayed on fireproofing work, for joint approval
by representative of fire resistant material manufacturer and the Employer. Work in
other areas shall not proceed until mock-up has been completed. Mock-up work
which remains in compliance with requirements and is in undamaged and acceptable
condition may be retained as final work in place.
516.1.5.3 Delivery, Storage and Handling

Deliver products to site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible
manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture;
shelf life, if applicable; and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project.
Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from site and
discard materials whose shelf life has expired.
Store materials inside, under cover, aboveground, so they are kept dry until ready for
use. Remove from site and discard materials that have deteriorated.
516.1.6 Conditions
516.1.6.1 Environmental Limitations

Do not apply sprayed fire-resistive material when ambient or substrate temperatures
are 5 deg. C or lower, unless temporary protection and heat is provided to maintain
temperatures at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after
product application.
516.1.6.2 Ventilation
Ventilate building spaces during and after application of sprayed fire-resistive
material. Use natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation until
fire-resistive material dries thoroughly.
TS 500 - 196
516.1.6.3 Sequencing
Sequence and coordinate application of sprayed fire-resistive materials with other
related work specified in other sections to comply with the following requirements:
1) Provide temporary enclosures for interior applications to prevent deterioration
of fire-resistive material due to exposure to unfavorable environmental
conditions.
2) Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other
damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its
application.
3) Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing
has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fire-
resistive material.
4) Do not begin applying fire-resistive material until clips, hangers, supports,
sleeves, and other items penetrating fire protection are in place.
5) Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with
applying fire-resistive material until application of fire protection is completed.
6) Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive
material has been applied, inspected, tested, and corrections have been made to
defective applications.
516.1.7 Warranty
516.1.7.1 General Warranty

The special warranty specified in this section shall not deprive the Employer of other
rights the Employer may have under other provisions of the contract documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the contract documents.
516.1.7.2 Special Warranty

Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor and cosigned by Installer,
agreeing to repair or replace sprayed fire-resistive materials that fail within the
specified warranty period.
Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking, flaking, eroding in excess of
specified requirements; peeling; and delaminating of sprayed fire-resistive materials
from substrates due to defective materials and workmanship within the specified
warranty period.
Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and the
Employer's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than
those investigated and approved during fire-response testing, and other causes not
reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use.
TS 500 - 197
Products
516.2.2 Concealed Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials

1) General: For concealed applications of sprayed fire-resistive materials, provide
manufacturer's standard products complying with requirements indicated in
this section for material composition and physical properties representative of
installed products.
2) Material Composition: Cementitious sprayed fire-resistive material consisting
of factory-mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or Portland cement binders and
lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at site to form a
slurry or mortar for conveyance and application.
3) Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher
values required to attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per
standard test methods referenced with each property listed as follows:
a) Dry Density: 240kg/cu. m for average and individual densities regardless
of density indicated in referenced fire-resistive design, or greater if
required to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 60S or
AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Appendix A, "Alternate Method for
Density Determination."
b) Thickness: Provide minimum average thickness required for fire-resistive
design shown on approved submittals.
c) Fireproofing shall be of thicknesses and density to meet the requirements
of the Vietnam Building Code for Type of construction indicated on
drawings.
d) Bond Strength: 7.2KPA per ASTM E 736.
4) Compressive Strength: 35.9KPA as determined in the laboratory per ASTM E
761. Minimum thickness of sprayed fire-resistive material tested shall be
19mm and minimum dry density shall be as specified, but not less than
240kg/cu. m.
5) Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
6) Deflection: No cracking, spalling, delamination, or the like per ASTM E 759.
TS 500 - 198
7) Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, delamination, or the like

per ASTM E 760.
8) Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.270g/sq. m in 24 hours per ASTM E
859. For laboratory tests, minimum thickness of sprayed fire-resistive material
is 19mm, maximum dry density is 240kg/cu. m, test specimens are not pre-
purged by mechanically-induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after
24 hours.
9) Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sprayed fire-resistive materials
with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing
identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a) Flame Spread: 10 or less.
b) Smoke Developed: 0.
10) Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.
516.2.3 Exposed Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials

1) General: For exposed applications of sprayed fire-resistive materials, provide
manufacturer's standard products complying with requirements indicated for
material composition and for minimum physical properties of each product
listed, measured by standard test methods referenced with each property.
2) Cementitious Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material: Factory-mixed, dry, cement
aggregate formulation, chloride-free formulation of gypsum or Portland
cement binders, additives, and inorganic aggregates, mixed with water at site
to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application, complying with the
following requirements:
3) Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities as required for fire-
resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-
A, Appendix A, "Alternate Method for Density Determination," but with an
average density of not less than 39 lb/cu. ft.
a) Bond Strength: 48KPA per ASTM E 736.
b) Compressive Strength: 2067KPA per ASTM E 761.
c) Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
d) Deflection: No cracking, spalling, delamination, or the like per ASTM E
759.
4) Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, delamination, or the like
per ASTM E 760.
a) Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of0.270g/sq. m per ASTM E 859.
b) Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136.
5) Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sprayed fire-resistive materials
with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing
TS 500 - 199
identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a) Flame Spread: 10 or less.
b) Smoke Developed: 0.
c) Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.
6) For exterior applications of sprayed fire-resistive material, provide
manufacturer's formulation approved for surfaces exposed to the exterior.
a) Products: Subject to compliance with applicable international
requirements for Cement-Aggregate Cementitious Sprayed Fire-Resistive
Material.
516.2.4 Auxiliary Fire-Resistive Materials

1) General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with
sprayed fire-resistive materials and substrates and are approved by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for use in fire-resistive designs indicated.
2) Adhesive for Bonding Fire-Resistive Material: Product approved by
manufacturer of sprayed fire-resistive material, used where required by
manufacturer to insure proper bond.
3) Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight,
configuration, and finish required to comply with fire-resistive designs
indicated and fire-resistive product manufacturer's written recommendations.
Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and other anchorage devices
required to attach lath to substrates and to receive sprayed fire-resistive
material.
4) Sealer for Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material in Elevator Shafts: Transparent-
drying, water-dispersible protective coating by manufacturer of sprayed-fiber
fire-resistive material.
516.2.5 Stone Wool Products and Cement Base Fire Protective Materials
1) Material: Stone wool products are non-combustible with a melting point of
approximately 1000°C. They are particularly suitable for thermal insulation,
fire protection and sound reduction/absorption. These materials are inorganic
and contain no nutritious substance, and therefore it will not be attacked by
microorganisms. Mineral wool will not rot and does not attract vermin. NO
chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs), hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs),
hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs), or asbestos shall be used in the
manufacture of stone wool products.
2) Components: Stone Wool Products and Cement Base Fire Protective Materials
shall conform to JIS A 9504 or equivalent standard approved by the Engineer
while ordinary Portland cement conform to JIS R 5210 or approved by the
Engineer.
TS 500 - 200
3) Mixing ratio of the stone wool and cement is as shown below:
Material Stone Wool Cement
Ratio (Weight) 60% 40%
4) Density of stone wool as dried shall not be less than 0.28g/cm2.

5) The thickness of stone wool products and cement base fire protective materials
shall be as shown in the Drawings.
516.2.6 Thermal Stone Wool (Blanket)

1) Thermal stone wool products are made of basalt, a volcanic stone.
2) Common applications: Thermal stone wool is manufactured in a wide variety
of thicknesses and densities to suit most requirements, and are suitable for
general application in residential, commercial and industrial buildings.
3) Facings: Thermal stone wool products for use shall have plain, aluminum foil
facings and one (1)-sided or two (2)-sided glass tissue facings.
4) Packaging and Storage: Thermal stone wool shall be supplied in folded or roll
form (depending on factory) and shrink-wrapped in polyethylene sheets for
ease of handling, transportation, storage and identification. Products should be
stored indoors or under waterproof covering.
5) Dimensions:
Thickness (mm) Length x Width (mm)
25 10000 x 1200
50 d 200
Execution
516.3.1 Examination
1) Examine substrates, with Installer present, to determine whether they are in
satisfactory condition to receive sprayed fire-resistive material. A substrate is
in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following:
a) Substrates are free of oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible
primers, loose mill scale, dirt, or other foreign substances capable of
impairing bond of fire-resistive material with substrate under conditions
of normal use or fire exposure.
b) Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers,
support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.
c) Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other
suspended construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive
material.
TS 500 - 201
2) Do not proceed with installation of fire-resistive material until unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected.
516.3.2 Preparation
1) Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive material,
including oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers, and loose mill
scale.
2) For exposed applications, repair substrates to remove any surface
imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished
surface of sprayed fire-resistive material. Remove minor projections and fill
voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application.
3) Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive
materials during application. Provide temporary enclosure as required to
confine spraying operations, protect the environment, and ensure maintenance
of adequate ambient conditions for temperature and ventilation.
1) Comply with fire-resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for
mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to
convey and spray on fire-resistive material, as applicable to particular
conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings
indicated.
2) Install metal lath, as required, to comply with fire-resistance ratings and fire-
resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of
exposure and intended use. Securely attach lath to substrate in position required
for support and reinforcement of fire-resistive material. Use anchorage devices
of type recommended in writing by fire-resistive material manufacturer. Attach
lathing accessories where indicated or required for secure attachment to
substrate.
3) Coat substrates with adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where
required to achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by fire-
resistive material manufacturer for material and application indicated.
4) Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate
to be protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by fire-resistive
material manufacturer, install body of fire-resistive covering in a single course.
5) Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the
spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application
or other placement method recommended in writing by manufacturer.
6) Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from
the sprayed fire-resistive material over which they are applied.
7) Maintain ambient conditions during installation and for cure period following
installation, as recommended by manufacturer. Provide ventilation and avoid
excessive rate of drying.
TS 500 - 202
8) Installation Sequence of Fireproofing

9) All tabs, hangers, supports, sleeves are to be installed by other trades prior to
application of the fireproofing materials.
10) All ducts, piping, conduit, etc., shall be installed after the application of the
sprayed fireproofing.
11) All patching and repairing of sprayed fireproofing, due to cutting by other
trades or testing and inspection, shall be performed under this section.
12) Provisions shall be made for ventilation to properly dry the fireproofing after
application. In enclosed areas lacking natural ventilation, air circulation and
ventilation must be provided.

1) Testing Agency: The Employer will engage a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test
reports.
2) Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report
whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements.
3) Testing and inspecting of completed applications of sprayed fire-resistive
material will take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using
methods as follows. Do not proceed with application of fire-resistive material
for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fire-
resistive material show compliance with requirements.
4) Extent: For each 93 sq. m area, or partial area, on each floor, testing and
inspecting agency will evaluate the following characteristics. Tested values
must equal or exceed values indicated and values required for approved fire-
resistance design.
a) Thickness for Floors, Roofs, and Walls: From the average of 10
measurements from a 0.093 sq. m sample area, with sample width of not
less than 150mm per ASTM E 605.
b) Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of
structural members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross
section for structural frame beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single
cross section for joists and trusses, and 12 measurements of a single cross
section for columns per ASTM E 605.
c) Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At
frequency and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of
each type of construction, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual
12-A, Appendix A, "Alternate Method for Density Determination."
d) Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing
Members: Cohesion and adhesion at frequency and from sample size
indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction, per
ASTM E 736.
TS 500 - 203
5) When testing discovers applications of fire-resistive material not in compliance

with requirements, testing and inspecting agency will perform additional
random
6) Remove and replace applications of fire-resistive material where test results
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements for cohesion and
adhesion or for density, or both.
7) Apply additional fire-resistive material per manufacturer's written instructions
where test results indicate that thickness does not comply with specified
requirements.
8) Additional testing and inspecting, at the Contractor's expense, will be
performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with
specified requirements.
516.3.5 Cleaning, Protection and repair

1) Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each
containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from
surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence
of soiling.
2) Cure exposed sprayed fire-resistive material according to product
manufacturer's written recommendations to prevent premature drying.
3) Protect fire-resistive material, according to advice of product manufacturer and
Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes
so fire protection will be without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
4) Coordinate application of fire-resistive material with other construction to
minimize the need to cut or remove fire protection. As installation of other
construction proceeds, inspect fire-resistive material and patch any damaged or
removed areas.
5) Repair or replace work that has not been successfully protected.

Sprayed Fire-Resistive is not applicable for the Package.
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 204
517 FIRESTOP
The Work
installation onsite of firestop, including all anchorage provisions, in accordance with
this Specification and in conformity with the Drawings or as established by the
Engineer.
517.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required firestop, as shown on the
517.1.2 Summary
1) Section Includes:
a) Through Penetration Firestopping.
b) Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
2) Related Sections
a) GS 100 “General Specification”
b) TS 400 – Station & Buildings (S&B) Structural.
c) TS 500 – S&B Architectural.
d) TS 600 – S&B Mechanical.
e) TS 700 – S&B Electrical.
517.1.3 References
1) American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a) ANSI/UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
b) ANSI/UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
c) ANSI/UL 1479 - Standard for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
d) ANSI/UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
2) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a) ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
b) ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building
Construction and Materials.
c) ASTM E 814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration
Firestops.
TS 500 - 205
d) ASTM E 1399 - Standard Test Method for Cyclic Movement and

Measuring the Minimum and Maximum Joint Widths of Architectural Joint
Systems.
e) ASTM E 1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems.
f) ASTM E 2174 - Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed
Firestops.
g) ASTM E 2307 - Fire Tests of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using
Intermediate Scale, Multi-Story Test Apparatus.
h) ASTM E 2393 - Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire
Resistive Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers.
3) Factory Mutual (FM) - FM4991 - Standard for Approval of Firestop
Contractors.
4) International Code Congress (ICC):
a) International Building Code (IBC).
b) International Mechanical Code (IMC)
c) International Fire Code (IFC)
5) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a) NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
b) NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
c) NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of
Commercial Cooking Operations.
d) NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
e) NFPA 5000 - Building Construction and Safety Code.
6) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - UL Building Materials Directory:
a) Through-Penetration Firestops Systems (XHEZ).
b) Joint Systems (XHBN).
c) Firestop Devices (XHJI).
d) Forming Materials (XHKU).
e) Wall Opening Protective Materials (CLIV).
f) Fill, Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW).
7) International Standards Organization (ISO):
a) ISO 6944
b) ISO 10295-1: 2007.
c) ISO 10295-2: 2009.
d) ISO 10295-3:
TS 500 - 206

1) Provide systems that are listed by at least one the following:
a) Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), in "Fire Resistance Directory".
b) Factory Mutual (FM), in FMRC Approval Guide.
c) Any other qualified independent testing and inspection agency that
conducts periodic follow-up inspections and is acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
2) Provide firestop products that are flexible enough to allow for pipe vibration in
a through penetration application.
3) Provide fire resistive sealants and sprays for construction joint applications that
are flexible enough to satisfy the movement criteria per the test standards
ASTM E 1399, ASTM E 1966 or ANSI/UL 2079.
4) Provide products with the appropriate flame spread index and smoke develop
index, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
5) Provide products that meet the intent of the L rating classification for the
movement of smoke per ANSI/UL 1479 for through penetrations and
ANSI/UL 2079 for construction joints.
6) Provide products identical to those tested and listed for classification by UL,
Intertek or any other qualified independent testing agency.
7) Provide products that bear classification marking of qualified independent
testing agency.
8) Where firestop systems not listed by any listing agency are required due to
project conditions, submit a substitution proposal with evidence specified.
9) Use only products specifically listed for use in listed systems.
10) Provide products that are compatible with each other, with the substrates
forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating the fire-stopping,
under the conditions represented by this project, based on testing and field
performance demonstrated by manufacturer.
11) Fire-stopping materials must meet and be acceptable for use by all building
codes and NFPA codes cited in this section.
12) Provide products that meet the intent of the state or local guidelines on volatile
organic compounds (VOC).
13) Where applicable provide products that meet the intent of the F rating
classification for passage of flame per ANSI/UL 1479 for through penetrations.
14) Where applicable provide products that meet the intent of the T rating
classification for the transfer of temperature per ANSI/UL 1479 for through
penetrations.
TS 500 - 207
15) Provide products that meet the intent of the L rating classification for the
movement of smoke per ANSI/UL 1479 for through penetrations and
ANSI/UL 2079 for construction joints.
16) Where applicable provide products that meet the intent of the W rating
classification for passage of water per ANSI/UL 1479 for through penetrations.
517.1.5 Submittals
1) Submit under provisions of the Contract and General Requirements.
2) Shop Drawings: For each fire-stopping system, provide the following:
a) Listing agency's detailed drawing showing opening, penetrating item(s),
and fire-stopping materials, identified with listing agency's name and
number or designation and fire rating achieved.
b) For proposed systems that do not conform strictly to the listing, submit
written instructions showing modifications and approved by firestop
system manufacturer.
c) Submit under provisions of the International Building Code (IBC) section
107 and 703 requiring a submittal package for fire-resistance ratings and
fire tests.
3) Product Certificates: Submit certificates of conformance signed by firestop
system manufacturer certifying that materials furnished comply with
requirements.
4) Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product data sheets on each material to
be used in firestop systems. Information on manufacturer's product data sheet
should include:
a) Product characteristics including compliance with appropriate
ASTM/UL/ANSI test standards.
b) Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
5) Installation Instruction: Furnish manufacturer's installation instructions.

1) General: All through-penetration firestop systems and construction gap fire
resistive systems shall be installed with approved methods using materials that
have been tested and classified to produce an approved assembly.
2) Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will
be supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty five (25) years’
experience.
a) Products shall be manufactured in a facility that follows ISO 9001 best
practices.
3) Installer Qualifications: Firm must be qualified by having experience, staff, and
be properly trained to install the specified products, and meets the following
criteria:
TS 500 - 208
a) Sub-contractor is a Master Contractor.

b) Sub-contractor is a Certified/Trained contractor.
c) Sub-contractor is acceptable to manufacturer.
d) Sub-contractor is acceptable to Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) i.e.
local authorities.
e) Sub-contractor has completed the manufacturer's certified product
installation training.
f) Sub-contractor must provide a list of completed projects as evidence of
experience; include project name and address, employer's name and
address, and engineer's name and phone number.
g) Certificate: Sub-contractor should provide certificate of qualification.
4) Codes: Where manufacturer's application procedures are in conflict with those
of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction, the stricter guidelines will prevail.
5) Pre-installation Meetings: Meetings to agree on firestop requirements,
conditions, manufacturer's instructions.

1) Deliver and store products until ready for installation in manufacturer's original
unopened packaging, legibly marked with manufacturer's name and product
identification, date of manufacture, lot number, listing agency's classification
marking, curing/dry time, mixing instructions (if applicable) and Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) reference number.
2) Store and handle in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or damage due to
moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, and other causes; follow
manufacturer's instructions.
3) Store and dispose of hazardous materials, and materials contaminated by
hazardous materials, in accordance with requirements of local AHJ.

1) Coordinate construction and cutting of openings so that each particular firestop
system may be installed in accordance with its listing, including assembly
rating, L rating, sizing, sleeves, manufacturer’s published STC rating and
penetrating items.
2) Coordinate fire-stopping of dynamic and static construction joints (top-of-wall,
bottom-of-wall, floor-to-floor, floor-to-wall), wall-to-wall, perimeter so that
each particular system may be installed in accordance with its listing, including
assembly rating, sizing, movement capabilities and manufacturer’s published
STC rating.
3) Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)
within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install
TS 500 - 209
fire-stopping under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute

limits.
4) Provide ventilation as required by fire-stopping manufacturer, including
mechanical ventilation if required.
517.1.9 Warranty
At project closeout, provide to the Employer or the Engineer an executed copy of the
manufacturer's standard limited warranty against manufacturing defect, outlining its
terms, conditions, and exclusions from coverage.
Products
3) Single Source: To maintain control and integrity of the firestop applications, a
single manufacturer should be used. Specific UL or approved listing agencies
systems applicable to each type of firestop condition should be supplied by one
manufacturer.
517.2.2 Scope/Application
1) Provide installed firestop products that limit the spread of fire, heat, smoke,
and gasses through otherwise unprotected openings in rated assemblies,
including walls, partitions, floors, roof/ceilings, and similar locations, restoring
the integrity of the fire rated construction to its original fire rating.
2) Provide firestop systems listed for the specific combination of fire-registant
construction, type of penetrating item, annular space requirements, and fire
rating, and the following criteria:
a) F-Rating: Equal to or greater than the fire-resistance rating of the
assembly in which the fire-stopping will be installed.
b) T-Rating: In habitable areas where penetrating items are exposed to
potential contact with materials on fire side(s) of rated assembly, T-rating
must equal its F-rating.
c) L-Rating: L-rating of 5.5 cu. m/h/m maximum at ambient temperatures.
d) W-Rating: meets UL Water Leakage Test, W Rating – Class 1
requirements for systems tested and listed in accordance with ANSI/UL
1479.
TS 500 - 210
e) Wall Penetrations: Through penetration systems must be symmetrical,

with the same rating from both sides of the wall. Membrane penetrations
may be asymmetrical.
f) Testing: Determine ratings in accordance with ASTM E 814 or UL 1479.
3) Provide fire-resistive systems listed for construction gaps per the specific
combination of fire-resistant construction type, configuration, gap dimensions,
and fire rating, and the following criteria:
a) Fire resistance rating must be equal to or greater than that of the assembly
in which it is to be installed.
b) Movement capability must be appropriate to the potential movement of
the gap, demonstrated by testing in accordance with ASTM E
1399/ASTM E 1966/UL 2079 for minimum of 500 cycles at 10 cycles per
minute.
c) L-Rating: L-rating of 1 cfm per linear foot (5.5 cu m/h/m) maximum.
d) Determine ratings in accordance with ASTM E 1966/UL 2079.
517.2.3 Through Penetration Firestop Products

1) Fire Barrier Cast-in-Place Devices: Fire-stopping device for use prior to a
concrete pour. Adjustable height with pull tabs, straight edge design for close
placement to walls and adjacent devices.
a) Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, or 3 hour fire-resistant systems.
b) Locations: Horizontal assemblies only.
2) Fire Barrier Ultra RC Pack: One piece metal collar assembly encasing
intumescent material for fire-stopping of pipes and cables through rated walls
and floors.
a) Fire Resistance: For use in 1- or 2-hour fire-resistant systems.
b) Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.
3) Fire Barrier Ultra Plastic Pipe Device: Intumescent device for fire-stopping of
plastic pipe and cables through rated walls and floors.
a) Fire Resistance: For use in 1-, 2- or 3-hour fire-resistant systems.
b) Configuration: One-piece metal collar, with locking latch and bendable
tabs to secure; equipped also for conventional anchoring.
c) Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.
4) Fire Barrier RC-1 Restricting Collar with either FS 195+ Wrap Strip or Wrap
Strip (reference available product descriptions): For fire-stopping of plastic
pipes from 4 inches (102mm) to 10 inches (254mm) in diameter.
a) Fire Resistance: For use in 1- or 2-hour fire-resistant systems.
b) Material: 28-gauge steel.
TS 500 - 211
c) Size: 7.6m roll.

d) Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.
5) Fire Barrier CP25WB+ Sealant: High-performance, intumescent, water-based
sealant. No-sag, fast drying, paintable, red in color. Versatile firestop sealant
for pipes (not for use with CPVC), cables, cable tray, blank opening and other
penetrations along with mineral wool or other fire-resistant assembly products.
a) Fire Resistance: For use in 1-, 2-, 3- or 4-hour fire-resistant systems.
c) STC rating of 54 when tested in STC 54-rated wall assembly.
6) Fire Barrier IC 15WB+ Sealant: General-purpose, intumescent, water-based
sealant. No-sag, fast drying, paintable, yellow in color. Economical firestop
sealant for pipes, cables, cable tray, blank opening and other penetrations along
with mineral wool or other fire-resistant assembly products.
a) Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire-resistant systems.
7) Fire Barrier Sealant FD 150+: Single-part, water-based, acrylic latex sealant.
No-sag, low-shrinkage, low VOC. Blue, red or limestone color. Used to
firestop for pipe penetrations (not for use with CPVC).
a) Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hour fire-resistant systems.
8) Fire Barrier Water Tight Sealant 3000 WT: Single-part, water-tight,
intumescent silicone firestop sealant for filling voids in concrete gypsum, metal,
plastic, wood and insulation. Light gray color with black flecks. Meets UL
Water Leakage Test, W Rating – Class 1 requirements.
a) Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hour fire-resistant systems.
9) Fire Barrier Water Tight 1000 NS Sealant: Single-part, non-slump fire-
stopping silicone sealant for floor and wall openings. Light gray color. Meets
UL Water Leakage Test, W Rating – Class 1 requirements.
a) Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hours fire-resistant systems.
TS 500 - 212
10) Fire Barrier Water Tight Sealant 1003 SL: Single-part, self-leveling fire-
stopping silicone sealant for floor openings. Light gray color. Meets UL Water
Leakage Test, W Rating – Class 1 requirements.
a) Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2 or 3 hours fire-resistant systems.
b) Locations: For horizontal assemblies only.
11) Fire Barrier Sealant 2000 NS: Single-part, non-slump elastomeric silicone
firestop sealant. Sag-resistant, low VOC. Light grey color. Used in mechanical,
electrical and plumbing applications to firestop openings and penetrations
through fire-resistant floor or wall assemblies. Typical penetrants include:
metallic pipe, non-metallic pipe (FGG/BM system CPVC compatible), conduit,
power and communication cable and telephone or electrical wiring.
a) Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hours fire-resistant systems.
b) Locations: Vertical and horizontal assemblies.
c) STC-Rating of 56 when tested in STC 56-rated wall assembly.
12) Fire Barrier Sealant 2000+: Single-part, elastomeric silicone firestop sealant.
Sag-resistant, low VOC. Light grey color. Used in mechanical, electrical and
plumbing applications to firestop openings and penetrations through fire-
resistant floor or wall assemblies. Typical penetrants include: metallic pipe,
non-metallic pipe (FGG/BM system CPVC compatible), conduit, power and
communication cable and telephone or electrical wiring.
a) Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hours fire-resistant systems.
b) Locations: Vertical and horizontal assemblies.
c) STC-Rating of 56 when tested in STC 56-rated wall assembly.
13) Fire Barrier Moldable Putty+: One-part, 100 percent solids intumescent
firestop. Remains pliable, flexible and easily re-enterable. Non-toxic synthetic
formula. Versatile putty for pipes, cables, cable tray, blank opening and other
penetrations along with mineral wool or other fire-resistant assembly products.
a) Type: Stick or Pad
b) Fire Resistance: For use in 1-, 2- or 3-hour fire-resistant systems.
c) Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.
14) Fire Barrier 2001 Silicone RTV Foam: Two-part, liquid-silicone elastomer,
foams in place when mixed. For use sealing large or complex openings such
as cable bundles, cable trays and conduit banks.
a) Fire Resistance: For use in 1-, 2- or 3 hours fire-resistant systems.
15) Fire Barrier Mortar: For sealing openings in concrete and masonry walls and
floors. Self-Leveling, non-sag, low VOC.
TS 500 - 213

16) Fire Barrier Self-Locking Pillow: Self-contained, intumescent firestop pillow
with interlocking strips. Meets fire rating without the use of wire mesh. For
use in fire-stopping larger openings
17) Fire Barrier Pillow: Self-contained, intumescent firestop product. Meets fire
rating without the use of wire mesh. For use in fire-stopping larger openings
18) Fire Barrier CS-195+ Composite Sheet: Organic/inorganic intumescent
elastomeric sheet, bonded on one side to a layer of 28-gauge galvanized steel.
Other side reinforced with steel-wire mesh and covered with aluminum foil.
For use in fire-stopping larger openings.
a) Thickness: Nominal 0.3 inch (7.6mm).
b) Thermal Expansion: 8 - 10 times original size.
c) Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 645 kPa/489 percent.
d) Fire Resistance: For use in 1, 2, 3 or 4 hours fire-resistant systems.
e) Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.
19) Wrap Strip: Graphite based, flexible, largely inorganic, intumescent mat. For
use around non-metallic piping with or with RC-1 collar.
20) T. Fire Barrier FS-195+ Wrap/Strip: One-part, organic/inorganic intumescent
strip with foil on one side. May be cut to fit irregular shapes. For use around
non-metallic piping with or with RC-1 collar.
a) Length: 610mm.
b) Width: 1 or 2 inches.
c) Fire Resistance: For use in 1-, 2-, 3- or 4-hour fire-resistant systems.
d) Locations: Vertical assemblies, horizontal assemblies and smoke barrier.
21) Fire Barrier Pass-Through Devices: One-Piece device for fire-stopping of cable
penetrations through rated walls and floors.
TS 500 - 214
22) 3M Fire Barrier Tuck-In: Graphite-based, flexible, intumescent wrap strip for
use around non-metallic piping. Adhesive closure tab.
23) Fire Barrier Putty Sleeve Kit: Device used for fire-stopping of cable
penetrations through fire-resistant walls and floors.
517.2.4 Fire-Resistive Joint Products

1) Fire Barrier Sealant FD 150+: Single-part, water-based sealant. Sag-resistant,
low-shrinkage, low VOC.
b) Location: For use at top-of-wall, bottom-of-wall, wall-to-wall and floor-
to-floor.
c) Compression/Extension Recovery: +/- 19 percent of original joint width.
d) Meets optional L rating requirements.
e) STC rating of 56 when tested in STC 56-rated wall assembly.
2) Fire Barrier Water Tight Sealant 1000 NS: Single-part, non-slump elastomeric
silicone sealant. Sag-resistant, low VOC.
b) Meets UL Water Leakage Test, W Rating – Class 1 requirements.
c) Location: For use at top-of-wall, bottom-of-wall, wall-to-wall, floor-to-
floor, floor-to-wall and perimeter joints.
d) Compression/Extension Recovery: +/- 15 percent of original joint width.
e) STC-Rating of 56 when tested in STC-56-rated wall assembly.
3) Fire Barrier Water Tight Sealant 1003 SL: Single-part, self-leveling
elastomeric silicone sealant. Sag-resistant, low VOC.
a) Fire Resistance: For use in 1-, 2-, 3- or 4 hours fire-resistant systems.
b) Meets UL Water Leakage Test, W Rating – Class 1 requirements.
c) Location: For use at top-of-wall, bottom-of-wall, floor-to-wall and floor-
to-floor joints.
e) STC-Rating of 56 when tested in STC-56-rated wall assembly.
4) Fire Barrier Sealant 2000 NS: Single-part, non-slump elastomeric silicone
sealant. Sag-resistant, low VOC.
TS 500 - 215

b) Service Flexibility: Accommodate vibration from normal building
movement.
wall, floor-to-floor and perimeter joints.
e) STC-Rating of 56 when tested in STC 56-rated wall assembly.
5) Fire Barrier Sealant 2000+: Silicone Sealant: Single-part, elastomeric silicone
sealant. Sag-resistant, low VOC.
b) Compression/Extension Recovery: +/- 13 percent of original joint width.
wall and floor-to-floor joints.
6) Fire Spray 200: Water-based, paintable, low VOC, freeze/thaw resistant spray
applied fire resistive product. Applied with conventional airless spray
equipment.
b) Compression/Extension Recovery: +/- 50 percent of joint width.
c) Location: For use at head-of-wall, wall-to-wall, floor-to-floor, bottom-
of-wall, floor-to-wall and perimeter joints.
d) STC-Rating of 56 when tested in STC 56-rated wall assembly.
517.2.5 Fire-stopping for Single Membrane Penetrations

1) Fire Barrier Moldable Putty+: One-part, 100 percent solids intumescent
firestop. Remains pliable, flexible and easily re-enterable. Non-toxic synthetic
formula.
a) Type: Pad.
b) Fire Resistance: For use in 1-, 2- or 3-hour fire-resistant systems.
2) Endothermic Mat E-5A-4: Endothermic heat absorbing mat.
a) Type: Mat.
b) Fire Resistance: For use in 1 or 2 hours fire-resistant systems.
Execution
517.3.1 Examination
1) Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
2) Conduct tests according to manufacturer's written recommendations to verify
that substrates are free of oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers,
TS 500 - 216
loose mill scale, dirt and other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of
fire-stopping.
3) Verify that items penetrating fire-resistant assemblies are securely attached,
including sleeves, supports, hangers, and clips.
4) Verify that openings and adjacent areas are not obstructed by construction that
would interfere with installation of fire-stopping, including ducts, piping,
equipment, and other suspended construction.
5) Verify that environmental conditions are safe and suitable for installation of
fire-stopping.
6) If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Engineer
of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
517.3.2 Preparation
1) Prepare substrates in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
2) Install masking and temporary coverings as required to prevent contamination
or defacement of adjacent surfaces due to fire-stopping installation.
1) Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's detailed installation instructions
and procedures.
2) Install so that openings are completely filled and material is securely adhered.
3) Where fire-stopping surface will be exposed to view, finish to a smooth,
uniform surface flush with adjacent surfaces.
4) After installation is complete, remove combustible forming materials and
accessories that are not part of the listed system.
5) Repair or replace defective installations in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations, listed systems details and applicable code requirements.
6) At each through penetration or fire-resistive joint system, attach identification
labels on both sides in location where label will be visible to anyone seeking to
remove penetrating items or fire-stopping.
7) Clean firestop materials off surfaces adjacent to openings as work progresses,
using methods and cleaning materials approved in writing by firestop system
manufacturer and which will not damage the surfaces being cleaned.
8) Notify AHJ when fire-stopping installation is ready for inspection; obtain
advance approval of anticipated inspection dates and phasing, if any, required
to allow subsequent construction to proceed.
9) Do not cover fire-stopping with other construction until approval of authority
having jurisdiction has been received.
TS 500 - 217

1) Employer will engage an independent testing agency to inspect installed fire-
stopping and to prepare reports indicating whether the installed work complies
with the contract documents.
2) Notify testing agency at least seven (7) days prior to date when fire-stopping
installation will be ready for inspection; obtain advance approval of general
schedule and phasing, if any, required to allow subsequent construction to
proceed.
517.3.5 Cleaning and Protection

1) Remove left over material and debris from Work area. Use necessary means
to protect fire protection product(s) before, during, and after installation.
2) Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before taking over by the
Employer.
3) Install identification Labels for Through Penetration and Construction Joint
Systems: Pressure sensitive self-adhesive vinyl labels, preprinted with the
following information:
a) The applicable words "Warning - Through Penetration Firestop System -
Do not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." or
"Warning – Construction Gap Fire Resistive System - Do not Disturb.
Notify Building Management of Any Damage."
b) Listing agency's system number or designation.
c) System manufacturer's name, address, and phone number.
d) Installer's name, address, and phone number.
e) General contractor's name, address, and phone number (if applicable).
f) Date of installation.

Quantity of Firestop is not measured but rate shall be deemed to be included
appropriate Pay Item of the other section as indicated on the Drawing and/or
specified elsewhere in those Specifications.
Generally, Firestop shall be provided around pipe, duct, and other items through the
fire rated walls and Ceiling
Refer to the Drawing
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 218
518 FIREPROOFING
The Work
The works in this section shall include:
1) Fireproofing Paint for Steel Structural Members
2) Sprayed-on Mineral Fiber Fireproofing.
3) Pre-formed Mineral Fiber Fireproofing.
518.1.1 General
Provide continuous fireproofing for the structural system in compliance with the
requirements of applicable codes, laws, and authorities. (Reference Drawings for
materials, installation details, and required fire ratings.)
Area and/or Rooms required resistance are shown on the Finishing Schedule.

1) In accordance with the 2008 Fire Code of the Philippines (FCP) and regulations.
2) Fire-proofing paint performance shell to satisfy Japan standard for required
fire-rating, if more stringent than those called for under Philippine Building
and/or Fire Codes.
518.1.3.1 Contractor's Qualification

Fireproofing work shall be carried out by an approved contractor having specialized
in the work as its primary business for at least ten (10) years, and having performed
satisfactorily work of this type and magnitude.
The fireproofing contractor shall be licensed or franchised by the fireproofing
materials manufacturer.
518.1.3.2 Correction
1) The Contractor shall correct or remove and replace unacceptable work at no
expense to the Employer.
2) The Contractor shall patch test areas as required to re-establish the fireproofing
integrity.
518.1.4 Submittals
Submit 2 copies of manufacturer’s recommendations for application of sprayed
fireproofing, and attachment of mineral fiber board fireproofing. Submit 2 copies of
certified test reports for each of the following:
1) Bond strength of fireproofing: Tested to provide a minimum bond strength of
twenty (20) times the weight of fireproofing materials.
TS 500 - 219
2) Fire test reports of fireproofing application to substrate materials similar to the

conditions expected on project.
3) Reports from an independent testing agency, indicating that the product
proposed for use conforms to applicable codes, laws and authorities.
4) Performance test data for Fire proofing paint in accordance with JIS A 1304.
Submit written verification that the spray-on and pre-formed fireproofing systems
are approved for use in the area of the Project.
518.1.5 Samples
1) Apply a sample of the material to the substrate for the Engineer to review and
to establish the standard for the work. Comply with specifications for thickness,
density of application, and fire rating.
2) Examine the sample installation of 6 sq. m in the presence of the Engineer.
Where shrinkage and cracking are evident, adjust the mixture and method of
application as necessary, and apply another sample. Repeat samples and
inspection until the testing agency approves the installation.
Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall certify in writing that the
fireproofing has been installed in compliance with all applicable legal requirements
and the manufacturer's application instructions.
Provide a warranty stating that the applied fireproofing will remain free from cracks,
checking, dusting, flaking, spilling, separation and blistering for a minimum period
of ten (10) years from the date of Substantial Completion, and that upon failure of
the material or work man ship to perform as warranted, the Contractor will repair or
replace the defective work at no cost to the Employer.
Products
518.2.2 Materials
1) Sprayed-on Fireproofing: Non-combustible, self-adhesive type, factory-
compounded mixture of mineral wool, pearlite or vermiculite together with
inorganic binders. Thickness as required to obtain fire rating indicated on
drawings, or as may be required by the governing authorities for the application
shown, whichever is the more restrictive. Density shall not exceed 600 kg/m3.
TS 500 - 220
2) Spray-on fireproofing material shall demonstrate that it inhibits corrosion of

steel when applied to unpainted steel.
3) Spray-on fireproofing shall not erode, flake or dust when subjected to an air
velocity of at least 5m/sec. for 24 hours. Use sealer to prevent erosion, flaking
and dusting.
4) Adhesive for spray-on fireproofing system, if required by manufacturer, shall
consist of a latex-type emulsion or cement, which, after setting, is unaffected
by moisture or aging, and shall be furnished by the manufacturer of the spray-
on fireproofing system.
5) Pre-formed Fireproofing: Non-combustible, factory pre-formed blocks of
mineral wool, vermiculite or silicate calcium together with inorganic binders.
Thickness as required to obtain fire rating indicated on drawings, or as may be
required by the governing authorities for the application shown, whichever is
the more restrictive.
6) Density between 200 and 800 kg/m3 according to the recommendation of the
manufacturer.
7) Pre-formed fireproofing material shall demonstrate that it inhibits corrosion of
steel when applied to unpainted steel.
8) Adhesive for pre-formed fireproofing system shall consist of silicate of soda as
the main ingredient and asbestos, fireproof additional as sub-ingredient.
9) Fireproofing paint: Fire proofing paint shall be the type that fireproofing
materials contained in the paint shall be formed and expanded against heat.
10) Sealer for sprayed-on fireproofing shall be the standard product of the
fireproofing manufacturer.
Execution
518.3.1 General
During the application of sprayed-on fireproofing, take all necessary measures to
prevent air or water pollution and health hazards from exposure to the fireproofing
material. Protection measures and spraying operations shall conform to the
requirements and restrictions of the local health codes and authorities.
518.3.2 Inspection
1) Examine all surfaces to receive sprayed-on and pre-formed fireproofing
immediately before application. Surfaces shall be clean and free of dirt, grease,
oil, loose plaster, loose rust, scale, paint or other materials that would prevent
good adhesion. All coatings or foreign substances that would impair adhesion
of the fireproofing shall be removed.
2) Starting the installation work shall constitute acceptance of the base material
and its condition.
TS 500 - 221
518.3.3 Preparation
1) Ensure that clips, hangers, supports, sleeves and other items required to
penetrate fireproofing are in place before application.
2) Ensure that no ducts, piping, equipment, or other items that would interfere
with the application of the fireproofing are installed until fireproofing work is
completed.
1) Pre-formed Fireproofing
a) Install pre-formed fireproofing before sprayed-on fireproofing.
b) Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
c) Seal minor cracks with fireproofing adhesive to maintain required fire
rating.
2) Sprayed - on Fireproofing
a) Mix and apply fireproofing in strict accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
b) Apply primer adhesive and fireproofing in sufficient thickness to achieve
the required rating.
c) Apply fireproofing over the substrate, building up to the required
thickness with as many passes or stages as necessary to produce a
monolithic blanket of uniform density and texture. Tamp or press the
fireproofing after application to provide a dense, medium smooth surface.
d) Apply specified sealer to sprayed-on surfaces in accordance with
manufacturer's directions.
3) Fireproofing paint
Surface preparation and application of fireproofing paint of steel members shall
in strictly accordance with approved fireproofing paint manufacturer.
4) Lockwool Insulation: Density of Lockwool Insulation shall be of 69kg/m3.
518.3.5 Inspection of Thickness

Inform the Engineer of the completion of each part of the work for inspection of
thickness of sprayed on fireproofing material thickness.
518.3.6 Cleaning
Upon completion of the work, remove all equipment and clean all deposits from areas
which do not require fire protection. Place all waste in suitable containers and remove
from the site.
TS 500 - 222

Fireproofing is measured in “Square Meters” Basis of Payment

Quantity of Rockwool Insulation is measured as the “Square Meter”
Item Number
518(1) Rockwool Insulation Square meter

Number
D518(1) Rockwool Insulation Square meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 223
519 INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING
The Work
installation onsite of intumescent fireproofing, including all anchorage provisions, in
519.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required intumescent fireproofing
519.1.2 Related Documents

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions, apply to this section.
519.1.3 Summary
1) Section includes intumescent fire-resistive coatings.
2) Related Requirements:
The Contractor shall cross-reference requirements that are specified in other
sections.
a) Section on for Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials (SFRM); and
b) Section on for Fireproofing.
519.1.4 Pre-installation Meetings

Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Site.
The Contractor shall list conference participants concerned with Project
Management and Coordination and submit the same to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall review products, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained
conditions, thicknesses, and other performance requirements, to include additional
and product-specific requirements to suit Project.
519.1.5 Action Submittals

1) Product Data: For each type of product.
2) Sustainable Design Submittals:
a) Product Data: For paints and coatings, indicate VOC content i.e. applies
to IgCC and/or ASHRAE 189.1. The Contractor shall coordinate with
requirements for paints and coatings
TS 500 - 224
b) Laboratory Test Reports: For paints and coatings, indicating compliance

with requirements for low-emitting materials i.e. applies to IgCC and/or
ASHRAE 189.1. The Contractor shall coordinate with requirements for
paints and coatings
3) Shop Drawings: Framing plans or schedules, or both, indicating the following:
a) Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating.
b) Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and
c) Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-
resistance rating of each structural component and assembly.
d) Treatment of fireproofing after application.
4) Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified,
the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer samples in the manufacturer's
standard dimensions and finishes.
519.1.6 Informational Submittals

1) Qualification Data: The Contractor shall submit information on Installer and
Testing Agency.
2) Product Certificates: The Contractor shall submit product certificates from
manufacturers for each type of fireproofing.
3) Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES.
4) Field quality-control reports if the Contractor is the party responsible for field
quality-control testing and inspecting.

1) Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise
qualified by fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient
trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified
requirements. The Contractor shall ensure that manufacturers qualify installers
who are available to perform work in Project area.
2) Mockups: The Contractor shall build mockups to verify selections made under
Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards
for materials and execution.
The Contractor shall indicate portion of Work represented by mockup on
Drawings or draw mockup as separate element. The Contractor shall also build
mockup of each type of fireproofing and different substrate and each required
finish as shown on the Drawings.
a) Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
contract documents contained in mockups unless the Engineer
specifically approves such deviations in writing.
TS 500 - 225
b) Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may

become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
519.1.8 Field Conditions

1) Environmental Limitations: The Contractor shall not apply fireproofing when
ambient or substrate temperature is 10 degrees C or lower unless temporary
protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level
for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.
2) Ventilation: The Contractor shall ventilate building spaces during and after
application of fireproofing, providing complete air exchanges according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are
inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly.
519.1.9 Product
Generic Type A single pack, solvent based intumescent coating for fire protection of
structural steel.
Description A decorative thin film intumescent coating designed for the fire protection
of steelwork for two to four (2-4)-hour fire ratings, depending on the
design. The recommended use for this product is fireproofing of interior
and exterior steel beams, columns, tubes and pipes.
Features * UL/ULC listed – designs for many types of steel sections. Two to four (2-
4)-hour fire ratings for both interior and exterior applications.
* Decorative Finish – provides a smooth, decorative finish. Compatible
topcoats available in a wide range of colors.
* Durable Finish – provides a hard, dust free surface resistant to normal
wear.
* UL exterior rated – can be permanently exposed to weather with the
appropriate topcoat.
* UL 1709-rated.
* Thin film coating – offers an economical solution to alternative
fireproofing.
* VOC-compliant
* Easy repair – if damaged it can be repaired easily using material as putty.
Color Pale green
Finish Smooth
Primer Must be applied over a compatible primer. If the steel has already been
coated with an existing primer, refer to manufacturer Technical Service for
advice before applying intumescent paint. Contact manufacturer’s
Technical Service for a complete list of approved primers.
Fireproofing For interior conditioned space, topcoats are optional.
TS 500 - 226
Topcoats For interior general purpose and exterior applications, manufacturer-

approved topcoats are required. Intumescent paint must be applied to the
specified DFT and be dry before applying a topcoat. Fluorine coating shall
be applied as topcoat for both interior and exterior.
Wet Film 1.14mm per coat
Thickness *During the drying process, the coating will shrink due to the evaporation
of solvent. In order to calculate the wet film thickness required, the
following formula can be used: WFT=(DFT/Volume Solids)x100
Dry Film 0.8mm per coat
Thickness * Intumescent paint must be applied to the specified DFT and be dry before
applying a topcoat. The dry film thickness shall be checked using an
electronic or magnetic thickness gauge.
Solids Content By Volume 67%
Theoretical 26.4m2/l at 25 microns
Coverage Rate 0.9m2/l at 750 microns
Allow for loss in mixing and application.
VOC Values As supplies 292g/l
Limitations Not recommended for steelwork subject to long-term surface temperatures
over 60°C in normal use.
519.1.10 Substrates and Surface Preparation:
General All surfaces must be primed with compatible primer and be clean, dry and
free of oil, grease, loose mill scale, dirt, dust or other materials which
would impair the bond of intumescent paint to the substrate.
519.1.11 Performance Data:
Test Method Results

ASTM D2240 Hardness Shore D – 65-70 (fully cured)
Shore D – 40 (for top-coating)
ASTM D2794 Impact 67.5 in/lbs
ASTM D45541 Bond Strength 1.7 MPa minimum
ASTM D695 Compressive Strength 7.9 MPa
ASTM E84 Surface Burning Class A
Density 1.36 g/cm3
519.1.12 Mixing and Thinning:
Mixer Use 12.7mm electric or air driven drill with a slotted paddle mixer (300
rpm under load).
TS 500 - 227
Mixing Intumescent paint must be mixed using a 12.7mm electric or air driven
drill with a slotted paddle or Jiffy mixer blade. Mix material for a
minimum of 5 minutes to achieve the necessary texture required before
spraying.
Thinning Do not thin.
519.1.13 Application Equipment Guidelines:
Airless Spray Use 3.7L per minute electric airless (minimum) to provide an operating
pressure of 3,000 psi (204 bar). Must have 30 mesh inline filter installed.
Remove rock catcher from siphon tube.
Spray Gun Silver Gun with gun swivel, Contractor Gun (with filter removed) or
equivalent
Spray Tips 0.021”-0.029” (Use heavy duty, non-diffuser tips and housing)
Fan Size 101mm-254mm depending on section being sprayed
Hose Length 45m
Material Hose 9.5mm I.D. minimum
Whip Hose 6.3mm I.D. minimum (optional)
519.1.14 Application Procedures:
General May be applied by spray, towel, brush or roller. Spray application is

recommended for the optimum production, coverage and finish. When
applying by trowel, brush or roller, work from a small container and mix
material frequently. The original pail should be kept tightly closed.
Airless Spray A single coat built up with a number of quick passes allows greater
control over quantities, thickness and finish. In most conditions, it is
advantageous to apply two thin coats rather than one thick coat.
Application At an ambient temperature of 21°C, the following application rates are
applicable
Rates Spray/trowel: 1.14mm per coat (wet)
Brush/roll: 0.25mm per coat (wet)
24 hour re-coat time between coats
Wet Film Frequent Thickness measurements with a wet film gauge are
Thickness recommended during the application process to ensure uniform thickness.
Dry Film Final thickness must be measured using an electronic dry film thickness
Thickness gauge. For method of thickness determination and tolerances refer to:
AWCI Technical Manual 12-B (Standard Practice for the Testing and
Inspection of Field Applied Thin Film Intumescent Fire Resistive
Materials).
TS 500 - 228
519.1.15 Application Conditions:
Condition Material Surface Ambient Humidity

Minimum 21°C 0°C 0°C 0%
Maximum 41°C 52°C 43°C 85%
*Steel surface temperature should be a minimum of 3°C above the dew point. Heavy rain or
water running over the surface of recently applied intumescent paint can cause surface patterning
if the material has not formed a skin.
519.1.16 Curing Schedule:
Surface Temp. & 50% Relative Humidity Dry to Recoat

25°C 24 hours
*For optimum curing, it is recommended to apply one coat at 1,143 microns wet per day. Drying
Time will vary with temperature and humidity conditions. Material is ready to be top-coated
when an average Shore D hardness of 40 is achieved. Consult manufacturer’s Technical Service
for specific details. Air movement and thinner coats will assist drying. Higher film thicknesses
will require longer drying times for top-coating.
519.1.17 Cleanup and Safety:
Cleanup Pump, Gun, Tips and Hoses and mixer should be cleaned at least once per day
with Thinner #19 or #2, Toluene, and the like.
Safety Follow all safety precautions on the Intumescent Paint Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS). It is recommended that personal protective equipment be
worn, including spray suits, gloves, eye protection and respirators when
applying Intumescent Paint.
Overspray All adjacent and finished surfaces shall be protected from damage and
overspray.
Ventilation In enclosed areas, ventilation shall not be less than 4 complete air exchanges
per hour until the material is dry.
519.1.18 Maintenance:
General If coating becomes damaged, rebuild required thickness by spray or trowel.

When dry, smooth and finish with approved topcoat to match. Damaged areas
must be abraded back to a firm edge by sanding or scraping. The topcoat
should be abraded back by 25.4mm from the damaged area. The surface must
be clean and dry before re-applying Intumescent Paint. The coating shall then
be built back to the original thickness, allowed to dry, then over-coated with
the specified topcoat or system.
519.1.19 Testing/Certification/Listing:
Intumescent Paint has been tested in accordance with ASTM E-119

(UL263) and UL 1709 at Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
TS 500 - 229
Underwriters Laboratories Intumescent Paint is listed by UL and ULC for the following
Inc. designs:
Wide Flange Columns: X629
Tube Columns: X630
Pipe Columns: X631
Restrained and Unrestrained Beams: N609
Beams (Protected Deck): D784
Beams (Unprotected Deck): D935
UL 1709: XR623
*The product should be applied in accordance with the appropriate
design.
City of New York Intumescent Paint has been found acceptable for use in Class I and
Class II buildings in accordance with report number:
MEA 171-00-M (Beams)
MEA 172-00-M (Beams)
MEA 173-00-M (Columns/Tubes/Pipes)
519.1.20 Packaging, Handling and Storage:
Shelf Life 18 months (when kept at recommended storage conditions and in

original unopened containers)
Shipping Weight 5.4kg per 3.7L
(Approximate)
Flash Point 30°C
Storage Store indoors in a dry environment between 0°C-40°C
Packaging 18.9L
Substrates and Surface Preparation:
General All surfaces must be primed with compatible primer and be clean,
dry and free of oil, grease, loose mill scale, dirt, dust or other
materials which would impair the bond of Intumescent Paint to the
substrate.
519.1.21 Performance Data
Test Method Results

ASTM D2240 Hardness Shore D – 65-70 (fully cured)
Shore D – 25 (for top-coating)
ASTM D2794 Impact 67.5 in./lbs
ASTM D4541 Bond Strength 350 psi (minimum)
ASTM D695 Compressive Strength 1,150 psi
TS 500 - 230
ASTM E84 Surface Burning Class A

Density 85 pcf
*All values derived under controlled laboratory conditions.
519.1.22 Mixing and Thinning:
Mixer Use ½” electric or air driven drill with a slotted paddle mixer (300 rpm
under load).
Mixing Intumescent Paint must be mixed using a ½’ electric or air driven drill
with a slotted paddle or Jiffy mixer blade. Mix material for a minimum
of 5 minutes to achieve the necessary texture required before spraying.
Thinning Do not thin.
519.1.23 Application Equipment Guidelines:
Airless Spray Use 1.0 gal. per minute electric airless (minimum) to provide an
operating pressure of 320kg/cm2. Must have 30 mesh inline filter
installed. Remove rock catcher from siphon tube.
Spray Gun Silver Gun with gun swivel, Contractor Gun (with filter removed) or
equivalent.
Spray Tips 0.021”-0.029” (Use heavy duty, non-diffuser tips and housing)
Fan Size 4”-10” (depending on section being sprayed)
Hose Length 150” (45m)
Material Hose 3/8” ID minimum
Whip Hose ¼” ID minimum (optional)
519.1.24 Application Procedures:
General May be applied by spray, trowel, brush or roller. Spray application is

recommended for the optimum production, coverage and finish. When
applying by trowel, brush or roller, work from a small container and
mix material frequently. The original pail should be kept tightly closed.
Airless Spray A single coat built up with a number of quick passes allows greater
control over quantities, thickness and finish. In most conditions, it is
advantageous to apply two thin coats rather than one thick coat.
Application Rates At an ambient temperature of 21°C, the following application rates are
applicable:
Spray/trowel: 1.14mm per coat (wet)
Brush/roll: 0.25mm per coat (wet)
24 hour re-coat time between coats
TS 500 - 231
Wet Film Thickness Frequent thickness measurements with a wet film gauge are
recommended during the application process to ensure uniform
thickness.
Dry Film Thickness Final thickness must be measured using an electronic dry film thickness
gauge. For method of thickness determination and tolerances refer to:
AWCI Technical Manual 12-B (Standard Practice for the Testing and
Inspection of Field Applied Thin Film Intumescent Fire Resistive
Materials).
519.1.25 Application Conditions:
Condition Material Surface Amount Humidity

Minimum 21°C 0°C 0°C 0%
Maximum 41°C 52°C 43°C 85%
*Steel surface temperature should be a minimum of 3°C above the dew point. Heavy rain or
water running over the surface of recently applied Intumescent Paint can cause surface
patterning if the material has not formed a skin.
519.1.26 Curing Schedule:
Surface Temperature & 50% Relative Dry to Recoat

Humidity
25°C 24 hours
*For optimum curing, it is recommended to apply one coat at 1,143 microns wet per day. Drying
Time will vary with temperature and humidity conditions. Material is ready to be top-coated
when an average Shore D hardness if 25 is achieved. Consult manufacturer Technical Service
for specific details. Air movement and thinner coats will assist drying. Higher film thicknesses
will require longer drying times for top-coating.
519.1.27 Cleanup and Safety:
Cleanup Pump, Gun, Tips and Hose and mixer should be cleaned at least once per day
with: Thinner #19, Thinner #2, Toluene, MEK, MIBK or Xylene.
Safety Follow all safety precautions on the Intumescent Paint Material Safety Data
Sheet. It is recommended that personal protective equipment be worn,
including spray suits, gloves, eye protection and respirators when applying
Intumescent Paint.
Overspray All adjacent and finished surfaces shall be protected from damage and
overspray.
Ventilation In enclosed areas, ventilation shall not be less than 4 complete air exchanges
per hour until the material is dry.
519.1.28 Maintenance:
General If coating becomes damaged, rebuild required thickness by spray or trowel.

When dry, smooth and finish with approved topcoat to match. Damaged areas
TS 500 - 232
must be abraded back to a firm edge by sanding or scraping. The topcoat

should be abraded back by 25.4mm from the damaged area. The surface must
be clean and dry before re-applying Intumescent Paint. The coating shall then
be built back to the original thickness, allowed to dry, then over-coated with
the specified topcoat or system.
519.1.29 Testing/Certification/Listing:
Underwriters Laboratories, Intumescent Paint has been tested in accordance with ASTM E-119
Inc. (UL 263) at Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. Intumescent Paint is
listed by UL and ULC for the following designs:
Wide Flange Columns: X632
Tube Columns: X633
Pipe Columns: X634
Restrained and Unrestrained Beams: N610
Beams (Protected Deck): D785
Beams (Unprotected Deck): D936
*The product should be applied in accordance with the appropriate
design.
City of New York Intumescent Paint has been found acceptable for use in Class I and
Class II buildings in accordance with report number:
MEA 174-00-M
MEA 175-00-M
MEA 97-00-M
City of Los Angeles Report: RR25464
519.1.30 Packaging, Handling and Storage:
Shelf Life 18 months (when kept at recommended storage conditions and in

original unopened containers).
Shipping Weight 12lbs. per gallon
(Approximate)
Flash Point 30°C
Storage Store indoors in a dry environment between 0°C-40°C
Packaging 5 gallons

1) Assemblies: The Contractor shall provide fireproofing, including auxiliary
materials, according to requirements of each fire-resistance design and
manufacturer's written instructions.
TS 500 - 233
2) Source Limitations: The Contractor shall obtain fireproofing for each fire-
resistant design from multiple sources to be enable the Engineer to compare
and select the most applicable product.
3) Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on the Drawings, tested according to ASTM
E 119 or UL 263. The Contractor shall use UL 1709 or ASTM E 1529 test
method, with testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
a) Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted
otherwise.
4) VOC Content: For field applications, coatings shall comply with VOC content
limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits:
Categories in subparagraphs below are taken from CI, and CS Credit IEQ 4.2
rating systems and the standards referenced by them; if clarification is
required, reference said documents or the reference guides.
a) Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
b) Non-flat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
c) Primers, Sealers, and Under-coaters: 200 g/L.
5) Asbestos: The Contractor shall only provide products with no detectable
asbestos.
519.1.33 Mastic and Intumescent Fire-Resistive Coatings

1) Materials and finishes vary with manufacturer and product and are based on
approved fire-resistance designs that comply with the fire-resistance ratings of
building elements as required by applicable code. Coordinate the approved fire-
resistance design with the material composition and other salient characteristics
retained.
a) Application: Designated for "exterior", "interior general purpose" and
"conditioned interior space purpose" use by a qualified testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
b) Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured
according to requirements of fire-resistance design.
TS 500 - 234
c) Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a

qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
i) Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
ii) Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
d) Hardness: according to ASTM D 2240.
e) Finish: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard finishes i.e.
Spray-textured finish or Rolled, spray-textured finish.
i) Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's designations; Match
Engineer's sample or as selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's
full range (color and gloss).
519.1.34 Auxiliary Materials

1) General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and
substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs
indicated.
2) Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and
complying with required fire-resistance design by UL or another testing and
3) Reinforcing Fabric (as required): Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight,
and form required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved
and provided by fireproofing manufacturer.
4) Reinforcing Mesh (as required): Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight,
and form required to comply with fire-resistance design indicated; approved
and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. Include pins and attachment.
5) Topcoat: Suitable for application over applied fireproofing; of type
recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer for each fire-resistance
design.
If decorative paints or coatings over fireproofing are specified in section on
"Painting", the Contractor shall verify compatibility with products in this
section and verify acceptability to authorities having jurisdiction.
Execution
519.2.1 Examination
1) Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance design. the
Contractor shall:
a) Verify that substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling
compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and
TS 500 - 235
encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of

fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire
exposure.
b) Verify that objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers,
support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.
c) Verify that substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts,
piping, equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with
fireproofing application.
2) The Contractor shall conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's
written instructions to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of
interfering with bond.
3) The Contractor shall prepare written reports, endorsed by Installer, listing
conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
4) The Contractor shall proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
519.2.2 Preparation
1) Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing
materials during application.
2) Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing.
3) Ensure that prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where
recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop
primer, has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.
4) For applications visible on completion of Project, the Contractor shall repair
substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of
texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing. Remove minor
projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products
after application.
519.2.3 Application
1) Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design
indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports;
for thickness, primers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures
affecting fireproofing work.
2) Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing
materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey,
and apply fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and
as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
TS 500 - 236
3) Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize

need to cut or remove fireproofing.
a) The Contractor shall not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers,
supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place.
b) The Contractor shall defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that
would interfere with applying fireproofing until application of
fireproofing is completed.
4) Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-
resistance design and fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for
conditions of exposure and intended use. For auxiliary materials, use
attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by
fireproofing manufacturer.
5) Spray-apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. After the spraying
operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other
placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.
6) Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be
protected.
7) Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended
in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.
8) Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of
fireproofing material and matching finish approved for required mockups.
Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
9) The Contractor shall not install enclosing or concealing construction until after
fireproofing has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been
made to deficient applications.
10) Finishes: Where indicated, the Contractor shall apply fireproofing to produce
the following finishes:
a) Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each finish selected.
b) Spray-Textured Finish: Finish left as spray applied with no further
treatment.
c) Rolled, Spray-Textured Finish: Even finish produced by rolling spray-
applied finish with a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive
roughness.

1) Special Inspections: The Employer shall engage a qualified special inspector
to perform the following special inspections: The Contractor shall test and
inspect as required by the IBC, Subsection 1705.14, "Mastic and Intumescent
Fire-Resistant Coatings," or as indicated on the Schedule of Special
Inspections.
TS 500 - 237
2) The Contractor shall perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in
successive stages. The Contractor shall not proceed with application of
fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed
applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values
must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for
approved fire-resistance design.
a) Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections. If so, remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests
and inspections, and retest.
b) Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions,
where test results indicate insufficient thickness, and retest.
3) Prepare test and inspection reports.
519.2.5 Cleaning, Protecting, and Repairing

1) Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each
containable area of Project, the Contractor shall remove material overspray and
fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to
remove evidence of soiling.
2) The Contractor shall protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer
and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other
causes, so fireproofing is without damage or deterioration at time of taking over
by the Employer.
3) As installation of other construction proceeds, the Contractor shall inspect
fireproofing and repair damaged areas and fireproofing removed due to work
of other trades.
4) The Contractor shall repair fireproofing damaged by other work before
concealing it with other construction.
5) The Contractor shall repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as
original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied
product.

Intumescent fireproofing is not measured under this Section, but Intumescent
fireproofing are measured in the ST547(4)a and ST548(25) hereinafter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 238
520 RIGID INSULATION
The Work
installation onsite of rigid insulation, in accordance with this Specification and in
520.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required rigid insulation, as shown
Install rigid insulation and sheet vapor barrier to maintain continuous thermal and
vapor protection for the building spaces.

1) Rigid Insulation
2) Vapor Barrier
3) Protective Cover

1) Stone Wool Heat Insulating Material: ASTM C168, 612, 656, 726, 721, 971
2) Foam Polystyrene Heat Insulating Material: ASTM C208, 209, 656, 726, 727,
971

Do not install insulation in or against damp or wet surfaces, in standing water, or
during rain. Protect the insulation from water after it is installed.
520.1.5 Submittals
Submit 2 samples of insulation (min. 30cm x 30cm) and 2 copies of manufacturer’s
technical literature and installation recommendations in accordance with appropriate
section of GS100 “General Specification” of these Specifications.
Products
TS 500 - 239

520.2.2 Insulation
Reference the Drawings for Materials, Thickness, and Location.
1) Extruded Polystyrene Foam
a) Board Faces: with skin
b) Edge Treatment: ship lap on all four sides
c) Application: roof insulation
d) Government and Industry Standards
XPS-EN 13164 – T1-CS (10/Y) 300 – CC ((2/1,5/50)110 - DS(70,90) -
DLT(2)5 - <50mm: WD(V)3 / >=50mm & - <80mm: WD(V)2 / >=80mm:
WD(V)1 - WL(T)0,7 - FTCD1
e) Final Testing Requirements
Test and Test Limit Unit Method
Condition
Thickness Tolerance -2.0 – 3.0 Mm EN 823
Applicable for Thickness 50.0 – 120.0mm
2) Extruded Polystyrene Foam
a) Final Testing Requirements
Test and Test Limit Unit Method
Condition
Declared Thermal 29 max mW/m EN 13164
Conductivity
K
Water Absorption by 0.7 max % EN 12087
immersion
Water Absorption by 1.0 max %vol EN 12088
diffusion, WD/V/1
3) Standard Dimensions
a) Width: 600mm
b) Length: 1250mm
c) Thicknesses: 100mm
TS 500 - 240
4) The Contractor shall read all precautionary information and material safety
sheets. This product shall be shipped in full compliance with applicable laws
and regulations regarding classification, packaging, shipping and labeling.
520.2.3 Adhesive
Insulation based on the manufacture’s standard product.
520.2.4 Vapor Barrier

0.15mm thick
Execution
520.3.1 General
Cut and trim insulation neatly. Butt edges and ends tight. Fit insulation tight against
items that protrude through the plane of the insulation.
Use insulation free of broken or chipped edges.
520.3.2 Preparation
Ensure that surfaces which are to receive rigid insulation are dry, and are sufficiently
flat to allow proper installation of insulation.
520.3.3 Installation under Slab on Grade

Place top of rigid insulation at bottom elevation of slabs on grade after base for slab
on grade has been compacted.
Prevent insulation and vapor barrier from being displaced or damaged while pouring
slabs.
520.3.4 Installation against Perimeter Foundation Walls

1) Secure rigid insulation on perimeter foundation wall with adhesive using spot
or bead method in accordance with insulation manufacturer's recommendations.
Place long dimension horizontally.
Stagger vertical joints of insulation except free ends at control joints.
Layout insulation so that ends overlap 100–150mm at expansion/contraction
joints. Leave overlapping ends of insulation unbounded.
2) Immediately after installing insulation, place asbestos-cement, board over all
exposed surfaces of insulation. Place with long dimension horizontal and to
minimum depth of 600mm below finished grade elevation. Butt asbestos-
cement board tight at joints, and stagger joints with those of insulation.
Provide control joints in asbestos-cement board In line with those of insulation.
TS 500 - 241
520.3.5 Installation in Cavity Walls

Install insulation within cavity walls with insulation fasteners or adhesive using spot
or bead method in accordance with insulation manufacturer's recommendations.
Place with long dimension horizontal. Seal joints and items protruding through
insulation with adhesive.
Stagger vertical joints of insulation except free ends at control joints.

Rigid insulation is measured as the “Square Meters”.

a) Sealing of sealant materials shall be executed as follows: a) prepare a
base plate of real materials, concrete steel, aluminum or others; b) adhere
cellophane tapes and apply primer; c) set a cord of sealant materials both
on cellophane tapes and on primer; d) Leave them as they are in the site
at least ten (10) days; e) pick the head of the cord and draw it down; and
f) if the cord is sufficiently attached to its base from bottom to top or is
broken by the force, the sealing materials will be accepted.
1) Premium Sealer for Stone, Tiles and Grout
a) Key Features
i) Premium, no-sheen, natural look, water-based, penetrating sealer
formulated to provide maximum stain protection/ resistance,
especially in food preparation and serving areas.
ii) Allows moisture vapor transmission.
iii) Formula protects in less than 4 hours.
iv) May also be used as a pre-grouting sealer.
v) Water-based formula.
vi) For interior and exterior use.
vii) Complies with all Federal EPA and SCAQMD standards for VOC
b) Suitable Tile Types.
TS 500 - 242
As a sealer or grout release for all natural stone surfaces, unglazed tile,
porcelain, clay pavers, concrete, brick, masonry, and grout.
c) Limitations to Product.
i) Do not allow sealer to come in contact with any non-recommended
surface.
ii) If product is allowed to dry on surface, a white film may form. If
this occurs, scrub with water and a white nylon pad.
iii) Sealer will not prevent surface wear or etching from acids or caustic
chemicals.
2) Premium Sealer for Back Coat/ Pre-Sealer
a) Key Features
i) An economical water based penetrating sealer designed to resist
staining caused by water soluble minerals which can be absorbed
through the back and sides of porous stone or tile during installation
or grouting.
iii) Designed as a pre-sealer.
iv) Use on all porous natural stone, such as granite, marble, limestone,
travertine, slate, sandstone etc. concrete pavers, brick and masonry.
v) Effective for interior and exterior applications
b) Limitations to Product.
i) Not for use as a final top surface sealer.
ii) Do not allow sealer to come in contact with any non-recommended
surface.
iii) If product is allowed to dry on surface, a white film may form. If
iv) Not a waterproofing agent.
v) Not for use on the top surface prior to the application of enhancing
sealers.
3) Water Repellents
a) Key Features
i) Active component for formulating penetrating water repellent
treatments
ii) For use on neutral and alkaline mineral substrates such as brick,
sandstone, concrete and mortar that require water repellency
iii) Excellent beading in as little as 5 minutes after application
iv) Dilutable in organic solvent to formulate water repellent products
TS 500 - 243
v) Produces a hydrophobic treatment that inhibits water absorption

vi) Excellent performance at low active solids levels, in range of 5-10
percent
b) Description
A solvent-free silane/ siloxane concentrate, dilutable in organic or silicone
solvents to formulate a water repellent. Upon proper application, the
formulated product will penetrate and provide water repellency by
chemically reacting with the substrate. Treated substrates are hydrophobic
and retain their original appearance. A catalyst is present, so it can be used
on both neutral and alkaline substrates.
The active ingredients react with moisture to produce hydroxy groups.
These hydroxy groups will bond with the substrates and themselves to
produce a hydrophobic treatment that inhibits water absorption into the
substrate. Exposure to water before use as a treatment may cause the
material to cure in the container.
c) Composition.
i) Solvent-free silane/siloxane concentrate
ii) Clear liquid
d) Packaging Information.
i) Water Repellent shall be supplied in 190-kg (418-lb) drums and 18-
kg (40-lb) pails, net weight
e) Limitations.
i) The Contractor shall not use product on structures under hydrostatic
pressure.
ii) The Contractor shall not apply product when temperature is at or
below 4°C (40°F).
Execution
520.5.1 Inspection
The Contractor shall inspect the surfaces to receive sealants and notify the Engineer
in writing of defects in the work of other trades that will affect the proper installation
of the work of this section. Starting the installation work shall constitute acceptance
of the base or adjoining work.
520.5.2 Preparation
1) Perform all work in accordance with ASTM C804.
2) Clean and prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Use
joint cleaner where required.
TS 500 - 244
520.5.3 Installation of Generic Sealant

1) Install joint filler as required to provide proper joint depth. Do not twist, brand,
or stretch joint fillers. Use bond breakers where required.
2) Install sealants in accordance with manufacture’s installation instructions,
apply only within recommended temperature range. Form joints as detailed,
free of air pockets, embedded matter, ridges, gaps, wrinkles, and sags. (Please
refer to Drawings for types of sealants and specific locations for application of
each sealant.)
3) Mixing of 2 Components
a) Max. volume: 3 liters
b) Min. mixing period: 10 minutes
c) Temperature for mix. : min. 10°C ambient temperature
520.5.4 Installation of Premium Sealer for Stone, Tile and Grout

1) Handling and Storage
a) Close container tightly after each use.
b) Store in original container only.
c) Store and use between temperatures of 45° F - 85° F (7° C - 29° C).
d) Dispose of residue or any unused leftover product in accordance with
applicable national and local requirements.
2) Application of Product
a) USE CHEMICAL-RESISTANT GLOVES, such as nitrile, when handling
product;
b) Read entire label before using. Apply using a paint pad applicator, sponge
or brush. Allow it to penetrate for up to 5 minutes. Wipe surface completely
dry using clean, dry cotton, paper or microfiber towels after each
application. Porous surfaces may require additional applications. Conduct
a test to see if surface is completely sealed after 2 hours by applying drops
of water on the surface. If it penetrates, an additional application is required.
c) MAY IRRITATE EYES AND SKIN. Installer to wear appropriate skin and
eye protection equipment and ventilate area when spraying. Contains glycol
ether monobutyl ether.
3) Pre-Grout Sealer/ Grout Release. Porous tile and stone can be stained by grout
during installation. Sealing the tile before grouting will make grout removal
much easier. Apply sealer according to directions after tile has been bonded for
a minimum of 24 hours or apply to front face of tile before installation. Wait a
minimum of 2 hours before grouting.
4) General Surface Preparation. Surface should be dry, clean and free of waxes,
sealers or finishes. New installations need to be dry 48 hours before application.
TS 500 - 245
Protect surrounding surfaces. Test product in an inconspicuous area to ensure

desirable results.
5) Drying Time
a) Allow 30 minutes drying time between applications.
b) Ready for surface traffic in 2 hours.
c) Keep dry for 12 hours.
d) Achieves a full cure in 24 hours.
6) Product Warranty. Manufacturer warrants to the original consumer purchaser
that its product shall be free from defects in material and workmanship under
normal and proper usage for a period of one year following the date of original
purchase. Manufacturer's sole liability under this warranty shall be limited to
the replacement of the product. As Philippine law may not allow the exclusion
or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, the above limitation or
exclusion may not apply. This warranty will not extend to any product which
has been modified in any way or which has not been used in accordance with
Manufacturer's printed instructions.
520.5.5 Installation of Back Coat/ Pre-Sealer

a) Test product in an inconspicuous area with 48 hours cure time to ensure
desirable results.
b) Apply with brush, sponge or paint roller. Six (6)-sided sealing can be
accomplished by dipping full tile in product for 10 seconds. A single
coat is recommended, assuring 100% coverage. For use as a pre-seal
prior to grouting apply a single coat to the top surface, and sides if
required. Sealing all 6 sides is recommended for maximum protection.
If applying an enhancer as the final surface seal, DO NOT apply
material to the top surface as it will stop the penetration of enhancing
sealers. The Contractor shall contact manufacturer prior to installation
if an enhancer is specified for use. Be sure any sealer that does not
penetrate surface is polished.
c) DRY off the surface within 5 minutes of application using absorbent
paper or cotton towels. Sealer should be allowed to cure 48 hours prior
to installation. When used as a pre-sealer, sealer must cure a minimum
of 2 hours prior to grouting. Ensure good airflow during the curing
process. Do NOT allow to get wet during the curing process. Clean
applicator tools with water after each use.
TS 500 - 246
d) IMPORTANT NOTE: TREAT THE SEALED UNDERSIDE

SURFACE AS A LOW POROSITY DENSE SURFACE. The material
will reduce the porosity of the underside sealed surface. The Contractor
shall contact the adhesive supplier or manufacturer for specification of
the appropriate adhesive suitable for installing low porosity dense
surfaces. Sealed underside surface and substrate should be thoroughly
wet out with the adhesive (using the flat side of trowel) prior to
applying adhesive with appropriate notch trowel to ensure proper
coverage and adhesion. Follow adhesive manufacturer
recommendation for the appropriate adhesive.
3) Product Warranty. Manufacturer warrants to the original product purchaser that
its product shall be free from defects in material and workmanship under
purchase. Manufacturer’s sole liability under this warranty shall be limited to
the replacement of the product. Some countries do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or
exclusion may not apply to the Contractor. This warranty will not extend to any
product which has been modified in any way or which has not been used in
accordance with Manufacturer’s printed instructions. Manufacturer shall
makes no other warranties either expressed or implied. This warranty gives the
Contractor specific legal rights, and the same may have other rights that vary
from one country to another.
520.5.6 Installation of Water Repellents

1) Shipping, Handling Precaution, Storage & Usable Life
a) Combustible liquid
b) Evolves methanol and ethanol upon cure. Exposure to water may cause the
material to cure in the container. Use dry solvents when diluting the product.
During the dilution procedure, limit exposure to air.
c) When stored in original, airtight containers at or below 35°C (95°F), Dow
Corning Z -6689 Water Repellent has a shelf life of 1 year from date of
manufacture. Refer to product packaging for “Use By” date.
d) Keep away from heat and open flame.
a) Water Repellent should be diluted in organic solvents such as aliphatic
hydrocarbons, aromatic hydrocarbons, anhydrous alcohol, chlorinated
solvents, or low molecular weight polydimethyl-siloxanes, before use.
Recommended dilution level for neutral substrates, such as brick and
sandstone, is 1 part water repellent to 19 parts solvent.
b) For alkaline substrates, such as mortar and concrete, water repellent
should be diluted in organic or silicone solvent at 1 part water repellent
to 9 parts solvent.
TS 500 - 247
c) VOC-compliant formulations with less than 600 g/L VOC can be

achieved with the water repellent by using VOC-compliant solvent.
d) The performance of the water repellent may vary depending on actives
level applied to different substrates. Optimization of the actives level
may be required to obtain maximum performance on your selected
substrate/s.
e) Methods of application include airless sprayer, roller and brush. When
a brush or roller is used, repeated applications should be made until the
surface remains moist for a few minutes. If an airless sprayer is used,
application should continue until the substrate is thoroughly saturated.
On vertical applications, material should be applied from the bottom up
and achieve a 6- to 8-inch rundown. Sprayers should be fitted with
solvent-resistant hoses and gaskets.
f) To ensure compatibility and the desired water repellent result, a test
application is necessary on each surface to be treated.
g) Surfaces should be free of standing water, surface dirt, dust, oils and
other contaminants. The formulated water repellent may be applied to
damp or wet surfaces, although dry surfaces are preferred to achieve
maximum penetration into the substrate.
h) As with most repellents, plants or shrubs should be protected from
exposure to the treatment. Windows and any other material that should
not be treated must be protected or cleaning with solvents may be
necessary to remove the treatment. Likewise, if applied as spray,
control overspray and drift to prevent contamination of nearby
substrates, especially windows, vehicles, etc.
3) Limited Product Warranty. The Manufacturer’s information shall be offered in
good faith and is believed to be accurate. However, because conditions and
methods of use of the products are beyond Manufacturer’s control, such
information should not be used in substitution for The Contractor’s tests to
ensure that the products are safe, effective, and fully satisfactory for the
intended end use. Suggestions of use shall not be taken as inducements to
infringe any patent.

Sealant is not measured under this Section and rate shall be deemed including the
appropriate Pay item of the other Section, such as TS542 and TS544.
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 248
521 SEALANT
The Work
installation onsite of sealants, including all anchorage provisions, in accordance with
this Specification and in conformity with the Drawings or as established by the
Engineer.
521.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required sealants as shown on the
1) Furnish and install all sealants and required accessories for the project that are
not furnished under other sections.
2) Comply with local requirements regarding the use of flammable materials.
3) Type of sealant to be used shall be in accordance with Table: Sealant of 5)
Waterproofing and Sealant in the General Provision.
4) Color of sealant shall be selected by the Engineer.
5) Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer the width
and depth of sealant shall be 15mm x 15mm. If the depth of gaps to be sealed
is more than 15mm, back-up material approved by the Engineer shall be filled.

1) Sealants
2) Joint Preparation

1) Waterproofing Work: JASS 8
2) Sealing Compounds for Sealing, Glazing and Caulking in Buildings: ASTM
C717, 1016, 1021, 1184, D2202, 2377
3) Sealing Compounds for Sealing and Glazing in Buildings: ASTM C1021, 1184,
1193, D2202, 2377
4) ASTM C 639 – Standard Test Method for Rheological (Flow) Properties of
Elastomeric Sealants
5) ASTM C 919 – Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical
Applications
6) ASTM C 920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
TS 500 - 249

1) Employ only skilled tradesmen experienced in the work of this section.
2) The work and material shall be inspected (and tested if necessary) by the
Engineer.
a) The Contractor shall correct or remove and replace unacceptable work
and material at no expense to the Employer.
b) The Contractor shall patch test areas as required to re-establish insulating
and waterproofing integrity.
3) Testing by an independent testing laboratory or review of data by the Engineer
shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for the performance of
the work as specified, nor relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to
verify that the work conforms to the requirements of the contract documents.
conforming to the specifications at any time before final acceptance.

1) Do not apply sealants to surfaces that are wet or damp. Allow wet concrete or
masonry surfaces to receive sealants to dry for five (5) days before applying.
2) Do not apply sealants during periods of wind driven sand. Max. wind velocity
is 10m/sec.
3) Do not apply sealants when the temperature of the surfaces which receive
sealant is below 5 degrees C or above 50 degrees C and relative humidity is
below 85%.
521.1.6 Storage
Store sealants under the conditions of temperature of minimum 5 degrees C and
maximum 25 degrees C and relative humidity of maximum 85% before application.
521.1.7 Submittals
1) Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's technical literature, product data, and full
installation instructions in conformance with GS 100 “General Specification”.
2) Provide a written warranty to the Employer in accordance with requirement of
the Contract, providing for repairing and replacing, at no cost to the Employer,
sealants that fail to perform as required because of leaking, crumbling,
hardening, shrinkage, bleeding, sagging, staining or loss of adhesion, within a
minimum period of five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion of the
Work as certified by the Engineer.
TS 500 - 250
Products
521.2.2 Materials
1) Generic Sealants
a) Polysulphide base, two (2) component, chemical curing; non-sagging type
for application in vertical joints; uniform, homogeneous and free from
lumps, skins and coarse particles when mixed; capable of being
continuously immersed in water, withstand movement up to 15% of joint
width and satisfactorily handled throughout a temperature range of 4 to
27 degrees C; color selected by the Engineer.
b) Polysulfide base, two (2) component, chemical-curing; type, non-sagging.
Color selected by the Engineer.
c) Silicone base, one component, chemical curing; capable of withstanding
movement of up to 20% of joint width and satisfactorily handled through
a temperature range of 4 to 27°C; color selected by the Engineer.
d) Silicone base, one component, chemical curing; color selected by the
Engineer.
e) Silicone base, two component, chemical curing, capable of withstanding
movement of up to 20% of joint width and satisfactorily handled
throughout a temperature range of 4 to 27°C; uniform, homogeneous and
free from lumps and coarse particles when mixed; color selected by the
Engineer.
f) Acrylic emulsion base, one component; capable of withstanding
movement of up to 7% of joint width and satisfactorily handled
throughout a temperature range of 4 to 27°C; non-sagging; color selected
by the Engineer.
g) Polyurethane base, multi-component, chemical curing; non-sagging type
for application in vertical joints; capable of being continuously immersed
in water, withstand movement of up to 15% of joint width and
satisfactorily handled throughout temperatures of 4 to 27 degrees C:
uniform, homogeneous, and free from lumps, skins and coarse particles
when mixed; color selected by the Engineer.
TS 500 - 251
h) Polyurethane base, one-component, chemical curing; non-sagging type

for application in vertical joints; capable of being continuously immersed
in water, withstand movement of up to 15% of joint width and
satisfactorily handled throughout temperatures of 4 to 27 degrees; color
selected by the Engineer.
i) Primer - Non-staining type recommended by sealant manufacture to suit
application.
j) Joint cleaner - Non-corrosive type recommended by sealant manufacture;
compatible with joint forming materials.
k) Joint Filler - Round, closed cell foamed polyurethane, polystyrene,
polyurethane, PVC, or synthetic rubber foam rod, oversized by 30-50%.
l) Bond Breaker – Pressure-sensitive type recommended by sealant
manufacturer to suit application.
m) Testing. Testing of sealing materials shall be executed as follows: a)
prepare a base plate of real materials, concrete steel, aluminum or others;
b) adhere cellophane tapes and apply primer; c) set a cord of sealing
materials both on cellophane tapes and on primer; d) Leave them as they
are in the site at least ten (10) days; e) pick the head of the cord and draw
it down; and f) if the cord is sufficiently attached to its base from bottom
to top or is broken by the force, the sealing materials will be accepted.
2) Premium Sealer for Stone, Tiles and Grout
a) Key Features
i) Premium, no-sheen, natural look, water-based, penetrating sealer
formulated to provide maximum stain protection/ resistance,
especially in food preparation and serving areas.
iii) Formula protects in less than 4 hours.
iv) May also be used as a pre-grouting sealer.
v) Water-based formula.
vi) For interior and exterior use.
vii) Complies with all Federal EPA and SCAQMD standards for VOC
b) Suitable Tile Types.
As a sealer or grout release for all natural stone surfaces, unglazed tile,
porcelain, clay pavers, concrete, brick, masonry, and grout.
c) Limitations to Product.
i) Do not allow sealer to come in contact with any non-recommended
surface.
ii) If product is allowed to dry on surface, a white film may form. If
TS 500 - 252
iii) Sealer will not prevent surface wear or etching from acids or caustic
chemicals.
3) Premium Sealer for Back Coat/ Pre-Sealer
a) Key Features
i) An economical water based penetrating sealer designed to resist
staining caused by water soluble minerals which can be absorbed
through the back and sides of porous stone or tile during
installation or grouting.
iii) Designed as a pre-sealer.
iv) Use on all porous natural stone, such as granite, marble, limestone,
travertine, slate, sandstone etc. concrete pavers, brick and
masonry.
v) Effective for interior and exterior applications
b) Limitations to Product.
i) Not for use as a final top surface sealer.
ii) Do not allow sealer to come in contact with any non-recommended
surface.
iii) If product is allowed to dry on surface, a white film may form. If this
occurs, scrub with water and a white nylon pad.
iv) Not a waterproofing agent.
v) Not for use on the top surface prior to the application of enhancing
sealers.
4) Water Repellents
a) Key Features
i) Active component for formulating penetrating water repellent
treatments
ii) For use on neutral and alkaline mineral substrates such as brick,
sandstone, concrete and mortar that require water repellency
iii) Excellent beading in as little as 5 minutes after application
iv) Dilutable in organic solvent to formulate water repellent products
v) Produces a hydrophobic treatment that inhibits water absorption
vi) Excellent performance at low active solids levels, in range of 5-10
percent
b) Description
A solvent-free silane/ siloxane concentrate, dilutable in organic or silicone
solvents to formulate a water repellent. Upon proper application, the
formulated product will penetrate and provide water repellency by
chemically reacting with the substrate. Treated substrates are hydrophobic
and retain their original appearance. A catalyst is present, so it can be used
on both neutral and alkaline substrates.
TS 500 - 253
The active ingredients react with moisture to produce hydroxy groups.

These hydroxy groups will bond with the substrates and themselves to
produce a hydrophobic treatment that inhibits water absorption into the
substrate. Exposure to water before use as a treatment may cause the
material to cure in the container.
c) Composition.
i) Solvent-free silane/siloxane concentrate

ii) Clear liquid
d) Packaging Information.
i) Water Repellent shall be supplied in 190-kg (418-lb) drums and 18-

kg (40-lb) pails, net weight
e) Limitations.
i) The Contractor shall not use product on structures under hydrostatic
pressure.
ii) The Contractor shall not apply product when temperature is at or
below 4°C (40°F).
Execution
521.3.1 Inspection
The Contractor shall inspect the surfaces to receive sealants and notify the Engineer
in writing of defects in the work of other trades that will affect the proper installation
of the work of this section. Starting the installation work shall constitute acceptance
521.3.2 Preparation
1) Perform all work in accordance with ASTM C804.
2) Clean and prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Use
joint cleaner where required.
521.3.3 Installation of Generic Sealant

1) Install joint filler as required to provide proper joint depth. Do not twist, brand,
or stretch joint fillers. Use bond breakers where required.
2) Install sealants in accordance with manufacture’s installation instructions,
apply only within recommended temperature range. Form joints as detailed,
free of air pockets, embedded matter, ridges, gaps, wrinkles, and sags. (Please
refer to Drawings for types of sealants and specific locations for application of
each sealant.)
3) Mixing of 2 Components
TS 500 - 254
a) Max. volume: 3 liters

b) Min. mixing period: 10 minutes
c) Temperature for mix. : min. 10°C ambient temperature
521.3.4 Installation of Premium Sealer for Stone, Tile and Grout

c) Store and use between temperatures of 45° F - 85° F (7° C - 29° C).
d) Dispose of residue or any unused leftover product in accordance with
applicable national and local requirements.
a) USE CHEMICAL-RESISTANT GLOVES, such as nitrile, when
handling product;
b) Read entire label before using. Apply using a paint pad applicator, sponge
or brush. Allow it to penetrate for up to 5 minutes. Wipe surface
completely dry using clean, dry cotton, paper or microfiber towels after
each application. Porous surfaces may require additional applications.
Conduct a test to see if surface is completely sealed after 2 hours by
applying drops of water on the surface. If it penetrates, an additional
application is required.
c) MAY IRRITATE EYES AND SKIN. Installer to wear appropriate skin
and eye protection equipment and ventilate area when spraying. Contains
glycol ether monobutyl.
3) Pre-Grout Sealer/ Grout Release. Porous tile and stone can be stained by grout
during installation. Sealing the tile before grouting will make grout removal
much easier. Apply sealer according to directions after tile has been bonded for
a minimum of 24 hours or apply to front face of tile before installation. Wait a
minimum of 2 hours before grouting.
4) General Surface Preparation. Surface should be dry, clean and free of waxes,
sealers or finishes. New installations need to be dry 48 hours before application.
Protect surrounding surfaces. Test product in an inconspicuous area to ensure
desirable results.
5) Drying Time
a) Allow 30 minutes drying time between applications.
b) Ready for surface traffic in 2 hours.
c) Keep dry for 12 hours.
d) Achieves a full cure in 24 hours.
TS 500 - 255
6) Product Warranty. Manufacturer warrants to the original consumer purchaser

that its product shall be free from defects in material and workmanship under
purchase. Manufacturer's sole liability under this warranty shall be limited to
the replacement of the product. As Philippine law may not allow the exclusion
or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, the above limitation or
exclusion may not apply. This warranty will not extend to any product which
has been modified in any way or which has not been used in accordance with
Manufacturer's printed instructions.
521.3.5 Installation of Back Coat/ Pre-Sealer


a) Test product in an inconspicuous area with a 48 hour cure time to

ensure desirable results.
b) Apply with brush, sponge or paint roller. Six (6)-sided sealing can be
accomplished by dipping full tile in product for 10 seconds. A single
coat is recommended, assuring 100% coverage. For use as a pre-seal
prior to grouting apply a single coat to the top surface, and sides if
required. Sealing all 6 sides is recommended for maximum protection.
If applying an enhancer as the final surface seal, DO NOT apply
material to the top surface as it will stop the penetration of enhancing
sealers. The Contractor shall contact manufacturer prior to installation
if an enhancer is specified for use. Be sure any sealer that does not
penetrate surface is polished.
c) DRY off the surface within 5 minutes of application using absorbent
paper or cotton towels. Sealer should be allowed to cure 48 hours
prior to installation. When used as a pre-sealer, sealer must cure a
minimum of 2 hours prior to grouting. Ensure good airflow during the
curing process. Do NOT allow to get wet during the curing process.
Clean applicator tools with water after each use.
d) IMPORTANT NOTE: TREAT THE SEALED UNDERSIDE
SURFACE AS A LOW POROSITY DENSE SURFACE. The
material will reduce the porosity of the underside sealed surface. The
Contractor shall contact the adhesive supplier or manufacturer for
specification of the appropriate adhesive suitable for installing low
porosity dense surfaces. Sealed underside surface and substrate
should be thoroughly wet out with the adhesive (using the flat side of
trowel) prior to applying adhesive with appropriate notch trowel to
TS 500 - 256
ensure proper coverage and adhesion. Follow adhesive manufacturer

recommendation for the appropriate adhesive.
3) Product Warranty. Manufacturer warrants to the original product purchaser that
its product shall be free from defects in material and workmanship under
purchase. Manufacturer’s sole liability under this warranty shall be limited to
the replacement of the product. Some countries do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or
exclusion may not apply to the Contractor. This warranty will not extend to any
product which has been modified in any way or which has not been used in
accordance with Manufacturer’s printed instructions. Manufacturer shall
makes no other warranties either expressed or implied. This warranty gives the
Contractor specific legal rights, and the same may have other rights that vary
from one country to another.
521.3.6 Installation of Water Repellents

a) Shipping, Handling Precaution, Storage & Usable Life
a) Combustible liquid
b) Evolves methanol and ethanol upon cure. Exposure to water may cause
the material to cure in the container. Use dry solvents when diluting the
product. During the dilution procedure, limit exposure to air.
c) When stored in original, airtight containers at or below 35°C (95°F), Dow
Corning Z -6689 Water Repellent has a shelf life of 1 year from date of
manufacture. Refer to product packaging for “Use By” date.
d) Keep away from heat and open flame.
b) Application of Product
a) Water Repellent should be diluted in organic solvents such as
aliphatic hydrocarbons, aromatic hydrocarbons, anhydrous alcohol,
chlorinated solvents, or low molecular weight polydimethyl-siloxanes,
before use. Recommended dilution level for neutral substrates, such
as brick and sandstone, is 1 part water repellent to 19 parts solvent.
b) For alkaline substrates, such as mortar and concrete, water repellent
should be diluted in organic or silicone solvent at 1 part water
repellent to 9 parts solvent.
c) VOC-compliant formulations with less than 600 g/L VOC can be
achieved with the water repellent by using VOC-compliant solvent.
d) The performance of the water repellent may vary depending on
actives level applied to different substrates. Optimization of the
actives level may be required to obtain maximum performance on
your selected substrate/s.
e) Methods of application include airless sprayer, roller and brush.
When a brush or roller is used, repeated applications should be made
TS 500 - 257
until the surface remains moist for a few minutes. If an airless sprayer
is used, application should continue until the substrate is thoroughly
saturated. On vertical applications, material should be applied from
the bottom up and achieve a 6- to 8-inch rundown. Sprayers should
be fitted with solvent-resistant hoses and gaskets.
f) To ensure compatibility and the desired water repellent result, a test
application is necessary on each surface to be treated.
g) Surfaces should be free of standing water, surface dirt, dust, oils and
other contaminants. The formulated water repellent may be applied to
damp or wet surfaces, although dry surfaces are preferred to achieve
maximum penetration into the substrate.
h) As with most repellents, plants or shrubs should be protected from
exposure to the treatment. Windows and any other material that
should not be treated must be protected or cleaning with solvents may
be necessary to remove the treatment. Likewise, if applied as spray,
control overspray and drift to prevent contamination of nearby
substrates, especially windows, vehicles, etc.
c) Limited Product Warranty. The Manufacturer’s information shall be offered
in good faith and is believed to be accurate. However, because conditions and
methods of use of the products are beyond Manufacturer’s control, such
information should not be used in substitution for The Contractor’s tests to
ensure that the products are safe, effective, and fully satisfactory for the
intended end use. Suggestions of use shall not be taken as inducements to
infringe any patent.

Sealant is not measured under this Section and rate shall be deemed including the
appropriate Pay item of the other Section as indicated on the Drawing and/or
specified elsewhere in those Specifications.
-END OF SECTION-
TS 500 - 258
522 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE MATERIAL
The Work
installation onsite of aluminum composite material (ACM), including all anchorage
522.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required ACM as shown on the
All materials forming ACM shall be of the noncombustible materials and fire safety
properties shall be used for both exterior applications (soffits, awnings, parapets,
signs, etc.) and interior applications (walls, partitions, ceilings, etc.). It is
manufactured and furnished by approved supply, dealers or distributors of the
manufacturer.
522.1.2 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing and installation of ACM, including ACM for
the fins of the station buildings.
The Contractor’s work under this section shall include all vetting work for all design
considerations relating to ACP installation, use and maintenance, including ACM
framing, supports, material strength, load and safety considerations, and the like,
which shall all require Engineer approval.
The Contractor shall provide all the required scaffolding and heavy equipment/
machinery for ACM installation, particularly those for the station building fin.
522.1.3 References
1) ASTM E8, Tensile & Yield Strength, Elongation;
2) ASTEM C393, Flexural Elasticity, Modules of Elasticity;
3) ISO 5660-1, Heat Release Test for Non-Combustible Material;
4) ASTM D523-89, Paint Performance: Gloss;
5) ASTM D522-88, Paint Performance: Pencil Hardness;
6) ASTM D2247-87; Paint Performance: Humidity Resistance; and
7) JIS A 5703 or equivalent to ASTM; Plast
522.1.4 Product Composition and Material Properties

1) Material Composition:
TS 500 - 259
a) Skin Material: 0.5mm thick aluminum alloy of A3105P-H14 in accordance

with JIS H 4000 or 3105-H14 or equivalent to ASTM, in accordance with
ASTM B209M or equivalent, that is deemed as a suitable aluminum for an
external cladding use with high strength, flexibility and durability.
b) Core Material: Non-combustible mineral-filled fire-retardant core
Total Thickness: 4+/-0.2mm
2) Material Properties: The material properties or data hereafter are portrayed as
representative values from mechanical tests and are not product specifications.
a) Mechanical Properties of Aluminum A3105P-H14:
Yield strength (ASTM E8) :150 MPa or N/mm2 Modules of
elasticity 70 GPa or kN/mm2
b) Mechanical Properties of ACM:
Tensile Strength (ASTM E8) :49MPa or N/mm2
Yield Strength (ASTM E8) :44MPa or N/mm2
Elongation (ASTM E8) :5%
522.1.5 Coating
The external cladding panel surface shall be factory pre-finished by the manufacturer
with a fluoropolymer three (3)-coat and three (3)-bake system like Fluorinated
Ethylene Vinyl Ether (FEVE) or Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF), (Fluorocarbon)
coating applied through “a die coating” or “a reverse roller coating” process. The
standard coating shall consist of a chromate conversion coating, an inhibitive primer,
fluorocarbon color coat and fluorocarbon clear topcoat, with color and top coat
containing 100% FEVE resin or not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride
resin by weight, with a minimum total dry film thickness of 25 microns. The coated
surface shall comply strictly with the American Architectural Manufacturers
Association (AAMA) 2605.
The back of ACM, which will face the structural wall or steel when it is installed as
a cladding panel, has a polyester-based wash coating or a service coating to protect
it from possible corrosion problems.
522.1.6 Photo-catalyst Coating

The top surface shall be coated with Photo-catalyst coating which has the function
of oxidative decomposition effect and hydrophilicity effect, and further it applied in
manufacturer’s continuous lines.
522.1.7 Fire Performance

ACM shall have fire performances to conform to the following fire test standards as
following:
TS 500 - 260
Country Test standard Requirement or Classification

EU EN 13823, EN ISO 11925-2, EN 13501-1 B-s1-d0
USA NFPA 259-93 British Thermal Unit Pass
ASTM D1781-76 Climbing Drum Peel Pass
Test Class A / Class 1
ASTM E84, Steiner Tunnel Test Pass
ASTM E-108, Modified Pass
UBC 26-9 & NFPA 285, ISMA Test
(Intermediate Scale Multi-story Pass
Apparatus)
UBC 26-3, Interior Room Corner Test
UK BS476-Part 6 & 7 Class 0 / Class 1
Japan Heat Release Test for Non-combustible Pass
Material (ISO 5660-1) & Toxicity Gas
Aluminum Honeycombed Panel
522.2.1 Product Description
Product Name Aluminum Honeycomb Panel

Thickness About 25mm
Density About 1810 kg/m3
Construction Non-homogeneous Product
Substantial Component Metallic material
Area Weight of Substantial 5.72 kg/m2
Component
Internal Non-substantial Component Polyurethane Adhesive
Area Weight of Internal Non- 0.353 kg/m2
substantial Component
522.2.2 Conditioning Procedure
Conditioning Temperature Relative Humidity Duration

Precondition (23±2) ºC RH (50±5) % 72 h
522.2.3 General Test Results
Test(s) Requested Result(s) Comments

EN 13501-1:2007+A1:2009 Fire Classification: /
classification of construction products A2 – s1, d0
and building elements – Part 1:
TS 500 - 261
Classification using data from reaction to

fire tests
522.2.4 Test Conducted

The test conducted shall be as per EN 13501-1:2007+A1:2009 Fire classification of
construction products and building elements - Part 1: Classification using data from
reaction to fire tests, Class A2. The test methods shall be as follows:
1) EN 13823:2010 Reaction to fire tests for building products – Building products
excluding floorings exposed to the thermal attack by a single burning item.
2) EN ISO 1716:2010 Reaction to fire tests for products – Determination of the
gross heat of combustion. (Calorific Value)
Note: The test specimens were conditioned to a constant mass before testing in
accordance with EN 13238.
522.2.5 Specific Test Results
Test Number of Compliance

Parameter Results
method tests with parameter
EN 13823 FIGRA (W/s) 3 34.7 Compliant
LFS < edge of specimen Yes Compliant
THR600s (MJ) 1.76 Compliant
SMOGRA (m2/s2) 1.05 Compliant
TSP600s (m2) 3.88 Compliant
Flaming particles or droplets No Compliant
EN ISO For substantial components: Heat 3 0 Compliant
1716 of Combustion –PCS (MJ/kg)
For external non-substantial NA -
component: Heat of Combustion
–PCS (MJ/m2)
For internal non-substantial 3.69 Compliant
component: Heat of Combustion
–PCS (MJ/m2)
For the product as a whole: Heat 1.82 Compliant
of Combustion –PCS (MJ/kg)
Legend:
NA – Not applicable
FIGRA – Fire growth rate index used for classification purposes [W/s]
LFS – Lateral flame spread [m]
THR600s – Total heat release within 600 s [MJ]
TS 500 - 262
SMOGRA – Smoke growth rate [m2/s2]

TSP600s – Total smoke production within 600 s [m2]
PCS – Gross heat of combustion [MJ/kg or MJ/m2]
Note: The test results must relate to the behavior of the test specimens of a product
under the particular conditions of the test; they are not intended to be the sole
criterion for assessing the potential fire hazard of the product in use.
522.2.6 Classification
Classification shall be carried out in accordance with EN 13501-1:2007+A1:2009,
as follows:
Fire Smoke production Flaming droplets
behavior
A2 - s 1 , d 0
Reaction to fire classification: A2-s1, d0
Note: The classes with their corresponding fire performance are given in Annex
hereafter. Reaction to fire classification is based on the 7-step scale of A1 to F, where
A1 is good and F is bad.
The classification report shall not represent type approval or certification of the
product. The test laboratory shall play no part in sampling the product for the test,
although it shall hold the appropriate references to the manufacturer’s factory
production control aimed to be relevant to the samples tested and that will provide
for their traceability.
522.2.7 Annex to Classification

Classes of reaction to fire performance for construction products excluding floorings
and linear pipe thermal insulation products.
Class Test method(s) Classification criteria Additional
classification
A1 EN ISO 1182 a ΔT≤30ºC, and -
and Δm≤50%, and
tf=0 (i.e. no sustained
flaming)
EN ISO 1716 PCS≤2.0MJ/kg a and -
PCS≤2.0MJ/kg b c and
PCS≤1.4MJ/m2 d and
PCS≤2.0MJ/kg e
A2 EN ISO 1182 a or ΔT≤30ºC, and -
Δm≤50%, and
tf≤20s
TS 500 - 263
EN ISO 1716 PCS≤3.0MJ/kg a and -

PCS≤4.0MJ/m2 b and
PCS≤4.0MJ/m2 d and
PCS≤3.0MJ/kg e
EN 13823 FIGRA≤120W/s and Smoke production f
LFS<edge of specimen and and
THR600s≤7.5MJ Flaming
droplets/particles g
B EN 13823 and FIGRA≤120W/s and Smoke production f
THR600s≤7.5MJ Flaming
EN ISO 11925-2 i Fs≤150mm within 60 s
Exposure = 30s
C EN 13823 and FIGRA≤250W/s and Smoke production f
THR600s≤15MJ Flaming
EN ISO 11925-2 i Fs≤150mm within 60 s
Exposure = 30s
D EN 13823 and FIGRA≤750W/s Smoke production f
and
EN ISO 11925- i Fs≤150mm within 60 s
Flaming
Exposure = 30s
E EN ISO 11925-2 i Fs≤150mm within 20 s Flaming
Exposure = 15s droplets/particles h
F No performance determined
a
For homogeneous products and substantial components of non-homogeneous
products.
b
For any external non-substantial component of non-homogeneous products.
c
Alternatively, any external non-substantial component having a PCS ≤ 2.0 MJ/m2,
provided that the product satisfies the following criteria of EN 13823: FIGRA ≤
20W/s, and LFS < edge of specimen, and THR600s ≤ 4.0 MJ, and s1, and d0.
d
For any internal non-substantial component of non-homogeneous products.
e
For the product as a whole.
f
In the last phase of the development of the test procedure, modifications of the
smoke measurement system have been introduced, the effect of which needs further
investigation. This may result in a modification of the limit values and/or parameters
for the evaluation of the smoke production.
s1 = SMOGRA ≤ 30m2/s2 and TSP600s ≤ 50m2; s2 = SMOGRA ≤ 180m2/s2 and

TSP600s ≤ 200m2;
s3 = not s1 or s2
TS 500 - 264
g
d0 = No flaming droplets/particles in EN 13823 within 600 s;
d1 = No flaming droplets/particles persisting longer than 10 s in EN 13823 within
600 s;
d2 = Not d0 or d1.
h
Pass = No ignition of the paper (no classification);
Fail = Ignition of the paper (d2 classification).
i
Under conditions of surface flame attack and, if appropriate to the end-use
application of the product, edge flame attack.
522.2.7.1.1Shop Drawings
Submit complete shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Indicate thickness
and dimension of parts; fastening and anchoring methods; detail and location of
joints and gaskets, including joints necessary to accommodate thermal movements.
522.2.7.1.2Samples
Two samples each type of panel assembly 600mm x 600mm. Submit two (2) samples
for each color or finish selected.

Composite panel manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience.
Fabricator / installer shall be acceptable to ACM manufacturer and field
measurements should be taken prior to completion of shop manufacturing and
finishing.

Protect finish and edges in accordance with ACM manufacturer’s recommendations.
Store material in accordance with ACM manufacturer’s recommendations.
Products
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the pertinent manufacturer and/or
supplier/ installer names and contact information at least one (1) month before the
intended use at the Site in the case of non-indent (locally-sourced/ supplied
materials/items) and three (3) months before the intended use at the Site in the case
of indent (imported materials/items).
Substitution is not permitted, unless officially authorized (i.e. in writing) by the
TS 500 - 265
522.3.2 Material
ACM is composed of a non-combustible mineral core with a small amount of low-
density polyethylene sandwiched between two (2) skins of 0.3mm thick aluminum.
Composition Skin material: 0.5mm thick aluminum (1100-H14)
Core material: Non-combustible mineral-filled core with gray color.
The effective sides are finished with polyester coatings (reference Table above). The
effective sides shall be protected by a translucent, self-adhesive/ peel-off film.
522.3.3 Product Dimension and Tolerance

1) Panel thickness: 4.0mm;
2) Panel Size in Stock: Non-combustible mineral-filled core with gray color.
Finish color shall be as selected by the Engineer from manufacturer’s standard
or custom colors.
Execution
522.4.1 Inspection
Surfaces to receive panels shall be even, smooth, sound, clean, dry and free from
defects detrimental to work.
Erect panels plumb, level and true. Anchor panels securely in place in accordance
with manufacturer’s approved shop drawings. Conform to ACM manufacturer’s
instructions for installation of concealed fasteners.
522.4.3 Adjusting and Cleaning

Remove and replace ACMs damaged beyond repair. Repair panels with minor
damage and clean exposed panels surfaces promptly after completion of installation
in accordance with recommendations of panel and coating manufacturer.

Quantity of the Composite Panel measured as the “Square Meters” and the rate shall
be included the following items:
1) Anchors and all necessity accessories for panel installation.
2) Fire stop sealant for gap the panel top and structural beam and/or slab.
3) Fire stop around penetration of pipes, ducts and alike.
4) Refer to the Drawing.
TS 500 - 266

Item Number
522(1) Aluminum Composite Material (ACM) System at Insulated Square meter
Exterior / Interior Wall (to include Frames)
522(2) ACM / Honeycomb Panel for Fins and Ledge, including Square meter
Frames (Fabricated, Supplied & Installed)

Number
D522(4) Aluminum Composite Material Square meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 267
523 TENSILE MEMBRANE ROOF STRUCTURE (TMRS)
The Work
installation onsite of tensile membrane roof structure, including all anchorage
The works (supply and installation onsite) specifically include membrane fabrication,
membrane-fixing materials, flashing, expansion, joint cover, catch basin, drainage
and transportation-handling-storage (DDU to project site).
The works (supply and installation onsite) specifically exclude scaffoldings, stock
yard, heavy machines for unloading materials onsite, structural steel and secondary
steel (material supply-fabrication-installation), gutter, temporary storage, mockup,
drawing submissions, permitting (approvals from Government), inspection, taxes,
and the like. While secondary steel (material supply-fabrication-installation) do not
form part of the work scope of the TMRS supplier, they are however required to
provide the details and quantities to the secondary steel fabricator.
Scaffolding and heavy machinery/ equipment to be used for TMRS/ membrane
installation shall be provided by the Contractor.
523.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required tensile membrane roof
structure (TMRS), as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.
Membrane supplier has experience of manufacturing and installing
polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) tensile membrane structures for over twenty (20)
years all over the world (including the Philippines), and has installed at more than
twenty (20) MRT stations by using TiO2 membrane roof structure.
Qualified membrane supplier has to undertake all of design, fabrication and
installation work, and must fully consider the cost of the roof shapes, anchorage and
supports.
523.1.2 References
1) ASTM E108, Fire Resistance of Coverings;
2) ASTM E84, Surface Burning Characteristics;
3) JIS 1703-2:2014 or equivalent to ASTM, Fine Ceramics - Test Method for Self-
Cleaning Performance of Photocatalytic Materials;
4) ISO 10678:2010, Fine Ceramics – Determination of Photocatalytic Activity of
Surfaces in an Aqueous Medium by Degradation of Methylene Blue;
5) PIAJ (Photocatalysis Industry Association of Japan)-qualified product.
TS 500 - 268
Products
523.2.1 Material
The fabric material should be fiberglass fabric with PTFE coating and TiO2 coating.
Material should satisfy equivalent figures below (Air Purify 450 (AP450) or greater.
Thickness : 0.8mm
Weight : 1,300g/㎡
Tensile strength : 7,000N/5cm (warp)
6,000N/5cm (weft)
Tear strength : 294N (warp)
294N (weft)
Light transmittance: 10±3%
523.2.1.1 Performance of Self-cleaning Functions

Standards for Determining Performance: Decomposition index is above 5
(Test Methods for Evaluating Self-cleaning Functions: JIS R 1703-2)
523.2.1.2 Performance of Air Purification Function (Nitrogen Oxide)

Standards for Determining Performance: Removal quantity of nitrogen oxide is
above 0.5μmol
(Test Methods for Evaluating Air Purification Function (Nitrogen Oxide): JIS R
1701-1)
Fire certificate needs to be satisfied. (ASTM E 108 Class A).
523.2.2 Design and Engineering

The following items shall be the membrane supplier’s responsibility.
1) Calculation of wind and other loads from information supplied on the
contract drawings and considering local conditions;
TS 500 - 269
2) Detailed design of secondary steel parts for fixing of membrane to the

structural steel and properly transferring the membrane tension to the
structural steel;
3) Detailed design of membrane shop drawings and patterning;
4) The terminal specifications for the structural cable for reinforcing the
membrane material, and fixing of the structural cable to the structural steel as
well as the submission of the shop drawings therefor for approval.
5) Membrane-form finding design analysis and patterning shall be by
computer finite element analysis conducted by persons experienced in the
field of tensile membrane engineering.
6) Submit to the Engineer for approvals a seam layout indicating the proposed
location of all seams to be included in the complete membrane. Supplier
must nominate the most economical seam layout.
523.2.3 Fabrication
Membrane supplier must have its own factories, with a solid background of over
twenty (20) years, and its quality control manual shall be in accordance with
ISO9001. The polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Membrane materials fabrication
capacity of supplier must be over 5,000 ㎡/month.
Light table test - each roll of fabric received shall be 100% scanned by light table to
identify any flaws, nicks, and imperfections. Identified area(s) shall be marked,
isolated and not be used nor form part of the final fabricated product.
Biaxial tensile strength test – in conjunction with the fabric technical data received
from the fabric manufacturer shall go through a bi-axial tensile strength test. The
data obtained shall be applied in the patterning and fabrication process to ensure a
quality final product can be achieved.
Fabrication shall only be by an approved specialist fabricator experienced in the work.
Fabric shop drawings shall include all information necessary for the fabrication of
the fabric membrane.
All membrane shall be patterned with computerized fabric patterning process using
finite analysis computer modeling
Joints shall be formed under pressure at the appropriate temperature and to a
tolerance of 75 ±4mm. All fabricated joints shall have a minimum of 80% of the total
strength of the coated fabric in strip tensile testing.
Packing, to prevent any damage occurring to the fabric coating and/or the base cloth.
All materials shall be packed in substantial crates and shall be designed to protect the
materials contained against hazard both during transit and while stored at the site.
Installation of membrane shall only be executed by the fabricator’s experienced
installation supervisor. Such a person shall have at least ten (10) years experiences
TS 500 - 270
in tensile membrane structure installation. He/she shall attend all membrane

installation actions at the site and provide guidance where necessary and appropriate.
The installation procedure shall be examined with respect to practicality and
compatibility with other work on the project. Where the sub-contractor proposes to
use a different basis for the installation procedure, full details shall be submitted for
approval.
Membrane supplier has to secure and store materials until installation start on site.
Install the fabric structure in a sequence and with sufficient bracing to ensure stability
of the structure. No creasing or folding of the fabric around sharp corners will be
permitted. The fabric shall not be abraded in any manner. The fabric shall be stressed
uniformly to avoid local over stresses.
Damage occurring during the installation sequence may be temporarily repaired with
field patches; however, permanent repairs shall be made with full panel replacement
from seam to seam or seam to approved splice.
Clean the fabric membrane after installation. Remove all signs of dirt and panel
markings where visible by the naked eye from 3 meters from the fabric.
523.2.5 Warranty
All materials supplied and installed or erected shall be in accordance with this
specification and shall be guaranteed against water leakage and discoloration of
membrane faulty materials and workmanship for ten (10) years.
523.2.6 Emergency
Supplier is required to have stocks of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Membrane
materials at all time in case of emergency. If an unexpected accident occurs, supplier
will be able to fabricate for repair or replacement immediately once the Engineer
identifies damages.
523.2.7 Maintenance
Membrane supplier should provide full maintenance manual.

1) Tensile membrane roof structure (TMRS) is measured as the “Square Meter”
2) Rate of Tensile membrane roof structure (TMRS) shall be included the
following:
a) Cost for the Tensile membrane roof structure’s (TMRS) factory inspection.
b) Cost and expenses for the Specialist Sub-contractor’s Site Supervisor
duration of the Tensile membrane roof structure (TMRS) installation period.
TS 500 - 271
Cost of Structural Steel Frame and necessary accessories for PTFE shall be allowed
in the Pay Item 408(11) of TS400 but all required sub-frame shall be deemed to be
included under this Pay Item.
Sub-frame shall be referred to the Drawing.

Stations Description Unit of Measurement
Building Pay
Item Number
523(1) Tensile Membrane Roof Structure (TMRS): Square meter
Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Membrane Materials
including Sub-frames on Structural Steel Work,
(Furnished & Installed)
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 272
524 ROOF ACCESSORIES
The Work
installation onsite of roof accessories, including all anchorage provisions, in
524.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required roof accessories, as
524.1.2 Scope
This section includes all materials, labor, equipment and the performance of all
operations necessary for the installation/completion of all roofing accessories of the
project as indicated on the Drawings and this Specification.
524.1.3 Submittals
524.1.3.1 Manufacturer’s Literature

Furnish to the Engineer with the Manufacturer’s product data.
524.1.3.2 Samples
Submit samples of material for the approval of the Engineer. Match these samples
with the delivered materials prior to use.
524.1.4 Product Handling

Deliver materials to site in undamaged condition. Each unit shall be handled with
care to prevent chipping and breakage. Storage shall be located as to avoid being
disturbed or shall be barricaded to protect these materials from damage by
construction operations and traffic. Protect against dampness before and after
delivery. Replace all damaged units.
524.1.5 Guarantee
The work shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ten
(10) years. Should any defect develop during the guarantee period due to improper
installation or material defects, the work shall be immediately repaired or replaced.
TS 500 - 273
Products
524.2.2 Materials
Skylight in Clark International Airport (CIA) Station shall be 4mm thick one (1)-
piece pyramidal polycarbonate dome and 900 x 900mm in size as per Engineer’s
design and dimension.
Execution
Install as per Manufacturer’s specifications.

1) Composite Interior Roof Deck Assembly Roof and Pre-painted Spandrel Metal
Ceiling accessories are measured as the “Square Meter” and the rate shall be
included furring and all necessary accessories.
2) Sky light is measured as the “Each” and the rate shall be included 1140mm x
1140mm Stainless Steel frame, t=6.8mm wired glass below the sky light doom
and all necessary works and accessories to completer works.

TS 500 - 274

Item Number
524(1) Composite Interior Roof Deck Assembly for Office and Square Meter
Facilities
524(2) 900mm x 900mm, Sky Light with Acrylic Dome Cover Each

Number
D524(24) Pre-painted Spandrel Metal Ceiling Square meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 275
525 WOODEN DOORS
General
This specification is to be read in conjunction with the rest of the Contract
Documents, including all other specifications and the drawings.
Details, workmanship and general fabrication procedures shall be approved by the
Engineer. All wooden doors shall be primed, painted and cleaned.
525.1.1 Scope of Works

The Contractor's scope of work shall include design, manufacture, delivery to Site
and installation required for the Wooden Doors and Frames Works as shown on the
drawings and specifications.
525.1.2 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit the following to the Employer for written approval
before ordering materials and commencement for the relevant item of finishing work:
1) Manufacturer's literature, giving a materials description, colour charts, details
of fixings, preparation of the background and range of accessories together with
recommendations for good workmanship practice.
2) Samples of each type of finish and materials from the manufacturers or
Contractor produced range as requested by the Employer to enable the selection
of quality, colour, pattern and the like.
3) Samples of each type of finish mounted on the correct background and each
material in accordance with the specification. Sample panels shall be a
minimum of 600 x 600 mm or a sufficient size, in the opinion of the Engineer,
to enable him to assess and establish the quality of workmanship. The
Contractor must obtain the approval of the Employer concerning quality,
application, jointing, evenness and workmanship before work commences. No
subsequent work, which is substandard to the approved sample panel and
material shall be accepted. Samples of larger units items such as building
appliances and specialities should be available at the manufacturer’s and/or
fabricator’s showroom to enable the Employer to access, and make selection of
the item for approval.
4) Certification of test results and label of materials conforming to cited
requirements and standards.
525.1.3 Drawings
1) Working drawings shall provide all information required at site for construction
and shall include full details regarding dimensions, recesses, openings,
embedded parts, reinforcements, etc.
2) Shop drawings, showing complete details or fabrication of panels, supports,
frames and accessories including elevations, plan views, full size details and
TS 500 - 276
fastening methods for this complete scope of the works. The shop drawings
shall be prepared in conformity with the best modern practice and with due
regard to practicability and economy in fabrication and erection.
3) As-built drawings shall be submitted upon completion of the work.
Products
525.2.3 General
1) Timber shall be of approved by the Engineer.
2) Timber shall be sound, well-conditioned, properly seasoned to suit the particular
use and free from the fungus. Moisture contents should not exceed 15%.
3) Samples of wood are to be submitted to the Engineer for approval and the
timbers used throughout the Works are to be equivalent in all respects to the
approved samples having particular regard to consistency of grain and colour.
525.2.4 Suitable Timbers

Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer timber shall be used in the locations as
follows:
Locations Timber grade

(1) Door Frames 1st grade hard wood
(2) Internal doors 1st grade hard wood
1st grade faces of double wood
(3) External doors 1st grade hard wood
(4) Doors to toilet and showers 15mm Laminate faced plywood
525.2.5 Decorative Plastic Laminate

Decorative laminated plastic sheeting, Colour and type shall be of the Engineer's
approval.
525.2.6 Pressure Impregnation

1) The Contractor shall treat cut ends and notches, etc. made on site with a brush
applied preservative recommended by the manufacturer.
2) Wood staining and finishing is specified under Painting and Decoration.
TS 500 - 277
525.2.7 Fixing Materials

All nails, screws, bolts and nuts shall be sufficient size and strength and be
adequately spaced to ensure that all lumber works and joinery works shall be carried
out in the best possible manner.
525.2.8 Finish Hardware

All finished hardware shall be fixed with matching screws and shall be properly fitted
and lubricated to ensure proper operation. All finished hardware is to be first class
quality to the Engineer's approval.
Finished hardware schedule shall be referred to the Section 534 of this Specification.
525.2.9 Quality Requirements

1) All timber shall be of sound stock, thoroughly seasoned treated with
preservatives described below and well manufactured, free from warp or other
defects, which would impair strength or durability. No timber should be used
which has a moisture content of more than 15%.
2) All timber shall be treated with approved preservative solution to preserve
against maestri penetration, fungal decay, insect and vermin attack and to
improve the dimensional stability of the wood.
3) Chipboard shall be good quality particle board, resin bonded with a density of
7 kg/m3. Where veneered it shall have a local species of hardwood veneer if
available fully bonded to the face and with a balancing veneer on the reverse
side.
4) Hardwood for finishing shall be of a local species if available selected for
straight grain and uniformity of colour and texture. It shall have a wrote planed
face on all exposed edges.
5) Plywood shall be good external or internal quality multiply depending upon
location of finished product. Perfect face veneer shall be used for all work
exposed to view.
6) Nails shall be steel, flat head.
7) Wood screws shall be steel, flat heads, slot drive.
8) Bolts shall be steel, zinc or cadmium plated.
9) Doors and door frames shall be proprietary types assembled at the
manufacturer's premises before delivery to site.
10) The Contractor shall be responsible for taking all necessary measurements of
the "hard" openings in which door frames and doors shall be installed before
they are respectively fabricated or final dimensions despatched to the
manufacturer. Cutting or adapting items on site shall not be allowed and
incorrect items shall be returned to the manufacturer for replacement.
11) Doors shall be in accordance particularly with the Employer's standards details
when applicable.
TS 500 - 278
12) All necessary mortising, tensioning, grooving, matching, tonguing, housing,

rebating and all other work necessary for correct jointing shall be executed in
a first class manner.
13) The joints shall be constructed exactly as shown on the drawing details (if any).
Where joints are not specifically indicated they shall be the recognised forms
of joints for each position.
14) Glued joints shall be executed with best quality animal glue, resistant to all
forms of fungicide or insect attack.
525.2.10 Veneering
1) All interior doors shall be flush teak veneered on both side of the door as
indicated and varnish finished except in the toilet area, the doors shall have
plastic lamination on one side of the door.
2) The melamine or hardwood veneer shall be securely glued to the timber core
using a melamine/urea-formaldehyde adhesive.
3) The veneer shall be checked for uniformity of colour and texture. Doors, which
in the opinion of the Employer have unacceptable variations in the colour or
texture of the veneer, shall be removed from site.
4) Edges and arises shall be neatly formed true and square with hair line butt joints.
5) All lumber shall be varnish finished.
Execution
525.3.1 Erection
All doors shall be set plumb, level, square and shall be continuously caulked to
provide weather tight seal at all joints between frames and siding, masonry, concrete
or girts with silicone rubber sealant per manufacturer's recommendation.
525.3.2 Fixing Materials

All mails screws, bolts and units shall be sufficient size and strength and be
adequately spaced to ensure that all lumber work and joinery work is constructed in
the best possible manner.
525.3.3 Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC)

The QA/QC procedures shall include the requirements defined in this specification,
but not limited to, such as:
1) Drawings and related documents
2) Fabrication, manufacturing and shop testing
3) Packing and shipping
4) Erection and installation procedures
5) Tolerance
TS 500 - 279
6) Tests at site
7) Commissioning and cleaning

Quantity of 46mm thick Wooden Door and frame is measured as the “Each” and rate
shall be included finished hardware and other required works. Refer to drawing for
the door configuration.
Wooden doors for Depot Area Building shall be of 2 hours fire rated.
Refer to the Drawing No. MCRO-DWG-OCC-AR-3611: Schedule of Doors

prescribed in the Item.
Depot Building
Unit of
Pay Item Description
Measurement
Number
D12 for OCC Building: W1000mm x H2100mm,

D525(1) Each
Single Leaf Wooden Door
D6 for Light Repair Shop: W1000mm x H2100mm,

D525(2) Each
Single Leaf Wooden Door
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 280
526 METAL DOOR AND FRAMES (AND WINDOWS)
The Work
installation onsite of metal doors and frames (and windows), including all anchorage
All metal Doors / Frame and Windows including glass and louvers for the facilities
in the Depot Area shall be of 2 hours fire-resistant.
526.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required metal doors and frames
(and windows) as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.
1) Furnish and install all items required to complete the work in accordance with
the intent of the Drawings and Specifications.
2) Furnish all bolts, anchors and inserts required for this work for building into or
fastening to the adjacent construction, complete with necessary setting
templates. Supervise the installation or verify the correct location of items after
installation. Deliver items to the appropriate contractor in sufficient time to
install properly.
3) Where the work of this section is intended to closely to work of other sections,
take field measurements prior to the preparation of shop drawings and
fabrication. Allow for trimming fitting.
526.1.2 References
1) Steel Sheets: JIS G3131, G3141, G3301, G3313 or equivalent to ASTM.
2) Stainless Steel Sheets: JIS G4303, G4305 or equivalent to ASTM.
3) Steel Frames: JIS 3101 or equivalent to ASTM and,
4) Zinc Coating: JIS 8610, 8641 or equivalent to ASTM.

specialized in this work as its primary business for at least ten (10) years and
3) The Engineer's acceptance of materials or workmanship shall not prevent its
TS 500 - 281
4) The Contractor shall remove installed materials which are rejected by the
Engineer and replace them at no additional cost to the Employer.

Protect all doors, windows and frames from water, cementitious materials, and
bituminous materials.
526.1.5 Submittals
1) Submit complete shop drawings in accordance with GS100 “General
2) Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for
the Engineer’s review.
3) Submit 2 samples of each type of window specified showing the complete
frame construction, operating sash, hardware, and insect screen (if specified).
The approved samples may be used in the work.
4) Submit the certificate of fire-resistant doors to the Engineer for his review and
approval.
Products
526.2.2 General
1) Configurations
See the Drawings and door and window schedule for specific size and
configurations.
2) Steel Doors and Frames
a) Materials
i) Steel Sheets: JIS G3131, JIS G3141, JIS G3302, JIS G3313
ii) Stainless Steel Sheets: JIS G4304, JIS G4305
iii) Steel Framing: JIS G3101
iv) Zinc Coating: JIS H8610, JIS H8641 or equivalent approved by the
Engineer.
TS 500 - 282
b) Fire-resistant Metal Doors

In compliance with the requirements of the applicable local codes, laws and
authorities.
c) Fabrication
i) Fabricate doors to allow for the following clearances within frames;
Hinge side 1.5mm
Lock side 3.0mm
Top 3.0mm
Bottom 9.0mm maximum
ii) Mechanically interlock the longitudinal seams of honeycomb core-
type doors. Leave seams invisible.
iii) Reinforce and prepare doors to receive hardware. Refer to Section
536 “Finish Hardware” of these Specifications for hardware
requirements. Use templates provide by the hardware manufacturer.
(1) Hardware location
(a) Hinges: 130mm from top of the door to top of hinge;
250mm from floor to bottom of the hinge. Intermediate
hinge (or hinges) spaced equidistant between top and
bottom hinges.
(b) Locks and latches: 100cm from floor to centerline of knob.
(c) Panic molt cross bar: 90cm to 120cmabove floor. Verify
with manufacturer’s template.
(d) Cylinder dead lock: 150cm from floor to centerline of
cylinder.
(e) Push-pulls: 112cm from floor to centerline of push-pull.
(f) Closers: Per manufacturer’s template.
(2) Mortise type hardware: Machine cut door following
manufacturer’s templates.
(3) Surface type hardware: Drill pilot holes for screws, using
hardware templates.
iv) Provide astragals for double doors where removable center mullions
are not provided.
v) Hot-dip galvanize doors and frames after welding and apply one (1)
coat of primer.
Execution
1) Install aluminum doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations, straight, plumb, square, free of wrap or twist, and in
TS 500 - 283
alignment with adjacent work. Use sufficient anchors to securely fasten door
and frame assemblies to the building.
2) Install glass in accordance with workmanship and installation techniques
described in Section 532 “Glazing” of these Specifications.
3) Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and
Section 536 “Finish Hardware” using proper tools. Avoid scratching or marring
finish surfaces.
4) Install perimeter sealant and related backing materials in accordance with
workmanship and installation requirements specified in Sections 514 & 515
“Waterproofing” and Section 523 “Sealants”.
5) Remove all protective covering materials and clean all glass and aluminum
properly prior to substantial completion.
526.3.2 Steel Door and Frame

1) Fabrication - General
a) Fabricate hollow metal units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from
defects, warp or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and
profiles. Weld exposed joints continuously, grind, dress, and make
smooth, flush and invisible. Metallic filler to conceal manufacturing
defects is not acceptable.
b) Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat heads for exposed
screws and bolts.
c) Prepare hollow metal units to receive finish hardware, including cutouts,
reinforcing, drilling and tapping in accordance with Finish Hardware
Schedule and templates provided by hardware suppliers. Comply with
applicable requirements of ANSI A11S "Specifications for Door and
Frame Preparation for Hardware".
d) Locate finish hardware as shown on final shop drawings in accordance
with locations noted herein.
2) Frames
a) Materials
Frames for interior openings shall be either commercial grade cold-rolled
steel (CRS) conforming to ASTM A366-68 or commercial grade hot-rolled
and pickled steel conforming to ASTM AS69-66T. Metal thickness shall
be not less than 1.5mm for frames in openings 1200mm or less in width;
not less than fourteen 1.9 mm for frames in openings over 1200 mm in
width.
3) Design and Construction
a) All frames shall be custom made welded units with integral trim, of the
sizes and shapes shown on Engineer-approved shop drawings. Knocked-
down frames will not be accepted.
TS 500 - 284
b) All finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square,
true and free of defects, warp or buckle. Molded members shall be clean
cut, straight and of uniform profile throughout their lengths.
c) Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends shall be as shown on the
Drawings.
d) Frames shall have corners mitered, reinforced and continuously welded
full depth and width of frame; conforming to NAAMM Standard HMMA-
820.
e) Minimum depth of stops shall be 16mm.
f) Frames for multiple or special openings shall have mullion and/or rail
members which are closed tubular shapes having no visible seams or
joints. All joints between faces of abutting members shall be securely
welded and finished smooth.
g) Hardware Reinforcements
i) Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory
for fully-templated mortised hardware only, in accord with approved
hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier.
Where surface-mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have
reinforcing plates.
ii) Minimum thickness of hardware reinforcing plates shall be as
follows:
(1) Hinge and pivot reinforcements – 5mm, 30mm x 250mm
minimum size.
(2) Strike reinforcements - 2.7mm
(3) Flush bolt reinforcements - 2.7mm
(4) Closer reinforcements - 2.7mm
(5) Reinforcements for surface mounted hardware - 2.7mm.
h) Floor Anchors
i) Floor anchors shall be securely welded inside each jamb for floor
anchorage.
ii) Where required, provide adjustable floor anchors, providing not less
than 50mm height adjustment, or to suit the floor finish condition.
iii) Minimum thickness of floor anchors shall be 1.9mm.
i) Jamb Anchors
Frames for installation in masonry walls shall be provided with adjustable
jamb anchors of the stirrup and strap type. Anchors shall be not less than
1.5mm steel. Stirrup straps shall be not less than 50mm x 250mm in size,
corrugated and/or perforated. The number of anchors provided on each
jamb shall be as follows:
TS 500 - 285
i) Frames up to 2.3m height - three (3) anchors.

(1) Frames 2.3m to 2.4m height - four (4) anchors.
(2) Frames over 2.4m height - one (1) anchor for each 600mm or
fraction thereof in height.
ii) Frames for installation in stud partitions shall be provided with steel
anchors of suitable design, not less than 1.2mm thickness, securely
welded inside each jamb as follows:
(1) Frames up to 2.3mm height - four (4) anchors.
(2) Frames 2.3mm to 2.4mm height - five (5) anchors.
(3) Frames over 2.4mm height - five (5) anchors plus one additional
for each 600mm or fraction thereof over 2.4mm.
j) Frames to be anchored to previously placed concrete or masonry shall be
provided with minimum 9mm concealed bolts set into expansion shields
or inserts at 150mm from top and bottom and 600mm o.c. Reinforce
frames at anchor locations with 400mm sheet steel stiffeners welded to
frame at each anchor.
k) Frames for installation in masonry wall openings more than 1200mm in
width shall have an angle or channel stiffener factory welded into the head.
Such stiffeners shall be not less than 2.7mm steel and not longer than the
opening width, and shall not be used as lintels or load bearing members.
l) Dust cover boxes (or mortar guards) of not thinner than 0.45mm steel shall
be provided at all hardware mortises on frames to be set in masonry or
plaster partitions.
m) All frames shall be provided with a steel spreader temporarily attached to
the feet of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling.
n) Loose glazing stops shall be of cold rolled steel, not less than 0.9mm
thickness, butted at corner joints and secured to the frame with
countersunk cadmium-or zinc-plated screws. Interior frames may be
provided with snap-on glazing stops.
o) Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive three (3)
silencers on strike jambs of single door frames and two (2) silencers on
heads of double-door frames.
4) Fire Resistance: Apart from full compliance with applicable law, regulation,
etc., the fire resistance of metal doors and frames must be supported/
complemented by the following:
a) Proof of compliance of resistance for the metal door, door frame, glass
panels, door furniture and all elements as a whole;
b) Provision of all the necessary automatic closer mechanisms;
c) Panic devices meeting all applicable international fire and safety
standards;
TS 500 - 286
d) Intumescent strips at the door edge and frame jamb;

e) Complete door set as a pre-hung door with integral frame;
f) The appropriate emergency directional devices, lights and signages; and
g) Installation only by the manufacturer’s fitter or a competent fitter in
accordance with the manufacturer instructions.
5) Finish: After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be
removed, and exposed faces of all welded joints shall be dressed smooth.
Frames shall then be chemically treated to insure maximum paint adhesion and
shall be coated on all accessible surfaces with one coat of rust-inhibitive baked-
on alkyd primer standard with the manufacturer which is fully cured before
shipment to a dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
526.3.3 Hollow Metal Doors

1) Materials: Doors shall be made of commercial quality, level, cold-rolled steel
(CRS) conforming to ASTM A366-68 and free of scale, pitting or other surface
defects.
Face sheets for interior doors shall be not less than 1.2mm.
2) Design and Construction
a) All doors shall be custom made, of the types and sizes shown on the
approved shop drawings, and shall be fully welded seamless construction
with no visible seams or joints on their faces or vertical edges. Minimum
door thickness shall be 44 mm.
b) All doors shall be strong, rigid and neat in appearance, free from warpage
or buckles. Corner bends shall be true and straight and of minimum radius
for the gauge of metal used.
c) Face sheets shall be stiffened by continuous vertical formed steel sections
spanning the full thickness of the interior space between door faces. These
stiffeners shall be not less than 0.75mm spaced not more than 150mm
apart and securely attached to face sheets by spot welds not more than
125mm o.c. Spaces between stiffeners shall be sound-deadened and
thermal insulated the full height of the door with an inorganic non-
combustible batt-type material.
d) Door faces shall be joined at their vertical edges by a continuous weld
extending the full height of the door. All such welds shall be ground, filled
and dressed smooth to make them invisible and provide a smooth flush
surface.
e) Top and bottom edges of all doors shall be closed with a continuous
recessed steel channel not less than 1.5mm, extending the full width of
the door and spot welded to both faces. Doors shall have an additional
closure at their bottom edge for attachment of drop weather/sound seal.
f) Edge profiles shall be provided on both vertical edges of doors as follows:
TS 500 - 287
i) Single-acting swing doors - beveled 3mm in 50mm.

ii) Double acting swing doors - rounded on 53mm radius.
3) Hardware Reinforcements
a) Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for
fully- templated hardware only in accord with the approved hardware
schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Where
surface-mounted hardware (or hardware, the interrelation of which is to
be adjusted upon installation - such as top and bottom pivots, floor closers,
etc.) is to be applied, doors shall have reinforcing plates.
b) Minimum gauges for hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows:
i) Hinge and pivot reinforcement - 4.5mm.
ii) Reinforcement for lock face, flush bolts, concealed holders,
concealed or surface mounted closers - 2.5mm.
iii) Reinforcements for all other surface-mounted hardware - 1.4mm.
4) Glass Moldings and Stops
a) Where specified or scheduled, doors shall be provided with hollow metal
moldings to secure glazing by others in accordance with glass opening
sizes shown on the Drawings.
b) Fixed moldings shall be securely welded to the door on the security side.
c) Loose stops shall be not less than 1 mm, with mitered corner joints,
secured to the framed opening by cadmium or zinc-coated countersunk
screws space 200mm o.c. Snap-on attachments will not be permitted.
d) Stops shall be flush with face of door.
5) Fire Resistance: Apart from full compliance with applicable law, regulation,
etc., the fire resistance of hollow metal doors and frames must be supported/
complemented by the following:
a) Proof of compliance of resistance for the hollow metal door, door frame,
glass panels, door furniture and all elements as a whole;
b) Provision of all the necessary automatic closer mechanisms;
c) Panic devices meeting all applicable international fire and safety
standards;
d) Intumescent strips at the door edge and frame jamb;
e) Complete door set as a pre-hung door with integral frame;
f) The appropriate emergency directional devices, lights and signages; and
g) Installation only by the manufacturer’s fitter or a competent fitter in
accordance with the manufacturer instructions.
6) Finish: After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be
dressed, filled and sanded as required to make all faces and vertical edges
TS 500 - 288
smooth, level and free of all irregularities. Doors shall then be chemically
treated to insure maximum paint adhesion and shall be coated, on all exposed
surfaces, with manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive alkyd primer as specified
for frames which fully cured before shipment.
7) Flatness: Doors shall maintain a flatness tolerance of 1.5mm maximum, in any
direction, including in a diagonal direction.
8) Labeled Doors and Frames
a) Labeled doors and frames shall be provided for those openings requiring
fire protection ratings as scheduled on drawings. Such doors and frames
shall be labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) or other
internationally-recognized agency having a factory inspection service in
the Philippines.
b) If any door or frame specified by the Engineer to be fire-resistant cannot
qualify for appropriate labeling because of its design, size, hardware or
any other reason, the Engineer shall be so advised before fabricating work
on that item is started.
9) Hardware Location
The location of finish hardware items, specified in Section 536 "Finish
Hardware", shall be as indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders
Hardware" as published by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI), unless
10) Clearances
a) Edge clearances shall be provided as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
i) Heads and Jambs: 3mm.
ii) Between edges of a pair of swing doors: 3mm.
iii) Door Sills (where no threshold is used): 9mm maximum above
finished floor
iv) Door Sills (where threshold is used): 19 mm maximum above
finished floor.
v) Door Sills (where threshold is used): 6 mm above non-combustible
sills. For fire-resistant doors conform with NFPA 80, if more
stringent.
b) Finished floor is defined as the top surface of the floor, except when
resilient tile or carpet is used, when it is the top of the concrete slab. Where
the carpet is to be more than 13mm thick, allow 6mm clearance.
11) Preparation for Finished Hardware
a) Prepare door and frames to receive hardware:
i) Hardware supplier shall furnish hollow metal manufacturer approved
hardware schedule, hardware templates, and samples of physical
hardware where necessary to insure correct fitting and installation.
TS 500 - 289
ii) Preparation includes sinkages and cut-outs for mortise and concealed
hardware.
b) Provide reinforcements for both concealed and surface applied hardware:
i) Drill and tap mortise reinforcements at factory, using templates.
ii) Install reinforcements with concealed connections designed to
develop full strength of reinforcements.
12) Inspection
Examine the areas and conditions where steel doors and frames are to be
installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of the work.
13) Frame Installation
a) Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection
Instructions for Steel Frames".
b) Where possible, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and
ceilings.
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely
until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete,
remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and
undamaged.
c) In stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and
strike levels.
In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping
screws.
14) Door Installation
a) Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
herein.
b) Inspect work after installation and repair damaged items equal to new
work, or remove and replace damaged items.
Automatic Sliding Doors
526.4.1 General
1) Extent and configuration of automatic entrance doors is indicated on drawings
and door schedules.
Automatic entrance doors consist of the manufacture’s assembled units
including entrance doors and frames, powered door operators, and operator
controls and all necessary accessories.
2) Types of automatic entrance door operations should be Bi-parting sliding as
show on the Drawings.
TS 500 - 290
3) Electrical connections are specified in the Electrical Specifications

526.4.2 Reference
1) AAMA 101: Appendix Dissimilar Materials.
2) AAADM.
3) ANSI Z97.1: Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Methods of Test.
4) ANSI A156.10: For Power Operated Pedestrian Doors; Sliding Doors section.
5) BHMA 1601: Power Operated Pedestrian Door Standard.
6) NFPA 101: Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings & Structures.
7) UL 325: Electrical Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and
Systems.
526.4.3 System Description
1) Performance Requirements
Provide exterior automatic entrance doors assemblies that have been designed
and fabricated to comply with performance requirements specified. Each
system shall be tested by a recognized testing laboratory or agency in
accordance with specified test methods. Provide certified test results.
2) Thermal Movement
Provide systems capable of withstanding thermal movements resulting from
an ambient temperature range up to 40 o C.
3) Find Loading
Provide assemblies capable of withstanding test pressure of 20 psf inward and
20 psf outward when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330.
4) Transmission Characteristics
Provide automatic entrance doors with jamb and head frames that have an air
infiltration rate per linear foot of perimeter crack of operating panels of not
more than 11 CFM when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at an inward
pressure differential of 1.567 psf.
526.4.4 Submittals
1) Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, standard details, and
installation recommendations for each type of automatic entrance door
required. Include the following:
a) Fabrication methods
b) Finishing
c) Hardware and operations
d) Roughing-in and wiring diagrams
e) Parts lists
f) Accessories and other components
2) Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication installation of

automatic entrance doors and associated components not included in
manufacturer’s product data. Include the following:
a) Elevations
TS 500 - 291
b) Hardware
c) Anchors and reinforcements
d) Expansion provisions
e) Glazing details
3) Templates and Diagrams: Furnish templates, diagrams and other data to

fabricators and installers of related work, as necessary for coordination of the
automatic entrance door installation.
4) Samples: Submit samples of each required stainless steel finish, at least 300
mm long sections of extrusions and 200mm x 200mm of sheet/plate. Where
color and texture variations are anticipated, include 2 or more units in each set
of samples indicating limits variations.
5) Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s maintenance and service data,

including the name, address and telephone number of the barest authorized
service representative.
6) Certification: Provide certificated test results showing that the automatic

entrance door systems have been tested by a recognized testing laboratory or
agency and comply with specified performance characteristics.
7) Maintenance organization in Ulaanbaatar for maintenance and repairing in the

event of breakdown of the door and door system after completion of the works

Provide automatic entrance doors produced by a single manufacturer capable
of showing prior production of doors similar to those required.
2) Installer’s Qualifications
Engage an Installer who is an authorized representative of the automatic
entrance door manufacture for both the installation and maintenance of the
type of units required for the project.
a) Experience: The installer shall have not less than 3 years experience in
the installation and service of the automatic entrance door assemblies
manufactured for this project.
b) Maintenance Proximity: The installer shall maintain offices and repair
or service or service facilities not more than 2 hours normal travel time
from the project site.
3) Design Criteria
The drawings indicate spacing of members, sizes, profiles and dimensions
required. Minor deviations will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer’s
standard products when, in the Architect’s sole judgment, such deviations do
not materially detract from design concept or intended performance.
TS 500 - 292
3) Emergency Exit Door

a) Automatic entrance doors serving as a required means of egress shall
comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
b) Provide manufacturer’s certification that doors comply with these
requirements.
c) Doors shall be operable manually by leasing automatic operation
system in the event of emergency.
4) Project Conditions
Field Measurements: Check openings by field measurement before fabrication
to ensure proper fitting of work; show measurements on final shop drawings.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of
work. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without measurements, and
coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit.
526.4.6 Products
1) Operator Covered finish location as indicate on the finishing schedule and
shown on the drawing and should be stainless steel and aluminum as
following;
a) Provide alloy and temper recommended by the producer or finisher for
type of use and finish indicated. Provide main extrusions of not less than
2mm wall thickness.
b) Provide extruded glazing stops and other applied trim extrusions with
minimum wall thickness of 1.5 mm.
2) Door Operation Requirements
a) Electricity: Electricity power for the automatic entrance doors shall be
220V and 50Hz.
b) Doors Motion Speed: Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer,
opening and closing door speed shall be 0.1 ～0.5m/s.
c) Operable Standard Wind Speed: 15m/s
3) Fasteners
Provide nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal fasteners
compatible with stainless steel components, hardware, anchors and other items
being fastened.
Exposed Fasteners: Exposed fasteners shall not be used unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer. For the application of hardware, use fasteners that
match the finishing of the member or hardware being fastened.
4) Steel Reinforcement and Brackets
Provide manufacturer’s standard steel reinforcement and brackets with 2.0 oz.
hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 123. Apply after fabrication.
5) Sliding Weather-stripping
TS 500 - 293
For exterior door, provide replaceable weather-stripping of wool,

polypropylene or nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric and aluminum strip
backing. Sliding weather-stripping includes stripping at jamb rails, head rails,
meeting rails, wherever there is no stop or lap to receive compression weather-
stripping.
6) Sealants and Gaskets
Use sealants and gaskets in fabrication, assembly and installation of the work
that are recommended and guaranteed by manufacturer to remain permanently
elastic, non-shrinking, and non-migrating.
526.4.7 Glazing
1) The type and thickness of glass for sliding glass doors, including fixed glass
panel shall be as indicated in the “Doors and Windows Schedule” or elsewhere
on the Drawings.
526.4.8 Hardware
1) Provide the door manufacturer’s standard
Heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled or required for operation
of each door, including the following items, of sizes, number, and type
recommended by the manufacturer for service indicated.
2) Automatic Locking
Provide an electrically controlled device to automatically lock the door in the
closed position after each cycle.
3) Install hardware
Except surface-mounted hardware, at the fabrication plant. Remove only as
required for final finishing operation, delivery and installation at the Project
Site.
526.4.9 Door Operation

1) vide operators of the size recommended by the manufacturer for door size,
weight and movement, for condition of exposure, and for long-term
maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for the type of occupancy
indicated.
2) Exposed Housings
Provide stainless steel housing for operators, minimum 1.5 mm thickness, with
fasteners concealed when door is in the closed position. Provide access for
maintenance.
3) Adjustment Features
Provide operations that are fully adjustable without removal of the doors.
Provide adjustment for opening, closing and checking speeds, as well as length
of time door remains open.
TS 500 - 294
1) Hold-open Switch : Equip units hold-open switch, arranged to hold door

open without continued use of power.
4) Electro-Mechanical Operators for Sliding Doors
a) Provide self contained, concealed overhead electro-mechanical drive unit,
with power opening and either power or spring closing and checking for
both opening and closing cycles.
b) Provide connections for power and control wiring.
c) Provide safety release clutch for obstructed closing.
d) Provide for easy manual sliding when power is off.
5) Operator Action: Provide operator action as indicated by door symbol on the
drawings.
6) Provide emergency breakaway swing feature.
526.4.10 DOOR OPERATOR SENSOR CONTROL SYSTEMS

1) Radar Frequency Motion Detection Control System
a) Provide self-contained motion-detecting control system composed of
Radar sensing device to activate door operator and horizontal photo-cell
beam across door opening to prevent door from closing until door is clear
of traffic.
b) Sensing device shall be adjustable to provide detection patterns and
sensitivity equivalent to those required for mats.
c) Provide housing for sensing device finished to match finish of doors and
frames.
4) Install scanners on both interior and exterior of each operator cover
automatic sliding entrance door.
2) Photo-Cell Control System
Provide the manufacture’s standard horizontal beam photocell control system,
arranged as indicated by manufacturer.
526.4.11 Accessories
1) Sill configuration at Sliding Entrance Doors
a) Provide sill members and bottom guide system of configuration indicated.
b) Provide recessed pin guide track system at sidelights, and no threshold
across the door opening.
526.4.12 Fabrication
1) General
Sizes of door and frame units, and profile requirements, are indicated on the
drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated with maximum and minimum
TS 500 - 295
dimensions required to achieve design requirements and coordination with

other works.
2) Prefabrication
a) Provide automatic entrance doors as prefabricated packaged units
complete with doors, sidelights, frames, transoms where indicated, door
operators and related components, hardware and accessories.
b) Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware applications and
other work before shipment to project site.
i) Pre-glaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible, in
coordination with installation and hardware requirements.
ii) Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time
of installation at project site.
iii) Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming,
drilling and grinding of metal work in manner which prevents
damage to exposed finish surfaces. For hardware, perform these
operations prior to application of finishes.
3) Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations; grind exposed welds smooth
and restore mechanical finish.
4) Reinforce the work as necessary for performance requirements, and for support
to the structure. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with nonmetallic
separators to prevent “freeze-up” of joints.
5) Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with zinc chromate primer,
bituminous paint, or other separator that will prevent corrosion.
6) Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. Provide
secure attachment and support at mechanical joints, with hairline fit of
contacting members.
7) Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
8) Glazing systems
a) Provide glazing systems for frames to receive lights and for replacement
of glass, but for non-removal of glass from the exterior.
b) Provide type and profile of glazing system indicated, to receive glazing
materials indicated.
9) Fabricate frame assemblies for exterior walls with flashing and keeps to drain
penetrating moisture to the exterior.
10) Providing anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly
from the building structure. Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units.
1) Installation of the doors shall be carried out in strictly accordance with
manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations.
TS 500 - 296
a) Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or
doors. Anchor securely in place. Separate aluminum and other corrodible
metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of
contact with other materials.
b) Bed sill members in a bed of sealant or with joint filers or gasket as
indicated to provide weather tight construction.
c) Install complete door operator system in accordance with manufacturer’s
instruction, including controls, control wiring and remote power units.
d) Tracks, header assemblies, operating brackets, rails and sides level and
true to location, with adequate anchorage for permanent support.
526.4.14 Cleaning
Glass and stainless steel surface promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing
and sealant compounds, dirt other substances. Exercise care to avoid damage to
coatings.
Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction
period to ensure that automatic entrance doors will be without damage or
deterioration, other than normal weathering, at the time of acceptance.

1) Metal doors and frames (and windows) are measured as the “Each”, and the
rates shall be included the following items:
a) Various configurations of doors and frames including threshold, various
type and martials of hardware confirm to the Section 534, Finish
Hardware of those Specifications and all necessary accessories, as shown
on the “Doors Schedule” for door No. and their configurations.
b) Fire grass and fire louvers and size as shown on Doors Schedule Drawing
of Dept facilities.
c) Grass and louvers for doors as indicated “Schedule of Door” for all
facilities in the Depot Area shall be of 2 hours fire-resistant
d) Panting finish as specified on the Door Schedule.
2) Vehicle Entrance and Pedestrian with Gates are measured as the “Each”.
a) Steel Grilled gate doors with hardware confirm to the Section 534 of those
Specifications and all necessary accessories, as shown on the Drawings
for gate doors No. and their configurations.
b) Gate posts with foundation including cement mortar plastering and
painting.
c) Panting finish as specified on the Door Schedule.
TS 500 - 297
3) All louvers in the doors in the Depot area Buildings and Sub-station Building
shall be equipped 1.6mm thick fuse-link steel sheet dumpers.

Item Number
D1 for Station: W2050mm x H2100mm, Double Leaf Fire-
526(1)a Rated Emergency Exit Door, Stainless Steel Powder Coated Each
Finish
526(1)b Rated Plain Steel Flush Door with Wicket Door, Fluoroure Each
Baked Finish
D3 for Station: W1525mm x H2100mm, Single Leaf Fire-
526(1)c Each
Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Finish
526(1)d Each
Rated Full Louver Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Finish
526(1)e Each
Rated Narrow Lite Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Finish
526(1)f Rated Bottom Louver Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
526(1)g Rated Bottom Louver Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D8 for Station: W1050mm x H2100mm, Single Leaf Sliding
526(1)h Fire-Rated Bottom Louver, Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Each
Baked Finish
526(1)i Each
Rated Emergency Exit Door, Fluoroure Baked Finish
526(1)j Each
526(1)k Rated Bottom Louver Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
526(1)l Each
TS 500 - 298

526(1)m Each
526(1)n Rated Emergency Exit Door, Stainless Steel Powder Coated Each
Finish
D1 for Station SIG/COM/Railway Electric House:
526(2)a W1850mm x H2100mm, Double Leaf Fire-Rated Full Each
Louver Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Finish
526(2)b W1050mm x H2100mm, Single Leaf Fire-Rated Full Louver Each
Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Finish
526(2)c W1050mm x H2100mm, Single Leaf Fire-Rated Narrow Each
Lite Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Finish
526(2)d W3050mm x H3000mm, Double Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Each
Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Finish
Sub-Stations Description Unit of

Item Number
D1 for Substation: W1850mm x H2100mm, Double Leaf
526(3) Fire-Rated Full Louver Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D3 for Intermediate Signaling House: W1050mm x
526(4)a H2100mm, Single Leaf Fire-Rated Narrow Lite Steel Flush Each
Door, Fluoroure Baked Finish
D4 for Intermediate Signaling House: W3050mm x
526(4)b H3000mm, Double Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Each
Fluoroure Baked Finish
D1 for Battery Post: W1850mm x H2100mm, Double Leaf
526(5) Fire-Rated Full Louver Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish

Number
Vehicle Entrance Gate Including Post (W=5.00m x
D526(1)c Each
H=2.50m)
Pedestrian Entrance Gate Including Post (W=0.75m x
D526(1)d Each
H=2.50m)
D1 for OCC Building: W3000mm x H3000mm, Double Leaf
D526(2)a Fire-Rated Full Louver Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
TS 500 - 299

D526(2)b Each
Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Finish
D526(2)c Each
D4 for OCC Building: W1000mm x H2100mm, Single Leaf
D526(2)d Each
D526(2)e Each
D526(2)f Each
D526(2)g Fire-Rated Bottom Louver Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Each
Baked Finish
D526(2)h Sliding Fire-Rated Bottom Louver, Steel Flush Door, Each
D526(2)i Fire-Rated Full Louver Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D11 for OCC Building: W2070mm x H3035mm, Automatic
D526(2)j Each
Sliding Entrance Doors
D2 for Workshop: W2000mm x H2400mm, Double Leaf
D526(3)a Each
D526(3)b Each
D4 for Workshop: W1000mm x H2100mm, Single Leaf
D526(3)c Each
D526(3)d Each
D526(3)e Fire-Rated Bottom Louver Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Each
Baked Finish
D526(3)f Sliding Fire-Rated Bottom Louver, Steel Flush Door, Each
D526(3)g Each
D9 for Workshop: W800mm x H2100mm, Single Leaf Fire-
D526(3)h Each
D526(3)i Fire-Rated Full Louver Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D526(3)j Fire-Rated Bottom Louver Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Each
Baked Finish
TS 500 - 300
D1 for Light Repair Shop: W1800mm x H2500mm, Double

D526(4)a Leaf Fire-Rated Full Louver Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Each
Baked Finish
D526(4)b Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D3 for Light Repair Shop: W1000mm x H2100mm, Single
D526(4)c Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D526(4)d Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D526(4)e Leaf Fire-Rated Bottom Louver Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Each
Baked Finish
D526(4)f Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D1 for Underfloor Cleaning Shop: W1000mm x H2100mm,
D526(5) Single Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Each
Baked Finish
D1 for Unscheduled Repaier Shop: W1000mm x H2100mm,
D526(6) Single Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Each
Baked Finish
D1 for Wheel Re-Profiling Shop: W1000mm x H2100mm,
D526(7)a Single Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Each
Baked Finish
D2 for Wheel Re-Profiling Shop: W1000mm x H2100mm,
D526(7)b Single Leaf Fire-Rated Bottom Louver Steel Flush Door, Each
D1 for Catenary Maintenance Vehicle Shop: W1000mm x
D526(8)a H2100mm, Single Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Each
D526(8)b H2100mm, Single Leaf Fire-Rated Bottom Louver Steel Each
D526(8)c H2100mm, Double Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Each
D2 for Shunting Car Shop: W2000mm x H2100mm, Single
D526(9) Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D1 for Fuel Pump House 1: W850mm x H2100mm, Single
D526(10) Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
TS 500 - 301
D1 for Depot Hazardous Store: W1800mm x H2100mm,

D526(11) Double Leaf Fire-Rated Bottom Louver Steel Flush Door, Each
D1 for Workshop Oil Storage: W900mm x H2100mm,
D526(12) Single Leaf Fire-Rated Bottom Louver Steel Flush Door, Each
D1 for Light Repair Shop Oil Storage: W900mm x
D526(13) H2100mm, Single Leaf Fire-Rated Bottom Louver Steel Each
D2 for Truck Garage: W950mm x H2100mm, Single Leaf
D526(14) Each
D2 for Track Maintenance Office: W1900mm x H2100mm,
D526(15)a Double Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Each
Baked Finish
D526(15)b Single Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Each
Baked Finish
D526(15)c Single Leaf Fire-Rated Bottom Louver Steel Flush Door, Each
D2 for Maintenance Car Shop: W1900mm x H2100mm,
Baked Finish
Baked Finish
D1 for N.Depot Sub Station: W2550mm x H3000mm,
Baked Finish
D2 for N.Depot Sub Station: W1050mm x H2100mm, Single
Finish
D1 for N.Depot Sectioning Post: W2550mm x H3000mm,
Baked Finish
Baked Finish
D10 for Water Pump House 1: W2100mm x H2150mm,
D526(19) Double Leaf Fire-Rated Full Louver Steel Flush Door, Each
D1 for N.Depot Sub Station: W2550mm x H3000mm,
Baked Finish
D2 for N.Depot Sub Station: W1050mm x H2100mm, Single
Finish
TS 500 - 302

Baked Finish
Baked Finish
D10 for Water Pump House 1: W2100mm x H2150mm,
D526(19) Double Leaf Fire-Rated Full Louver Steel Flush Door, Each
D1a for Training Center: W600mm x H2400mm, Single
D526(23)a Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D1b for Training Center: W700mm x H2400mm, Single
Finish
D1c for Training Center: W900mm x H2400mm, Single
D526(23)c Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D1d for Training Center: W1000mm x H2400mm, Single
D526(23)d Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D2 for Training Center: W1000mm x H2400mm, Single
D526(23)e Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D3 for Training Center: W1800mm x H2400mm, Double
D526(23)f Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D526(23)g Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D5a for Training Center: W600mm x H2300mm, Single
D526(23)h Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D5b for Training Center: W800mm x H2300mm, Single
D526(23)i Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D526(23)j Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Baked Each
Finish
D526(23)k Leaf Fire-Rated Full Louver Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Each
Baked Finish
D8 for Training Center: W600mm x H600mm, Single Leaf
D526(23)l Each
D1 for Central Equipment Room: W2000mm x H3000mm,
Baked Finish
TS 500 - 303

D526(24)b Double Leaf Fire-Rated Full Louver Steel Flush Door, Each
D526(24)c Double Leaf Fire-Rated Plain Steel Flush Door, Fluoroure Each
Baked Finish
D2 for Canteen: W1000mm x H2100mm, Single Leaf Fire-
D526(25) Each
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 304
527 METAL LOUVERS
The Work
The works in this section shall consist of the manufacture supply, delivery and
installation onsite of metal louvers, including anchorage provisions, in accordance
Engineer.
527.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required metal louvers as shown
Products
527.2.2 Materials
1) Steel Sheet
ASTM A505, 606, 715, hot-rolled, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123,
385.
2) Aluminum
References are JIS H4100, Aluminum and Aluminum-alloy Extruded Shapes;
and JIS A5757 & 5758 or equivalent ASTM, Sealant. Extruded sections must
meet ASTM B429, G102, alloy as specified.
3) Accessories and Hardware
Manufacturer’s standard, non-corrosive, compatible with louver material and
building material.
4) Insect Screen
Stainless Steel, minimum 14/18 size mesh, removable.
5) Bird Screen
12.7mm squarer mesh formed with 1.6mm diameter wire in frame, compatible
with louver frame. Attach with non-corrosive hardware.
TS 500 - 305
Anti-corrosive protection paint and finishing shall be in accordance with

Section 550 “Painting”.
527.2.3 Architectural Louvers

The type and configuration of Architectural Louvers shall be referred to the Doors and
Windows Schedules.
527.2.3.1 All Louvers

The criteria below have been calculated using a standard size louver and shall change
depending on the selected louver size. For custom louver data using the design
criteria, the Airflow Tool from the “Customize” column hereafter shall be selected.
The sizes and configuration of louvers shall be show on the Drawings.
All louvers in the doors in the Depot area Buildings, Sub-station Building and the
fire rated partitions in the Station shall equipped 1.6mm thick fuse-link steel sheet
dumpers.
527.2.3.2 Modular Intake Louvers

Fixed intake/ exhaust louvers that offer modular design shall fit together seamlessly
for custom openings. Blades shall be positioned at approximately 45º and spaced at
approximately 4” center to center. Galvannealed steel louvers shall have a very fine
matte finish that acts like a primer to easily accept paint while providing corrosion
resistance. Aluminum louvers shall be strong, lightweight, and corrosion-resistant,
with each unit including a pre-installed bird screen.
527.2.3.3 Stationary Intake Louvers

Stationary intake louvers shall be designed to protect air intake and exhaust openings
at exterior walls. Each shall feature a flattened aluminum birdscreen. Louvers shall
provide a smooth finish and clean appearance.
527.2.3.4 Combination Louver Dampers

Combination louver dampers shall be designed to protect air intake and exhaust
openings from rain and weather while still providing excellent air flow. Each shall
include a ½” flattened birdscreen in removable frame mounted on the interior.
Provide standard manually-operated linkage kit for opening and closing.
527.2.4 Fabrication
Fasten blades to provide a rigid, square, self-supporting assembly free from warp or
twist.
527.2.5 Finish
See the Drawings for finishing of metal louvers.
TS 500 - 306
Execution
527.3.1 Inspection
The Contractor shall inspect the work in place and notify the Engineer in writing of
defects in the work of other trades that will affect the proper installation of the work
of this section. Starting the installation work shall constitute acceptance of the base
or adjoining work.
527.3.2 Preparation
1) Take Site dimensions before fabricating louvers.
2) Ensure that openings are properly prepared and that flashing is properly
installed.
1) Install louvers in openings straight and plumb.
2) Secure louver with concealed or semi-concealed non-corrosive fasteners.
3) Coordinate the installation with metal siding, masonry, or curtain wall system,
and mechanical work.
4) Set and tie in to flashing to ensure the diversion of moisture to the exterior.
5) Install bird or insect screen. Hinge screens for access.
6) Clean up and dispose of all wrapping, scraps, waste materials, and other refuse
which has been brought onto the job or which has accumulated as a result of
the work.

1) Aluminum louvers of Manual operable and fixed type with various size and
configuration of louvers are measured as the “Square Meters” and rate shall be
including the following items:
a) Insect screen for the louvers specified in the Drawings.
b) Manual operation devices.
2) Horizontal Steel Sun Shade Grill with vertical posts for Training Center in
Depot Area is measured as the “Square Meters” and rate shall be included
painting finish. Refer to the Drawing for configuration of grill.
3) Rate of louvers in the doors shall be allowed 1.6mm thick fuse-link steel sheet
dumpers for buildings in the depot area and Sub-station Building.

TS 500 - 307
Item Number
527(1) Aluminum louver on PTFE Membrane Square meter
L1 for Station SIG/COM/Railway Electric House:
527(1) Each
W1800mm x H3140mm, Powder Coated Aluminum Louver

Item Number
L1 for Substation: W1800mm x H3140mm, Powder Coated
527(2) Each
Aluminum Louver
L1 for Battery Post: W1800mm x H3140mm, Powder
527(3) Each
Coated Aluminum Louver

Number
D'527(1) Steel Sun Shade Grill Lot
L1 for OCC Building: W3120mm x H5100mm, Powder
D527(2) Each
Coated Aluminum Louver, Polygonal
L1 for Workshop: W20000mm x H4000mm, Powder Coated
D527(3)a Each
Aluminum Louver
D527(3)b Each
Aluminum Louver
D527(3)c Each
Aluminum Louver
D527(3)d Each
Aluminum Louver
L1 for Light Repair Shop: W2000mm x H3000mm, Powder
D527(4)a Each
D527(4)b Each
D527(4)c Each
TS 500 - 308
L4 for Light Repair Shop: W230000mm x H1000mm,

D527(4)d Each
Powder Coated Aluminum Louver
D527(4)e Each
D527(4)f Each
D527(4)g Each
L1 for Underfloor Cleaning Shop: W2500mm x H1300mm,
D527(5) Each
L1 for Unscheduled Repaier Shop: W2500mm x H1300mm,
D527(6) Each
L1 for Wheel Re-Profiling Shop: W2500mm x H1300mm,
D527(7)a Each
L1 for Catenary Maintenance Vehicle Shop: W2500mm x
D527(8) Each
H1300mm, Powder Coated Aluminum Louver
W2 for Shunting Car Shop: W3924mm x H1350mm,
D527(9) Each
W1 for Fuel Pump House 1: W600mm x H400mm, Powder
D527(10) Each
W2 for Truck Garage: W2350mm x H1350mm, Powder
D527(11)a Each
D527(11)b Each
W3 for Track Maintenance Office: W8500mm x H1250mm,
D527(12)a Each
D527(12)b Each
D527(12)c Each
W5 for Training Center: W5150mm x H900mm, Powder
D527(13)a Each
D527(13)b Each
D527(13)c Each
D527(13)d Each
L1 for Central Equipment Room: W3600mm x H900mm,
D527(14)a Each
L2 for Central Equipment Room: W4000mm x H700mm,
D527(14)b Each
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 309
528 ALUMINUM & GLASS DOORS AND WINDOWS
The Work
installation onsite of aluminum & glass doors and windows, including all anchorage
All metal Aluminum & Glass Doors and Windows including glass for the facilities
in the Depot Area shall be of 2 hours fire-resistant.
528.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required aluminum & glass doors
and windows, as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.
528.1.2 Section Includes

1) Aluminum single swing doors.
2) Aluminum double-swing doors.
3) Aluminum Thermally-Controlled single swing doors.
4) Aluminum Thermally-Controlled double-swing doors.

1) Section 509 - Rough Carpentry: Installation and requirements for rough door
opening.
2) Section 510 - Finish Carpentry: Installation and requirements for door frame
and casing and trim.
3) Section 523 - Sealants.
4) Section 537 - Finish Hardware.
5) Section 554 - Painting.
528.1.4 References
1) AAMA 611.98 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural
Aluminum.
2) AAMA 2603.02 - Voluntary Specifications, Performance Requirements and
Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and
Panels.
3) AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specifications, Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for Pigmented for High Performance Organic Coatings on
Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
TS 500 - 310
4) ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for

Safety Glazing Material Used In Buildings.
5) ASTM E 283 - Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
6) ASTM E 330 - Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
7) ASTM E 547 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential.
8) CPSC 16CFR-1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
528.1.5 Design/Performance Requirements

1) Swing Door Systems to comply with the performance requirements specified
with independently-certified testing results.
2) Aluminum Outswing Swing Door: With weather resistant sill.
Test Results: Size tested 42 inches by 120 inches with weather resistant sill
a) Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283 when tested at 1.6 psf (25 mph), 0.23
CFM/FT2
b) Water Infiltration: ASTM E 547 when tested at 6.0 psf, DP 40, No Leakage
c) Uniform Load Deflection: ASTM E 330 when tested at plus or minus 40.0
psf, DP 40, 2.12 inch Positive / 2.15 inch Negative.
d) Uniform Load Structural: ASTM E 330 when tested at plus or minus 60.0
e) Overall DP Rating: DP 40
3) Aluminum Inswing Swing Door: With weather resistant sill.
Test Results: Size tested 42 inches by 120 inches with weather resistant sill.
a) Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283 when tested at 1.6 psf (25 mph), 0.28
CFM/FT2
b) Water Infiltration: ASTM E 547 when tested at 3.8 psf, DP 25, No Leakage
c) Uniform Load Deflection: ASTM E 330 when tested at plus or minus 25.0
d) Uniform Load Structural: ASTM E 330 when tested at plus or minus 37.5
528.1.6 Submittals
1) Submissions by the Contractor as per Administrative Requirements.
2) Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
a) Preparation instructions and recommendations.
TS 500 - 311

c) Installation methods.
3) Shop Drawings: Include outside net frame dimensioning, direction of swing
(outswing or inswing), typical head, side jamb, sill and panel details and type
of glazing material per vertical plan and elevations view drawings.
4) Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of
color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and
patterns.
5) Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples,
minimum size 150 mm square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
6) Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
7) Closeout Submittals: Provide manufacturer's maintenance instructions that
include recommendations for periodic checking and adjustment of cable
tension and periodic cleaning and maintenance of all railing and infill
components.

1) Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide complete, engineered and high quality
swing door system by a single source manufacturer with at least ten (10) years
documented experience manufacturing folding door systems.
2) Installer Qualifications: Installer with documented experienced in the
installation of manufacturer's sliding door systems or similar and screen system
to the products specified.
3) Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques
and application workmanship.
a) Finish areas designated by Engineer.
b) Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen
are approved by Engineer.
c) Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.

1) Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for
installation.
2) Protect stored product from damage. Store products flat in dry, well ventilated
area out of direct sunlight, under cover, protected from weather, moisture and
excessive dryness and construction activities.
TS 500 - 312
528.1.9 Sequencing
1) Ensure that locating templates and other information required for installation
of products of this section are furnished to affected trades in time to prevent
interruption of construction progress.
2) Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to
prevent interruption of construction progress.

Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within
limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products
under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
528.1.11 Warranty
Manufacture's limited warranty including; ten (10) years for panel and frame
aluminum components, product finishes, hardware, and weather-stripping; five (5)
years for locking hardware; ten (10) years for insulated glass against failure of the
air seal and that each unit will be free from material obstruction of vision as a result
of fogging or film formation on the internal surfaces.
Products
528.2.2 Materials
1) Low-e double-glazed 10-12-8 with 4-way metal point system;
2) Low-e double-glazed 6-12-6 with argon gas fill on powder-coated aluminum
frames;
3) Ga. #18 galvanized steel doors with fluorourethane-baked finish;
4) Double leaf, fire-resistant emergency exit door, stainless steel powder-coated
finish;
5) Double leaf, fire-resistant plain steel flush door & jamb with honeycomb
insulation, fluorourethane-baked finish;
6) Single leaf, fire-resistant plain steel flush door & jamb with honeycomb
TS 500 - 313
7) Double leaf, fire-resistant full louver steel flush door & jamb with honeycomb
8) Single leaf, fire-resistant narrow lite steel flush door & jamb with honeycomb
9) Single leaf, fire-resistant bottom louver steel flush door & jamb with
honeycomb insulation, fluorourethane-baked finish;
10) Single leaf, sliding fire-resistant bottom louver with kick plate, steel flush door
& jamb with honeycomb insulation, fluorourethane-baked finish;
11) Single leaf, fire-resistant emergency exit door, fluorourethane-baked finish.
a) Single leaf, fire-resistant half louver steel flush door & jamb with
honeycomb insulation, fluorourethane-baked finish
b) 200x50mm c-channel door jamb support
c) Low-e pair glass awning window on powder-coated aluminum frame
d) Wall: aluminum spandrel with rib
e) Surface-mounted horizontal "crash bar" exit device (push side) with lever
on pull side (grade 1); UL-listed, 3-hour fire rating; non-handed; with
positive latching assembly, bolts & optional dogging mechanism feature
f) Exit stopper door alarm, astragal, stainless steel thresholds, & other
hardware
g) 5"x4 1/2" loose-pin, heavy duty butt hinge, steel, ball bearing, grade 1
528.2.3 Fabrication
1) Sizes and Configurations: Fabricate to sizes and configurations indicated on
the Drawings. Verify opening sizes by field measurement prior to completing
fabrication.
2) Verify opening direction.
3) Fabricate with manufacturer's non-integral nail fin for use in conjunction with
standard flashing, weather resistant barriers and compatible sealants.
Execution
528.3.1 Examination
2) Verify that the maximum deflection of the header with the live load does not
exceed the lesser of L/720 of the span and 1/4 inch. Structural support for lateral
loads including both wind load and when the panels are stacked open) must be
provided.
3) Verify that dimensions of rough opening will fit the net frame dimensions of
door system; verify that rough openings are level, plumb, and square, with no
unevenness in the floor.
TS 500 - 314

528.3.2 Preparation
1) Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
2) Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for
achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
1) Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2) Properly flash and waterproof around the perimeter of the opening and frame.
Adequate overhangs to prevent the effects of sheeting water from above are
recommended.
3) Provide adequate anchorage devices. Securely fit frame in place, level, straight,
plumb and square. Install frame in proper elevation, plane and location, and in
proper alignment with other work. Head section of frame must be installed with
a 1/8 inch upward crown at the center of the opening.
4) If necessary for sill recessed into finish floors, drill weep holes in the floor track
and provide drain connectors to ensure water can escape.
5) Ensure doors are adjusted for proper operation.
6) For products requiring field finishing, seal and finish promptly after installation
and no more than seven (7) days and prior to exposure to weather.
7) Install the screen system following the Manufacturer's recommendations and
installation instructions.
528.3.4 Protection
1) Protect installed products until completion of project.
2) Protect installed product from construction activities, particularly thresholds
and floor channels.
3) Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
Aluminum Windows and Frames
528.4.1 General
528.4.1.1 Section Includes

1) Projected windows.
2) Sliding windows.
3) Impact-resistant windows.
TS 500 - 315
528.4.1.2 Related Sections

1) Section 521 - Sealants.
2) Section 526 - Metal Doors and Frames (and Windows).
3) Section 528 - Aluminum Glass Doors and Windows.
4) Section 532 - Glazing.
5) Section 534 - Finish Hardware.
528.4.1.3 References
1) AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - Voluntary Specification for Aluminum,
Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors.
2) AAMA 701/702; 2000 - Combined Voluntary Specifications for Pile Weather
strip and Replaceable Fenestration Weather Seals.
3) AAMA 902; 1999 - Voluntary Specification for Sash Balances.
4) AAMA 907 - Voluntary Specification for Corrosion-Resistant Coatings on
Carbon Steel Components.
5) AAMA 910 - Voluntary "Life Cycle" Specifications and Test Methods for
Architectural Grade Windows and Sliding Glass Doors.
6) AAMA 1503.1 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and
Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall sections.
7) ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard For Safety Glazing Materials Used
in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of
Test/Consumer Products Safety Commission CPSC 16 CFR 1201.
8) ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage
Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified
Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
9) ASTM E 330; 1997 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference.
10) ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior
Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference.
11) ASTM E 547 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior
Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure
Difference
12) ASTM F 588; 1997 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry
Resistance of Window Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact.
13) ASTM F1233 - Standard Test Method for Security Glazing Materials and
Systems.
14) ASTM F1642 - Standard Test Method for Glazing and Glazing Systems
TS 500 - 316
Subject to Airblast Loadings.

15) GSA TS 01-2003 - US General Services Administration Standard Test Method
for Glazing and Window Systems Subject to Dynamic Overpressure Loadings.
16) ASTM E 1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, Doors and Storm Shutters Impacted by Windborne Debris in
Hurricanes.
1) The Contractor shall submit under provisions of Administrative Requirements.
3) Shop Drawings:
a) Elevation for each style window specified indicating its size, glazing type,
muntin type and design.
b) Manufacturer's head, jamb and sill details and section views for each
window type specified.
4) Schedules:
Provide a window schedule indicating the type, size, color, and operation of
each unit specified. Coordinate with window mark types found in the
Contract Drawings.
5) Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of
color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and
patterns.
6) Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples
representing actual product, color, and patterns. Samples may be subsequently
installed on the project.
7) Test Reports: Submit certified independent testing agency reports indicating
window units meet or exceed specified performance requirements.
528.4.1.5 System Description

1) Test Units:
Air, water and structural test unit shall conform to requirements set forth in
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
2) Test Procedures and Performance:
a) Windows shall conform to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440
requirements for each window type.
TS 500 - 317
b) Air Infiltration Test:

i) With window sash and ventilators closed and locked, test unit in
accordance with ASTM E 283 at static air pressure of 6.24 psf.
ii) Air infiltration shall not exceed that specified for each Product.
c) Water Resistance Test:
accordance with ASTM E 331 and ASTM E 547 at static air pressure
difference of 12 psf.
ii) There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage.
d) Uniform Load Deflection Test:
accordance with ASTM E 330 at static air pressure (positive and
negative) difference of100% design pressure.
ii) During testing, no member shall deflect more than 1/175 of its span.
e) Uniform Load Structural Test:
accordance with ASTM E 330 at static air pressure (positive and
negative) difference 150% of design pressure.
ii) At conclusion of test, there shall be no glass breakage; no permanent
damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support arms, or actuating
mechanisms; no other damage which would cause window to be
inoperable.
f) Condensation Resistance Test (CRT):
i) With window sash closed and locked, test unit in accordance with
AAMA 1503.1.
ii) Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) shall not be less than that
specified for each Product.
g) Thermal Transmittance Test (Conductive U-Value):
i) With window sash closed and locked, test unit in accordance with
AAMA 1503.1.
ii) Conductive thermal transmittance (U-Value) shall not exceed that
specified for each Product.
h) Life Cycle Test:
i) Test window in accordance with AAMA 910.
ii) At conclusion of test, there shall be no damage to fasteners, hardware
parts, support arms, or actuating mechanisms; no other damage which
would cause window to be inoperable. Subsequent air infiltration and
water resistance tests shall not exceed specified requirements.
TS 500 - 318
i) Forced Entry Resistance Test: ASTM F 588, Type and Grade as indicated
for each Product.

1) Manufacturer Qualifications: All windows and window hardware specified in
this section will be supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten
(10) years of experience.
2) Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by
a single installer with a minimum of five (5) years demonstrated experience in
installing windows of the same type and scope as specified.
3) Provide test reports from AAMA accredited laboratory certifying that window
units are found to be in compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA
101/I.S.2/A440-97 and performance standards listed above.
a) Test reports shall be accompanied by the window manufacturer's letter of
certification stating that the tested window meets or exceeds criteria for the
appropriate AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 test.
b) Code Compliance: Provide windows that comply with regulations of the
code bodies having jurisdiction.
c) Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation
techniques and application workmanship.
i) Finish areas designated by Engineer.
ii) Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and
sheen are approved by Engineer.
iii) Testing for Air and Water as specified
iv) Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
528.4.1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

1) Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for
installation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2) Protect units against damage from the elements, construction activities and
other hazards before, during, and after installation.
528.4.1.8 Project Conditions

under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
528.4.1.9 Warranty
At project closeout, provide to Employer or Engineer an executed copy of the
manufacturer's standard limited warranty against manufacturing defect, outlining its
terms, conditions, and exclusions from coverage.
TS 500 - 319
528.4.2 Products
528.4.2.2 Materials
1) Aluminum:
a) Frame: Extruded aluminum, 6063-T6 alloy and temper, tensile strength
of 25,000 psi.
b) Ventilator: Extruded tubular aluminum, 6063-T6 alloy and temper, tensile
strength of 25,000 psi.
2) Thermal Barrier:
a) Poured-in-place structural thermal barrier shall transfer shear during
bending and provide composite action between frame components.
b) Thermal barrier pocket on aluminum extrusions shall be abraded to create
a mechanical lock to improve the adhesion properties between the
polyurethane polymer and the surface of the thermal barrier pocket.
c) Window manufacturer must provide a warranty from the manufacturer of
the polyurethane thermal barrier that warrants against product failure as a
result of thermal shrinkage beyond 3.2 mm from each end and fracturing
of the polyurethane for a period not to exceed ten years from the date of
window manufacture.
3) Weather-stripping:
a) Vent: Double thermoplastic rubber weather stripping installed in
extrusion pocket.
b) Vent: One (1) row heavy fin seal wool pile and one (1) row of rigid vinyl
installed in extrusion pocket.
c) Sash: One (1) row of heavy fin seal wool pile and one (1) row of non-
shrinking dual durometer weather-stripping.
528.4.2.3 Hardware
1) Locks:
a) Cam type locking handles; white bronze alloy with US25D brushed finish.
b) Pole ring cam lock.
TS 500 - 320
c) Pole ring snap lock.

d) Key lock.
e) Casement lock (multi-point lock).
2) Double Window Hung Lock: Extruded aluminum auto-spring catch installed
at sill to hold sash in closed position.
3) Operator:
a) 4 - bar arms conforming with AAMA 904.1.
b) 4 - bar casement arms conforming with AAMA 904.1.
c) Friction-adjustable HOA arms.
d) Key release limit arms.
e) Roto Operator: Pivot shoe.
f) Stainless steel.
4) Hinge:
a) 5 knuckle butt hinge with stainless steel pin.
b) 4-bar casement hinge.
5) Balances:
a) Shall be tested in accordance with AAMA 902 Voluntary Specification
for Sash Balances.
b) Balances shall meet all minimum Class 1 requirements with a minimum
0.70 Manually-Applied Force (MAF) Ratio.
c) Balances shall comply with 902 Class 1 MAF Ratio.
d) Balances shall be attached to locking carrier system, which slides on rails
extruded in jamb frame. Mounting brackets screw attached to sash are not
acceptable.
e) Shall be high performance sash balances tested in accordance with
AAMA 902 Voluntary Specification for Sash Balances.
f) Shall meet all minimum Class 5 requirements with a minimum 0.30 MAF
Ratio.
g) Shall be of appropriate size and capacity to hold sash in position in
accordance with ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101-88, Section 2.2.3.3.2 and
AAMA 902 Section 8.1.
h) Balances shall be attached to locking carrier system, which slides on rails
extruded in jamb frame. Mounting brackets screw attached to sash are not
acceptable.
6) Blind Sash Fasteners: Stainless steel ramp clamp secured with minimal
fasteners.
7) Hinged Sash Supports: Stainless steel four bar arms.
TS 500 - 321
8) Handle: Pull handle.

9) Hold Open: Hold open arms.
10) Push Bar: Under screen push bar.
11) Sign: Emergency exit sign.
528.4.2.4 Finish
1) Anodic Finish: All exposed areas of aluminum windows and components shall
receive a two-step finish: clear anodize components, then color coat with
electrostatically-deposited finish in accordance with Aluminum Association
(AA) Designation AA-M12-C22-A, color as indicated.
a) Color: To be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standard
colors.
b) Color: As noted in the Window Schedule.
c) Color: A41, Class I clear anodized at 0.7 mils or greater in accordance
with AAMA 611-98.
d) Color: A31, Class II clear anodized at 0.4 mils or greater in accordance
with AAMA 611-98.
e) Color: A44, Class I color anodized at 0.7 mils or greater in accordance
with AAMA 611-98.
f) Color: for selection by Engineer.
2) Paint Finish: Finish all exposed areas of aluminum windows and components
with the following:
a) 70 percent Kynar in accordance with AA-M12-C42-R1X, AAMA 2605-
98
b) 50 percent Kynar in accordance with AA-M12-C42-R1X, and AAMA
2604-98.
c) Color: To be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standard
colors.
d) Color: As noted in the Window Schedule.
e) Color: for selection by Engineer.
528.4.2.5 Glazing
1) Refer to Section 532 “Glazing”.
2) Glazing:
a) Interior glazed.
b) Exterior glazed.
3) Zero Sight Line Glazing: Windows shall be structurally glazed on the exterior.
Glazing tape and sealant will be visible from the exterior if clear glass is
TS 500 - 322
specified.
c) Tinted Glass: (Tint Color), with bronze colored spacer.
d) Reflective Glass: (Color), with bronze colored spacer.
4) Blind Window Glazing: Windows shall be interior glazed; exterior light shall
be structurally-glazed and interior light shall be marine-glazed.
5) Glass Type: Insulating, with :
e) Exterior Lite.
f) Air Space.
g) Interior Lite.
6) Glass Type: Monolithic.
7) Glass Type: Impact-Resistant
8) Glazing Bead, Dual-Glazed: Exterior lite 6.4 mm monolithic, interior lite 3.2
mm monolithic.
9) Glazing Bead, Dual-Glazed: Exterior lite 6.4 mm monolithic, interior lite 16
mm insulated.
10) Glazing Bead, Panel: 63.5 mm, maximum.
Execution
528.5.1 Examination
528.5.2 Preparation
The Contractor shall install in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
528.5.4 Protection
2) Final operating adjustment shall be made after glazing work is complete.
Operating sash and ventilator shall operate smoothly and shall be weather-tight
when in locked position;
TS 500 - 323
3) Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

Various size and type of Aluminum and stainless-steel glass doors and windows are
measured as the “Each” and the rate shall be included the following items.
1) Size, type and configuration of glass doors are as shown on the “Schedule of
Doors and Windows”
2) Type of and thickness of glass as shown on the “Schedule of Doors and
Windows”
3) Grass and louvers for doors as indicated “Schedule of Windows” for all
facilities in the Depot Area shall be 2 hours fire-resistant
4) All Finished hardware confirm to the Section 534 of those Specifications and
insect screen shall be provided as specified on the “Schedule of Doors and
Windows”
5) All necessary accessories including gasket and sealant for glazing.
6) The Type and thickness of Glass are shown on the Drawing No. MCRP-DWG-
OCC-AR-3621.

Item Number
W1 for Station: W1800mm x H1200mm, Powder Coated
528(1)a Each
Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Sliding Type
W2 for Station: W1800mm x H600mm, Powder Coated
528(1)b Each
W2 for Station SIG/COM/Railway Electric House:
528(2) W1800mm x H600mm, Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Each
Glass Windows, Awning Type

Item Number
TS 500 - 324
W1 for Substation: W1800mm x H1200mm, Powder Coated

528(3)a Each
Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Awning Type
W2 for Substation: W1800mm x H600mm, Powder Coated
528(3)b Each
W2 for Intermediate Signaling House: W1800mm x
528(4) H600mm, Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Each
Awning Type
W2 for Battery Post: W1800mm x H600mm, Powder Coated
528(5) Each

Number
D528(1) Fixed Glass Panel on Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Square meter
Laminated Glass Panel on Powder Coated Aluminum

D528(2) Square meter
Frame
W1 for OCC Building: W7000mm x H1980mm, Powder
D528(3)b Each
Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Awning Type
D528(3)c Each
D528(3)d Each
W4 for OCC Building: W780mm x H780mm, Powder Coated
D528(3)e Each
Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Fixed Type
D528(3)f Each
D528(3)g Each
Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Fixed Type
CW1 for OCC Building: W73000mm x H17400mm, Double
D528(3)h Each
Paned Stainless Steel Glass Windows, Fixed Type
D528(3)i Each
Paned Stainless Steel Glass Windows, Fixed Type, Triangular
D528(3)j Each
Paned Stainless Steel Glass Windows, Fixed Type, Triangular
D528(4)a Each
Stainless Steel Glass Door
W1 for Workshop: W67500mm x H1350mm, Powder Coated
D528(4)b Each
D528(4)c Each
TS 500 - 325

D528(4)d Each
D528(4)e Each
D528(4)f Each
D528(4)g Each
D528(4)h Each
D528(4)i Each
D528(4)j Each
D528(4)k Each
D528(4)l Each
D528(4)m Each
D528(4)n Each
D528(4)o Each
W15 for Workshop: W354400mm x H4000mm, Powder
D528(4)p Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Fixed Type with Each
Louver
D528(4)q Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Fixed Type with Each
Louver
D528(4)r Each
D528(4)s Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Awning Type with Each
Louver
D528(4)t Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Awning Type with Each
Louver
W1 for Light Repair Shop: W28000mm x H1350mm, Powder
D528(5)a Each
D528(5)b Each
D528(5)c Each
TS 500 - 326

D528(5)d Each
D528(5)e Each
D528(5)f Each
D528(5)g Each
D528(5)h Each
Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Sliding Type
D528(5)i Each
W10 for Light Repair Shop: W224390mm x H3759mm,
D528(5)j Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Fixed Each
Type with Louver
W1 for Underfloor Cleaning Shop: W2500mm x H4000mm,
D528(6)a Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Fixed Each
Type with Louver
D528(6)b Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Fixed Each
Type with Louver
D528(6)c Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Awning Each
Type
W1 for Unscheduled Repaier Shop: W2500mm x H4000mm,
Type with Louver
D528(7)b Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Awning Each
Type
Type
W2 for Wheel Re-Profiling Shop: W2500mm x H3000mm,
Type with Louver
D528(8)b Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Fixed Each
Type
D528(8)c Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Fixed Each
Type
W1 for Catenary Maintenance Vehicle Shop: W2500mm x
D528(9)a H4000mm, Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Each
Windows, Fixed Type with Louver
TS 500 - 327

D528(9)b H1300mm, Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Each
Windows, Awning Type
D528(9)c H650mm, Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Each
Awning Type
D528(9)d H650mm, Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Each
Awning Type
W1 for Shunting Car Shop: W1400mm x H1350mm, Powder
D528(10)a Each
D528(10)b Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Fixed Type with Each
Louver
D528(10)c Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Fixed Type with Each
Louver
D528(11)a Each
G1 for Truck Garage: W7500mm x H2000mm, Powder
D528(11)b Each
D528(12)a Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Awning Each
Type
Type
Type
D528(12)d Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Awning Each
Type
D528(12)e Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Awning Each
Type
D528(12)f Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Fixed Each
Type with Louver
D528(12)g Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Fixed Each
Type with Louver
W1 for Maintenance Car Shop: W4000mm x H1350mm,
Type
TS 500 - 328

Type
D528(13)c Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Fixed Each
Type with Louver
D528(13)d Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Fixed Each
Type with Louver
W1 for N.Depot Sub Station: W1800mm x H1200mm,
Type
W2 for N.Depot Sub Station: W1800mm x H600mm, Powder
D528(14)b Each
W1 for N.Depot Sectioning Post: W2450mm x H600mm,
D528(15) Powder Coated Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Awning Each
Type
W7 for Water Pump House 1: W1400mm x H1250mm,
Type
W7 for Water Pump House 2: W1400mm x H1250mm,
Type
W7 for Security House 1: W1400mm x H1250mm, Powder
D528(18)a Each
D528(18)b Each
D528(18)c Each
D528(18)d Each
D528(19)a Each
D528(19)b Each
D528(19)c Each
D528(19)d Each
W1 for Training Center: W12250mm x H10186mm, Stainless
D528(20)a Each
Steel Glass Windows, Fixed Type
D528(20)b Each
D528(20)c Each
TS 500 - 329

D528(20)d Each
D528(20)e Each
D528(20)f Each
D528(20)g Each
D528(20)h Each
D528(20)i Each
D528(20)j Each
D528(20)k Each
D528(20)l Each
D1 for Canteen: W2050mm x H3000mm, Double Leaf Fire-
D528(21)a Each
Rated Powder Coated Aluminum Glass Door
W1 for Canteen: W1100mm x H600mm, Stainless Steel Glass
D528(21)b Each
Windows, Fixed Type with Louver
W2 for Canteen: W1850mm x H600mm, Powder Coated
D528(21)c Each
Aluminum Frame Glass Windows, Fixed Type with Louver
D528(21)d Each
D528(21)e Each
W5a for Canteen: W3975mm x H3000mm, Powder Coated
D528(21)f Each
W5b for Canteen: W3975mm x H3000mm, Powder Coated
D528(21)g Each
W6a for Canteen: W4375mm x H3000mm, Powder Coated
D528(21)h Each
W6b for Canteen: W4375mm x H3000mm, Powder Coated
D528(21)i Each
D528(21)j Each
D528(21)k Each
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 330
529 INTERIOR FIRE-RESISTANT SAFETY GLASS DOORS AND WINDOWS
The Work
Work of this section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary
to complete the all Interior Fire-Resistant Safety Glass Door and Window Assembly,
as shown on the Drawings, and/or specified herein, as needed for a complete and
proper installation, including the following:
1) Clear tempered glass doors and the thickness of glass shall be as specified on
the Drawings.
2) Bottom rail, stainless steel.
3) Top center pivot hinge plate, stainless steel.
4) Top plate for mounting of electric lock clad in stainless steel.
5) 21 mm dia. Push pull bars.
6) Cylinder lock in bottom rail.
7) Recessed floor closer, center pivots, extruded aluminum saddle with removable
section at closer.

Qualifications of Installers: For actual installation of doors and windows, use only
personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in installation of the selected
products and who are completely familiar with the requirements of this work.

Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding loads indicated
without structural failure, deflection exceeding specified limit, support components
transferring stresses to glazing and glazing-to-glazing.
1) 2 hours Fire-resistant Glass: All glasses for both external and internal of all
facilities within the Depot Area shall be of the 2 hours Fire-resistant Glass.
2) Deflection Normal to glazing Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4"
whichever is smaller.
529.1.3 Submittals
1) Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include details of
construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components,
profiles, and finishes.
2) Shop Drawings; Show details of fabrication and installation, including the
following:
a) Plans, elevations, and sections.
b) Details of fittings.
TS 500 - 331
c) Hardware quantities, locations, and installation requirements.

d) Anchorages and reinforcement.
e) Glazing details.
3) Samples for verification of size indicated below and of same thickness and
material indicated for Work. Show the full range of color and texture variations
expected.
a) Metal Finishes: 6-inch long sections of patch fittings, rails, and other
items.
b) Glass: 150mm square showing exposed-edge finish.
529.1.4 Products and Handling

1) Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this section
before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and
materials of all other trades.
2) Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and
replacements necessary.

Field Measurements: Verify opening dimensions of all doors and windows by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
529.1.6 Warranty
Contractor shall submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to
repair or replace components of all doors and windows that fail in materials or
workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1) Structural failures.
2) Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
3) Failure of operating components to function normally.
4) Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Products
The product must have the ability to withstand fire exposure without transmission of
fire to the non-fire side as a result of the passage of flames or hot gases, thereby
causing ignition of the non-fire exposed surface or materials adjacent. The material
must also maintain radiated heat in front of the glazing window below a specified
level to provide for safer separation distance and escape-ways.
TS 500 - 332
529.2.2 Materials
1) Fire Resistance:
a) Reaction to Fire: A2-S1;
b) Max. Glass Size: Variable, subject to glass make-up, framing material or
glazed element type;
c) Thickness Tolerance: +/-2 mm;
d) Length Tolerance: +/- 2mm;
e) Impact Resistance: 1(B)1 classification;
f) UV Stability: In addition to standard Specification: no formation of bubbles
or yellowing after 2,000 hours of exposure to radiation;
g) Application Conditions: Avoid prolonged exposure to extreme
temperatures. Exterior applications must be supplied as an IGU with low-
E solar control coating; and
h) Hazardous Material Contained: None.
2) Nominal Thickness per Panel: 16mm composed of toughened safety glass, an
intumescent interlayer and an edge sealant;
3) Glass Size per Thickness: < or = 1800 mm x 3500 mm;
4) Weight: 36 kg/ m2;
5) Light Transmission: 84%;
6) Light Reflection (exterior/ interior) : 9%/ 9%;
7) U value: 5.0;
8) G value: 0.69;
9) Energy Transmission: 60%; and
10) Light Reflection (exterior/ interior): 7%/ 7%.
529.2.3 Components
1) Door and Window Assembly Unit (Double-Paned): shall be two (2) 16 mm
thick panels of Interior Fire-Resistant Safety Glass separated by 6mm of
sealed-in argon gas, for a total thickness of 38 mm;
TS 500 - 333
2) Fittings: Provide fittings and accessories for all-glass entrances of

configurations shown on Drawings.
3) Anchors and Fastenings: Manufacturer's standard concealed anchors and
fastening.
4) Weather-stripping: Manufacturer's standard weather-stripping.
529.2.4 Hardware
1) General: Heavy-duty hardware units indicated in sizes, numbers, and type
recommended by manufacturer for glass entrances indicated. For exposed parts,
match fitting metal and finish.
2) Closers: Center-hung, concealed floor closers complying with ANSI/BHMA A
156.4, Grade 1 or Grade 2 requirements, including cases, bottom arms, top
pivots, plates and accessories required for a complete installation, and as
follows:
a) Swing: Single acting.
b) Hold Open: Selective.
c) Positive Dead Stop: Coordinated with hold-open angle.
d) Delayed-Action Closing: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility
Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," whichever are more
stringent.
3) Push-Pull: 25mm dia. Stainless steel, as shown on the Drawings.
4) Lockset: Bottom rail dead bolt, dead bolt operated by key outside and inside
engaging cutout in threshold or floor plate.
5) Lock cylinder shall be as described on the Drawings or “Finish Hardware”
section (Section 536) of these Specifications.
6) Make provisions for and coordinate with installation requirements for
electro/magnetic lock and door release at door head.
7) Threshold: Manufacturer's standard threshold with cutouts coordinated for
operating hardware, with anchors and jamb clips, not more than 1/2-inch-high
with beveled edges providing a floor-level change with a slope of not more
than 1:2, and fabricated of stainless steel.
529.2.5 Fabrication
1) General: Fabricate door components in sizes, profiles, and configurations
indicated.
2) Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, rails, and
accessories before tempering glass. Do not cut, drill, or make other alterations
to glass after tempering.
3) Fully temper glass using horizontal roller hearth process.
TS 500 - 334
4) Factory assemble components and factory install hardware to greatest extent

possible.
Execution
529.3.1 Inspection
Examine the areas and conditions where glass doors and windows are to be installed
and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the
work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to
permit proper installation of the work.
1) Install doors, windows and associated components according to manufacturer's
written instructions;
2) Set units level and plumb;
3) Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components;
4) Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer's written
instructions; and
5) Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required by hardware and substrate.
529.3.3 Adjustment and Cleaning

Adjust doors, windows and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and
weather-stripping, smooth operation and weather-tight closure.
529.3.4 Protection
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to
manufacturer that ensures that all Interior Fire-Resistant Safety Glass Door and
Window Assemblies are without damage or deterioration.
529.4.1 Measurement and Payment

Interior Fire-Resistant Safety Glass is not measured under this Section, but rate shall
be deemed to include in the appropriate pay item of other Section, such as Doors and
Windows, and Glass Railing and Grass Frames.
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 335
530 GLAZING
The Work
glazing work, including all anchorage provisions, in accordance with this
530.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required glazing work, as shown
on the Drawings and/or as specified herein

1) 1250mm glass wall;
2) 12mm thk tempered glass panels with security film;
3) Double-glazed glass curtain wall with metal point system;
4) 12mm frosted tempered glass;
5) Clear glass wall for scenic elevator (with zocalo wall);
6) Glass railings (with zocalo wall);
7) Glass wall with metal point system for exterior glass panel; and
8) Mirrors.
General
1) Provide and install all glass not supplied in factory-glazed items.
2) The type of materials and thickness of glass shall be as required in the Particular
Specifications on shown on the Drawings.
530.2.1.1 Float Polished Plate Glass

ASTM C158, 429, 1036, 1349, E997, 998
530.2.1.2 Laminated Glass

ASTM C429, 1172, E997, 998
530.2.1.3 Tempered Glass

ASTM C429, 1048, E997, 998
TS 500 - 336
530.2.1.4 Oil-Based Caulking Compounds for Buildings

ASTM C570, 717, 834, 920
530.2.1.5 Putty for Metal Sash Glazing

ASTM C717, 797, D2451
530.2.1.6 Gasket for Windows, Doors and Joints of Panel in Building

ASTM C716, 717, 797, 864, 964, 1083, F104
530.2.1.7 Sealing Compounds for Sealing, Glazing and Caulking in Building

ASTM C717, 1016, 1021, 1184, D2202, 2377
530.2.1.8 Sealing Compounds for Sealing and Glazing in Building

ASTM C1021, 1184, 1193, D2202, 2377

The work of this section shall be carried out by an approved contractor having
specialized in this work as its primary business for at least ten (10) years, and having
performed satisfactorily work of this type and magnitude. Employed only craftsmen
who are thoroughly skilled in the various crafts, and who are completely familiar
with the specified requirements. Provide the services of a competent foreman or
supervisor who shall be available at all times during the progress of the work of this
section and who shall be designated as the single point of contact within the
subcontractor's organization for matters in connection with the work of this section.

Do not install glass when there is a possibility of rain before the work can be
completed.
530.2.4 Submittals
1) Submit two (2) copies of Manufacturer's product data and installation
recommendations.
2) Submit three (3) samples of all tinted, reflective, and patterned glass.
Minimum size – 20cm x 20cm square.
3) Provide to the Employer, in conformance with requirements of the Contract, a
guarantee covering glazing materials and workmanship for a period of 5 years
after Substantial Completion of the work.
4) Mock-up: Provide 3m length of Stainless Steel Glass Railings at Site
TS 500 - 337
Products
530.3.1 Glass (for Station Buildings)

1) General - Color of glass shall be as selected by the Engineer.
2) Clear Float Glass – is produced by floating molten glass on top of a tin bath,
forming a continuous ribbon pulled and cooled at controlled temperature. It is
entirely distortion-free because of its precise surface flatness which provides
excellent through-vision images. The surface of clear float glass is naturally
fire-finished, exuding a far more sparkling and brilliant luster than sheet glass
(or even polished plate glass). The wide range of its manufactured thickness
(of from 1.8mm to 24mm maximizes its functionality, and adaptation to
temperature and wind pressure changes.
The performance data (values) for float glass shall be as follows:
a) Reflective color: clear;
b) Thickness: 6mm;
c) Visible Light: Transmitted - 89; Reflected (Outdoor-7 and Indoor-7);
d) Solar Energy: Transmitted - 80; Reflected - 6;
e) U-Value: Summer (Air - 5.25);
f) SC - 0.97;
g) SHGC - 0.84; and
h) RHG (w/m2) - 651.
3) Low Emissivity (Low-E) Coating glass - Low-E glass, which has a
microscopically-thin, transparent coating that reflects long-wave infrared
energy (heat) was developed to minimize the amount of ultraviolet (UV) and
infrared light that can pass through glass without compromising the amount of
visible light that is transmitted.
Low-E glass has energy-saving properties as it blocks significant amounts of
radiant heat transfer, thus lowering the total heat flow through the window and
enabling buildings to confine energy within desired limits. Low-E glass can
reduce energy loss by as much as 30%-50%.
The soft-coat (offline) type of Low-E glass, which requires special handling
requirements during production, is required for the Project. It is manufactured
by introducing a metallic “sputter” coating as a secondary process, usually to
offer high low-emissivity (of 0.04) or solar control benefits. Since silver is used,
this coating can oxidize if exposed to normal air. As such, soft-coat low-E glass
must be used in an insulated glass assembly i.e. sealing the soft-coated surface
internally within an air spacer between 2 pieces of glass protects the soft
coating from outside air and sources of abrasion.
Soft-coat low-E glass is distinguished by higher light solar gain (LSG and
lower U-values), performing best in climates where interior cooling and
thermal insulation are important i.e. by effectively reducing infrared
TS 500 - 338
transmittance, soft-coat low-E glass reduces the overall heat gain through a
window, thus decreasing energy use of regulated cooling systems. It also
reflects interior heat back to its source, resulting in less radiant heat transfer
and more effective insulating performance.
The performance data (values) for Soft-coat (double silver) low-E glass shall
be as follows:
a) Reflective color: blue grey;
b) Visible Light: Transmitted - 37; Reflected (Outdoor-28 and Indoor-12);
c) Solar Energy: Transmitted - 17; Reflected - 40;
d) U-Value: Summer (Air - 1.62 and Argon - 1.28);
e) SC - 0.25;
f) SHGC - 0.21; and
g) RHG (w/m2) - 168.
4) Pyrolytic Low-E glass - is where the low-E coating is applied on a substrate of
clear float glass by a pyrolytic process called online chemical vapor disposition
(CVD) method. During summer, the glass will reduce the amount of heat re-
radiated into the building, thus keeping the temperature comfortably cool. The
glass is neutral in appearance and has high light transmission, with the metal
oxide coating contributing to the thermal insulating properties of windows and
doors, which reduces the building’s energy consumption. This type of glass
provides excellent solar shading when processed as an insulating glass unit
(IGU) with reflective and tinted glass.
For the project, this shall be used for all window types e.g. awning, sliding, etc.
5) Tempered (Toughened) glass - Tempered glass is float glass that is heated in
an oven, then cooled fast. It is approximately 4 to 5 times stronger than ordinary
annealed glass of equal thickness. It has greater resistance to thermally-induced
stress and shall have a surface compressive strength of more than 90Mpa.
Tempered glass shall be up to five (5) times as strong as ordinary glass in
resisting impact and when it breaks, the fragments are small and comparatively
harmless pieces. Generally, tempered glass offers greatly increased resistance
to sudden temperature changes of up to 250 degrees C and its stress
characteristics are unchanged for continuing service up to 300 degrees C and
are unaffected at sub-zero temperatures.
These shall be used for safety/ balustrade railings, customer service areas and
point-of-sale (POS) areas.
6) Laminated glass -Laminated glass shall consist of two (2) glass layers with a
thin interlayer film called polyvinyl butyral (PBV) in between. PVB film is a
tough and pliable material that can bend and absorb impact in case the glass
panels on either its (or both its) side/s break/s. The broken glass remain attached
to the PVB to reduce the risk of injury or damage to property.
TS 500 - 339
Laminated glass shall still display the visual perfection of monolithic float glass
while the PVB must give safety benefits such as:
a) Ability to withstand high wind pressure and earthquake-related
vibrations;
b) Serve as security glass to meet different levels of required protection e.g.
Bullet-resistant, anti-bandit, etc.;
c) Block up to 99% of ultraviolet (uv) light for protection against radiation;
d) Subdue outside noise due to the pvb’s sound-insulating property; and
e) Possibly offer up to two (2) hours of fire protection.
Laminated safety/ security glass shall be used for the elevator shaft (interior
and exterior).
The fire-resistant laminated safety glass (with metal point system) shall provide
up to two (2)-hours of fire protection at critical areas where the risk of fire
and/or explosion is present.
7) Mirrors - Glass for mirrors shall be top-of-the-line float glass, chemically-
treated with silver through automatic sprayers, to ensure even and perfect
reflection. It is copper-coated to prevent peeling and backed with double paint
coatings, then oven-cured to maintain durability through the years. Mirrors
shall exude brilliant, distortion-free reflections and is protectively-sealed to
guard against moisture and temperature changes. These shall be provided
mainly at all toilets and locker rooms, and rooms for persons with disabilities
(PWD) and for gender and development (GAD).
Tolerance on glass thickness -The tolerance on thickness for various type of
glass shall be as shown on Table 530.3.1-1 below;
Table 530.3.1-1 Tolerance on Glass Thickness (mm)
Type of Nominal Float glass Tempered Glass
glass
Thickness
2 - -
3 + 0.3 -
4 + 0.3 + 0.3
5 + 0.3 + 0.3
6 + 0.3 + 0.3
6.5 + 0.3 -
8 + 0.6 + 0.6
10 + 0.6 + 0.6
12 + 0.8 + 0.8
TS 500 - 340
15 + 0.8 + 0.8
19 + 1.2 + 1.2
530.3.2 Glass (for Depot Buildings)

1) General - Color of glass shall be as selected by the Engineer.
2) Pyrolytic Low-E glass - is where the low-E coating is applied on a substrate of
clear float glass by a pyrolytic process called online chemical vapor disposition
(CVD) method. During summer, the glass will reduce the amount of heat re-
radiated into the building, thus keeping the temperature comfortably cool. The
glass is neutral in appearance and has high light transmission, with the metal
oxide coating contributing to the thermal insulating properties of windows and
doors, which reduces the building’s energy consumption. This type of glass
provides excellent solar shading when processed as an insulating glass unit
(IGU) with reflective and tinted glass.
The two (2) types of pyrolytic Low-E glass for use on the Project are as follows:
a) Shading Pyrolytic Low-E Glass - the ideal choice for curtain wall and
window glass applications, it primarily meets energy-saving requirements
through its neutral color and excellent shading function. The surface of
the float glass is covered with several layers of durable coating applied
with a unique coating technology than can reflect over 80% far infrared
and also absorb some near infrared, and where the Shading Pyrolytic
Low-E Glass’s spectral selectivity can achieve the best balance between
light and heat control. Such a glass must allow for moderate visible light
transmittance, uniform colors and lower external reflectivity as well as
provide excellent decorative shading performance. For this project, it shall
be used for facades, and for skylights (laminated).
b) Pyrolytic Low-E Glass – with solar control and thermal insulation
properties that are perfect for building curtain walls, providing low
exterior reflection and neutral color appearance, reduces heat gain and
excellent solar shading. For the-is Project, this glass shall be used for all
large panel window and glass panels.
3) Laminated glass -Laminated glass shall consist of two (2) glass layers with a
thin interlayer film called polyvinyl butyral (PBV) in between. PVB film is a
tough and pliable material that can bend and absorb impact in case the glass
panels on either its (or both its) side/s break/s. The broken glass remain attached
to the PVB to reduce the risk of injury or damage to property.
Laminated glass shall still display the visual perfection of monolithic float glass
while the PVB must give safety benefits such as:
a) Ability to withstand high wind pressure and earthquake-related
vibrations;
b) Serve as security glass to meet different levels of required protection e.g.
Bullet-resistant, anti-bandit, etc;
TS 500 - 341
c) Block up to 99% of ultraviolet (uv) light for protection against radiation;

d) Subdue outside noise due to the pvb’s sound-insulating property; and
e) Possibly offer up to two (2) hours of fire protection.
Laminated safety/ security glass shall be used for the elevator shaft (interior
and exterior).
The fire-resistant laminated safety glass (with metal point system) shall provide
up to two (2)-hours of fire protection at critical areas where the risk of fire
and/or explosion is present.
4) Mirrors - Glass for mirrors shall be top-of-the-line float glass, chemically-
treated with silver through automatic sprayers, to ensure even and perfect
reflection. It is copper-coated to prevent peeling and backed with double paint
coatings, then oven-cured to maintain durability through the years. Mirrors
shall exude brilliant, distortion-free reflections and is protectively-sealed to
guard against moisture and temperature changes. These shall be provided
mainly at all toilets and locker rooms, and rooms for persons with disabilities
(PWD) and for gender and development (GAD).
530.3.3 Putty
1) Linseed oil putty -The linseed oil putty shall be manufactured from linseed oil
and fillers approved by the Engineer.
2) Metal casement putty -The metal casement putty shall be the type formulated
to set and adhere to no-porous surface approved by the Engineer.
530.3.4 Sealants
1) General -The sealant shall generally be used copping and bedding application
and type of sealant to be incorporated to the work shall be shown on the
Drawings.
2) One (1)-part sealant, curing type - shall be of polysulphide, silicone or urethane
base and undergo at normal temperature, chemical reaction to form a firm
resilient seal.
3) These shall be capable to tolerate greater movement over climatic temperature
variations.
4) One (1)-part sealant, solvent release type - should be of butyl or acrylic bases
and essentially no-curing in the sense that no extensive chemical change takes
place.
5) Two (2)-part sealants, curing type - shall be of polysulphide or polyurethane
base and supplied as two component materials which, when mixed, react to
form a rubbery material.
The mix proportion of components and mixing procedure shall be in strictly
accordance with instruction of the manufacturer.
TS 500 - 342
530.3.5 Pre-formed Strip Materials

Pre-formed strip shall be the pre-formed top materials and extruded sections such as
Pre-formed mastic tapes based on butyl or polyisobutylene polymers, extruded solid
sections based PVC or synthetic rubbers and cellular strips based on synthetic rubber,
etc.
The selection of pre-formed strip materials shall be compatible with selected sealant
and as recommended by the sealant manufacturer or as requested on the Drawings.
530.3.6 Pre-formed Compression Gaskets

Gasket shall generally be of polyvinyl chloride or synthetic rubber base. Gaskets
shall be remained flexible under load and shall be formulated to withstand stretching
compression, aging, ozone attack, and to minimize stiffening at low temperature and
to avoid staining of adjacent surfaces.
Execution
530.4.1 Inspection
The Contractor shall inspect the frames, etc. to be glazed and notify the Engineer in
writing of defects in the work of other trades that will affect the proper installation
of the work of this section. Starting installation work shall constitute acceptance of
the base or adjoining work.
530.4.2 Preparation
1) Ensure that all work of installing and adjusting operating doors and windows
is completed.
2) Clean rebates and frames to receive glass. Coordinate with sealant work (refer
to section on “Sealants”).
530.4.3 Field Measurement and Tolerance

1) Cut glass to correct sizes based upon field measurements.
2) Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings or required in the Particular
Specifications, the minimum clearance between bottom of rebates and glass
edge shall be as shown in Table 530.4.3-1.
Table 530.4.3-1 Minimum Edge Clearance of Glass
Type of Glass Edge clearance in mm Edge clearance in mm

When longest edge: When longest edge:
Up to 2m Over 2m
Annealed or tempered glass
Up to 12mm thickness 3 5
Over 12mm thickness 3 5
Insulating glass units
TS 500 - 343
Up to 18mm overall thickness 3 5

Over 18mm overall thickness 3 5
Laminated glass
Up to 12mm overall thickness 3 5
12-30mm overall thickness 5 5
Over 30mm overall thickness 10 10
3) Install glass and accessories within the tolerances specified in the Japanese
Architectural Standard Specification (JASS).
530.4.4 Storage
1) Glass shall be stored in racks in a near vertical position in a dry ventilated
sheltered location and on no account should glass be allowed to stand on or
lean against materials which might damage the edges.
2) Staked glass and opened cases containing glass shall not be subjected to direct
sunlight to avoid build-up of heat within the stack could give rise to high
thermal stress resulting in breakage.
1) Install glass and accessories in conformance with the JASS glazing standards
and frame or window manufacturer's recommendations.
2) Setting blocks shall be used between the bottom edge of the glass and the frame
or surround and location blocks shall be used between the edges of glass other
than at the bottom edge. Setting blocks and location blocks shall be positioned
at quarter points form the corner of glass or as recommended by the glass
manufacturer.
3) After installation, mark glass with an X using tape or removable paste that is
readily removed and will not damage the glass. Do not use masking tape.
530.4.6 Extra Stock

Refer to the requirements of the Contract for a list of spare glass to be supplied to the
Employer.
The Contractor shall ensure that he will have a sufficient stock of the various types
of glass used in the project on hand for immediate replacement of broken glass.
530.4.7 Cleaning
1) During construction, if, in the Engineer's opinion, the glass becomes dirty or
stained enough that permanent damage may be done to the glass surface, he
shall order the Contractor to clean the glass as frequently as necessary using
suitable cleaning materials.
2) The cost of the cleaning will be added to the contract sum.
TS 500 - 344
3) Remove all protection and carry out a final cleaning down of all aluminum,
glass and accessories with approved cleaning agents just prior to Substantial
Completion.
4) Upon completion of the work, remove all waste and surplus materials and leave
the area of work broom clean to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
5) Remove and replace all glass broken before the Employer’s acceptance of the
work.

Glass and glazing are measured as the “Square Meters” and rate of the Pay Items
listed below shall be included the following items:
1) Item 530(2) Tempered Glass Panels:
Aluminum frame and frame fixing anchors and sealant for grazing including
all necessary accessories to complete the works.
2) 530(6)a Glass Railing.:
Stainless-steel Banister and frame fixing anchors and sealant for grazing
including all necessary accessories to complete the works.
3) 530(7) Glass walls with metal point system for exterior glass panel:
a) Box shape Steel frame for support of glass walls including all necessary
accessories.
b) Metal point system including all necessary accessories and sealant for
glazing.
4) Fire Resistance Glass
Metal frame and frame fixing anchors and Sealant for glazing including all
5) D530(5) Stainless Steel Glass Railings:
Stainless-steel Banister and frame fixing anchors and sealant for grazing
including all necessary accessories to complete the works.

TS 500 - 345

Item Number
530(2) T=12mm, Tempered Glass Panels on Powder Coated Square meter
Aluminum Frame
530(6)a Stainless Steel Glass Railing (T=15 +15mm). Linear meter
530(7) Metal Point System for exterior glass panel (T=15 +15mm). Square meter
530(8) T=23mm, Fire Rated Glass Panels Square meter

Number
D530(5) Stainless Steel Frame Glass Railings (T=15 +15mm). Linear meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 346
531 GLASS DOORS
The Work
Work of this section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary
to complete the all glass doors, as shown on the Drawings, and/or specified herein,
as needed for a complete and proper installation, including the following:
1) Clear tempered glass doors and the thickness of glass shall be as specified on
the Drawings.
2) Bottom rail, stainless steel.
3) Top center pivot hinge plate, stainless steel.
4) Top plate for mounting of electric lock clad in stainless steel.
5) 21 mm dia. Push pull bars.
6) Cylinder lock in bottom rail.
7) Recessed floor closer, center pivots, extruded aluminum saddle with removable
section at closer.

Qualifications of Installers: For actual installation of doors, use only personnel who
are thoroughly trained and experienced in installation of the selected products and
who are completely familiar with the requirements of this work.

Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding loads indicated
without structural failure, deflection exceeding specified limit, support components
transferring stresses to glazing, and glazing-to-glazing or glazing-to-support contact
as determined by structural analysis.
1) Structural Loads:
Wind Load: See the notes on the Drawing.
2) Deflection Normal to glazing Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4"
whichever is smaller.
531.1.3 Submittals
1) Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include details of
construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components,
profiles, and finishes.
2) Shop Drawings; Show details of fabrication and installation, including the
following:
a) Plans, elevations, and sections.
b) Details of fittings.
TS 500 - 347
c) Hardware quantities, locations, and installation requirements.

d) Anchorages and reinforcement.
e) Glazing details.
3) Samples for verification of size indicated below and of same thickness and
material indicated for Work. Show the full range of color and texture variations
expected.
a) Metal Finishes: 6-inch long sections of patch fittings, rails, and other
items.
b) Glass: 150mm square showing exposed-edge finish.
531.1.4 Products and Handling

1) Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this section
before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and
materials of all other trades.
2) Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and
replacements necessary.

Field Measurements: Verify opening dimensions of all-glass entrances by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
531.1.6 Warranty
Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace
components of all-glass entrances that fail in materials or workmanship within the
specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Structural failures.
2) Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
3) Failure of operating components to function normally.
4) Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Products
TS 500 - 348
531.2.2 Materials
1) Clear Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully-tempered), Condition A (uncoated
surfaces), Type I (transparent), Class 1 (clear) requirements. Provide products
of thickness indicated that have been tested for surface and edge compression
according to ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength according to CPSC 16 CFR,
Part 1201 for Category II materials.
a) Thickness: The thickness of glasses for various glass doors shall be as
specified on the Drawings.
b) Exposed Edges: Flat polished.
c) Corner Edges: Mitered.
2) Stainless-Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 302 or Type 304; No. 4 finish.
531.2.3 Components
1) Fittings: Provide fittings and accessories for all-glass entrances of
configurations shown on drawings fabricated of stainless steel, minimum 12
Ga.
2) Anchors and Fastenings: Manufacturer's standard concealed anchors and
fastening.
3) Weather -stripping: Manufacturer's standard sweep-type weather-stripping.
531.2.4 Hardware
1) General: Heavy-duty hardware units indicated in sizes, numbers, and type
recommended by manufacturer for all-glass entrances indicated. For exposed
parts, match fitting metal and finish.
2) Closers: Center-hung, concealed floor closers complying with ANSI/BHMA A
156.4, Grade 1 or Grade 2 requirements, including cases, bottom arms, top
pivots, plates and accessories required for a complete installation, and as
follows:
a) Swing: Single acting.
b) Hold Open: Selective.
c) Positive Dead Stop: Coordinated with hold-open angle.
d) Delayed-Action Closing: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility
Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," whichever are more
stringent.
3) Push-Pull: 25mm dia. Stainless steel, as shown on the Drawings.
4) Lockset: Bottom rail dead bolt, dead bolt operated by key outside and inside
engaging cutout in threshold or floor plate.
TS 500 - 349
5) Lock cylinder shall be as described on the Drawings or “Finish Hardware”

section (Section 536) of these Specifications.
6) Make provisions for and coordinate with installation requirements for
electro/magnetic lock and door release at door head.
7) Threshold: Manufacturer's standard threshold with cutouts coordinated for
operating hardware, with anchors and jamb clips, not more than 1/2 inch high
with beveled edges providing a floor-level change with a slope of not more
than 1:2, and fabricated of stainless steel.
531.2.5 Fabrication
1) General: Fabricate all-glass entrance components in sizes, profiles, and
configurations indicated.
2) Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, rails, and
accessories before tempering glass. Do not cut, drill, or make other alterations
to glass after tempering.
3) Fully temper glass using horizontal roller hearth process.
4) Factory assemble components and factory install hardware to greatest extent
possible.
Execution
531.3.1 Inspection
Examine the areas and conditions where all glass doors are to be installed and correct
any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper
installation of the work.
1) Install all-glass entrances and associated components according to
manufacturer's written instructions; coordinate installation with structural glass
wall fabricator.
2) Set units level and plumb.
3) Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.
4) Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
5) Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required by hardware and substrate.
531.3.3 Adjustment and Cleaning

Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and weather stripping,
smooth operation, and weather-tight closure.
TS 500 - 350
531.3.4 Protection
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to
manufacturer that ensures all-glass entrances are without damage or deterioration.

Glass doors is measured as the “Square Meter” and rate shall be included the
following items:
1) Stainless steel door frame and all necessary accessories.
2) All finished hared wares shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the
Section 534 of this Specification.

Item Number
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 351
532 ROLL-UP SHUTTER DOORS
The Work
installation onsite of roll-up shutter doors, including all anchorage provisions, in
All roll-up shutter doors for the facilities in the Depot Area shall be of 2 hours fire-
resistant.
532.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required roll-up shutter doors, as
532.1.2 Summary
Section includes interior and exterior overhead roll-up security shutters
532.1.3 Submittals
1) Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for all specified components,
including specifications, finish information and installation instructions.
2) Submit Certificate of 2 hours fire rate for all roll-up shutter doors to be Installed ifor
facilities in the Depot Area.
3) Shop Drawings: Submit scaled shop drawings showing layout, sizes and types,
product materials, components and accessories, fabrication data, wiring
diagrams for motor driven operators, finishes, rough-in dimensions, anchorage
with installation requirements and location details.
4) Samples: Manufacturer's standard array of colors for selection by the Engineer.
5) Quality Assurance Submittals:
a) Test Reports: Engineer raised seal test reports showing compliance with
specified requirements.
b) Certificates: Engineering certification that design criteria meets specified
requirements.
c) Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Submit detailed maintenance
requirements and operating instructions.
d) Warranty: Submit specified warranty documents.
TS 500 - 352

1) Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roll-up shutter doors through one source
from a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty (20) years’ experience
in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section.
2) Installer Qualifications:
Use only manufacturer's factory-trained installers or qualified installers
approved by shutter manufacturer.
3) Regulatory Requirements:
a) Comply with all local and governing code requirements.
b) Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct a pre-installation meeting to verify
project installation and coordination requirements, and field conditions.
Tele-conference is acceptable.
c) Electrical Certification: ANSI-approved and labeled UL325 as a
complete shutter system. Individual testing of components will not be
acceptable in lieu of system testing.

Deliver components in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers
with identification labels intact. Store components protected from harmful weather
conditions and damage from other construction activity.

Field Measurements: Record actual measurements of openings before fabrication.
Show recorded measurements on As-Built Drawings.
532.1.7 Warranty
1) Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Employer's acceptance, manufacturer's
standard warranty document executed by an authorized company official.
2) Warranty period: one year parts and labor, not including scaffolding, lifts, or
other means to reach the inaccessible areas.
3) Motors and motor control systems: Manufacturer’s standard non-depreciating
five (5)-year warranty.
(Note: Refer to manufacturer's product data and /or consult with manufacturer's
representative for warranty information/ requirements.)
Products
TS 500 - 353
532.2.2 Materials
1) Shutter Components:
a) Slat Type:
i) Stainless Steel Single Wall Slats: Solid stainless steel slats with non-
slip hinge. Slip hinges with slotted light slits shall not be permitted
due to strength compromise.
(1) End Retention: both ends of each slat to contain #8-18 thread
410 stainless steel, coated, screws with a 3/16” shoulder bushing
and ½” diameter head.
(2) Finger pull slat model AL-FP-A-1 integrated with curtain at 32”
AFF (with push up/pull down operation only).
(3) Slat perforations for vision (non-typhoon rated) (P51) (P11)
b) Bottom Base or Locking Slat: Stainless steel. Lock bar operation into
mortised side rails at bottom of each side rail. Polypropylene felt or rubber
gasket at underside of bottom lock slat.
i) Slide lock base slat with manual stainless steel (ss) slide and ss thumb
turn lockdown at either end of base slat.
ii) Key lock (lock CC) ss base slat with standard key engaging ss slides.
Key lock on (non-box or box) side.
iii) Cylinder lock heavy duty base slat (with or without) thumb turn
opposite key (centered or off-center at double doors) engaging ss
slides. Key lock on (non-box or box) side.
iv) Motorized shutters do not require a lock since the motor maintains
the shutter curtain in the down position. A separate locking ss base
slat is not required. Provide non-latching ss base slat.
v) Gear-operated shutters do not require a separate ss locking base slat.
Provide non-latching ss base slat.
vi) Drive-operated shutters do not require a separate ss locking base slat.
Provide non-latching ss base slat.
c) Operation: (Manual) (110V Motor-operated) (14.4V Low Voltage Motor-
operated).
i) Manual operator type: (choose one)
(1) Gear with hand crank: 11:1 drive end gearbox with wall or
housing-mounted universal joint with 7mm hex input with
TS 500 - 354
(interior-through-the-wall) or (exterior housing-mounted)

operation. Removable crank pole with articulating handle.
(2) Manual push up/pull down operation with internal drive tube
torsion spring lift-assist manufactured to have maximum 35 lbs
raise or lower effort.
ii) Electric Motor operator type: Single phase 110V-60Hz, UL-
recognized. Motor model / size to be determined by manufacturer to
provide ample lift for shutter size and weight.
(Important Note: Motorized operation cannot be used at exit doors
due to egress-recommend push up/pull down.)
(1) Optional crank-operated motor override 32:1 gear ratio. (Note:
Manual override capability above is an optional feature, delete
if not required.)
(2) Maintained single switch operation
(3) Single switch to multiple motors using relays. Requires line of
sight operation.
(4) Wireless remote to control (single motor) (groups up to 16
motors)
iii) Low voltage system: DC-operated tubular shutter motor utilizing a
rechargeable, portable 14.4V power pack/”controller” and fixed wall
plate receivers.
(Note: limited shutter size to 65 sq. ft. max.)
d) End Caps: Die-cast Aluminum (square, 45 degree or round) profile. Color
(selected by Engineer) to match slats.
e) Box Cover (hood): Roll-formed aluminum; .036 inch thickness, 3105-H14
alloy. Two-piece assembly-profile to match end caps. Color (selected by
Engineer) to match slats.
i) Shape: shall be (square, 45° or round).
ii) Size: all shutters for project shall be contained in a/an (6”-, 6.5”-, 7”-,
8”-, 10”- or 12”-) sized box housing. (Note: Consult Engineer for the
precise AL7 box housing size as shutter width may affect roll box
size.)
f) Track Guides/Side Rails: Stainless steel (ss), lined with insulation woven
polypropylene runners. Color (selected by Engineer) to match slats.
Mounting: (Jamb, Surface/Face or Build-out).
i) Face mount to sides of opening into building structure. No shutter
shall be mounted to window frames.
ii) Build-out required at door openings (site specific) to clear door
hardware.
TS 500 - 355
iii) Build-out required and mounted to building structure at trapped

openings for jamb mount. No build-out shall be attached to window
frames.
g) Drive Tube: Manufacturer-selected based on shutter-specific load
calculations from either 60mm octagon steel, 70 mm octagon steel, 4” ss
round, or 5” ss round.
532.2.3 Shop Finish

1) Side Frames and Track: (Electrostatically applied - ESP - paint finish AMAA
2603).
2) Color: (To match slats, as selected by Engineer from standard manufacturer
colors).
3) Anodized finish: 201-R1 Clear Acid Etch (15 min Velo).
532.2.4 Application & Design

CODES: Installed shutters shall meet the required building compliance and
documentation per section.
532.2.5 Submittals
2017 International Building Code (IBC)-compliant.
Execution
532.3.1 Examination
Verify conditions of substrates to determine if acceptable for shutter installation in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Correct all unsatisfactory conditions
prior to commencing shutter installations.
1) Install track and all shutter components to comply with project shop drawings
and manufacturer's installation product approvals.
2) After installation, lubricate, test and adjust shutters to operate properly and free
from distortion.
532.3.3 Cleaning
1) Clean installed components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
prior to Employer's acceptance. Properly remove from the site all debris
remaining from this installation.
2) Inadequate surface cleaning will result in corrosion formation & potential
structural damage.
TS 500 - 356
532.3.4 Protection
Comply with manufacturer recommendations and protect completed shutter
installations from damage during remaining construction so as not to void warranty.

Stainless-steel roll-up shutter and grilled doors shall be measured as the “Each” and
rate shall be included the following items:
1) All required parts and necessary accessories as specified in the Sub-Clause
532.2 above and chain-block for duration of the power failure.
2) Safety device to avoid any objective and/or human is wedged by closing shutter
door.
3) Electrical works for mortar control including control switches and provision
manual operation device in the event of power failure.
4) Manual opening and closing device, such as chain-block shall be provided for
in the event of power failure.
5) All roll-up shutter doors as indicated in the “Schedule of Door” for all facilities
in the Depot Area shall be of 2 hours fire-resistant

Item Number
SH1 for Calumpit Station: W25070mm x H3700mm,
532(1) Each
Motorized Stainless Steel Grill Shutter Doors
SH1 for Apalit Station: W34050mm x H3800mm, Motorized
532(2)a Each
Stainless Steel Grill Shutter Doors
SH2 for Apalit Station: W32950mm x H3800mm, Motorized
532(2)b Each
SH1 for San Fernando Station: W25050mm x H4200mm,
532(3)a Each
SH2 for San Fernando Station: W21580mm x H4200mm,
532(3)b Each
TS 500 - 357
SH1 for Angeles Station: W30345mm x H4200mm, Motorized

532(4)a Each
SH2 for Angeles Station: W8800mm x H4200mm, Motorized
532(4)b Each
SH1 for Clark Station: W16360mm x H4200mm, Motorized
532(5)a Each
SH2 for Clark Station: W3100mm x H4200mm, Motorized
532(5)b Each
SH1 for CIA Station: W17800mm x H4500mm, Motorized
532(6)a Each
SH2 for CIA Station: W11000mm x H4950mm, Motorized
532(6)b Each

Number
SS1 for OCC Building: W3000mm x H2425mm, Motorized
D532(1) Each
Stainless Steel Roll-up Shutter Doors
SS1 for Workshop: W5000mm x H6400mm, Motorized
D532(2)a Each
D532(2)b Each
D532(2)c Each
SS1 for Light Repair Shop: W5000mm x H6400mm,
D532(3)a Each
Motorized Stainless Steel Roll-up Shutter Doors
SS2 for Light Repair Shop: W3000mm x H3000mm,
D532(3)b Each
SS1 for Underfloor Cleaning Shop: W5000mm x H6400mm,
D532(4)a Each
SS2 for Underfloor Cleaning Shop: W4000mm x H6400mm,
D532(4)b Each
SS1 for Unscheduled Repairer Shop: W5000mm x H6400mm,
D532(5)a Each
SS2 for Unscheduled Repairer Shop: W4000mm x H6400mm,
D532(5)b Each
SS1 for Wheel Re-Profiling Shop: W5000mm x H6400mm,
D532(6)a Each
SS2 for Wheel Re-Profiling Shop: W3000mm x H4000mm,
D532(6)b Each
SS1 for Catenary Maintenance Vehicle Shop: W5000mm x
D532(7) Each
H6400mm, Motorized Stainless Steel Roll-up Shutter Doors
TS 500 - 358
D1 for Shunting Car Shop: W5000mm x H6400mm, Motorized

D532(8) Each
D1 for Truck Garage: W4000mm x H3000mm, Motorized
D532(9) Each
D532(10) Each
D532(11) Each
SS1 for Training Center: W5200mm x H3000mm, Motorized
D532(12) Each
SS1 for Canteen: W3000mm x H3000mm, Motorized Stainless
D532(13) Each
Steel Roll-up Shutter Doors
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 359
533 ACCESS DOORS
The Work
installation onsite of access doors, including all anchorage provisions, in accordance
Engineer.
533.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required access doors as shown on

1) Work of this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
2) Work of this section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services
necessary to complete the access doors as indicated on the drawings and/or
specified herein, including but not limited to, the following:
a) Frameless recessed panel access doors at drywall ceilings and walls.
b) Provide access doors and frames for access from occupied spaces to the
following, where indicated or required, and as directed by the trades of
Divisions IS and 16.
i) All shut off or balancing valves.
ii) Fire dampers, as required.
iii) Points of duct access.
iv) Pull boxes.
v) Controls of mechanical and electrical items.
vi) Masonry shafts for pipes and conduits, as required.
vii) Pipe spaces, if required.
viii) Inlets of fans.
ix) Fusible link and splitter damper at filter bank.
x) Automatic damper and motor.
xi) Equipment not otherwise accessible.
TS 500 - 360

For actual installation of the work of this section, use only personnel who are
thoroughly familiar with the manufacturer's recommended methods of installation
and who are completely trained in the skills required.
533.1.4 Fire-Resistance Ratings

Wherever a fire-resistance classification is shown, or for construction where access
doors are installed, provide access required door assembly with panel door, frame,
hinge and latch from manufacturers listed in Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
"Classified Building Materials Index" for the rating shown.
1) Provide UL label on each access panel.
2) Provide flush, key operated cylinder lock.
533.1.5 Size Variations

Obtain the Engineer’s acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units which may
vary slightly from sizes shown or scheduled.
533.1.6 Submittals
Before any materials of this section are delivered to the job site, submit complete
manufacturer's literature to the Engineer. Submit plans and schedules showing size
and location of each and every access door for Engineer's acceptance prior to
installation.
533.1.7 Products Handling
Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this section before, during and
after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
533.1.7.2 Replacements
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary.
Products
TS 500 - 361
533.2.2 Materials and Fabrication

1) Provide access door assembly from the manufactured approved by the
Engineer. Assembly shall be an integral unit complete with all parts and ready
for installation.
2) Fabricate units of continuous welded steel carbon and stainless steel
construction.
Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Provide attachment
devices and fasteners of the type required to secure access panels to the types
of supports shown.
3) In wet areas all doors shall be stainless steel.
4) Frames for Flush Panel Units
a) Fabricate frame from l.5mm thick carbon or stainless steel. Provide frame
with exposed flange not less than 23mm wide around perimeter of frame
for the following construction:
i) Exposed masonry.
b) For installation in masonry construction, provide frames with adjustable
metal masonry anchors.
5) Frameless Units for Drywall Surfaces (Recessed Panel Units)
Provide access doors without exposed frames for drywall adhered to recessed
panel.
6) Panels: Fabricate from 1.9mm thick carbon and stainless steel, with concealed
spring hinges set to open to 80 degrees. Provide removable pin type hinges of
the quantity required to support the access panel sizes used in the work. Finish
with manufacturer's factory applied baked enamel prime coat applied over
phosphate protective coating on steel.
7) Locking Devices
For non-rated access doors, provide flush, screwdriver operated cam locks of
number required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed.
For fire-resistant doors and public areas shall be provided.
8) Inserts and Anchorage: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be
built into masonry for the installation of access panels. Provide setting
drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage
devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
9) Refuse Chute Doors: Provide fusible link fire partition self-closing units at each
landing; at heights indicated. Provide stainless steel door units AISI type
302/304, with No. 4 brushed finish.
TS 500 - 362
Execution
533.3.1 Inspection
Examine the areas and conditions where access doors are to be installed and correct
any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not
533.3.2 Coordination
1) Coordinate all work with the mechanical trades to insure proper locations and
in a timely manner to permit orderly progress of the total work.
2) Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face
panels plumb or level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.
3) Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
4) Remove and replace panels or frames which are warped, bowed, or otherwise
damaged.
533.4.1 Method of Measurement and Payment

Quantity for Access Door is not considered under this section and rates are deemed
to be included in other appropriate pay items, such as TS541, 544 and 545.
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 363
534 FINISH HARDWARE
The Work
installation onsite of finish hardware, in accordance with this Specification and in
The work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Drawings and
Specifications, and includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary
to complete the required finish hardware, as shown on the Drawings and/or as
specified herein.
534.1.2 Supplying Finish Hardware
534.1.3 Providing Hardware Templates

The Contractor shall provide and fix the hardware required by the Specifications or
shown on the Drawings complete with all necessary screws, bolts, plugs and other
fixings. The use of nails for fixing hardware shall not be permitted. The Contractor
shall hand over all work in a finished state and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
All hardware shall be of the first quality and shall be obtained from an approved
manufacturer.

Fittings Work JASS 16 or
equivalent Standard
Wrought Steel and Wrought Stainless Steel Butt Hinges ASTM D8, 448,
1241
Spheroidal Graphite Iron Castings C330
Sliding Door Rails ASTM
Wrought Steel and Wrought Stainless Steel. Loose Pin Butt Hinges ASTM
F1073
Door Hinges (with Bushings and Washers) ASTM F1073
Door hinges (with Ball Bearing) ASTM F1073
Lever Tumbler Mortise Locks ASTM F1073
Fittings for Steel Sash ASTM F1073
Fitting for Steel Door ASTM F1073
Floor Hinge ASTM F1073
Door Closures ASTM F1073
Fittings for Aluminum Sliding Windows and Doors ASTM F1073
TS 500 - 364
534.1.5.1 Contractor's Qualification

Hardware work shall be carried out by an approved contractor having specialized in
the work as its primary business for at least ten (10) years and having performed
satisfactorily work of this type and magnitude.
Employ only skilled tradesmen experienced in the work of this section.
534.1.6 Submittals
1) Submit 2 copies of manufacturer’s product data and catalog cuts for all finish
hardware items.
2) Submit 3 copies of complete hardware schedule including master key schedule
listing all door numbers for each hardware set.
3) Submit 2 samples of each type of hardware in accordance with GS 100
“General Specification”.
4) Supply hardware templates to door and frame manufacturers for preparation of
doors and frames for hardware.
5) Provide the Engineer with manufacturer's parts list and maintenance
instructions for each type of hardware supplied, and necessary wrenches and
tools required for proper maintenance of hardware.
Products
534.2.2 Materials
Materials of hardware exposed to view shall be stainless steel except auto-hinges
(cast iron) and door closures (aluminum-alloy) unless specified otherwise.
534.2.3 Keying
1) In general, provide for grand master keying. Provide 3 keys for each lock, 3
master keys for each group of locks, and 3 grand master keys. Provide spare
cylinders, blank keys, and spare knobs in compliance with requirements of the
Contract.
TS 500 - 365
2) The Master Key System or Card Key System shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the notes on the Drawings.

Quantity of the Finish hardware (ironmongery) for Doors and Windows are not
considered under this Section, but rates shall be included appropriate pay items of
the TS 526, 528, 532 and 552.
Quantity of the Cast Iron Abrasive Nosing is measured as the “Linear Meter”
Quantity of the Master Kay and Card Key System is measured as the “Lot”.

Station Description Unit of

Item Number
534(25) Cast Iron Abrasive Nosing Linear meter
534 (27)a The Master Key System Set
534 (27)b Card Key System Set

Number
D534(26) Cast Iron Abrasive Nosing Linear meter
D534 (29)a The Master Key System Lot
D534 (29)b Card Key System Lot
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 366
535 PLASTICS
The Work
1) Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Sections, apply to this section.
a) Standard/ Solid color decorative laminate;
b) Metal laminates;
c) Fire-resistant decorative laminates;
d) Chemical-resistant decorative laminate;
e) Countertops;
f) Toilet partitions; and
g) Walls as indicated, including accessories and trim needed for a complete
installation.
535.1.1 Related Work

1) Work of this section is related to work specified in the following sections:
a) Section 510 - “Finish Carpentry”.
b) Section 511 - “Cabinetry”.
c) Section 552 - “Toilet Partitions”.
2) Alternates: Refer to description of Work in this section affected by alternates.
535.1.2 References
Reference Standards: In addition to requirements, comply with applicable provisions
of following for design, materials, fabrication, and installation of component parts:
NEMA LD3-2005.
535.1.3 Submittals
1) Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for decorative plastic
laminate material, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, miscellaneous
accessories and related components.
2) Samples:
Decorative plastic laminates, 125 by 175mm, for each type, color, pattern, and
surface finish, with 1 sample applied to core material and with specified edge
material applied to one (1) edge.
3) Product: For decorative plastic laminate material use the same designations
indicated on Drawings.
TS 500 - 367
4) Informational Submittals: Submit following packaged separately from other

submittals:
Manufacturer’s written handling, storage and installation instructions.

1) Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating and
installing decorative plastic laminate finished work with a minimum of three
(3) years’ experience.
2) Source Limitations: Obtain decorative plastic laminate materials through one
source from a single manufacturer.
3) Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide decorative plastic laminate with
the following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical
products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
a) Flame-Spread Index (FSI): 25 or less.
b) Smoke-Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less.
4) Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals,
to demonstrate aesthetic effects, the qualities of materials and execution and to
set quality standard for fabrication and installation.

1) Deliver, store, handle, and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer’s
written instructions.
2) Provide protective coverings of suitable material. Take special precautions at
corners.
535.1.6 Sequencing
Coordinate sizes and locations of plumbing, cut-outs and other related Work
specified in other sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
Products
TS 500 - 368
535.2.2 Materials and Components

1) Decorative Plastic Laminate: Manufacturers standard and custom decorative
surface papers with melamine resins, bonded under heat and pressure to kraft
paper backing sheet with phenolic resins.
2) Standard Decorative Laminate – General Purpose Type Decorative Laminate:
a) Grade: Grade 10, HGS, Grade 12, HGP, Grade 20, VGP, CLS, BKH.
b) Thickness: 1.1mm, 0.9mm, 0.7mm, 0.5mm, 0.8mm.
c) Surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTM E84.
d) Finish: (as specified by Engineer)
e) Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer’s designations; or as
selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s full range.
3) Solid Color Decorative Laminate:
a) Grade: Grade CC, HCS.
b) Thickness: 1.02 mm.
4) Fire-resistant Decorative Laminate
a) Grade: Grade 32, VGF, Grade 50, HGF.
b) Thickness: 0.8 mm, 1.1 mm.
c) Surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL723.
selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s full range].
5) Chemical Resistant Decorative Laminate:
a) Grade: Grade A3, Post Forming Grade
b) Thickness: 1.0 mm
6) Metal Laminate:
a) Grade: Grade 82, Grade 83, Grade 84, Grade 85, Grade 86.
b) Thickness: 0.7mm0.8mm), 1.0mm, 1.3mm.
TS 500 - 369
c) Sheet Size: 4 ft x 8 ft, 4 ft x 10 ft.

d) Surface burning characteristics in accordance with ASTM E84.
e) Finish: (as specified by Engineer)
f) Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer’s designations; or as
7) Edge Molding: Grade: Grade 12, HGP
a) Profile thickness: 1.25” Ogee and Bullnose, Size/Profile: A12, Ogee; B12,
Bullnose.
b) Finish: (as specified by Engineer)
c) Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer’s designations; or as
8) Edge Banding: Grade HGS, PVC tape, 0.460-mm minimum thickness,
matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish; PVC T-mold matching laminate
in color, pattern, and finish; PVC edge banding, 3 mm thick, matching laminate
in color, pattern, and finish.
535.2.3 Accessory Materials

Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement, PVA, Urea
formaldehyde or Resorcinol, as directed by manufacturer.
Adhesive for Bonding Edge Molding: Provide type as specified in manufacturer’s
written installation instructions.
Execution
535.3.1 Examination and Preparation

Examine surfaces for conditions that would adversely affect decorative plastic
laminate surfacing or edge performance.
535.3.2.1 General
Install decorative plastic laminate in accordance with manufacturer’s written
installation instructions, approved Submittals and requirements of sections on
“Finish Carpentry” and “Toilet Partitions”.
Provide templates and rough-in measurements.
535.3.2.2 Edge Molding

Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
TS 500 - 370
535.3.3.1 Cleaning
Clean decorative plastic laminate surfaces and edge moldings in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not permit construction near unprotected surfaces.

Quantity of Plastics is not measured but rate shall be deemed to be include in the
appropriate Pay Item of other Section such as Furniture.
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 371
536 INTERIOR/EXTERIOR STONE
The Work
installation onsite of interior/ exterior stone, in accordance with this Specification
536.1.1 Codes and Standard

Welded Wire Cloth ASTM A82, 185, 496, 497
Manufactured Sand for Concrete ASTM C33
Crushed Stone for Concrete ASTM C33
Portland Cement ASTM C150
536.1.2 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required interior/ exterior stone,
as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein. See the Drawings and finish
schedules for floor materials, colors, patterns, etc.

1) Stone Flooring and Base
2) Mortar Bed
3) Joint Pointing

specialized in this work as its primary business for at least ten (10) years, and
conforming to the Specifications at any time before final acceptance.
subsequent rejection if defects are discovered later. The Contractor shall
remove installed materials which are rejected by the Engineer and replace them
at no additional cost to the Employer.
TS 500 - 372

1) Provide adequate, continuous ventilation and sufficient heat to maintain
temperatures above 7°C for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after the
setting of ceramic tile.
2) Provide minimum of 270 lux of lighting on surfaces to receive tile.
536.1.6 Submittals
1) Submit installation drawings of special paving patterns in accordance with GS
100 “General Specification”.
2) The Contractor shall provide and submit suitable key drawing and stone cutting
list indicating exact cutting size, shape and polishing faces to the Engineer for
his approval before commencement of the Work.
3) Submit 3 samples of each specified paving brick or stone (minimum 1000 x
1000 cm) in accordance with GS 100 “General Specification”, showing the
range and/or variation in color and texture.
4) Submit 3 copies of each manufacturer’s installation instructions.
Furnish manufacturer's certification that the materials meet or exceed the
Specification requirements.
5) Provide the Employer with a warranty stating that the work will remain free of
defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period of ten (10) years
from the date of substantial completion, and that upon failure of the installation
to perform as warranted, the Contractor will repair or replace the defective
work at no cost to the Employer.
6) Prepare a sample of each type of paving (minimum 1m square) for the
Engineer's approval before starting the installation. The finish paving shall
match the approved samples.
Products
536.2.2 Materials
1) Stone
TS 500 - 373
a) Unless otherwise as specified on the Drawings the type stones shall be as

shown in the Table below:
b) Marble
LOCATION STONE FINISH
Customer Service Room Travertine Classic or Polished
equivalent (Honed)
c) Granite
LOCATION STONE FINISH
Platform, Station Plaza Granite Polished
(Honed)
d) Size, color, quality, and finish as specified.
e) Provide stone free of cracks, fissures and prominent features detrimental to
its appearance or durability.
f) Country of origin: as specified.
2) Portland Cement: ASTM C150
3) Sand: Sharp, coarse, clean, screened sand free from deleterious material.
4) Water: Potable
5) Color Pigments: Non-fading lime-proof mineral pigments, colors as specified.
6) Reinforcing Mesh: ASTM A82, 185, 596, 497 galvanized.
7) Cleavage membrane: Polyethylene sheet.
536.2.3 Mortar Mixes

1) Setting bed: One (1) part cement to six (6) parts damp sand. Mix with water to
a workable consistency.
2) Pointing Mortar: 1:3 cement sand mortar.
3) Add Pigment and/or admixtures as specified.
536.2.4 Stone Fabrication

1) Generally, sound, uniform, square, straight, and flat.
2) Shapes, sizes, thickness, and finishes as specified.
3) Cutting and finishing at location specified.
4) Cut holes shown on shop drawings.
536.2.5 Tolerances
Length and width of stones: Less than 3mm
Thickness: Plus or minus 1mm
TS 500 - 374
536.2.6 Storage, Handling and Protection

Generally, in accordance with appropriate section of GS 100 “General Specification”
Execution
536.3.1 Inspection
1) Inspect the work in place and notify the Engineer in writing of defects in the
work of other trades that will affect the proper installation and operation of the
work of this section. Starting the installation work shall constitute acceptance
2) Ensure that all pipes, conduits, drains, etc. penetrating floors are securely
installed in the correct position (and tested or inspected if required).
536.3.2 Preparation
1) Allow concrete base slab and /or walls to cure for 28 days (minimum).
2) Remove sharp projections from concrete surface, sweep concrete thoroughly
clean
3) Install control joints and mat recesses.
4) Clean stone prior to installation, leaving edges and surfaces free of dirt or
foreign material. Do not uses wire brushes or implements which mark or
damage exposed surfaces.
5) Coat the back of stones with shellac.
536.3.3.1 Stone Paving

1) Spread mortar bed as detailed and screed off to the proper elevation for the
bottom of the stone. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures
of 26°C and above, and two-and-one half hours at temperatures under 10°C. If
necessary, re-temper mortar within two hours of mixing to replace water lost
by evaporation. Do not re-temper mortar after two (2) hours from mixing.
2) Install stones in accordance with stone supplier’s instructions. Set stones in the
mortar to support the stones over their full bearing surface.
3) Tamp stones soundly into the mortar bed.
4) Maintain a uniform joint width as shown on the Drawings. Form joints
watertight, and without voids, cracks, or excess mortar.
5) Cut tile neatly around fixtures and drains. Form corners, intersections and
returns accurately. Slope floor uniformly to drains as indicated.
6) Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours before pointing. To accommodate
pointing mortar, rake out joints 6 to 10mm. Fill joints with pointing mortar.
TS 500 - 375
Pack and work well into voids. Neatly tool the surface flush with the stone.
Keep expansion/contraction, and control joints free of mortar.
536.3.3.2 Wall Cladding

1) Method of stone cladding shall be the Dry Method.
2) Galvanized metal batten frame shall be installed to the concrete and /or Steel
framing at the stone joints in accordance with stone layout as shown on the
Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
3) Stone panel shall securely installed by galvanized metal stone fastener.
4) Remove and replace broken, damaged or faulty stones.
5) Seal around all penetrations through floor surfaces and at expansion joints.
6) Apply sealants in accordance with requirements of section on “Sealants”.
536.3.4 Installation Tolerance

1) Max variation, face of one stone to the adjacent stone: 0.5mm
2) Maximum deviation from a flat surface: 1/1000
3) Maximum variation in joint width: 1.5mm
4) Maximum joint deviation from a straight line: 1/1000
536.3.5 Maintenance
Provide maintenance data in accordance with requirements of the Contract
Document. Include a list of liquids detrimental to the appearance of the finish.
536.3.6 Protection and Cleaning

1) The Contractor shall be responsible to provide and fix protection against
weather or damage caused by impact, staining by other trades.
2) Protection shall be maintained until immediate before substantial completion
or directed by the Engineer.
3) Clean soiled surfaces using a solution that will not harm the stone, joint
materials, or adjacent surfaces.
4) Consult the stone supplier for recommended materials. Use non-metallic tools
in cleaning operations.
the work. Leave the work broom clean or better.
TS 500 - 376

1) Quantity of marble and granite stones for paving and wall claddings are
measured as the “Square Meters” without wastage factor is considered and for
quantity of baseboards and countertop are measured as the “Linear Meter”,
2) No wastage factor of stone is allowed in the quantity.
3) The rate of stone paving shall be included the following items.
4) The rate of stone walls cladding shall be included the following items.
a) Marble and Granite Stones sizes shall be as shown on the Drawings.
b) Anchors for primary stainless-steel fasteners installation.
c) Stainless-steel angle primary and secondary fasteners dowel pin and all
necessary accessories for stone wall dry cladding method.
d) Joint pointing for stone tail.
e) Provision of protection for finished surface until completion of all works.

Item Number
536(1) Granite Floor Tiles, Common and Accent (300x300mm / Square Meter
600x600mm / Granite Border; t=30mm)
536(2) T=30mm, Granite Base (600 mm x 100 mm) Linear Meter

536(3) T=30mm, Non-Skid Granite Floor Tiles (900mm x 900mm) Square meter
536(4) Granite Floor Tiles with Non-Skid Nosings (300mm x Square meter
600mm; t=30mm)
536(5) Granite rock J & pt 30 Square meter

536(6) T=20mm, H=150mm, Polished Granite Baseboard Square meter
536(7) Granite Slab Countertop & Granite Lintel Square meter
536(8) T=30mm, Honed Granite Floor Tiles Square meter
536(9) T=30mm, Honed Granite Wall Tiles Square meter
TS 500 - 377
536(10) T=20mm, H=150mm, Honed Granite Baseboard Linear meter

536(11) 90mm x 90mm, 30mm thick Granite brick Paving Square meter
536(12) T=50mm, Limestone Countertop Linear meter
536(13) Marble Square meter

Number
D536(7) T=50mm, Granite Slab Countertop & Granite Lintel Square meter
D536(11) T=30mm, Honed Granite Floor Tile Square meter
D536(16) T=20mm, H=150mm, Honed Granite Baseboard Linear meter
D536(17) T=30mm, Framed Granite Floor Tile Square meter
D536(18) T=20mm, H=150mm, Framed Granite Baseboard Linear meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 378
537 TILES (CERAMIC, QUARRY AND TERRAZZO TILE)
The Work
installation onsite of tiles (ceramic and quarry), including all anchorage provisions,
in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the Drawings or as
537.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required tiles (ceramic and quarry),

1) Tile Flooring
2) Tile Walls
3) Accessories
4) Grouting

remove installed materials, which are rejected by the Engineer and replace
them at no additional cost to the Employer.

1) Provide adequate, continuous ventilation and sufficient heat to maintain
temperatures above 7 Degrees C for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after
the setting of tile.
TS 500 - 379
2) Provide a minimum of 270 lux of lighting on surfaces to receive tile.
537.1.5 Submittals
1) Submit 3 samples of each type floor and wall tiles shown on the Drawings.
2) The Contractor shall provide 2 sq.m. actual wall and floor samples showing
color, patterns, and grouted joints for the Engineer’s approval.
3) The Contractor shall submit detail tile layout drawing showing location of
fittings to be installed by the other trades
4) Provide the Employer with a warranty, in accordance with requirement of the
Contract, stating that the work will remain free from defects in material and
workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from the date of substantial
completion, and that upon failure of the installation to perform as warranted,
the Contractor will repair or replace the defective work at no cost to the
Employer.
Products
537.2.2 Materials
537.2.2.1 Tiles
1) Generally, the tiles shall be manufactured from refined alkalized white china
clays and produced in molds under heavy pressure and fire to produce
"biscuits", those biscuits shall be glazed with colored enamel which is to be
heat.
2) Floor and wall tiles shall be of Double Charge Vitrified Tiles with the
characteristics specified in the table below or approved by the Engineer.
Flooring
Specifications
Characteristics Standards
Glazed
Floor Tile Homogeneous
Porcelain
Product ISO 13006 Group B II a Group B I a Group B I a

Classification
TS 500 - 380
Water Absorption ISO 13006 < 6.00% < 0.50% < 0.50%
Flexural Strength ISO 10545 – 4 > 35N/mm² > 45N/mm² > 45N/mm²
Resistance to ISO 10545 – 13 Min. Class B Min. Class B Min. Class B

Acids and Alkalis
Stain resistance ISO 10545 – 14 Min. Class 3 Min. Class 3 Min. Class 3
Dimension and ISO 10545 – 2 Max. Tolerance Max. Tolerance Max.

Surface Quality 0.30% 0.30% Tolerance
0.30%
Wear and ISO 10545 – 7 PEI- 4-5 PEI- 4-5

Abrasion
Resistance
Wall Tile
Characteristics Standards Specifications
Product Classification ISO 13006 Group B III
Water Absorption ISO 10545 – 3 < 17.00%
Flexural Strength ISO 10545 – 4 > 23N/mm²
Crazing resistance ISO 10545 – 11 Pass
Resistance to Acids and Alkalis ISO 10545 – 13 Min. Class B
Stain resistance ISO 10545 – 14 Min. Class 3
Dimension and Surface Quality ISO 10545 – 2 Max. Tolerance 0.30%
Surface Hardness EN 101 Min. No. (Mohs Scale)
3) Double Charge Vitrified Tiles Double shall be achieved the various tests listed
table below and approved by the Engineer. The contractor shall submit samples
and certificate of Double Charge Vitrified Tiles.
Serial International Double Method of

Standard. ISO Charge Testing
No. Property
130006/EN176 Value
1 Deviation in Length ± 0.6% ± 0.1% EN 98
2 Deviation in Length ± 0.5% ± 0.1% EN 98
TS 500 - 381
3 Straightness of Sides ± 0.5% ± 0.3% EN 98
4 Rectangularity ± 0.6% ± 0.3% EN 98
5 Surface Flatness ± 0.5% ± 0.2% EN 98
6 Water absorption < 0.5% < 0.03% EN 99
7 Mohs hardness >6 >6 EN 101
8 Flexural Strength > 40 N/mm

> 27 N/mm ² EN 100
²
9 Abrasion resistance < 204 mm ³ < 144 mm ³ EN 102
10 Skid Resistance (Friction

> 0.4 > 0.6 ASTM C-1028
Coefficient)
11 Breaking Strength 1113 N 2500 N ASTM C-648
12 Density (g/cc) >2 2.4 DIN 51082
13 Frost resistance Frost proof Frost proof EN 202
14 Chemical Resistance No Damage No Damage EN 106
15 Thermal Shock Resistance No Damage No Damage EN 104
16 Colour Resistance No Damage No Damage DIN 51094
17 Thermal Expansion < 9 x 10-6 < 6 x 10-6 EN 103
18 Stain Resistance Resistant Resistant ISO 10545-14
19 Moisture Expansion Nil Nil ISO 10545-10
20 Glosiness 89%
- Glossmeter
reflaction
4) Tiles shall be of the colors and patterns or combinations and sizes as selected
by the Engineer and the tiles used in the works shall be true in shape, flat, free
from flaws and cracks, uniform in color and texture and with glazing which if
free from steaks and runs.
5) See the Drawings and the finish schedules for specific tile accessories,
threshold, setting bed, and grout requirements.
537.2.2.2 Terrazzo Tile

1) Terrazzo tile shall be as follows:
TS 500 - 382
a) Terrazzo tiles and fittings (normal type): shall be 400 x 400 mm for wall
tiles, 30 mm thick for floor, 20 mm thick for upstand walls and 15 mm
thick for skirtings, and shall be precast pressed tiles, with the wearing
surfaces made of tinted Portland cement and Green Marble, Red Marble
and Yellow Marble chippings and particles of an approved quality color
and ratio. Particles shall be minimum 50mm x 50mm in size. Tiles shall
be sound, square edged, and of even and uniform texture and color.
Terrazzo tiles shall meet the prescribed laboratory tests.
b) Underbid: One part Portland cement to 4 parts sand by volume. Add
water to produce low slump mix.
c) Grout shall be of tile grout factory mixed with all required aggregate and
pigment. The color shall be selected by the Engineer.

Deliver materials and store on the site in original containers with seals unbroken and
labels intact until time of use and handle all in accordance with manufacturer's
directions. No tile shall be dropped during unloading or handling.
537.2.4 Furnish spare tile as specified in the Contract
Execution
537.3.1 General
1) The background or sub-floor shall be free from contamination, looser or friable
materials and shall provide an adequate key for bedding.
2) The Contractor may propose to the Engineer the local practice method of
bedding for his approval or selected from various bedding methods, or
combined, specified in hereinafter. Any additional cost incurred by selection
of bedding method shall be borne by the Contractor.
537.3.2 Inspection
1) The Contractor shall inspect the work in place and notify the Engineer in
writing of defects in the work of other trades that will affect the proper
installation of the work of this section. Starting the installation work shall
constitute acceptance of the base or adjoining work.
2) Prior to starting work ensure that floor surfaces to receive tile are flat within
1/400 and slope adequately to drains (where indicated). Ensure that wall
surfaces to receive tile are flat within 1/1000.
537.3.3 Preparation
1) Apply bonding agent mortar leveling coat to masonry or concrete surfaces that
are unsuitable for thin set application (if specified).
TS 500 - 383
2) Install mortar leveling bed as indicated over floor waterproofing and trowel flat
within 1/1000 ready for thin set floor tile installation (if specified).
3) Ensure the gypsum boards are securely fixed and rigid with no protruding
fixtures and the face intended to relive decorative finish is exposed.
537.3.4 Bedding Method

1) Bedding method of interior wall tiles:
a) Thin-bed notched-trowel method - Apply adhesive as thin floated coat to
uniform thickness, approximately 3mm, and trowel with notched trowel
to form ribs of adhesive. Press tiles into position within stated working
time, recommended by adhesive manufacturer, using twisting or sliding
action to align tiles correctly.
b) Thin-bed butting method - Trowel adhesive evenly over back of each tile
to slightly greater thickness than final bed thickness required.
c) Tap tiles into position to achieve bed thickness not exceeding required
bed thickness.
d) Bedding in sand and cement mortar - This method shall be permitted for
heavy tiles and frogged tiles or when approved by the Engineer.
2) Bedding method for interior mosaic
Mosaic can be bedded using thin bed adhesives and the notched-trowel method.
The backs of mosaic shuts are pre-grouted immediately before fixing.
3) Bedding methods for exterior wall tiles
a) Thin-bed floating/butting method - Spread adhesive evenly over
background as thin floated and apply thin coating to backs of tiles.
b) Tap tiles into position within stated working time using twisting or sliding
action to align tiles correctly to form a bed not exceeding 3mm.
c) Thick-bed floating/butting methods- Spread adhesive evenly over
background as floated coat. Apply thin coating to backs of tiles and tap
into position to form a bed not exceeding manufacturer's recommended
thickness. Fill deep keys or frogs in back of tiles immediately fixing.
4) Bedding method for floor tiles
a) Bedding in cement and sand mortar -Spread, compact and level a budding
of cement and sand mortar 1:3 to 4 of stiff, plastic consistency to required
thickness. Water content of mortar shall be limited to prevent formation
of surface water when mortar is compacted. Any surface water, which
does occur, must be allowed to dry. Lay only sufficient mortar for 2 hours
work at a time. Butter back tiles with neat cement/water mix or cement-
based adhesive, lay on bedding and tap down to form level surface.
b) Bedding in Cement/sand (semi-dry) mix - Sweep base clean and pried a
thoroughly mixed, by propose made mixer, cement and concreting sand
mortar l:3.5 to 4 to a 10 to 15% greater thickness than required and
TS 500 - 384
thoroughly compacted and level to a required thickness. Water content

must be sufficient to prevent sample from crumbing when squeezed but
have hand slightly moist. Tap tile carefully into position on slurry leaving
required joint between each tile. Brush dry cement and sand mix into
joints, sprinkle tiles liberally with water and beat tiles with wooden beater
to produce true surface.
c) Thin-bed method - Prepare base according to adhesive manufacturer's
instructions and apply adhesive direct to dry base in a layer not exceeding
recommended thickness. Lay dry tiles onto budding and tamp down and
have required joint between each tile. Leave tiles for at least 12 hours
before grouting joints and 1:1 mix cement and fine dry sand of paste
consistency well into joints until flush with face of tiles, remove surplus
grout from floor surface by wiping with fine sand and sawdust must not
be used.
1) Install floor and/or wall tile, accessories, and threshold in accordance with
2) Cut tile neatly around fixtures and drains. Form corners, intersections and
returns accurately.
3) Form tile joints uniform in width (subject to normal tolerance in tile size).
4) Ensure that joints are watertight, and without voids, cracks, or excess grout.
5) Tiling work shall be carefully set out in accordance with approved tile layout
and ensure alignment of vertical and horizontal joints. Unless otherwise shown
on the drawings, tiles at internal angles shall be coved and at external angles
shall be bull-nosed.
6) Tiles shall be dry when fixed, and where adhesive is used, fixing shall be in
strictly accordance with manufacturer's instructions and within the stated
working time of the adhesive. The manufacturer's recommendations for safe
handling and ventilation of working area shall be carefully followed.
7) The concrete base for floor tile shall be subjected to continuous air-drying after
the end of curing for at least four weeks. Screeds shall be subjected to
continuous air dry after the end of curing for at least two weeks.
8) The maximum deviation of background and floor bed shall not exceed 3mm
under a 3 meter straight edge.
9) Sound tile after setting. Remove and replace hollow sounding units.
10) Keep expansion/contraction, and control joint(s) free of mortar or grout.
11) Joints between tiles shall be as indicated on the Drawings or approved tile
layout and kept clean of this bedding mix. When the tiling has completely set
the joints shall be raked out and pointed in neat by specified grout material and
rubbed into joints using a sponge or absorbent cloth and excess grout wiped
from the tile surface.
TS 500 - 385
12) Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours before grouting.

13) Completed floors shall be protected from traffic for at least seven (7) days and
particular attention shall be given to external paving to prevent too rapid drying
when subjected to sunlight or washing out of grout by rain and water.
14) Remove and replace broken, damaged or faulty tile.
537.3.6 Spare Material

Provide spare tiles in accordance with requirements of the Contract.

The Contractor shall be responsible to provide and fix protection against weather or
damage and staining by other trades. Particular care shall be taken against staining
from timbers, oil, wet straw, washings from steel work or scaffolding, or from any
other injurious substances. Leave the work clean and perfect on completion.

Tiles (ceramic and quarry) are measured as the “Square Meter” and base board are
measured as the “Linear Meter” without wastage factor is considered and rate shall
1) Cement mortar tile bed.
2) Joint pointing for stone tail.
3) Provision of protection for fine surface until completion of all the Works.

Item Number
537(2) T=18mm, Tactile Strip Square meter
537(7) Double Charge Vitrified ceramic floor tile Square meter
537(14) W=300mm, Non-slip Precast Tile Linear Meter
537(16) H=150mm, Ceramic tiles Baseboards Linear Meter
537(17) Glazed Ceramic Tile Wall Finish Square meter
TS 500 - 386
537(28) Terrazzo Tiles Square meter

537(29) Hexagon Mosaic Tiles (Colored) Square meter

Number
D537(2) T=18mm, Tactile Strip Square meter
D537(4) Glazed Ceramic Tile Wall Finish Square meter
D537(7) Double Charge Vitrified ceramic floor tile Square meter
D537(16) H=150mm, Ceramic Tile Baseboard Linear meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 387
538 RESILIENT FLOORING
The Work
resilient flooring, in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the
538.1.2 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required resilient flooring, as

1) Preparation of Substrate
2) Resilient Tile
3) Sheet Flooring
4) Resilient Base and Trim
5) Stair Treads, Risers and Nosing
538.1.4.1 PVC Floor Tiles

ASTM D1593, 1667, E1486, F1066, 1303
538.1.4.2 PVC Floor Sheets

ASTM D1593, 1667, E1486, F1066, 1303

TS 500 - 388


1) Store flooring materials in the area of application for three (3) days to allow
material to reach the temperature of the area.
2) Maintain a minimum temperature of 21°C at flooring installation area for three
(3) days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation.
538.1.7 Submittals
1) Submit three (3) full size tile samples of each type, size, shape and thickness
of resilient tile indicated on the Drawings.
2) Submit three (3) samples (min. 30cm long) of all stair treads, base, stair nosing,
edge strips, etc. indicated in the particular Specification or Drawings.
3) Make submittals in accordance with appropriate Clause of GS100 “General
Specification”.
Products
538.2.2 Acceptable Products

1) See the Drawings and the finish for size, type, material and thickness of tile,
base and trim.
2) Color or pattern of tiles shall be selected by the Engineer.
3) Rubber Tile
Rubber tiles or sheets shall be basically composed of natural rubber of
plantation or synthetic rubber and by varying the proportions and types of
filling compounds, grades are produced to give different textures and colures.
4) Vinyl Asbestos Tile
Vinyl asbestos tile shall be a subsequent development of thermoplastic tile. The
polymeric binder consists mainly of vinyl chloride polymer, vinyl chloride
TS 500 - 389
copolymer or a mixture of those together with plasticizer and stabilizer. To this

may be added up to 40% of chrysotile asbestos fiber together with powdered
mineral fillers and pigments.
5) Flexible PVC Tile and Sheet
Flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC) tiles and sheets shall be flooring materials
comprises of a substantial proportion of plasticized PVC resin which gives
flexibility to the surface. The PVC binder content can constitute the largest
proportion of the mix and wearing properties related closely to this binder
content.
6) Adhesive
Adhesive to be used for adhesion of resilient tiles shall be in accordance with
the recommendation of manufacturer.
538.2.3 Materials
See the finish schedule and detail for size, type, color and thickness of tile, base, and
trim.
Execution
538.3.1 Inspection
1) Inspect the work in place and notify the Engineer in writing of defects in the
work of other trades that will affect the proper installation of the work of this
section. Starting the installation work shall constitute acceptance of the base or
adjoining work.
2) Ensure that floor surfaces are smooth and flat with a maximum variation of
1/1000.
3) Ensure that concrete floors are dry (maximum 7% moisture content) and
exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization or dusting. Ensure that all pipes,
conduits, drains, etc. penetrating floors are securely installed in the correct
position (and tested or inspected if required).
538.3.2 Preparation
Remove ridges, bumps, and projections from substrate. Fill in low spots, cracks,
joints, holes, etc. with water base, premixed, latex filler compatible with floor tile.
Steel trowel filler to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface. (Apply second coat if
necessary.)
1) In each room, mix tile from several cartons to ensure uniform shade variation.
2) Clean the substrate if necessary. Spread epoxy glue adhesive evenly in the
quantity recommended by the manufacturer to ensure adhesion over the entire
TS 500 - 390
area to be covered. Spread only the amount that can be covered before the
adhesive take its initial set. Set flooring in place and roll to ensure full adhesion.
3) Lay flooring with joints or seams parallel to the principal wall, and to produce
a symmetrical pattern (see the Drawings for special patterns).
4) Terminate resilient flooring at the centerline of doors where the adjoining floor
finish is different.
5) Install specified edge strips at exposed edges.
6) Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, etc. to form neat, tight
joints.
7) Install each stair tread and/or nosing in one piece for the full width of the stair
tread. Fit the material accurately, and adhere it to the entire surface.
8) Install base and trim with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, miter
internal corners or use pre-molded corners.
Use pre-molded external corners and exposed ends. Scribe to obstructions.
Install straight and level within 1/1000.
9) Protect floor from traffic for 48 hours after installation is complete.

the work.
2) The Contractor shall be responsible to provide and fix protection against
damage or staining. Protection shall be maintained until immediate before
substantial completion or as directed by the Engineer.
3) The surface of floor tile shall be thoroughly cleaned and waxing before handing
over to the Employer.
538.3.5 Spare Materials

In accordance with the requirements of the Contract Document for a list of spare
materials to be furnished.

Resilient flooring is measured as the “Square Meter” and Baseboard is measured as
the “Linear Meter” but wastage factor is not considered, and the rate shall be included
the following items:
1) Preparation of tile base surfaces.
2) Wax coating and protection of finishes.
TS 500 - 391

Item Number
538(2) Vinyl Baseboard Linear Meter

Item Number
538(2) H=150mm, Vinyl Baseboard Linear Meter

Number
D538(1) Vinyl Floor Tile Square meter
D538(2) H=150mm, Vinyl Base Board Linear Meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 392
539 CARPET TILES
The Work
carpet tiles, including all anchorage provisions, in accordance with this Specification
539.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required carpet tiles, as shown on
539.1.2 Scope
necessary to complete the installation of carpet tile as shown on the drawings and as
specified herein.
539.1.3 Submittals
539.1.3.1 Product Data

Submit manufacturer’s product literature and installation instructions for each type
of carpet tile material and installation accessory required. Include methods of
installation for each type of substrate.

Submit shop drawings showing carpet tile layout, clearly indicating carpet tile
direction, pattern direction (if applicable), placement of cut tiles, and locations and
types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing walls/partitions, built-in
cabinets, and locations where cut-outs are required in carpet tile. Show installation
details at any special conditions.
539.1.3.3 Samples for Initial Selection Purposes

Submit manufacturer’s standard size samples and color yarns showing full range of
colors, textures and patterns available for each type of carpet tile required.
539.1.3.4 Samples for Verification Purposes

Submit the following:
1) Actual samples of each type of carpet tile pattern module required.
2) 6” long samples of each type of exposed edge stripping and accessory item.
3) Prepare samples from same material to be used for the work.
TS 500 - 393
539.1.4.1 Manufacturer’s Qualifications

Firm (material producer) with not less than three (3) years of production experience,
and whose published literature clearly indicates general compliance of products with
requirements of this section.
539.1.4.2 Installer Qualifications

Firm specializing in carpet tile installation with not less than two (2) years of
experience in installation of carpet tile similar to that required for this project.
539.1.5 Single Source Responsibility

Provide material produced by a single manufacturer for each carpet tile type.

1) Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers,
clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or
grade, fire hazard classification, and lot number. Store materials in original
undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated area protected from
weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity, laid flat, blocked-
off ground to prevent sagging and warping.
2) Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special
delivery, storage, and handling requirements.
539.1.7 Sequencing & Scheduling

Sequence carpet tile with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling
during remainder of construction period.
539.1.8 Warranty
539.1.8.1 Special Project Warranty

Submit a written Warranty executed by the Contractor, Installer, and the
Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace carpet tiling which fails in materials or
workmanship within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition
to and not a limitation of other rights the Employer may have against the Contractor
under the Contract Documents.
Warranty period is two (2) years after the date of substantial completion.
539.1.9 Maintenance
539.1.9.1 Maintenance Instructions

Submit manufacturer’s printed instructions for maintenance of installed work,
including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition
TS 500 - 394
under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against materials
and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance.
539.1.9.2 Replacement Materials

After completion of work, deliver not less than 5% of each type, color, and pattern
of carpet tiling, exclusive of material required to properly complete installation.
Furnish accessory components as required. Furnish replacement materials with
protective covering, identified with appropriate labels.
Products
539.2.1 Manufacturer
539.2.2 Materials
1) General
The following carpet tile data shall be as selected by the Engineer from the
manufacturer’s standard range.
a) Pile Material: 100% nylon 6.6
b) Carpet Tile Construction File: Flocked textile floor covering
c) File Density: 80 million/ m2
d) Total Thickness: 5.3mm
e) Pile Face Weight: Approx. 4.5 kg/sq.m.
f) Tile Size: 500mm x 500mm
g) Backing material i.e. resilient waterproof backing carpet.
539.2.3 Carpet Tile Accessories

1) Installation Adhesive
Releasable type adhesive as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer and
which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile.
2) Carpet Edge Guard, Metallic
Extruded aluminum bend-down type edge guard with concealed gripper teeth
and minimum 38mm wide anchorage flange and minimum 16mm wide face
TS 500 - 395
flange. Provide with anodized aluminum finish of colors as selected by the

Engineer, from standard colors available with the manufacturer.
3) Miscellaneous Materials
As recommended by the manufacturer of carpet tile and selected by Installer to
meet project circumstances and requirements.
Execution
539.3.1 Pre-Installation Requirements

1) Installation Adhesive
Releasable type adhesive as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer and
which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile.
2) Carpet Edge Guard, Metallic
Extruded aluminum bend-down type edge guard with concealed gripper teeth
and minimum 38mm wide anchorage flange and minimum 15mm wide face
flange. Provide with anodized aluminum finish of colors as selected by the
Engineer, from standard colors available with the manufacturer.
3) Miscellaneous Materials
As recommended by the manufacturer of carpet tile and selected by Installer
to meet project circumstances and requirements.
539.3.2 Pre-Installation Requirements

1) Examine substrates for moisture content to verify a maximum allowable 65%
corrective measures as required if moisture content exceeds 65%.
2) Examine substrates for alkalinity. Corrective measures are required if pH
reading is greater than 10.
3) Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
4) Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from concrete surfaces
to receive carpet tile; apply sealer to prevent dusting.
5) Patch all holes and level to a smooth surface. If previous finish was chemically
stripped, re-seal concrete. Seal all powdery or porous surfaces with sealer
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
1) General
Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for direction
of carpet tile; maintain uniformity of carpet tile direction and lay of pile.
2) Extend carpet tile under open-bottomed obstructions and under removable
flanges and furnishings, and into alcoves of each space, or as otherwise
indicated.
TS 500 - 396
3) Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to
substrate.
4) Determine the center of the room using standard tile laying methods. The center
chalk lines, dividing the room into quadrants, should be off-center, if necessary,
to ensure that perimeter modules will be half-size or larger.
5) On both sides of chalk-line, apply a strip of adhesive at least 228mm in width,
using a twist-textured paint roller. When adhesive is ready, lay modules firmly
along these anchor lines. Fill in each quadrant section laying using the “stair
step” technique, completing the installation from center to corner of room in
each quadrant, then moving to the next quadrant.
6) In large areas, a control grid of adhesive should be laid every 3050mm as
control of the uniformity of the installation.
7) As each module is installed, ensure that the installation remains square and
conforms to chalk lines.
8) Adhere perimeter tiles and cut tiles with a full spread of adhesive. Dry fit all
cut tiles and apply adhesive to tile back after tile has been cut.
539.3.4 Cleaning
1) Remove and dispose of debris, cartons and unusable tile scraps.
2) Remove spots and smears of adhesive from carpet surface with approved
cleaning agent. Replace any tile which cannot be cleaned.
3) Vacuum carpet using commercial machine. Remove any protruding face yarns
with sharp scissors.
539.3.5 Protection
Advice the Contractor of protection methods and materials needed to ensure that
carpet tiles will be without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion.
539.3.6 Inspection
Upon completion of the installation verify that work is complete, properly installed
and acceptable. Remove and replace all work not found acceptable at the Installer’s
expense and to the satisfaction and acceptance of the Engineer.

Carpet tiles is measured as the “Square Meters”, and no wastage factor is allowed in
the quantities.

TS 500 - 397
Payment will be made under:

Number
D539(1) Carpet Tile Finish Square Meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 398
540 LIGHT GAUGE METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
The Work
installation onsite of light gauge metal framing systems, including all anchorage
The works including:
1) Dry wall Studs and Furring strips shall be included all necessary accessories.
2) Ceiling Suspension system shall be included hangers and all necessary
accessories
540.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required light gauge metal framing
systems as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.
540.1.2 Reference
JIS G3350, Light Gauge Steel for General Purpose (or equivalent).

Quantity of the Light gauge metal framing system is not measured under this Section,
but the rates shall be deemed to be included in the other pay items of the following
Section.
1) Section 541: Dray Wall Board System.
2) Section 544: Metal Ceiling
3) Section 545: Acoustic Ceiling System
TS 500 - 399

- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 400
541 DRYWALL BOARD SYSTEM
The Work
installation onsite of drywall board system, including all anchorage provisions, in
541.1.2 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required drywall board system as
Gypsum Board shall be confirmed to ASTM 36.
2) Substitution is not permitted, unless officially authorized (i.e. in writing) by
the Employer and/or Engineer.
541.1.4 Rockwool Insulation

Rockwool Insulation density shall be of 60kg/m3 approved by the Engineer.

Quantity Wall Gypsum Board ta measured as the “Square Meters” and the rate shall
1) No wastage factor is allowed in the quantity.
2) Thickness of Gypsum Board is 12mm for single layer wall and 24mm for
double layer wall.
3) The rate shall be included the following items.
a) Gypsum Board
b) Metal studs, horizontal furring strip frame System and all accessories.
c) Backing wooden boards for fixing the fittings and Signage and alike.
d) Rockwool Insulation
e) Access doors where directed by the Engineer.
TS 500 - 401

Item Number
541(6) Polyester Coated Calcium Silicate Panel Square meter

Number
D541(5) 12mm x 2 Layers, Double Wall Gypsum Board and Square meter
Rockwool Insulation on Standard Metal Framing,
D541(8) T=12mm, Single Wall Gypsum Board and Rockwool Square meter
Insulation in Standard Metal Framing,
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 402
542 GYPSUM BOARD
The Work
installation onsite of gypsum board, including all anchorage provisions, in
542.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required gypsum board as shown

1) Fire-Resistant Gypsum Board.
2) Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
3) Interior Ceiling Gypsum Board.
4) Acoustic Accessories - Acoustical Sealant: As specified in section on
"Sealants."

1) Section 506 – “Metal Fabrications”.
2) Section 508 – “Furring and Metal Lath”.
542.1.4 References
3) ASTM International (ASTM):
a) ASTM C 473 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum
Panel Products.
b) ASTM C 475 - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape
for Finishing.
c) ASTM C 514 - Standard Specifications for Nails for the Application of
Gypsum Board.
d) ASTM C 681 - Standard Test Method for Volatility of Oil- and Resin-
Based, Knife-Grade, Channel Glazing Compounds.
e) ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of
Gypsum Board.
f) ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping
Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster
Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.
TS 500 - 403
g) ASTM C 1396 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.

h) ASTM D 2202 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Sealants.
i) ASTM D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold
on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.
j) ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of
Panels for Building Construction.
k) ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics
of Building Materials.
l) ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials.
m) ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building
Construction and Materials.
n) ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a
Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 176; C.
o) ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic
Polymeric Materials to Fungi.
4) Gypsum Association (GA):
a) GA-214 - Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.
b) GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products.
c) GA-231 - Assessing Water Damage to Gypsum Board.
d) GA-238 - Guidelines for the Prevention of Mold Growth on Gypsum
Board
e) GA-801 - Handling and Storage of Gypsum Panel Products: A Guide For
Distributors, Retailers, and Contractors.
542.1.5 Submittals
1) Refer to Administrative Requirements (Submittal Procedures)
2) Product Data: Submit manufacturer current technical literature for each
component.
3) Samples:
a) Board: Submit sample of each panel product specified, 102 mm x 152 mm
b) Trim: Submit sample of each type of trim specified, 305 mm long.
c) Texture: Submit sample 12 inch square of textured coated gypsum board.
4) Quality Assurance Submittals:
a) Design Data, Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating
product compliance with indicated requirements.
TS 500 - 404
b) Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer's written installation

instructions
5) Closeout Submittals:
Refer to Execution and Closeout Requirements (Closeout Submittals).

1) Installer shall have experience with installation of gypsum board under similar
conditions.
2) Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-rated assemblies, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated
according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
3) STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM
E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
4) Mock-ups:
Install mock-up using approved gypsum products, including fasteners and
related accessories per manufacturer's current printed instructions and
recommendations.
a) Mock-up size: 10 feet by 10 feet
b) Mockup for designated level of exposed gypsum board finish and each
designated texture finish indicated.
c) Mock-up Substrate: Match wall assembly construction.
d) Mock-up may remain as part of the work.

Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage
from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic and other causes in
accordance with GA-238 and manufacturer recommendations. Stack product flat to
prevent sagging. In addition, follow guidelines found in GA-801.

1) Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 or GA-216
requirements, whichever are more stringent.
2) Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and
conditioned.
3) Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those
that are mold damaged.
a) Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
TS 500 - 405
b) Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to,
fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
542.1.9 Sequencing
Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent
Products
542.2.2 Moisture-Resistant and Fire-Resistant Gypsum Board

Panel Physical Characteristics:
1) Core: Type X Gypsum Core.
2) Surface Paper: 100 percent recycled content paper on front, back and long
edges.
3) Long Edges: Tapered.
4) Long Edges: Rounded.
5) Overall Thickness: 12.0mm, 9.0mm with chamfer for butt joint and flush finish
with patty.
6) Panel complies with Type X requirements of ASTM C 1396.
7) Painted finish
542.2.3 Interior Ceiling Gypsum Board

Panel Physical Characteristics:
1) Core: Regular Gypsum Core.
2) Foil backing
3) Long Edges: Tapered.
4) Long Edges: Rounded.
5) Overall Thickness: 12.0mm.
6) Panel complies with requirements of ASTM C 1396.
TS 500 - 406
7) Humidified Deflection: <=5/16 inch (8mm) when tested in accordance with

ASTM C 473.
8) On power-coated aluminum tee runners
Execution
542.3.1 Examination
1) Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded
hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance.
2) Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture
damaged, and mold damaged.
3) Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
542.3.2 Applying and Finishing Panels, General

1) Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216 or GA-214.
2) Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end
joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger
abutting end joints of adjacent panel not less than one framing member.
3) Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges
and ends with not more than 1.5 mm of open space between panels. Do not
force into place.
4) Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end
joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical
joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control
joints at corners of framed openings.
5) Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining
gypsum panels.
6) Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces
(above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
a) Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air,
or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less
than 0.7 sq. m in area.
b) Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
c) Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside
of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by
structural members; allow 6 to 9 mm wide joints to install sealant.
7) Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at
structural abutments, except floors. Provide 6 to 12 mm wide spaces at these
TS 500 - 407
locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed.
Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical
sealant.
8) Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each
panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
9) Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating
internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain
of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum
panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood
shrinkage.
10) STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints,
and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant.
Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through
penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written
recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths
around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical
ceilings. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels,
unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
542.3.3 Applying Interior Gypsum Board

1) Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
a) Regular Type: Vertical or horizontal surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
b) Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
c) Type C: Where required for specific fire-resistance-rated assembly
indicated.
d) Type XXX: Where required for specific fire-resistance-rated assembly
indicated on Drawings.
e) Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
f) Moisture and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
g) Sound-Damped Gypsum Board: As indicated on Drawings.
2) Single-Layer Application:
a) On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application
to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise
indicated.
b) On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing),
unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly,
and minimize end joints.
i) Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in
alternate courses of panels.
TS 500 - 408
ii) At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
c) On furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing)
or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at
least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring
members.
d) Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill
screws.
3) Multilayer Application:
a) On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying
base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply
base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints
1 framing member, 400 mm minimum, from parallel base-layer joints,
unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
b) On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and
face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers
located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least
one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on
opposite sides of partitions.
c) On furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and
face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally
(perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring
member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.
d) Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to
supports with screws.
4) Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly
adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer
of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written
recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until
fastening adhesive has set.
5) Curved Surfaces:
a) Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to
extent possible, across curved surface plus 304.8 mm long straight
sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.
b) For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws
406.4 mm o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer,
and fasten to studs with screws spaced 304.8 mm o.c.
TS 500 - 409
542.3.4 Installing Trim Accessories

1) General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing
with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
2) Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings and if
not shown, according to ASTM C 840 or GA-216 and in specific locations
approved by Engineer for visual effect.
3) Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
a) Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
b) LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
4) Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:
a) Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
b) LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
5) Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
542.3.5 Finishing Gypsum Board

1) General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to
prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint
compound from adjacent surfaces.
2) Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
3) Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having
flanges not intended for tape.
4) Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and
according to ASTM C 840, GA-216 or GA-214:
a) Locations to receive Level 0 finish (no taping, finishing, or accessories
required): Non-fire-rated, non-sound-rated, and non-smoke-rated
assemblies in ceiling plenums and concealed areas, and in temporary
construction
b) Locations to receive Level 1 finish (all joints and interior angles shall have
tape set in joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound.
Tool marks and ridges are acceptable): Fire rated, sound rated, and smoke
rated assemblies in plenum areas above ceilings, in attics, and in areas
where the assembly would generally be concealed.
c) Locations to receive Level 2 finish (all joints and interior angles shall have
tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with a joint knife leaving a
thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior angles. Fastener
heads and accessories shall be covered with a coat of joint compound):
Surfaces to receive moisture resistant gypsum board as a surfacing.
TS 500 - 410
d) Locations to receive Level 3 finish (all joints and interior angles shall have
tape embedded in joint compound and one additional coat of joint
compound applied over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and
accessories shall be covered with two separate coats of joint compound):
Areas which are to receive heavy or medium-texture (spray or hand
applied) before final painting, or where heavy-grade wall coverings are to
be applied as the final decoration. This level of finish is not recommended
where smooth painted surfaces or light to medium wall coverings are
specified.
e) Locations to receive Level 4 finish (all joints and interior angles shall have
tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint
compound applied over all flat joints): All flat and eggshell paints, light
textures, or wall coverings.
f) Locations to receive Level 5 finish (all joints and interior angles shall have
tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint
compound applied over all flat joints. A thin skim coat of joint compound
trowel applied, or a material manufactured especially for this purpose and
applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, shall be
applied to the entire surface. The surface shall be smooth and free of tool
marks and ridges): Gloss or semi-gloss paints, and areas where severe
lighting conditions occur.
542.3.6 Protection
1) Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct
sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction
period.
2) Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
a) Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
b) Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to,
fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

Gypsum board shall be measured as the “Square Meters” and the rate shall be
1) Light weight metal studs including all necessary works and accessories.
2) Fire stop where at penetration of pipes, ducts

TS 500 - 411
Item Number
542(1) T=12mm, Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board on Metal Frames, Square meter
Painted Finish

Item Number
542(1) T=12mm, Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board on Metal Frames, Square meter
Painted Finish

Number
D542(5) T=12mm, Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board on Metal Frame Square meter
Pint Finish
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 412
543 FIBER CEMENT BOARD
The Work
installation onsite of fiber cement board (FCB), in accordance with this Specification
543.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required FCB, as shown on the
543.1.2 Reference
ASTM C 1629 - Standard Classification for Abuse Resistant Non-decorated Interior
Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber reinforced Cement Panels.
543.1.3 Scope
necessary to complete the installation of FCB panels and/or ceiling as shown on the
543.1.4 Submittals
543.1.4.1 Product data

Submit manufacturer’s product data for each type of product specified.
543.1.4.2 Samples
1) Submit 300mm x 300mm for each board required, two (2) sets of required
mock up.
2) Submit miscellaneous product samples such as joint tapes and compounds.
543.1.5.1 Single Source Responsibility

Obtain each type of FCB panels and related treatment materials from a single
manufacturer.
543.1.6 Delivery, Handling and Storage
543.1.6.1 Delivery
Deliver materials in original-packages containers or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
TS 500 - 413
543.1.6.2 Handling
Handle FCBs to prevent damage to edges, ends, corners and surfaces. Do not bend
or otherwise damage metal corner boards and trim.
543.1.6.3 Storage
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage
from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic
and other causes. Neatly stack fiber cement panels flat to prevent sagging.
Product
543.2.2 Materials
Shall be fiber cement sheets, auto-cleaved, single-faced sheets containing Portland
cement, ground sand, cellulose fiber and water. Fiber cement sheets shall be
manufactured from asbestos-free materials.
1) 12-mm thick for internal wall and 9-mm thick for eaves
2) Composition: FCB shall be asbestos-free, fiber-reinforced cement sheets.
3) Density: 1380 kg/m3 minimum
543.2.3 Steel Framing

Steel Studs and Runner: Ga. 25 minimum thickness of uncoated metal galvanized C-
shaped or as otherwise indicated.
543.2.4 Fasteners
1) Provide fasteners of type, material size, corrosion resistance, holding power
and other properties required for fastening furring and framing members to
substrates indicated.
2) Trim Accessories: Provide metal trims accessories of profile and materials as
shown on the drawings, or as otherwise required by the Engineer and/or by the
manufacturer.
543.2.5 Miscellaneous Framing and Supports

1) General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated.
TS 500 - 414
2) Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive
adjacent other construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from
structural steel shapes, plates and steel bars of welded construction using
mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware,
hangers, and similar items.
a) Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or
building into masonry. Furnish insert, if units must be installed after
concrete is placed.
b) Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors at 600 mm o.c. and provides
minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 32 mm wide by 6 mm
by 200 mm long.

1) General: Provide auxiliary materials for FCB construction, which comply with
reference standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the FCB.
2) Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended by
manufacturer.
3) Screws: As per recommendation by manufacturer.
4) Bedding and Topping Cement: As per recommendation by manufacturer.
5) Perforated Paper Reinforcing Tape: As per recommendation by manufacturer.
6) Trim Accessories: Provide galvanized steel edge corner and joint trims as
shown or otherwise required by the Engineer and/or manufacturer as standard
details.
Execution
543.3.1 Examination
Examine substrates to which fiber cement panel construction attaches or abuts, preset
hollow metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, with installer present,
for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of fiber cement panel construction. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
543.3.2 Preparation
General: Follow specifications of manufacturer.
543.3.3 Installation of Steel Framing General

1) General: Follow specification by manufacturer.
2) Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the
work and for support of fixture, equipment services, heavy trim, furnishings,
and similar construction to comply with details indicated and with
recommendations of FCB manufacturer.
TS 500 - 415
3) Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading

imposed by structural movement, at locations indicated below to comply with
details shown on drawings.
4) Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or
furring members; independently frame both sides of joints with framing or
furring members or as indicated.
543.3.4 Installation of Steel Framing

1) Installation Tolerances: Install each steel furring members so that fastening
surface do not vary more than 3 mm from plane of faces of adjacent framing.
2) Extend steel furring full height to structural supports or substrates above
suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at
suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and
frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for
FCB.
3) Application and Finishing of Fiber Cement Panels (FCP). Apply and finish
FCB panels as per specifications by manufacturer for flush-jointed applications.
4) Install FCB panels in manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints
or avoids them entirely where possible.
5) Install exposed FCB panel with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damages
or damp boards. Bat boards together for slight contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1.5 mm open space between boards. Do not force into place.
6) Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications
where intermediate support is provided behind end joints. Position boards so
that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered ends. Do no place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on
opposite sides of partitions.
7) Attach FCB panel for supplementary framing and blocking provided for
additional support at openings and cutouts.
8) Space fasteners in FCBs in accordance with referenced application and
finishing standard and manufacturer specifications.
543.3.5 Methods of FCB Panel Application

1) General: Follow specifications by manufacturer.
2) Single-layer Application: Install FCB panel as follows, and as indicated on the
Drawings.
3) Single-layer fastening Methods: Apply fiber cement panels to supports as
follows:
a) Fasten to steel framing with adhesive and supplementary screws as per
recommendation by manufacturer.
TS 500 - 416
543.3.6 Installation of Trim Accessories

1) General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory
flanges as required to fasten FCB to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to
comply with specification by the manufacturer.
2) Install corner boards at external corners.
3) Install metal edge trim whenever edge of FCB would otherwise be exposed or
semi-exposed.
Install U-type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant-filled.
543.3.7 Finishing of FCBs

1) General: Apply to joint treatment at FCB panels joints (both directions);
penetrations; fasteners head, surface defects and elsewhere as required to
prepare works for decoration.
2) Finish FCB panels as per recommendation by manufacturer.
543.3.8 Protection
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to installer that
ensures, FCB panel construction being without damage or deterioration at time of
substantial completion.
543.4.1 Method of Measurement and Payment

Not applicable under this Package.
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 417
544 METAL CEILING
The Work
The works in this section includes the supply and furnishing of materials, including
equipment, and performing labor necessary to complete the installation of all metal
and aluminum ceiling, including accessories, ceiling supports such as hanger rods,
braces for ceiling supports, hangers for lighting and signages, ceiling cavity access,
and the like, as specified and as shown on the Drawings and schedules.
544.1.1 Submittals
1) Shop Drawings
Submit along with catalog cuts, templates, and erection and installation details,
indicating thickness, type, grade, class and dimensions.
2) Samples
Submit the following samples for approval:
a) Aluminum, Oven-baked/ Oven-baked Fluorourethane Resin Pre-painted
finishes
b) Supports, Panel Carriers; and
c) Fasteners, Panel Clips
3) Delivery Storage and Handling
Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Store items
in an enclosed area from contact with soil and weather. The Contractor shall
replace all damage items.
Products
544.2.2 Materials
1) 600mm x 600mm Lay-in Metal Ceiling;
2) 600mm x 600mm Cell-type Metal Ceiling;
3) Linear Plank Metal Ceiling (cut to design size/ CDS);
4) 600mm x 600mm Lightweight Perforated Aluminum Ceiling;
TS 500 - 418
5) 600mm x 600mm Lay-in Metal Ceiling with 100 mm thk. Stone Wool on
Exposed Tee Hot-dipped Galvanized Fire-rated Metal Framing;
6) Curved High Ceiling (ribbed type lightweight aluminum ceiling on metal
ceiling frames and hangers;
7) Interior Spandrel Metal Ceiling (0.50mm thk. Pre-painted G.I. sheets);
8) Linear Type Ceiling (0.50mm thk. Oven-baked Pre-painted G.I. sheets);
9) Lay-in Metal Ceiling (0.50mm thk. Oven-baked Pre-painted G.I. sheets);
10) Exposed Underside of Metal Roofing (0.60mm thk. Oven-baked
Fluorourethane Resin Pre-painted G.I. sheets);
11) Stainless Steel mesh Acoustic ceiling: AISI Type 316 SS, Rigid, Open area
35%, 1.416bs/sgft, 0.197 Thik.
12) All ceiling trim and accessories, including skirts, and the like.
Execution
1) Installation
a) Carriers
Space carriers 1500mm o.c. overhead or directly to structural supports.
Utilize expansion carriers to compensate for ceiling areas that are out of
square, out of parallel or where ceiling size doors not conform to the
standard 101mm increment. Install carrier splices at abutting ends of carrier
for rigidity and align holes of splices with carriers.
b) Filler Strips
Insert filler strip in carriers where required. Use strip in color as selected
where directional or aesthetic features are required.
c) Ceiling Panels
Snap ceiling panels over protruding ears of carrier. Stagger joints in panels
between adjoining carriers, using an interior splice of color similar to
ceiling panel to stiffen the joint. Where panel ends are visible install end
plug or panels. At angular walls and turn, trim panels to the correct angle
and join ends along top inconspicuously with a stock angle for rigidity.
2) Cleaning
Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean surfaces in accordance with
recommended procedure of manufacturer. Do not use abrasive, caustic or acid
cleaning agents.

Aluminum and stainless-steel ceiling system are measured as the “Square Meters”
and the rate shall include the following Items:
TS 500 - 419
1) Light weight metal ceiling suspension system and hangers including all
2) Hot dipped galvanized fire rated metal framing and glasswool for pay item
544(6)
3) Joint sealant where required and shown on the Drawings or directed by the
Engineer.
4) Access hatch shall be provided where directed by the Engineer.

quantity by the rate.
Item Number
544(6) Lay-in metal ceiling w/ Rockwool on exposed Tee hot dipped Square meter
galvanized fire rated metal framing.
544(7) Curve High Ceiling, Ribbed Type Aluminum Spandrel Square meter
Lightweight Metal Ceiling on Ceiling Frames & Hangers
544(8) Exposed Structure with 100mm Non-Combustible Insulation Square meter
with Studs & Catcher & Wire Mesh Netting
544(9) Stainless Steel Mesh Acoustic Ceiling System Square meter

Number
D544(6) Metal Ceiling on Metal Framing with Glasswool Insulation. Square Meter
D544(8) Stainless Steel Mesh Acoustic Ceiling System Square meter
- END OF SECTION -
.
TS 500 - 420
545 ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM
The Works
acoustical ceiling system, including all anchorage provisions, in accordance with this

Perforated Gypsum Boards for Acoustic Use ASTM C367, 553, 578, 585,
592, 612, D578
Perforated Asbestos Cement Flat Sheets for Acoustic ASTM C367, 553, 578, 585,
592, 612, D578
Rock-wool Acoustic Material ASTM C367, 553, 578, 585,
592, 612, D578
Soft Fiber-boards for Acoustic Use ASTM C367, 553, 578, 585,
592, 612, D578
Perforated Aluminum Panel for Acoustic use ASTM C367, 553, 578, 585,
592, 612, D578
Glass Wool Acoustic Materials ASTM C367, 553, 578, 585,
592, 612, D578
Dressed Rock-wool Boards for Acoustic Use ASTM C367, 553, 578, 585,
592, 612, D578
545.1.2 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required acoustical ceiling system
as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein. See the drawings for locations,
types, patterns, colures, details, etc. for suspended grid and acoustic tiles.

1) Acoustical Ceiling Boards
2) Suspended Metal Grid
3) Lay-in Acoustical Panels
4) Related Trim and Accessories.

TS 500 - 421

Do not install acoustical ceilings until the building is enclosed, sufficient heat is
provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead mechanical work
is completed, tested and approved. Permit wet work to dry prior to commencement
of installation. Maintain a uniform temperature of 15°C minimum and humidity of
20% to 40% prior to, during and after installation.
545.1.6 Submittals
1) Submit shop drawings for all ceiling grids in accordance with GS100 “General
Specification”. Clearly indicate ceiling access and all mechanical, structural
and electrical work that will affect the work of this section.
2) Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's product data and installation instructions.
3) Submit 3 samples each of the following:
a) Main tee bar (including splice)
b) Cross tee including method of attachment to main tee
c) Trim at wall
d) Hanger wire and proposed attachment to main tee bar
e) Each type of lay-in panel (min. 30cm square)
f) Ceiling trim and accessories, including skirts, and the like.
4) Submit written verification that fire rated ceiling systems are approved for use
in the area of the Project.
Products
TS 500 - 422
545.2.2 Suspension System

1) Generally indicated on the Drawings.
2) Galvanized or Prime-Painted Carrying Channels: of sizes and types to suit the
design, application, and spans.
3) Grid: A unified system, all parts die-cut and fabricated by a single manufacture,
and all interlocking.
4) Provide stabilizer bars, furring clips, splices, edge molding, hold down clips,
etc. as required to provide a complete system.
545.2.3 Lay-in Panels

See the Drawings for size, of cross section shape, thickness, material, finish, and fire
hazard classification.
Execution
545.3.1 Inspection
or adjoining work.
1) Install acoustical ceiling system(s) in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations to produce finished ceilings true to lines and levels and free
from warped, soiled or damaged grid or lay-in panels.
2) Install fire rated ceiling system(s) in accordance with local codes.
3) Install ceiling system(s) in a manner capable of supporting all superimposed
loads, with a maximum permissible deflection of 1/400 of span and maximum
surface deviation of 1/1000.
4) Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Co-ordinate the location of
hangers with other work. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular
spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying
channels as required to span the required distance.
Marking, cutting and reinforcing of the openings in the suspended ceiling for
access panels, Mechanical and Electrical fittings, etc. shall be the responsibility
of the Contractor.
TS 500 - 423
5) Supply hangers or inserts for installation to the appropriate contractor in ample

time and with clear instructions for their correct placement.
Provide additional hangers and inserts as required supervise the installation or
verify after installation.
6) Hang the ceiling independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit.
Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of the
longitudinal axis or face plane of adjacent members.
7) Center the ceiling system(s) on room axis, leaving equal width border pieces
of 1/2 tile (minimum).
8) Do not support fixtures from or on main runners or cross runners if the weight
of the fixture causes the total dead load to exceed the deflection capability. In
such cases, support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within
152mm of each corner, or support the fixtures independently.
9) Do not install fixtures so that main runners cross runners will be eccentrically
loaded. Fixture installation would produce rotation runners, provide stabilizer
bars.
10) Install edge moldings at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using
maximum lengths, straight, true to line and level. Miter corners. Provide edge
moldings at junctions with other ceiling finishes.
11) Form expansion joints as detailed on the drawings. Form to accommodate plus
or minus 25 mm movement and maintain visual closure.
12) Fit acoustic lay-in panels in placer free from damaged edges or other defects
detrimental to appearance and function. Cut border units neatly install lay-in
panels level, in a uniform planer free from twist, warp and dents.
13) Where equipment projects thru tile, trim down the raised portion of the tile
neatly and touch up the cut faces with paint to match the balance of the tile.
14) Install hold-down clips on all lay-in panels within 6m of an exterior door.
15) Suspension systems shall be designed rigid enough to support the top track or
wood stud partitions. Coordinate with installation of "System Ceiling"
mechanical and electrical contracts.
16) Provide ceiling access panels as detailed and indicated in interior finishing
schedule.
17) Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall certify in writing that the
work has been installed in compliance with all applicable legal requirements
and the manufacturer's application instructions.
545.3.3 Extra Stock

Provide extra stock of each type and size of lay-in panel as specified in the Contract
Documents.
TS 500 - 424
545.3.4 Clean Up
Clean up and dispose of all wrapping, scraps, waste materials, and other refuse which
has been brought onto the job or which has accumulated as a result of the work.
Leave the work broom clean or better.

Acoustical ceiling system is measured as the “Square Meters” and the rate shall be
1) Light weight metal ceiling suspension system including hangers.
2) Aluminum ceiling T shape bars and L shape perimeter strips
3) Provision of openings for lighting textures, Ceiling mount A/C units, diffusers,
and alike.
4) Ceiling access number and location as shown on the Drawings or directed by
the Engineer.
5) Access Hatch for future maintenance shall be provided where directed by the
Engineer.

quantity by the rate.
Item Number
545(1) Acoustic Ceiling Board with Foil Backing Square meter

Number
D545(1) Acoustic Ceiling Boards with Foil Backing Square meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 425
546 PLASTERING
The Work
installation onsite of plastering work, in accordance with this Specification and in
546.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required plastering work as shown
546.1.2 Work of This Section

Contract Documents.
2) Work of this section includes all labor materials, equipment and services
necessary to complete the plastering as shown on the Drawings and/or specified
herein, including, but is not limited to, the following:
3) Portland cement lime stucco plaster for exterior vertical applications.
4) Accessories.
546.1.3.1 Qualifications of Installers

For actual installation of plaster, use only skilled journeyman plasterers who are
completely familiar with the referenced standards and with the requirements for this
work.
Work of this section shall conform to the following standards:
1) ASTM C 929 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-
Based Plaster
2) ASTM C 206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime
3) ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement
4) ASTM C 932 - Standard Specification for Surface-Applied Bonding Agents
for Exterior Plastering
5) ASTM C 897-83 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed
Portland Cement-Based Plasters
TS 500 - 426
546.1.4 Allowable Tolerances

For flat surfaces do not exceed 3mm in 3m for bow or warp
1) Plaster ceiling and soffit, assemblies shall be fabricated and installed so that
deflection of plaster surfaces does not exceed L/360.
2) Plaster wall assemblies shall be fabricated and installed so that deflection of
plaster surfaces does not exceed L/360 when subject to a lateral load of 1436Pa
for interior and 30 psf. for exterior.
546.1.5 Submittals
546.1.5.1 Materials List

Before any plaster materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Engineer a
complete list of all materials proposed to be furnished and installed under this portion
of the Work, samples of all accessories, and copies of the manufacturer's current
recommendations as to methods and installation.

Submit shop drawings of control joints.
546.1.5.3 Samples
Submit 600mm x 600mm sample panels of plaster showing each finish described
herein.

1) Deliver all manufactured products to the site in their original unopened
containers with all labels intact and legible at the time of use.
2) Do not permit scattering of materials or equipment but use all means necessary
to ensure neatness of the site and structure at all times.
3) Perform all cleaning of tools and equipment only in the areas set aside for that
purpose.
546.1.7 Protection
Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this section before, during and
after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
546.1.8 Replacements
TS 500 - 427
546.1.9 Conditions
546.1.9.1 Environmental Conditions

Comply with referenced standards.
Protect contiguous work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration and other
harmful effects which might result from plastering.
Products
546.2.2 Metal Plastering Accessories and Reinforcement

1) General: Coordinate depth of accessory with thickness of and number of coats
of plaster to be applied. All accessories shall be of zinc alloy material.
2) Small-Nose Corner Beads: General purpose type with expanded perforated
flanges.
3) Cornerite: Manufacturer's standard preformed interior corner reinforcement
made from 1.4kg/sq.m. diamond mesh lath.
4) Square-Edged Casing Beads: Manufacturer's standard with expanded or short
flange to suit application.
5) Two-Piece Control Joints: Manufacturer's standard roll-formed pair of casing
beads with modified back flanges providing positive slip joint action and dust
barrier, adjustable for joint width variation of 3mm to 15mm.
6) Corner Reinforcement: Special stucco-type woven galvanized wire corner
reinforcing strips.
7) Line Wire: 18 Ga. soft annealed steel wire.
8) Fasteners: Galvanized steel, of type and length suitable for adequate
penetration of the substrate.
546.2.3 Portland Cement/Lime Stucco System

1) Materials
a) Portland Cement: (ASTM CI50, Types 1A and 11 A, as recommended for
weather and exposure with air entrainment.
b) Hydrated Lime (ASTM C206, Type S).
TS 500 - 428
c) Aggregate (sand): ASTM CI44 with the following gradation: Sieve Size
Percentage Passing Each Sieve
8 100%
16 60-90%
30 35-70%
50 10-30%
100 0-5%
2) Assembly: For scratch and brown coat mixes conform to ASTM C-926; or
approved equal acrylic admixture to both coats using 1:3 mix. (1 part acrylic
admixture to 3 parts water).
3) Finish Coat Mix: Factory prepared stucco finish containing all necessary
materials including integral non-fading Colorant approved by the Engineer.
Finish shall be smooth as directed by Engineer. Color shall be custom and
coordinated with Engineer thru the sample process.
4) Unacceptable Additives: Do not use magnesium oxychloride in any stucco
mixes.
Execution
546.3.1 Inspection
Examine the areas and conditions where plastering is to be installed and correct any
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not
546.3.2 Installation of Plastering Accessories

1) Anchor accessories to the plaster base or substrate 200mm center to center
along each flange.
2) Miter or cope exposed portions of accessory items at comers, and install with
tight joints. Spline splices to avoid offsets; conceal splines.
3) Set exposed accessories plumb, level and true to line, with a tolerance of 3mm
in 3m. Shim as required and align units with adjoining work in a manner which
will produce the best possible visual effect.
4) Install metal casing beads where shown and at the following locations:
a) At openings and terminations of plaster finish where otherwise edge of
plaster would be exposed.
b) Where interior plaster abuts adjacent wall. Where interior plaster abuts
other finishes, and termination is not lapped by other finish.
5) Install metal comer beads at external comers.
TS 500 - 429
6) Install control joints where indicated on drawings following manufacturer's

instructions.
546.3.3 General Plastering Requirements

1) Mechanically mix plaster materials at the site; do not hand mix except where
small amounts are needed, using less than one bag of plaster material.
2) Sequence plaster installation properly with the installation and protection of
other work, so mat neither will be damaged by the installation of other work.
3) Cut out and replace all un-bonded spots. Build in the work of others and do all
cutting and patching of plaster in this connection. Where abutting other built-
in materials, plaster shall be finished tightly against them and by neatly
trimmed.
4) Repair surface defects. Surfaces shall be within 0.8mm to 1.5mm of true plane.
5) Plaster thicknesses noted herein or on drawings shall be considered as a
minimum; plaster shall be of such thickness required to plumb and square wall
surfaces, to level ceilings so that plaster is flush with adjacent surfaces.
6) Unless otherwise shown of the Drawing or directed by the Engineer, the
thickness of plastering shall be 25mm.
546.3.4 Cement Stucco Application

1) Environmental Conditions: When there is no danger of freezing for a period of
48 hrs. after application and surface temperature can be maintained at 10 deg.
C. during the hydration period, stucco work may proceed.
2) Portland Cement Plaster
Portland cement plaster lime stucco shall be thoroughly mixed and worked in
small batches, and after mixing it shall be allowed to stand until initial set is
about to begin when it shall be reworked just prior to application.
3) Scratch coat shall be full and approx. 11mm thick, applied with sufficient force
to form good keys. Scratch coat shall be evenly cross-scratched upon attaining
its initial set and shall be kept moist with a fog spray for 48 hrs.
4) Brown coat shall be applied after the scratch coat has set, but not less than 48
hrs. after the application of the scratch coat. Thickness of brown coat shall be
approx. 11mm. Bring brown coat to true and even surface by floating or
rodding. The brown coat shall be lightly scratched and broomed, shall be kept
moist with a fog spray for 48 hrs. and then be allowed to dry out.
5) Finish coat shall not be applied until the brown coat has seasoned for 7 days.
Just before application of the finish coat, the brown coat shall again be evenly
moistened with a fog spray. Thickness of finish coat shall be sufficient to secure
texture required but in no case less than 3 mm. Keep moist with a fog spray for
48 hrs.
TS 500 - 430
a) Float finish shall be started as the glaze disappears from the surface.
Apply water to the surface and move float in circular motion as water is
applied. Float surface twice - once with a wood float, followed
immediately by a final rubber float to achieve cement-sand finish
b) Total thickness of plaster shall be no less than 25mm.
546.3.5 Cutting and Patching

1) Patch, point-up and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and
to restore work, free from cracks, dents and imperfections. Repair or replace
work to eliminate blisters, buckles, excessive crazing and check cracking, dry-
outs, florescence, sweat-outs and similar defects, including areas of the work
which shall comply with specified tolerances, and where bond to the substrate
has failed.
2) Sand plaster lightly to remove trowel marks and arises.

Promptly remove plaster from surfaces which are not to be plastered. Repair floors,
walls and other surfaces which have been stained, marred or otherwise damaged
during the plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused
materials, containers and equipment and clean floors of plaster debris.

Plastering work is measured as the “Square Meters” and the rate shall be included
metal lath at joint of different plastering beas material such as concrete and concrete
block and/or bricks.
The thickness of CHB and plastering shall be as shown on the Drawing.

Item Number
546(1) Plastering Square meter
TS 500 - 431
Sub-Station Description Unit of

Item Number
546(1) Plastering Square meter

Number
D546(1) Plastering Square meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 432
547 PROTECTIVE COATINGS
Anti-Graffiti Coating
547.1.1 The Work

installation onsite of anti-graffiti coating, in accordance with this Specification and
in conformity with the Drawings or as established by the Engineer.
547.1.2 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required anti-graffiti coating, as
547.1.3 Summary
Section Includes:
1) Surface applied anti-graffiti coatings.
2) Extended written warranty.
547.1.4 Submittals
1) Product Data: Manufacturer’s specifications and technical data including the
following:
a) Detailed specification of construction and fabrication.
b) Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
c) Certified test reports indicating compliance with performance
requirements specified herein.
2) Quality Control Submittals:
a) Statement of qualifications.
b) Statement of compliance with Regulatory Requirements.
c) Field Quality Control Submittals as specified by Engineer.
d) Manufacturer’s field reports.

1) Manufacturer’s Qualification: Not less than five (5) years of experience in the
actual production of specified products.
2) Installer’s Qualifications: Firm experienced in installation or application of
systems similar in complexity to those required for this Project, plus the
following:
TS 500 - 433
a) Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer.

b) Not less than three (3) years of experience with systems.
c) Successfully completed not less than five (5) comparable scale projects
using this system.
3) Product Qualifications: The anti-graffiti coating shall meet the following
requirements:
a) Active Content: Organofluorosilane.
b) Solvent: None, water-borne.
c) VOC Content: less than 50 grams per liter.
d) Cleaning Cycles: ASTM D 6578 “Standard Practice for Determination of
Graffiti Resistance” minimum 25 cycles without loss of repellency.
e) Breathability: ASTM D1653 greater than 95% water vapor transmission.
f) Surface Appearance: No appreciable difference compared to non-coated
surface.
g) Excellent Ultraviolet light stability.
4) Regulatory and Safety Requirements: Products must have independent
laboratory analysis that material does not contain any known carcinogens.
Materials shall comply with State and local regulations concerning AIM
(Architectural, Industrial and Maintenance) coatings regarding Volatile
Organic Content (VOC). If used indoors the material must comply with the
following safety requirements:
a) Flammability, Smoke Spread and Toxic Fume Emission During Burning
(BS 6853)
b) Toxic gases below IDLH level.
c) Flame Propagation: Does not propagate flame
d) Smoke emission: No change
547.1.6 Delivery Storage and Handling

1) Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with
legible manufacturer’s identification.
2) Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations.

1) Environmental Requirements:
a) Maintain ambient temperature above 40 degrees F during and 24 hours
after installation.
b) Do not proceed with application if ambient temperature of surface
exceeds 100 degree F.
TS 500 - 434
c) Do not proceed with the application of materials in rainy conditions or if

heavy rain is anticipated with 4 hours after application.
2) Sealer Coordination:
Verify compatibility with curing compounds, patching materials, repair mortar,
paints, sealants, to be used on masonry surfaces to ensure compatibility with
the anti-graffiti coating.
547.1.8 Special Warranties

The system manufacture shall furnish the Employer a written single source
performance warranty that the anti-graffiti coating system will be free of defects
related to workmanship or material deficiency for a five (5) year period from the
date of completion of the work provided under this section.
1) All defective areas shall be retreated by the system manufacture as determined
by the Engineer.
2) The anti-graffiti paint manufacturer shall be responsible for providing labor
and material to reseal areas where coating effectiveness does not meet the
specified limits.
Products
Execution
547.3.1 Examination
Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be
performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
547.3.2 Preparation
1) Protection: Install coverings to protect adjacent surfaces.
2) Surface Preparation:
a) Surfaces to receive sealer shall be cleaned of dirt, oil, graffiti, grease,
laitance, and other contaminants. All other surfaces shall be cleaned by
mid-pressure water (1500 psi) and commercial paint strippers. Pressure
TS 500 - 435
washing is the minimum cleaning that will be accepted, other methods,

such as blast-tracking, mobile power scrubbing and sandblasting may be
submitted.
b) Remove dirt, dust and materials that will interfere with the proper and
effective application of the anti-graffiti coating. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor to prepare the surfaces of the concrete as recommended by
the anti-graffiti paint manufacturer and acceptable to the Engineer.
c) Check the compatibility of all caulking and patching material to be used
with the anti-graffiti coating.
d) Sealants, patching materials, and expansion joints shall have been
installed and approved.

Before an anti-graffiti coating will be accepted a field test evaluation will be done.
The cost of the field testing will be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Engineer
will approve the test area prior to starting the project.
547.3.4 Application
1) Product shall be applied as per manufacturer’s application instructions and
recommendations for this specific project. Provide written copy of
2) Apply at temperature and weather conditions recommended by the
manufacturer or written in this specification.
3) Surface residue shall be brushed out thoroughly until they completely penetrate
into the surface.
4) Protect treated areas from rain and other surface water for a period of not less
than four hours after application.
5) Provide adequate ventilation and follow all safety regulations for the Site.
547.3.5 Cleaning
1) As Work Progresses: Clean spillage from adjacent surfaces using materials and
methods as recommended by anti-graffiti paint manufacturer.
2) Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces when no longer needed.
547.3.6 Completion
Work that does not conform to specified requirements shall be corrected and/or
replaced as directed by the Engineer at the Contractor’s expense without extension
of time.
TS 500 - 436
Chemical-Resistant Coating
547.4.1 The Work

installation onsite of chemical-resistant coating, including all surface preparation, in
547.4.2 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required chemical-resistant
coating, as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.
Section Protection Coating (Aliphatic Urethane)
547.5.1 The Work

installation onsite of section protection coating, including all anchorage provisions,
in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the Drawings or as
547.5.2 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required section protection coating,
547.5.3 Summary
High-performance (alipathic) urethane coatings.
2) Related Sections:
Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements.
TS 500 - 437
547.5.4 References
1) STM International:
a) D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating.
b) D4259 - Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete.
c) D4260 - Standard Practice for Liquid and Gelled Acid Etching of Concrete.
d) D4261 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete Unit Masonry for
Coating.
2) Master Painters Institute (MPI) - Approved Product List.
5) Society for Protective Coatings (SPC) - Painting Manual.
547.5.5 Submittals
1) Submittals for Review:
a) Product Data: Manufacturer's data on materials proposed for use including:
i) Product designation and grade.
ii) Product analysis and performance characteristics.
iii) Standards compliance.
iv) Material content.
v) Mixing and application procedures.
b) Samples:
i) 3” x 6” samples of each coating system on representative substrate.
ii) Step back successive coats so that all coats remain exposed.
iii) Indicate type of material used for each coat.
c) Coating Schedule: Indicate types and locations of each surface, paint
materials, and number of coats to be applied.
2) Sustainable Design Submittals:
a) Regional Materials: Indicate cost of products harvested, extracted,
recovered, or manufactured within 805 kilometer (km) radius of Site.
b) Low-Emitting Materials: Certify volatile organic compound (VOC)
content.

Applicator Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years of documented experience in
work of this section.
TS 500 - 438

1) Container Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot
number, brand code, coverage rates, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup
requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.
2) Paint Materials: Store in ventilated area at ambient temperature and humidity
as required by manufacturer's instructions.

1) Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures or relative
humidity are outside ranges required by paint manufacturer.
2) Provide lighting level of 861 lux at substrate surface.
547.5.9 Maintenance
Extra Materials: 3.875 liters of each color and sheen.
Products
547.6.2 Materials - Primers

1) Acrylic Primer:
a) Product: Acrylic Metal Primer V110.
b) Resin type: Waterborne acrylic.
c) VOC content: Maximum 200 grams per liter.
2) Polyamide Epoxy Primer:
a) Product: Polyamide Epoxy Primer V150.
b) Resin type: Polyamide Epoxy.
3) 100 Percent Solids Epoxy Pre-Primer:
a) Product: 100% Solids Epoxy Pre-Primer V155.
b) Resin type: Polyamide epoxy.
TS 500 - 439
4) Concrete Floor Primer/Sealer:

a) Product: Moisture Tolerant Quick Set Epoxy Sealer V156.
b) Resin type: Waterborne polyamide epoxy.
5) Epoxy Mastic Coating:
a) Product: Epoxy Mastic Coating V160.
b) Resin type: Polyamide epoxy.
6) Epoxy Block Filler:
a) Product: Epoxy Block Filler V163.
b) Resin type: Waterborne epoxy.
7) Waterborne Bonding Primer:
a) Product: Waterborne Bonding Primer V175.
b) Resin type: Waterborne acrylic.
547.6.3 Materials - Coatings

1) Gloss Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane Coating:
a) Product: Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane Coating - Gloss V500.
b) Resin type: Aliphatic acrylic urethane.
d) MPI rating: 78, 83, and 105.
2) Gloss Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane Coating:
a) Product: Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane Coating - Gloss V510.
b) Resin type: Aliphatic acrylic urethane.
d) MPI rating: 78, 83, and 105.
3) Polyester Urethane Coating:
a) Product: Polyester Urethane V520.
b) Resin type: Polyester urethane.
4) Waterborne Urethane Gloss Coating:
a) Product: Waterborne Urethane Gloss V540.
TS 500 - 440
b) Resin type: Acrylic polyurethane.

5) Aromatic Moisture-Cured Urethane Coating:
a) Product: Aromatic Moisture-Cured Urethane V580.
b) Resin type: Aromatic moisture-cured urethane.
d) MPI rating: 31.
6) Gloss Aliphatic Urethane Coating:
a) Product: Aliphatic Urethane Gloss Coating V515.
b) Resin type: Aliphatic acrylic urethane,
d) MPI rating: 78, 83 with anti0skid additive, and 105 for shop use.
547.6.4 Accessories
Accessory Materials: Paint thinners and other materials required to achieve specified
finishes; commercial quality.
547.6.5 Mixes
1) Deliver coatings pre-mixed and pre-tinted.
2) Uniformly mix to thoroughly disperse pigments.
3) Do not thin in excess of manufacturer's recommendations.
4) Re-mix coatings during application; ensure complete dispersion of settled
pigment and uniformity of color and gloss.
Execution
547.7.1 Application
1) Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2) Apply primer immediately after surface preparation to prevent contamination
of surface.
3) Apply coatings uniformly without visible laps, sags, curtains, holidays, and
objectionable brush marks.
4) Allow each coat to cure completely before applying additional coats.
5) Ensure that each coat is undamaged prior to applying succeeding coat.
547.7.2 Adjusting
Touch up minor damage or refinish as required.
TS 500 - 441
547.7.3 Cleaning
Remove coatings from adjacent surfaces.
547.7.4 Schedule
SURFACE PRIMER TOP COAT

Interior Wood None Two (2) coats Aromatic
Moisture-Cured Urethane
Coating
Interior Ferrous Metals One coat Epoxy Mastic Two (2) coats Gloss
Coating Aliphatic Urethane Coating
Interior Masonry One coat 100 Percent Solids One (1) Coat Polyamide
Epoxy Pre-Prime Epoxy followed by One Coat
Semi-Gloss Aliphatic
Urethane Coating

Protective coatings are measured as the “Square Meters” and the rate shall be
included the following Items:
1) Paint base preparation.
2) Proved the protective measures, such tape, on the surfaces adjacent to the
Protective coating area.

Item Number
547(3) Acid-Resistant Paint Finish Square meter
547(4)a High-performance Urethane Coatings (Metal/Steel Painting) Square meter
547(4)b High-performance Flurourethane Coatings (Masonry Painting) Square meter
TS 500 - 442

Item Number
547(8) High-Performance Urethane Coatings (Masonry Painting) Square meter
Depot Description Unit of

Item Number
D547(7) High-Performance Urethane Coatings (Metal/Steel Painting) Square meter
D547(8) High-Performance Urethane Coatings (Masonry Painting) Square meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 443
548 PAINTING
The Work
installation onsite painting, in accordance with this Specification and in conformity
with the Drawings or as established by the Engineer.
548.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required painting as shown on the
548.1.2 Works of this Section

requirements of the Contract Documents.
2) Work of this section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services
necessary to complete the painting and finishing as shown on the Drawings
and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the following:
a) Prime painting unprimed surfaces to be painted under this section.
b) Painting all items furnished with a prime coat of paint, including touching
up of or repairing of abraded, damaged or rusted prime coats applied by
others.
c) Painting all ferrous metal (except stainless steel) exposed to view.
d) Painting all galvanized ferrous metals exposed to view.
e) Painting interior concrete block exposed to view.
f) Painting gypsum dry wall exposed to view.
g) Painting plaster surfaces.
h) Painting of wood exposed to view, except items which are specified to be
painted or finished under other sections of these Specifications. Back
painting of all wood in contact with concrete, masonry or other moisture
areas.
i) Painting pipes, pipe coverings, conduit, ducts, insulation, hangers,
supports and other mechanical and electrical items and equipment
exposed to view.
j) Painting surfaces above, behind or below grilles, gratings, diffusers,
louvers, lighting fixtures, and the like, which are exposed to view through
these items.
k) Incidental painting and touching up as required to produce proper finish
for painted surfaces, including touching up of factory finished items.
TS 500 - 444
l) Painting of any surface not specifically mentioned to be painted herein or

on Drawings, but for which painting is obviously necessary to complete
the job, or work which comes within the intent of these specifications,
shall be included as though specified.
m) Painting of designated steel members such as columns, beams, girders,
and the like, forming part of the secondary and intermediate steel
structures at all station and depot buildings.
548.1.3 Materials and Equipment Not to Painted

1) Items of equipment furnished with complete factory finish, except for items
specified to be given a finish coat under this section.
2) Factory finished acoustical tile.
3) Non-ferrous metals, except for items specified and/or indicated to be painted.
4) Finished hardware, excepting hardware that is factory-primed.
5) Surfaces not to be painted shall be left completely free of droppings and
accidentally-applied materials resulting from the work of this section.
548.1.4.1 Job Mock-Up

1) In addition to the samples, specified herein to be submitted for approval, apply
in the field at their final location, each type and color of approved paint
materials applied 3m wide, floor to ceiling of wall surfaces, and other
representative conditions, before proceeding with the remainder of the work,
for approval by the Engineer. Paint mock-ups to include door and frame
assembly.
2) These applications when approved will establish the quality and workmanship
for the work of this section.
3) Repaint individual areas which are not approved, as determined by the
Engineer, until approval is received.
4) Assume at least two (2) paint mock-ups of each color and gloss for each
representative condition for approval.
548.1.4.2 Qualification of Painters

Use only qualified journeyman painters for the mixing and application of paint on
exposed surfaces.
548.1.4.3 Paint Coordination

Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime paints used. Review other
sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure
compatibility of the total coatings system for the various substrates. Upon request
from other subcontractors, furnish information on the characteristics of the finish
TS 500 - 445
materials proposed to be used, to ensure that compatible prime coats are used.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime as required.
Notify the Engineer in writing of any anticipated problems using the coating systems
as specified with substrates primed by others.
All paints must conform to the Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) standards of
prevailing codes and ordinances.
548.1.5 Submittals
548.1.5.1 Materials List

1) Before any paint materials are delivered to the job site, submit to the Engineer
a complete list of all materials proposed to be furnished and installed under this
portion of the work.
2) This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution of materials for
those specified or accepted for this work by the Engineer.
548.1.5.2 Samples
1) Accompanying the materials list, submit to the Engineer copies of the full range
of colors available in each of the proposed products.
2) Upon direction of the Engineer, prepare and deliver to the Engineer two (2)
identical sets of Samples of each of the selected colors and glosses painted onto
212mm x 275mm x 6mm thick material; whenever possible, the material for
Samples shall be the materials as that on which the coating will be applied in
the work.
548.1.5.3 Manufacturer's Recommendations

In each case where material proposed is not the material specified or specifically
described as an acceptable alternate in this section of these specifications, submit for
the Engineer's review the current recommended method of application published by
the manufacturer of the proposed material.
Submit data indicating that paint meets Performance Standards specified herein.

Deliver all paint materials to the job site in their original unopened containers with
all labels intact and legible at time of use.
548.1.7 Protection
1) Store only the approved materials at the job site, and store only in a suitable
and designated area restricted to the storage of paint materials and related
equipment.
2) Use all means necessary to ensure the safe storage and use of paint materials
and the prompt and safe disposal of waste.
TS 500 - 446
3) Use all means necessary to protect paint materials before, during and after
application and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
548.1.8 Replacements
548.1.9 Extra Stock

Upon completion of this portion of the Work, deliver to the Employer an extra stock
of paint equaling approximately ten (10) percent of each color and gloss used in each
coating material used, with all such extra stock tightly sealed in clearly labeled
containers.
548.1.10 Conditions
1) Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted
and the surrounding air temperatures are between 10 degrees C and 32 degrees
C, unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
2) Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be
painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 10 degrees C and 35
degrees C. unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed
instructions.
3) Do not apply paint in sandstorm, rain, fog or mist; or when the relative humidity
exceeds eighty-five (85) percent; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise
permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
4) Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if the areas and
surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within the temperature limits
specified by the paint manufacturer during application and drying periods.
548.1.11 References
1) Resistance to neutral spray: JIS K 5600-7-1 or equivalent ASTM.
2) Adhesion test (pull-off method): JIS K 5600-5-7 or equivalent ASTM.
3) Accelerated weathering and exposure to artificial radiation (exposure to filtered
xenon-arc radiation): JIS K 5600-7-7 or equivalent ASTM.
Products
TS 500 - 447

3) Manufacturers shall provide best quality "Architectural" grade painting
products for all required painting, duly approved by the Engineer.
548.2.2 Materials
1) Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
2) Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and use only to
recommended limits.
3) Colors and Gloss: All colors and gloss shall be as selected by the Engineer.
4) Certain colors will require paint manufacturer to prepare special factory mixes
to match colors selected by the Engineer. Color schedule (with gloss) shall be
furnished by the Engineer.
5) Coloring Pigment: Products of or furnished by the manufacturer of the paint or
enamel approved for the work.
6) Linseed Oil: Raw or boiled, as required, of approved manufacture, per ASTM
D234 and D260, respectively.
7) Turpentine: Pure distilled gum spirits of turpentine, per ASTM D13.
8) Driers, Putty, Spackling Compound, Patching Plaster, etc.: Best quality, of
approved manufacture.
9) Heat Resistant Paint: Where required, use heat resistant paint when applying
paint to heating lines and equipment.
10) Paint for Designated Steel Members: high-build, organic, zinc-rich paint/
epoxy resin paint with long coating interval/ high-build, inorganic polysiloxane
paint (3-coat system):
a) Primer
i) High-build organic zinc-rich paint;
ii) Zinc content in dry film: at least 84% by weight;
iii) Packaging: three (3) components i.e. Part A (base); Part B (hardener);
and Zinc dust;
iv) Solids content (typical value): 86%;
v) VOC content: 375 g/ L;
vi) Performance criteria: neither of the two (2) test panels shall show red
dust or blisters in the coating after 2,160 hours of testing in
accordance with JIS K 5600-7-1. Three (3) mm of both sides of the
cuts are exempt from evaluation; and
vii) Recommended dry film thickness: 75 microns/ coat.
b) Intermediate
i) Epoxy resin paint with long coating interval;
TS 500 - 448
ii) Coating material shall be able to ensure at least six (6) months of
coating interval before application of subsequent coat;
iii) Solids content (typical value): 70%;
iv) VOC content: 417 g/ L;
v) Performance criteria: At least 6.0 MPa of pull-off values shall be
obtained when tested six (6) months after the application of topcoat
in accordance with JIS K 5600-5-7 or equal standard approved by the
Engineer; and
vi) Recommended dry film thickness: 100 microns/ coat.
c) Topcoat
i) High-build inorganic polysiloxane paint;
ii) Coating material shall be organic/ inorganic hybrid paint;
iii) Solids content (typical value): 75%;
iv) VOC content: 321 g/ L;
v) Performance criteria: At least 80% of gloss retention shall be
maintained after 6,000 hours of testing in accordance with JIS K
5600-7-7 or equal standard approved by the Engineer;
vi) Recommended dry film thickness: 50 microns/ coat; and
vii) Coating material shall be color-matched in accordance with the
appropriate color schedule.
548.2.3 General Standards

1) The various surfaces shall be painted or finished as specified below in Article
2.4. However, the Engineer reserves the right to change the finishes within the
range of flat, semi-gloss or gloss, without additional cost to the Employer.
2) All paints, varnishes, enamels, lacquers, stains and similar materials must be
delivered in the original containers with the seals unbroken and label intact and
with the manufacturer's instructions printed thereon.
3) All painting materials shall bear identifying labels on the containers with the
manufacturer's instructions printed thereon.
4) Paint shall not be badly settled, caked or thickened in the container, shall be
readily dispersed with a paddle to a smooth consistency and shall have
excellent application properties.
5) Paint shall arrive on the job color-mixed except for tinting of under-coats and
possible thinning.
6) All thinning and tinting materials shall be as recommended by the manufacturer
for the particular material thinned or tinted.
7) It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to see that all mixed colors match
the color selection made by the Engineer prior to application of the coating.
TS 500 - 449
548.2.4 Schedule of Finishes

Paint finishes shall be as specified on the Drawings.
548.2.5 Piping and Mechanical Equipment Exposed to View

1) Paint all exposed piping, conduits, ductwork and mechanical and electrical
equipment. Use heat-resisting paint when applied to heating lines and
equipment.
The Contractor is cautioned not to paint or otherwise disturb moving parts in
the mechanical systems. Mask or otherwise protect all parts as required to
prevent damage.
2) Exposed Uncovered Ductwork, Piping, Hangers and Equipment: Latex Enamel
Undercoater and one (1) coat Acrylic Latex Flat.
3) Exposed Covered Piping, Duct Work and Equipment: Primer/Sealer and one
(1) coat Acrylic Latex Flat.
4) Panel Boards, Grilles and Exposed Surfaces of Electrical Equipment: Alkyd
Enamel Under-coater and two (2) coats Alkyd Semi-Gloss.
5) Equipment or Apparatus with Factory-Applied Paint: Refinish any damaged
surfaces to match original finish. Do not paint over name plates and labels.
6) All surfaces of insulation and all other work to be painted shall be wiped or
washed clean before any painting is started.
7) All conduit, boxes, distribution boxes, light and power panels, hangers, clamps,
etc., are included where painting is required.
8) All items of Mechanical and Electrical trades which are furnished painted
under their respective Contracts shall be carefully coordinated with the work
of this section so as to leave no doubt as to what items are scheduled to be
painted under this section.
Execution
548.3.1 Inspection
Examine the areas and conditions where painting and finishing are to be applied and
correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit
proper installation of the work.
548.3.2 Workmanship
1) Only skilled mechanics shall be employed. Application may be by brush or
roller.
Spray application only upon acceptance from the Engineer in writing.
TS 500 - 450
2) The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a schedule showing when he expects
to have completed the respective coats of paint for the various areas and
surfaces.
This schedule shall be kept current as the job progresses.
3) The Contractor shall protect his work at all times, and shall protect all adjacent
work and materials by suitable covering or other method during progress of his
work. Upon completion of the work, he shall remove all paint and varnish spots
from floors, glass and other surfaces. He shall remove from the premises all
rubbish and accumulated materials of whatever nature not caused by others and
shall leave his part of the work in clean, orderly and acceptable condition.
4) Remove and protect hardware, accessories, device plates, lighting fixtures, and
factory finished work, and similar items, or provide ample in place protection.
Upon completion of each space, carefully replace all removed items by
workmen skilled in the trades involved.
5) Remove electrical panel box covers and doors before painting walls. Paint
separately and re-install after all paint is dry.
6) All materials shall be applied under adequate illumination, evenly spread and
flowed on smoothly to avoid runs, sags, holidays, brush marks, air bubbles and
excessive roller stipple.
7) Coverage and hide shall be complete. When color, stain, dirt or undercoats
show through final coat of paint, the surface shall be covered by additional
coats until the paint film is of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage,
8) All coats shall be dry to manufacturer's recommendations before applying
succeeding coats.
9) All suction spots or "hot spots" in plaster after the application of the first coat
shall be touched up before applying the second coat.
10) Do not apply paint behind frameless mirrors that use mastic for adhering to
wall surface.
548.3.3 Surface Preparation

1) Clean surfaces requiring paint or finishing, remove all loose and flaking paint
or finish and sand surface smooth as required to receive new paint or finish. No
"telegraphing" of lines, ridges, flakes, etc., through new surfacing is permitted.
Where this occurs, the Contractor shall be required to sand smooth and re-finish
until surface meets with Engineer's approval.
2) General
a) The Contractor shall be held wholly responsible for the finished appearance
and satisfactory completion of painting work. Properly prepare all surfaces
to receive paint, which includes cleaning, sanding, and touching-up of all
prime coats applied under other sections of the work. Broom clean all
TS 500 - 451
spaces before painting is started. All surfaces to be painted or finished shall

be perfectly dry, clean and smooth.
b) Perform all preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with
the paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each
particular substrate condition.
c) Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments.
Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvents prior to
mechanical cleaning. Program the cleaning and painting so that dust and
other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall in wet, newly
painted surfaces.
548.3.4 Metal Surfaces

1) Weld Fluxes: Remove weld fluxes, splatters, and alkali contaminants from
metal surfaces in an approved manner and leave surface ready to receive
painting.
2) Bare Metal: Thoroughly clean off all foreign matter such as grease, rust, scale
and dirt before priming coat is applied.
3) Clean surfaces, where solder flux has been used, with benzene. Clean surfaces
by flushing with mineral spirits. For aluminum surfaces, wipe down with an oil
free solvent prior to application of any pre-treatment.
4) Shop-primed Metal: Clean off foreign matter as specified for "Bare Metal".
Prime bare, rusted, abraded and marred surfaces with approved primer after
proper cleaning of surfaces. Sandpaper all rough surfaces smooth.
5) Galvanized Metal: Prepare surface as per the requirements of ASTM D-6386.
6) Metal Filler: Fill dents, cracks, hollow places, open joints and other
irregularities in metal work to be painted with an approved metal filler suitable
for the purpose and meeting the requirements of the related section of work;
after setting, sand to a smooth, hard finish, flush with adjoining surface.
548.3.5 Plaster Surfaces

Scrape off all plaster nibs or other projections and sand smooth or finish to match
adjoining surface texture. Cut out all scratches, cracks, holes, depressions and similar
voids and fill with non-shrinking grout, spackles, patching plaster or other approved
patching material; allow to dry, refill if necessary, then sand smooth (or refinish) to
provide a flush, smooth surface of the same texture as the adjacent plaster surface.
1) Allow at least 28 days, from installation of final plaster coat, before starting
work.
548.3.6 Gypsum Drywall Surfaces

Scrape off all projections and splatters, spackles all holes or depressions, including
taped and spackled joints, sand smooth. Conform to standards established in Section
541- “Drywall Board System”.
TS 500 - 452
548.3.7 Wood Surfaces

Sand to remove all roughness, loose edges, slivers, or splinters and then brush to
remove dust. Wash off grease or dirt with an approved cleaner. Fill all cracks, splits,
nail holes, screw holes, and surface defects with putty after the priming coat has been
applied. Putty shall be brought up flush with the surface and sanded smooth and
touched-up with primer when dry.
548.3.8 Block Masonry Surfaces:

Thoroughly clean off all grit, grease, dirt mortar drippings or splatters, and other
foreign matter. Remove nibs or projections from masonry surfaces. Fill cracks, holes
or voids, not filled under the "Masonry" section, with Portland cement grout, and bag
surface so that it has approximately the same texture as the adjacent masonry surface.
548.3.9 Testing for Moisture Content

The Contractor shall test all plaster, masonry, and drywall surfaces for moisture
content using a reliable electronic moisture meter. The Contractor shall also test latex
type fillers for moisture content before application of top coats of paint. Do not apply
any paint or sealer to any surface or to latex type filler where the moisture content
exceeds seven (7) percent as measured by the electronic moisture meter.
548.3.10 Touch-Up
Prime paint all patched portions in addition to all other specified coats.
548.3.11 Materials Preparation

1) Mix and prepare painting materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
directions.
2) Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain
containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
3) Stir all materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density,
and as required during the application of the materials. Do not stir any film
which may form on the surface into the material. Remove the film and, if
necessary, strain the material before using.
4) Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat
where multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to
match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of
undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
548.3.12 Application
1) General
a) Apply paint by brush or roller in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions. Use brushes best suited for the type of material being applied.
TS 500 - 453
Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high pile sheep's wool as

recommended by the paint manufacturer for material and texture required.
b) The number of coats and paint film thickness required is the same
regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until
the previous coat has completely dried. Sand between each enamel or
varnish coat application with fine sandpaper, or rub surfaces with pumice
stone where required to produce an even, smooth surface in accordance
with the coating manufacturer's directions.
c) Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show
through the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish,
color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that all surfaces,
including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a
film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
d) Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as
similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
e) "Exposed surfaces" is defined as those areas visible when permanent or
built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles,
etc., are in place in areas scheduled to be painted.
f) Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles,
with a flat, non-specular black paint, before final installation of equipment.
g) Paint the back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers to match
the exposed surfaces.
h) Finish doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as the faces, unless
i) Enamel finish applied to wood or metal shall be sanded with fine
sandpaper and then cleaned between coats to produce an even surface.
j) Paste wood filler applied on open grained wood after beginning to flatten,
shall be wiped across the grain of the wood, then with a circular motion,
to secure a smooth, filled, clean surface with filler remaining in open grain
only. After overnight dry, sand surface with the grain until smooth before
applying specified coat.
k) For designated steel members, coating application work shall be
conducted in accordance with the coating specification (a separate sheet),
product data sheets, application instructions, and the like, as furnished by
the paint manufacturer. The coating specification must be based on the
understanding that the application of primer and intermediate coats (1st
and 2nd coats) are to be done at fabrication shops, followed by the
application of the topcoat (3rd coat) at construction sites, and this is made
possible by the epoxy intermediate coat with long coating interval.
l) Coating application work for designated steel members shall NOT be
conducted under any of the following conditions:
TS 500 - 454
i) Rain and other bad weather conditions for outdoor work;

ii) When condensation forms on the surface to be coated; and
iii) Relative humidity of 85% or higher, or ambient temperature of 5˚C
or lower.
m) When there is a need for change/s on or questions regarding the provisions
of this Section relating to painting work for designated steel members,
and/or should key items or provisions not be stated in this Section, the
Contractor shall discuss the same at length with the Engineer and/or the
Employer, and the Contractor shall only deal with such issues with prior
official approval from the Engineer and/or the Employer.
2) Scheduling Painting
a) Apply the first coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-
treated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after
preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
b) Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper
drying. Do not re-coat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not
deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and the application
of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the
undercoat.
3) Prime Coats: Re-coat primed and sealed walls and ceilings where there is
evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat
with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
4) Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth
5) Surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage.
6) "Touching-Up" of Factory Finishes: Unless otherwise specified or shown,
materials with a factory finish shall not be painted at the site. To "touch-up",
the Contractor shall use the factory finished material manufacturer's
recommended paint materials to repair abraded, chipped, or otherwise
defective surfaces.
548.3.13 Post-Application Inspection (for Painting of Designated Steel Members)

1) Measurement of Wet Film Thickness
During coating application, Contractor must frequently check the wet film
thickness with wet gauge in order to obtain the required dry film thickness.
Immediately after measurement, repair the points of measurement with brush
to obtain a smooth surface.
2) Inspection of Appearance of Cured Film
After the coating is cured, the appearance of the film shall be visually checked
by the Contractor. The surface must be free of sagging, unevenness or other
abnormalities.
3) Measurement and Control Methods of Dry Film Thickness
TS 500 - 455
a) Measurement
After the coating is cured, the dry film thickness shall be measured with an
electromagnetic thickness gauge.
b) Control Criteria
The surface area of steel members shall be divided into approx. 200.0 –
500.0 square meters (sqm), each of which is called a “lot”. The
measurement of dry film thickness shall be performed at least twenty-five
(25) points per “lot”. If the surface area of one lot is less the 200.0 sqm, one
(1) measurement per 10.0 sqm shall be done. At any given measurement,
five (5) readings shall be obtained to calculate the average, which then
becomes the “measured value” of each measurement point. The control
criteria of measurement outcomes need to fulfill the following
requirements:
i) The average of “measured values” per lot shall be at least 90% of the
total of specified dry film thickness;
ii) The minimum of the measured values shall be at least 70% of the total
specified dry film thickness.
iii) The standard deviation of the distribution of measured values shall
not exceed 20% of the total of specified dry film thickness. However,
even if the standard deviation exceeds 20%, the thickness shall be
regarded as “acceptable” as long as the average of measured values
per lot is greater than the total of specified dry film thickness.
c) Disposition of Insufficient Dry Film Thickness.
If the dry film thickness is less than the specified thickness, Contractor shall
re-apply the specified coating material until the specified dry film thickness
is ensured. The same shall be true in the case of onsite touch-up.
548.3.14 Protection
1) Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by
the painting and finishing work. Leave all such work undamaged. Correct any
damages by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to
the Engineer.
2) Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes.
Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of
their work after completion of painting operations.
548.3.15 Clean up
1) During the progress of the work, remove from the site all discarded paint
materials, rubbish, cans and rags at the end of each work day.
2) Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint
spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and
scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.
TS 500 - 456
3) At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.

Painting of concrete, wood and metal surfaces are measured as the “Square Meters”
and the rate shall be included the following Items:
1) Paint base preparation.
2) Provision of protective measure, such as tape, on adjacent to the painting area.

Item Number
548(1) Acrylic Water-Based Paint (For Interior Ceiling on Gypsum Square meter
Board, Interior Wall and Underside of Viaduct & Box
Girders)
548(2) Acrylic Latex Paint (Semi-Gloss; Painting Soffit of Square Meter
Slab/Beam, etc.)
548(10) Elastomeric Water Paint (Coating for Exterior Wall / Cement Square Meter
Plaster)
548(14) H=150mm, Paint Baseboards, Linear Meter
548(25) Fireproofing (Intumescent Paint for Metal/Steel) Square meter

Item Number
548(1) Acrylic Water-Based Paint (For Interior Ceiling on Gypsum Square meter
Board, Interior Wall and Underside of Viaduct & Box
Girders)
TS 500 - 457

Number
D548(2) Semi-Gloss Latex Painted Finish Square Meter
D548(13) H=150mm, Paint Baseboards, Linear Meter
D548(25) Fireproofing (Intumescent Paint for Metal / Steel) Square meter
D548(26) Acrylic Water-Based Paint (For Interior Ceiling on Gypsum Square meter
Board, Interior Walls and Underside of Slab)
D548(27) Elastomeric Water Paint (Coating for Exterior Wall / Cement Square meter
Plaster)
D548(28) Heat Resistant Paint (for Metal Roof) Square meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 458
549 ACCESS FLOORING
The Work
installation onsite of access flooring, including all anchorage provisions, in
549.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required access flooring, as shown

1) Floor Support System
2) Removable Floor Panels
3) Accessories
4) Earthing of the Floor
See the Drawings for floor materials, height, accessories, etc.

who are completely familiar with the specified requirements.
3) Provide the services of a competent foreman or supervisor who shall be
available at all times during the progress of the work of this section and who
shall be designated as the single point of contact within the subcontractor's
organization for matters in connection with the work of this section.

1) Do not start the installation work until wall and ceiling finishing work is
complete.
TS 500 - 459
2) Provide a minimum of 700 lux of lighting in the area during installation.
549.1.5 Submittals
1) Submit complete shop drawings in accordance with GS100 “General
2) Submit 3 copies of manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for
the Engineer’s review and approval.
3) Submit a sample of each floor panel type specified.
4) The approved panel may be used in the work.
5) Submit the manufacturer's certificate, in accordance with Section 001 “General
Requirements” of these Specifications that the system meets specified design
strength and electrical resistance requirements.
6) Provide the Employer with a warranty, in accordance with requirements of the
Contract Documents, stating that the work will remain free from defects in
material and workmanship for a period of 10 years from the date of substantial
completion, and that upon failure of the installation to perform as warranted,
the Contractor will repair or replace the defective work at no cost to the
Employer.
Products

549.2.2 Design Criteria

1) An elevated pedestal and frame grid with rigid floor panels, complete with
accessories.
2) Pedestals: Allowable axial load for Office Area shall be 500kg and Equipment
Room shall be 800kg without permanent deformation.
3) Floor Panels: Capable of supporting a live load of 11.7 kPa with a maximum
deflection of 1.0mm or a concentrated load of 500kg for Office Area and
800kg for Equipment Room on 710 mm2 at any location with a maximum
deflection of 2mm.
Permanent deformation: Maximum of 0.5 mm at design load.
Ultimate strength: Not less than twice design load.
TS 500 - 460
4) The system shall be laterally stable in all directions with or without panels in
place.
5) Maximum surface electrical resistance: One ohm per panel.
549.2.3 Materials
1) Pedestals: Steel or aluminum as specified with flat bottom base plate, threaded
supporting rod, vibration-proof lock nut to permit minimum 40mm vertical
adjustment, galvanized or manufacturer's standard finish approved by the
Engineer.
2) Frame Grid Stringers: Continuous or removable type, consisting of steel or
aluminum channels, square tubing, or T sections.
3) Floor Panels: Die formed galvanized sheet metal top and bottom plates and
reinforcing stiffeners; cast aluminum; plywood, asbestos board, or
particleboard core laminated to galvanized sheet steel on both faces as specified.
Edge panels with metal or vinyl trim.
4) Floor Finish: Vinyl-asbestos tile, 3 mm thick, vinyl tile 3 mm thick, melamine
phenolic laminate, 3 mm thick, rubber sheet, 3mm thick or carpet as specified.
5) Floor Finish Adhesive: Moisture resistant type recommended by floor finish
manufacturer; electrically conductive type.
6) Finish of Exposed Metal Surfaces: Baked enamel from selected from
manufacturer's standard colors or as specified or selected by the Engineer.
7) Ramps and Stairs: Same materials, structural strength, and construction as floor
panels.
8) Fascia Panels: As specified. Include corner pieces, trim, reinforcing, and clip
angles.
9) Railings: Posts and rails of tubular or bar stock, extruded aluminum or primed
steel, assembled with welded or sleeved connections as specified.
10) Include cast metal caps, floor sockets and collars, brackets, and fittings.
11) Panel Lifting Devices: Recessed metal handling built into panels or
manufacturer’s standard lifting device, one in each room for each type of floor
finish.
12) Perforated Floor Panels: Same material, size, and construction as floor panels.
13) Earthing Conductors: Solid copper.
14) Cable Cutout Protection: Extruded polyvinyl chloride, neoprene edging or
closed cell neoprene sheet 9mm thick, self-extinguishing.
549.2.4 Fabrication
1) Factory fabricate all components.
TS 500 - 461
2) Allowable Tolerances: Floor panel flatness plus or minus 0.5 mm in any

direction; floor panel length plus or minus 0.5mm; floor panel squareness plus
or minus 1mm in diagonal dimension.

Generally, in accordance with GS 100 “General Specification” or manufacturer's
recommendation.
Execution
549.3.1 Inspection
or adjoining work.
549.3.2 Preparation
Remove projections from the sub floor, and sweep the floor thoroughly clean.
1) Install components in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the
approved shop drawings.
2) Secure pedestal base plates to sub-floor with adhesive or galvanized metal
fasteners as specified.
3) Install additional pedestals where the grill pattern is interrupted by room
appurtenance and at cutouts.
4) Install stringers and floor panels solidly on the pedestals. Maximum out-of-
level tolerance: 1/1000.
5) Install grilles and perforated panels as indicated.
6) Seal field cuts of floor panels with plastic angles or channels.
7) Allow for cutting holes in floor panels as specified for installation of
Employer's equipment. Include cable cutout protection.
8) Install floor, ramp and stairs complete with edge trim and end closures.
Provide lateral braces at stair edges and other locations where a pedestal is not
braced.
9) Provide positive electrical earthing of the entire access floor assembly.
10) Install plenum dividers to provide a positive air seal between the subfloor and
elevated floor where shown. Include sponge rubber plugs to insure an airtight
seal where holes are cut in the elevated floor for passing of cable.
TS 500 - 462

Access flooring is measured as the “Square Meters” and the rate shall be included all
required accessories and Dust-Proof Epoxy Paint as shown on the Drawing.

Item Number
549(1)a High density calcium sulphate core raised flooring Square meter
system with 600 x 600 x 38mm anti-static vinyl as
top layer 500kg/m2
549(1)b High density calcium sulphate core cooled air Square meter
circulation type raised flooring system with 600 x
600 x 38mm anti-static vinyl as top layer 800kg/m2

Number
D549(2)a High density calcium sulphate core raised flooring Square meter
system with 600 x 600 x 38mm anti-static vinyl as
top layer 500kg/m2
D549(2)b High density calcium sulphate core cooled air Square meter
circulation type raised flooring system with 600 x
600 x 38mm anti-static vinyl as top layer
1000kg/m2
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 463
550 FOLDING PARTITIONS
The Work
folding partitions, including all anchorage provisions, in accordance with this
550.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required folding partitions, as

1) Folding Partitions
2) Ceiling Track
550.1.3 General
See the Drawings and the door & window schedules for partition locations, finishes,
etc.

designated as the single point of contact within the subcontractor’s
organization for matters in connection with the work this section.

1) Do not start installation of partition panels until all finishing work has been
completed.
2) Provide a minimum of 700 lux of light in the area of installation.
550.1.6 Submittals
1) Submit complete shop drawings, in accordance with appropriate Clause of
GS100 “General Specification” of these Specifications, including, but not
limited to, plan, elevation, loads, stacking size, details of track, and adjacent
construction.
TS 500 - 464
2) Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions in accordance

with appropriate Clause of GS100 “General Specification” of these
Specifications.
3) Submit 3 samples of the surface finish (minimum 200 sq.cm.) in accordance
with appropriate Clause of GS100 “General Specification” of these
Specifications.
4) Provide the Employer with a warranty, stating that the work will remain free
from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from
the date of substantial completion, and that upon failure of the installation to
perform as warranted, the contractor will repair or replace the defective work
at no cost to the Employer.
5) Submit maintenance data in accordance with appropriate Clause of GS100
“General Specification” of these Specifications. Describe recommended
cleaning materials and methods, and spot removal procedures. Describe
cleaning materials detrimental to finish surface and hardware finish.
Products
550.2.2 Design Criteria

1) Surface Burning of Vinyl Fabric Finish: as specified
2) Limit installed track deflection under load to 1/360 of opening width.
550.2.3 Materials
1) Panels Core: Solid wood, plywood or particle board as specified, construction
using manufacturer’s standard fabrication methods.
2) Track: Formed steel; or extruded aluminum; size, thickness, and profile
designed to support live and dead loads. Include steel sub-channel and track
connectors.
3) Hardware: Latching door handles of cast steel with satin chrome finish; lock
cylinder master keyed to building keying system.
4) Carriers: Nylon or ball bearing, steel wheels on trolley carrier at every second
panel.
5) Accessories: As specified
TS 500 - 465
6) Finish: As specified

Generally, in accordance with appropriate Clause of GS100 “General Specification”
Execution
550.3.1 Inspection
defects in the work of other trades that will affects the proper installation and
operation of the work of this section. Starting the installation work shall constitute
acceptance of the base or adjoining work.
1) Attach partition track to the overhead structure. Laterally brace track to
building structure.
2) Install partition in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and
approved shop drawings.
3) Install accessories to provide a neat, finished installation.
4) Adjust partition to provide smooth quiet operation.
550.3.3 Cleaning
Clean all exposed surfaces using products recommended by the manufacturer.
Clean up and dispose of all wrapping, scraps, waste materials, and other refuse which
has been brought onto the job or which has accumulated as a result of the work.
Leave the work broom clean or better.

Folding partitions is measured as the “Square Meters” and the rate shall be included
all necessary accessories and hardware as specified hereinbefore finishes as indicated
on the drawing.

TS 500 - 466

Number
D10A for OCC Building: W6000mm x H2700mm,
D550(1)a Each
Folding Partition Wall
D10B for OCC Building: W3400mm x H2700mm,
D550(1)b Each
Folding Partition Wall
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 467
551 MOVABLE PARTITIONS
The Work
movable partitions, including all anchorage provisions, in accordance with this
551.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required movable partitions, as

1) Top supported panel partitions. (600 series)
2) Top supported fire rated panel partitions. (600-F series)
3) Vertical lift panel partitions. (645V series)
4) Acoustical glass panel system. (GA1/GA2)
5) Frameless glass panel systems. (GL1/GL2)
6) Wood-framed glass panel system. (GT1/GT2)
7) Accordion folding partitions. (1500, 2000, 3100-4100)
8) Pocket doors.
9) Structural truss support system. (U900/U901)

1) Section 516 - Sprayed and Auxiliary Fire-Resistive Materials.
2) Section 509 – “Rough Carpentry”.
551.1.4 Related Work by Others

1) Preparation of opening. Any deviation of site conditions contrary to approved
shop drawings shall be called to the attention of the Engineer.
2) Header, blocking, support structures, jambs, track enclosures, surrounding
insulation, and sound baffles.
3) Pre-punching of support structure in accordance with approved shop drawings.
4) Paint or otherwise finishing all trim and other materials adjoining head and
jamb of operable partitions.
551.1.5 References
1) ASTM International:
TS 500 - 468
a) ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound
Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
b) ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully
Tempered Flat Glass.
c) ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
d) ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of
Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
e) ASTM E336 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound
Attenuation between Rooms in Buildings.
f) ASTM E557 - Standard Practice for Architectural Application and
Installation of Operable Partitions
2) Underwriter's laboratory (UL) 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies.
551.1.6 Submittals
1) Submit under provisions under Administrative Requirements.
3) Shop Drawings: Complete shop drawings are to be provided prior to fabrication
indicating construction and installation details.

1) Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years of experience in
manufacturing similar products.
The manufacturer shall have a quality system that is registered to the ISO 9001
standards.
2) Installer Qualifications: Minimum two (2) years of experience in installing
similar products.
3) Product Qualifications:
a) Preparation of the opening shall conform to the criteria set forth per
ASTM E557 Standard Practice for Architectural Application and
Installation of Operable Partitions.
b) The partition STC (Sound Transmission Classification) shall be achieved
per the standard test methods ASTM E90.
c) Noise isolation classifications shall be achieved per the standard test
methods ASTM E336 and ASTM E413.
TS 500 - 469
d) Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) ratings shall be per ASTM C423.

e) Rack testing for ten (10) years. (tensional strength stress test)
f) Product shall be listed by a recognized testing, classification and follow-
up agency as a one-hour Special Purpose Fire Door Assembly, after
testing for fire resistance per UL 10B. The listing shall include all
variations of panel configuration, tracks, hardware, end conditions,
options, finishes, and pass doors contained in project design.
g) Fire hazard classification: ASTM E84.
h) Operable partition shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to SEI/ASCI. Withstand means, "the panels will
remain in place without separation of any parts from the system when
subjected to the seismic forces specified".
i) The manufacturer shall have a quality system that is registered to the ISO
9001 standards.
551.1.8 Pre-Installation Meetings

Convene minimum two weeks prior to starting work of this section.

1) Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging bearing the
brand name and manufacturer's identification until ready for installation.
2) Handling: Handle materials to avoid damage.

under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.
551.1.11 Sequencing
Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent
551.1.12 Warranty
1) Manufacturer shall warrant partition system for a period of two years against
defects in material and workmanship, excluding abuse.
2) Manufacturer shall warrant partition system for a period of one year against
defects in material and workmanship, excluding abuse.
TS 500 - 470
Products
551.2.2 Top-Supported Panel Partitions

1) Acoustical Performance
a) Acoustical performance shall be tested at a laboratory in accordance with
ASTM E90 Test Standards.
b) Complete, unaltered written test report is to be made available upon
request.
2) Product: Individual, Multi-Directional Panels
a) Panels shall be nominally 76mm thick and to 1219mm in width.
b) Panel faces shall be laminated to appropriate substrate to meet the STC
requirement.
c) Substrate Material: Steel.
d) Substrate Material: Non-steel.
e) Substrate Material: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF).
f) Vertical sound seals shall be of tongue and groove configuration, ensure
panel-to-panel alignment and prevent sound leaks between panels.
g) Weight of the panels shall be 27.8 to 49.8kg/ sq.m. based on STC and
options selected.
h) Horizontal top seals shall be fixed continuous contact dual 4-finger vinyl.
i) Horizontal bottom seals shall be retractable, provide up to 50mm nominal
operating clearance, and shall exert downward force when extended.
j) Frames shall be of 1.42mm painted steel.
k) Face finish with integral factory applied aluminum vertical edge and face
protection.
l) Face finish shall wrap around the vertical panel edges and provide no
protective vertical face trim.
m) Horizontal top seals shall be retractable, provide 25mm nominal operating
clearance, and exert upward force when extended. All panels, including
TS 500 - 471
pass door panels and lever closure panels shall have retractable top and
bottom seals.
n) Horizontal bottom seals shall be automatic and provide up to 50mm
nominal operating clearance.
o) Horizontal bottom seals shall be fixed continuous contact dual 4-finger
vinyl.
p) Horizontal trim shall be of aluminum.
q) Weight of the panels shall be 27.8 to 49.8 kg/ sq.m. based on STC and
options selected.
i) STC: 41.
ii) STC: 43.
iii) STC: 47.
iv) STC: 49.
v) STC: 51.
3) Product: Manual Operated Paired Panels
a) Panels shall be nominally 76mm thick and to 1219mm in width and
hinged in pairs.
requirement.
f) Frames shall be of 1.42mm (16 gauge) painted steel.
g) Face finish with integral factory applied aluminum vertical edge and face
protection.
h) Face finish shall wrap around the vertical panel edges and provide no
i) Vertical sound seals shall be of tongue and groove configuration, ensure
j) Horizontal trim shall be of aluminum.
k) Low profile hinges on basic panels shall be of steel and project no more
than 6mm beyond panel faces. Each pair of panels to have a minimum of
three hinges.
l) Weight of the panels shall be 27.8-49.8 kg/ sq.m. based on options
selected.
i) STC: 41.
ii) STC: 43.
TS 500 - 472
iii) STC: 47.

iv) STC: 49.
v) STC: 51.
m) Horizontal top seals shall be fixed continuous contact dual 4-finger vinyl.
n) Horizontal top seals shall be retractable, provide 25mm nominal operating
bottom seals.
o) Horizontal bottom seals shall be automatic and provide up to 50mm
nominal operating clearance.
p) Horizontal bottom seals shall be fixed continuous contact dual 4-finger
vinyl.
4) Product: Electrically-Operated Continuously-Hinged Panels
continuously hinged.
requirement.
f) Frames shall be of 1.42mm painted steel.
protection.
j) Horizontal top seals shall be fixed continuous contact dual 4-finger vinyl.
k) All standard panels shall have bottom retractable seals which provide a
minimum of 51mm floor clearance during movement of the partition,
including all panels adjacent to pass doors. Retractable bottom floor seal
to exert downward seal force when activated. Floating or rigid seals that
maintain contact with the floor during partition movement will not be
acceptable.
l) Horizontal bottom seals shall be fixed continuous contact dual 4-finger
vinyl.
m) Motor shall automatically extend/retract the bottom seals.
n) No floor mounted seal activators are allowed.
TS 500 - 473
o) Panels shall provide wall-to-wall contact for tight acoustical seal.

Operable wall systems that do not extend to the back of storage pocket are
not acceptable.
p) Weight of the panels shall be 27.8-49.8 kg/ sq.m. based on construction
selected.
i) STC: 41.
ii) STC: 43.
iii) STC: 47.
iv) STC: 49.
v) STC: 51.
q) Provide appropriate safety system.
5) Product: Manual-Operated Continuously-Hinged Panels
hinged.
requirement.
e) Frames shall be of 1.42mm painted steel.
f) Face finish with integral factory applied aluminum vertical edge and face
protection.
g) Face finish shall wrap around the vertical panel edges and provide no
h) Vertical sound seals shall be of tongue and groove configuration, ensure
i) Horizontal top seals shall be fixed continuous contact dual 4-finger vinyl.
j) Horizontal bottom seals shall be fixed continuous contact dual 4-finger
vinyl.
k) Low profile hinges on basic panels shall be of steel and project no more
than 6mm beyond panel faces. Panels to have a minimum of three hinges.
l) Weight of the panels shall be 27.8-49.8 kg/ sq.m. based on options
selected.
i) STC: 41.
ii) STC: 43.
iii) STC: 47.
iv) STC: 49.
TS 500 - 474
v) STC: 51.
6) Product: Manual Individual Multi-Directional Panels
a) Provide Fire-Rated Manual Individual Multi-Directional Panels
b) Panels shall be nominally 102mm thick and to 1219mm in width and
hinged.
c) Panels shall be nominally 102mm thick and to 1486mm in width and
hinged.
d) Panel faces shall be of one-piece roll formed min. 0.89mm steel laminated
to gypsum backing and assembled to welded steel frame.
e) Panel faces shall be laminated to appropriate substrate to meet the STC
requirement.
i) Substrate Material: Steel.
ii) Substrate Material: Non-steel.
protection.
j) The lead panel shall seal against adjacent wall surface with recessed or
surface jambs.
k) Horizontal top seals shall be retractable, provide 25mm nominal operating
bottom seals.
l) Horizontal top seals shall be fixed continuous contact dual 4-finger vinyl.
m) Horizontal bottom seals shall be retractable, provide up to 51mm nominal
operating clearance, and exert downward force when fully extended.
n) Horizontal bottom seals shall be retractable, provide 4 inches nominal
operating clearance, and exert 97 lbs. downward force when fully
extended.
o) Horizontal bottom seals shall be fixed continuous contact dual 4-finger
vinyl.
q) Weight of the panels shall be 37.8-66.4 kg/sq.m. based on options selected.
i) STC: 43.
TS 500 - 475
ii) STC: 47.

iii) STC: 49.
iv) STC: 52.
v) STC: 54.
vi) STC: 55.
vii) STC: 56.
r) Weight of the panels shall be 46.00-53.2 kg. per sq.m. based on options
selected.
i) STC: 51.
ii) STC: 54.
7) Product: Manual Paired Panels
a) Provide One (1)-Hour Fire-Rated Manual Paired Panels.
b) Panels shall be nominally 102mm thick and to 1219mm in width and
hinged.
c) Panels shall be nominally 102mm thick and to 1486mm in width and
hinged.
d) Panel faces shall be of one-piece roll formed min. 0.89mm steel laminated
to gypsum backing and assembled to welded steel frame.
e) Panel faces shall be laminated to appropriate substrate to meet the STC
requirement.
i) Substrate Material: Steel.
ii) Substrate Material: Non-steel.
iii) Medium Density Fiberboard.
protection.
j) The lead panel shall seal against adjacent wall surface with recessed or
surface jambs.
k) Horizontal top seals shall be retractable, provide 25mm nominal operating
bottom seals.
l) Horizontal top seals shall be fixed continuous contact dual 4-finger vinyl.
TS 500 - 476
m) Horizontal bottom seals shall be retractable, provide up to 51mm nominal

operating clearance, and exert downward force when fully extended.
n) Horizontal bottom seals shall be fixed continuous contact dual 4-finger
vinyl.
o) Horizontal bottom seals shall be retractable, provide 38mm nominal
operating clearance, and exert 27.21 kg downward force when fully
extended.
q) Low profile hinges on standard panels shall be of steel and project no
more than 6mm (1/4 inch) beyond panel faces. Each pair of panels to have
a minimum of three hinges.
r) Weight of the panels shall be 37.8 to 66.4 kg/sq.m. based on options
selected.
i) STC: 43.
ii) STC: 47.
iii) STC: 49.
iv) STC: 52.
v) STC: 54.
vi) STC: 55.
vii) STC: 56.
s) Weight of the panels shall be 46.00 to 53.2 kg. per sq. m. based on options
selected.
i) STC: 51.
ii) STC: 54.
8) Product: Electrically-Operated Continuously-Hinged Panels
a) Panels shall be nominally 101mm thick, to 1232mm in width and
continuously hinged.
requirement.
e) Substrate Material: Medium Density Fiberboard.
protection.
TS 500 - 477

j) Horizontal top seals shall be fixed continuous contact dual 4-finger vinyl.
k) All standard panels shall have bottom retractable seals which provide a
minimum of 51mm floor clearance during movement of the partition,
including all panels adjacent to pass doors. Retractable bottom floor seal
to exert downward seal force when activated. Floating or rigid seals that
maintain contact with the floor during partition movement will not be
acceptable.
l) Horizontal bottom seals shall be fixed continuous contact dual 4-finger
vinyl.
m) Motor shall automatically extend/retract the bottom seals.
n) No floor mounted seal activators are allowed.
o) Panels shall provide wall-to-wall contact for tight acoustical seal.
Operable wall systems that do not extend to the back of storage pocket are
not acceptable.
p) Weight of the panels shall be 37.8-53.2 kg/sq.m. based on options selected.
q) Provide Safety System.
9) Suspension System:
a) Track shall be of clear anodized architectural grade extruded aluminum
alloy 6063-T6. Track design shall provide precise alignment at the trolley
running surfaces and provide integral support for adjoining ceiling, soffit,
or plenum sound barrier. Track shall be connected to the structural support
by pairs of minimum 10mm diameter threaded steel hanger rods.
i) The panels shall be supported by pre-engineered truss and post
system fabricated of steel and aluminum, attached to the building
structure for lateral support only. The load of the truss and partition
is supported by end columns. The columns are connected to floor
plates that distribute the load of the system at the floor.
ii) Pairs of rods are directly attached to the track, no single point
attachment allowed. L, T, or X intersections shall be factory-
assembled and welded.
iii) Each panel shall be supported by two (2) 2-wheeled counter-rotating
horizontal carriers. Wheels to be of precision ground steel ball
bearings with heat treated and hardened races encased with molded
polymer tires.
iv) Each panel shall be supported by two (2) 1-wheel horizontal rotating
carriers. Wheel to be of precision ground steel ball bearings with heat
treated and hardened races encased with molded polymer tires.
v) Each panel shall be supported by two (2) 4-wheel carriers.
TS 500 - 478
vi) Guide rails and/or track sweep seals shall not be required.
vii) Each panel shall be supported by one (1) 4-wheeled carrier. Wheels
to be of hardened steel ball bearings encased with molded polymer
tires.
viii) Guide rails and/or track sweep seals shall not be required.
ix) Each panel shall be supported by one (1) 4-wheeled carrier in the
track and one internal 4-wheeled carrier. Wheels to be of hardened
steel ball bearings encased with molded polymer tires.
x) Each panel shall be supported by one (1) 4-wheeled carrier. Wheels
shall be of hardened steel ball bearings encased with molded polymer
tires.
b) Plenum Closure: Construction of plenum closure shall permit lifting out
of header panels to adjust track height. Plenum closure required for
optimum sound control of partition.
a) For panels to 455kg or 6.75m: Track shall be of clear anodized
architectural grade extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6. Track design shall
provide precise alignment at the trolley running surfaces and provide
integral support for adjoining ceiling, soffit, or plenum sound barrier.
Track shall be connected to the structural support by pairs of minimum
10mm dia. threaded steel hanger rods. Pairs of rods are directly attached
to the track, no single point attachment allowed. L, T, or X intersections
shall be factory-assembled and welded.
i) Each panel shall be supported by two (2) 2-wheeled counter-rotating
polymer tires.
b) For panels 455-680kg: Track shall be of clear anodized architectural grade
extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6. Track design shall provide precise
alignment at the trolley running surfaces and provide integral support for
adjoining ceiling, soffit, or plenum sound barrier. Track shall be
connected to the structural support by pairs of minimum 13mm dia.
threaded steel hanger rods. Pairs of rods are directly attached to the track,
no single point attachment allowed. L, T, or X intersections shall be
factory-assembled and welded.
i) Each panel shall be supported by two (2) 2-wheeled counter-rotating
polymer tires, steel banded and reinforced.
c) For panels 680-1364 kg: Track shall be of 6mm formed black-painted
steel connected to the structural support by pairs of minimum 13mm
threaded steel hanger rods. Track trim shall be clear anodized aluminum.
TS 500 - 479
Carriers to have four steel wheels with precision ground radial bearings.
Bearings are inserted into a steel tire. The steel tire rim fully captures the
bearing. Carriers may be programmed for self-directing and sorting.
d) Plenum Closure: Design of plenum closure shall permit lifting out of
header panels to adjust track height. Plenum closure required for optimum
sound control of partition.
a) For panels to 408kg: Track shall be of clear anodized architectural grade
extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6. Track design shall provide precise
alignment at the trolley running surfaces and provide integral support for
adjoining ceiling, soffit, or plenum sound barrier. Track shall be
connected to the structural support by minimum 10mm dia. threaded steel
hanger rods. Track trim shall be of steel.
i) Each panel shall be supported by one (1) 4-wheeled carrier. Wheels
to be of hardened steel ball bearings encased with molded polymer
tires.
ii) Each panel shall be supported by one (1) 4-wheeled carrier in the
track and one internal 4-wheeled carrier. Wheels to be of hardened
steel ball bearings encased with molded polymer tires.
b) For panel weights over 408kg: Track shall be of 6mm formed steel,
painted black. Track trim to be of steel. Track shall be connected to the
structural support by pairs of min. 13mm dia. threaded steel hanger rods.
i) Each panel shall be supported by one (1) 4-wheeled carrier. Wheels
to be of steel with precision ground radial bearings. Bearings are
inserted into a steel tire. Tire rim fully captures the bearing.
ii) Each panel shall be supported by one (1) 4-wheeled carrier in the
track and one internal 4-wheeled carrier. Wheels on track carrier to
be of hardened steel ball bearings. Wheels on internal carrier shall be
of hardened steel ball bearings encased with molded polymer tires.
12) Power Unit:
a) Factory assembled power unit shall be UL-listed and include motor,
electronic torque limiter, two key control stations wired in series,
emergency release, and all necessary equipment for electric operation.
Roller chain drive shall attach to carrier of lead panel. Limit switches shall
be provided to prevent over-travel. Motor shall be able to operate 50-60
Hz, and 200-240 volts, single phase, with adequate horsepower to operate
partition effectively.
i) Low profile hinges shall be of steel and project no more than 6 mm
beyond panel faces. Panels shall have a minimum of three hinges.
ii) Each panel shall be supported by a single carrier allowing the panels
to stack freely without the use of rub rails near the pocket.
TS 500 - 480
iii) Partition shall be operated by two control stations wired in series and
located on opposite sides and ends of the partition. The key stations
require human contact to be activated ensuring supervised operation
of the partition system.
iv) Provide safety system which automatically stops the partition's
forward movement when an object or person contacts the lead edge
of the partition during movement.
13) Finishes:
a) Face finish shall be factory applied reinforced vinyl fabric with woven
backing, weighing not less than 20 oz. per lineal yard. Color shall be
selected from manufacturer's standard color selectors.
b) Face finish shall be factory applied vertical ribbed carpet (N.R.C. 20).
c) Face finish shall be factory applied stain resistant fabric
d) Face finish shall be customer selected.
e) Face finish shall be unfinished for field decoration.
f) Face finish shall be wood veneer (factory-installed on trimmed models).
g) Face finish shall be high pressure laminate (factory-installed on trimmed
models).
h) Face finish shall be as approved by Engineer.
i) Exposed metal trim and seal color shall be custom powder-coated paint
finish, with color to be approved by the Employer and the Engineer.
j) Aluminum track shall be clear anodized or custom-anodized color finish
or custom powder-coated paint finish, with color to be approved by the
Employer and the Engineer.
k) Frame color shall be black.
l) Horizontal trim shall be custom-anodized or custom powder-coated, with
color to be approved by the Employer and the Engineer.
m) Track trim shall be primed off-white.
14) Accessories:
a) ADA-compliant pass door of the same thickness and construction as the
basic panels. Pass door panel legs require bottom seals that provide
downward force to maintain stability during door operation. Pass door
leaf has perimeter trim to protect face finish and to provide visual
identification as required by International Building Code (IBC). Pass door
leaf incorporates a self-adjusting retractable bottom seal providing sound
control when door is closed.
i) Provide automatic door closer.
ii) Provide door lock.
TS 500 - 481
iii) Provide self-illuminated exit sign.

iv) Provide provision for window.
v) Provide peep hole.
b) Provide inset chalk/writing/projection surfaces.
c) Provide inset tack boards.
d) Provide inset eraser pocket.
e) Provide segmented faces.
f) Provide finished end cover.
g) Provide pocket doors.
h) Provide inset chair rail pan (for field installation of chair rail).
i) Provide custom design options as indicated on Drawings.
15) Manual Operation:
a) Panels shall allow manual relocation from the storage area, positioning in
the opening, and seals-setting.
b) Retractable Horizontal Seals:
i) Retractable horizontal seals shall be activated by a removable quick-
set operating handle located approximately 1067mm from the floor
in the panel edge. Seal activation requires approximately 6.8kg of
force per panel and approximately a 190 degree turn of the removable
handle.
ii) 4-inch Bottom Seals: Retractable horizontal seals shall be activated
by a lift/drop motion of the removable handle.
iii) Top and bottom retractable seals on each panel or hinged panel pair
shall be operated simultaneously.
c) Automatic Floor Seals:
i) Horizontal seals shall be activated by pressing the edge of the panel
into the edge of the adjacent panel or wall.
ii) Seal activation requires approximately 6.8 kg of force per panel.
d) Final Partition Closure:
i) To close opening, panels shall be manually moved from the stack area
and pulled across the opening to the opposite wall. Final closure is by
manually flattening the stack panel. To open partition, "break" the
seal by applying pressure to the stack panel. The partition is manually
moved to the stack area.
ii) Lever closure panel with expanding jamb which compensates for
minor wall irregularities and provides a minimum of 113.4kg seal
force against the adjacent wall for optimum sound control. The jamb
activator shall be located approximately 1143mm from the floor in
TS 500 - 482
the panel face and be accessed from either side of the panel. The jamb
is equipped with a mechanical rack and pinion gear drive mechanism
and shall extend 100-152mm by turning the removable operating
handle.
iii) Pivot panel is attached to the wall and permits access between
adjacent rooms. Pivot panel is of the same construction as basic
panels but with continuous contact multi-ply vinyl top and bottom
seals. The lead end of the panel has full height finger pull and vertical
seal of multi-ply vinyl.
e) Stack/Store Panels
i) Retract seals and move to storage area.
ii) Panels may be stored at either or both ends of the track or in a pocket.
16) Motorized Operation:
a) Partitions shall be key switch controlled, requiring constant contact to
activate the motor. As a safety precaution, two key switches are required
to activate the partition. Switches to be mounted on both sides of partition
to provide operators a clear view of the partition path to prevent injury.
b) Motor drive shall automatically seal the partition in the opening. For
models with retractable bottom seals, the motor automatically sets the
bottom seals.
c) Stack/Store Panels: Panels are retracted and stored by activating the two
(2) key-switch controls.
551.2.3 Frameless Glass Panel Systems

1) Product shall be top supported individual glass panel system.
Provide GL1 Glass Panel System.
2) Product shall be top-supported, center-stacked paired glass panel system.
Provide GL2 Glass Panel System.
3) Panel Construction:
a) Panels shall be nominally 40mm thick and to 1219mm in width.
b) Glass shall be mechanically-attached to top and bottom rails and not rely
on friction and/or adhesives. Glass shall be clear tempered per ASTM
C1048-97b.
c) All glass edges shall be polished.
d) Glass panel faces shall be 12mm fully tempered glass.
e) Glass panel faces shall be 12mm laminated glass.
f) Glass panel faces shall be 1/2 inch satiny translucent acid washed, full
height, one side only.
TS 500 - 483
g) Glass panel faces shall be acrylic.

h) Glass panel faces shall be custom glass as scheduled or indicated on the
Drawings.
i) Top and bottom horizontal rail shall be anodized aluminum and
incorporate brush light seals.
j) Glass faces shall have no vertical trim.
k) Each panel contains a foot bolt which is extended into a floor-mounted
receiver to stabilize and secure each panel in the opening.
l) Weight of the panels shall be approximately 7.4 lbs. per sq. ft. for 12 mm
glass.
4) Suspension system:
a) Track shall be of clear anodized architectural grade extruded aluminum
alloy 6063-T6. Track design shall provide integral support for adjoining
ceiling, soffit, or plenum sound barrier. Track shall be connected to the
structural support by minimum of 10mm diameter threaded steel hanger
rods. Guide rails and/or track sweep seals shall not be required.
b) Each panel shall be supported by two (2) 2-wheeled counter-rotating
horizontal carriers. Wheels to be of precision ground steel ball bearings
with heat treated and hardened races encased with molded polymer tires.
c) Each panel shall be supported by one (1) 4-wheeled carrier. Wheels to be
of hardened steel ball bearings encased with molded polymer tires.
5) Finishes:
a) Horizontal Rail Finish: Clear anodized aluminum (standard) or Medium/
Dark Bronze anodized aluminum or Stainless steel clad, No. 4 brushed
finish or No. 8 mirror finish or Custom painted or Powder-coated, with
finish and color to be approved by the Employer and the Engineer.
b) Aluminum Track Finish: Clear anodized (standard) or custom-anodized
or custom- powder-coated, with finish and color to be approved by the
Employer and the Engineer.
6) Accessories:
a) Pivot panel closure shall be by low profile handle or by push/pull handle
both sides or one side or by push bar, one side or secured by thumb turn
floor lock or by keyed floor lock, with type, finish and color to be.
b) Glass etching shall be fully etched and sealed or shall be of custom
patterns, as approved by the Employer and the Engineer.
c) Pass Door: Full height, ADA-compliant pass, of same finish and
construction as basic panels. Includes low profile handle, plunger latch to
hold door closed, and a magnetic hold open to secure door while the panel
is being moved.
7) Operation:
TS 500 - 484
a) Panels shall be manually moved from the storage area, positioned in the
opening, and floorbolts set.
b) Final partition closure to be by pivot panel or by overlapping the opening
or by end at wall, as approved by the Employer and the Engineer.
c) Stack/Store Panels: Retract foot bolts, and move to storage area. Panels
shall be stored in stacks in storage area(s).
Execution
551.3.1 Examination
2) If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify the
Engineer of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
551.3.2 Preparation
1) Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2) The complete installation of the operable wall system shall be by an authorized
factory-trained installer and be in strict accordance with the approved shop
drawings and manufacturer's standard printed specifications, instructions, and
recommendations.
3) Perform field sound test to confirm installation acoustical performance.
551.3.4 Cleaning
1) All track and panel surfaces shall be wiped clean and free of handprints, grease,
and soil.
2) Packaging and other installation debris shall be removed to onsite waste
collection area, provided by others.
551.3.5 Protection and Training

1) Installer shall demonstrate proper operation and maintenance procedures to
Engineer.
2) Operating handle and Employer's manuals shall be provided to the Engineer.
4) Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before substantial completion.
TS 500 - 485

Movable partition Wall is measured as the “Square Meters” and rate shall be included
all finished hardware and all necessary accessories.

Number
D551(2) H=2700mm, Movable Partition Wall Square meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 486
552 TOILET PARTITIONS
The Work
installation onsite of toilet partitions, including all anchorage provisions, in
552.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required toilet partitions, as shown
552.1.2 Scope
Furnish and install toilet partitions as shown on Plan and as specified herein.
552.1.3 Submittals

Submit shop drawings indicating elevations of partitions, full scale sections,
thickness and gauges of metal, fastenings, proposed method of anchoring, the size
and spacing of anchors, details of construction, hardware, fittings, mountings, and
other related items and installation details.
552.1.3.2 Samples
Submit one of each item of hardware, fittings, fastening, and each type of panel. The
panel sample shall be cross-sectioned not less than 150mm by 150mm in size and
shall show finish on base material and core of the panel.
552.1.3.3 Manufacturer's Data

Submit literature for each item of hardware, fitting, fastening and each type of panel,
complete with description of materials, finishes, and anchoring devices, and
appurtenances.
552.1.3.4 Colors
Submit one sample of each color of partition for verification that products match the
color indicated. Where colors are not indicated, submit the manufacturer's standard
color samples for selection by the Employer and/or the Engineer.
TS 500 - 487
552.1.4 Delivery and Storage

Deliver materials to the site in original sealed containers or packages, bearing the
manufacturer's name, brand designation, specification number, type, style and finish
as applicable. Store and handle materials in a manner to protect them from damage.
Products
552.2.2 Materials
All toilet partition panels, plasters, door and urinal screens shall be Stainless steel
hairline finish flush panels.
552.2.3 Toilet Enclosures
552.2.3.1 Door Hardware and Fixing

All pilaster shall rest on polyamide adjustable foot and anchored to the divisional
walls by stainless-steel “U” channel. The pilasters shall be finished with black
anodized heavy-duty channel at the top rail. Fixing of the pilaster to the wall shall be
done with black anodized heavy-duty channel.
Each cubicle shall be equipped with nylon steel privacy thumb turn, nylon door knob,
nylon coat hook, stainless-steel hinges with polyamide cover. All the accessories
shall be of heat chemical and bacteria resistance nylon.
552.2.4 Finish
All edges of doors and pilasters are chamfered and finish without any metal trimming.
Execution
Installation of toilet partitions and urinal screens shall be in accordance with
approved shop drawings and manufacturer's installation and directions.

Laminate toilet partitions is measured as the “Square Meters” and the rate shall be
including the following items:
TS 500 - 488
1) Stainless-steel petitions fixing floor anchors, top rail and U channels for
partition walls fixing.
2) All finished Hardware as indicated on the Drawing.

Item Number
552(2) H=1800mm, Stainless Steel Toilet Partition System Square meter

Pay Item Number Measurement
D552(1) H=1800mm, Laminate Toilet Partitions Square meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 489
553 TOILET AND SHOWER ACCESSORIES
The Work
installation onsite of toilet and bathroom accessories, including all anchorage

Standers shall be applied another equal standard approved by the Engineer
1) Cold-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets and Strip: JIS G3141 or equivalent ASTM.
2) Electroplated Coatings of Nickel and Chromium: JIS H8617 or equivalent
ASTM
3) Cold-Rolled Stainless Steel Sheets Plates: JIS G4305 or equivalent ASTM
4) Brass Coatings: JIS G4305 or equivalent ASTM
553.1.2 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required toilet and bathroom
accessories, as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.

1) Toilet and Bath Accessories
2) Inserts and rough in Frames delivered to other trades for installation
3) Framed Mirrors
4) Attachment Hardware
See the Drawings and the finish schedules for items, locations, sizes, mounting
details, etc.

specialized in this work as its primary business for at least 10 years and having
performed satisfactorily work of this type and magnitude.
services of a competent foreman or supervisor who shall be available at all time
during the progress of the work of this section and shall be designated as the
single point of contact within the subcontractor’s organization for matters in
connection with the work of this section.
TS 500 - 490
553.1.5 Submittals
1) Submit three (3) samples of each type of fixture specified, in accordance with
appropriate section of the General Requirements” of these Specifications.
Approved samples mat be used in the work
2) Submit two (2) copies of manufacturer’s catalog cuts, product data installation
instruction for the Engineer’s review.
3) Submit a schedule of toilet accessories in accordance with appropriate section
on GS 100 “General Specification” of these Specifications for each area where
toilet accessories are indicated, showing types and quantities of toilet
accessories in each area.
4) Provide the Employer with a warranty stating that the work of this section will
remain free from defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period
of ten (10) years from the date of substantial completion to performs as defect
work at no cost to the Employer.
Products
553.2.2 General
Provide toilet accessories of the same manufacturer for each type of accessory units
exposed in the same areas, wherever.
The manufacturer’s name or other identifying markings shall not be permitted on
exposed surfaces of any toilet accessories.
Where specified, provide locks with the same keying for all accessory units in the
project wherever possible.
553.2.3 Materials
1) Sheet Steel: JIS G3141 or equivalent ASTM, cold rolled, stretcher leveled, 38
g/sq.m galvanized coating.
2) Stainless Steel Sheet: JIS269 or equivalent ASTM, commercial grade.
3) Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A269, commercial grade seamless welded.
4) Brass- Casting or forging quality alloy meeting JIS H5101 or equivalent ASTM.
TS 500 - 491
5) Bolts, Screw and Other Fastening Devices – Stainless steel or chromium plated
brass, same finish as adjoining metal, theft proof type, smallest size practical,
countersunk with oval head, Concealed fasteners shall be of non-corrosive
metal.
6) Joints- Exposed joints shall be metered at corners, welded, ground smooth, and
finished to match the adjacent surfaces.
553.2.4 Fabrication
1) Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints, Weld joints of
fabricated components and grind smooth. Form surfaces flat without distortion.
Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.
2) Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building
finishes.
3) Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent
electrolysis.
4) Hot dip galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices.
5) Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
553.2.5 Finishes
1) Chromium Plating on Brass – Chromium plating applied to a coating of nickel
applied over a coating of copper on brass. Dull satin finish.
2) Stainless Steel –Hairline finish or mirror finish as specified on the Drawings.
3) Shop primed ferrous metals – Preheat and clean, spray one coat of primer and
bake.
4) Enamel – Preheat to clean, apply one coat of primer and minimum of two coats
of baked enamel.
553.2.6 Delivery, Storage and Protection

1) Generally, in accordance with appropriate section of GS 100 “General
2) Do not deliver accessories to the site until the rooms in which they are to be
installed are ready to receive them.
3) Pack each accessory individually in a manner to protect its finish.
4) Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces from damage during the
installation of the work of this section.
TS 500 - 492
Execution
553.3.1 Inspection
or adjoining work.
553.3.2 Preparation
Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to the jobsite at the appropriate time for building-
in. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
1) Install toilet accessories at the locations indicated on the drawings or where
directed by Engineer, in accordance with approved schedules. Install all items
neatly, securely, plumb or level, clean and free of defects. Operating devices
shall work properly and smoothly.
2) Use concealed fastenings wherever possible. Provide anchors, bolts and other
necessary fasteners, and attach accessories securely walls and partitions
complying with the manufacturer’s instructions for each item and each type of
substrate construction.
3) Install concealed mounting devices and fasteners fabricate of the same material
as the accessories or of galvanized steel. Install exposed mounting devices and
fasteners finished to match the accessories.
4) Provide theft-resistant fasteners for all accessory mountings.
5) Do not remove labels on mirrors until after mirrors have been installed.
553.3.4 Cleaning
1) The Contractor shall be responsible to protect all finished accessories until
immediate prior to substantial completion of the work.
2) All toilet room accessories shall be thoroughly cleaned and left free of smear,
scratches and abrasions to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3) Any damages to the accessories is liable to be rejected and the Contractor shall
replace such materials at no additional cost to the Employer.

Pay items of Toilet & bathroom accessories and sanitary fixtures shall be refer to the
Section 619 of TS 600.
TS 500 - 493

The quantity measured as prescribed in Method of Measurement shall be paid for at
the contract unit price for toilet & bathroom accessories, which price and payment
shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this
section.
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 494
554 FURNISHINGS
The Work
installation onsite of furnishings, including all anchorage provisions, in accordance
Engineer.
554.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required furnishings, as shown on
Blinds
554.2.1 Scope of Work

Furnish materials, labor, and tools necessary to install Window Treatment (Roller
Shades) as shown and specified on drawings.
554.2.2 Qualifications
Contractor/ Supplier shall have no less than two (2) years’ experience in
Manufacturing, Distribution, Installation and Maintenance Skills in providing high
quality Roller Shades on projects with similar requirements.
554.2.3 Submittals
Submit Sample of Fabric and Brochures for Engineer’s approval.
554.2.4.1 Product Delivery

Pre-assembled and cut to actual sizes of screen shall be delivered and installed to site.
554.2.4.2 Job Conditions

1) Hangers and necessary framing on Perimeter Cove/ Curtain Wall shall be
installed prior to turnover/completion.
TS 500 - 495
2) To conduct plumb and level checking before and after installation of Roller
Shades.
554.2.4.3 Specifications
1) Product:
Roller shades
2) Screen Specifications:
a) Sunscreen Fabric for Internal Roller shades
b) Material; Glass Yarn-coated with PVC
c) Weave; Basket Weave (or approved equal)
d) Screen Vision; 5% (or as per employer approved)
e) Color; white/beige
f) Fire Rating; M1, NFPA 701, ASTM E648
g) Thickness; 0.45mm/ 0.017in
3) Weight; 390g/m2
4) Warranty/ Maintenance Program:
1-Year Warranty or as prescribed by the Engineer.
554.2.5 Execution
1) Work shall be performed in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction and
shop drawings approved by the Engineer.
2) Installation shall be done by workmen experience in installing Roller Shades.
Installers must examine field conditions prior to installation and installation
shall commence if any unsatisfactory condition(s) have been corrected in an
acceptable manner.
3) The Contractor shall protect the installations from subsequent operations of
other trades until final acceptance of the project.
Entrance Floor Mats and Frames
554.3.1 General
This section includes the following types of entrance flooring systems:
1) Floor Mats & Frame Assemblies
2) Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements related to this
section:
Grouting frames into recess; refer to Section 405 “Concrete Structures” and Section
413 “Unit Masonry Assemblies”.
TS 500 - 496
554.3.1.1 References
1) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
2) The Aluminum Association (AA)
3) The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI)
4) The National Floor Safety Institute (NFSI)
1) General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract these
Specifications.
2) Product data for each type of floor mat and frame specified including
Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions.
3) Shop drawings in sufficient detail showing layout of mat and frame specified
including details indicating construction relative to materials, direction of
traffic, spline locations, profiles, anchors and accessories.
4) Samples for verification purposes: Submit an assembled section of floor mat
and frame members with selected tread insert showing each type of color for
exposed floor mat, frame and accessories required.
5) Maintenance data in the form of Manufacturer's printed instructions for
cleaning and maintaining floor mats.

To maximize the life cycle of the entrance flooring and its appearance, the following
items are critical:
1) Most C/S mats are designed for traffic crossing perpendicular to the rail.
2) When designing an entranceway, it is preferable to minimize the need for
turning on the mat.
3) It is recommended that splices in wider units (above 12 feet) not be positioned
in the middle of a door opening wherever possible.
4) Flammability in accordance with ASTM E648, Class 1, Critical Radiant Flux,
minimum 0.45 watts/m2.
5) Slip resistance in accordance with ASTM D-2047-96, Coefficient of Friction,
minimum 0.60 for accessible routes. The approved systems must be certified
by the manufacturer as meeting a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.60, when
tested in wet conditions.
6) Standard rolling load performance is 350 lb./wheel with larger loading
requirements as specified (load applied to a solid 5” x 2” wide polyurethane
wheel, 1000 passes without damage).
7) Single Source Responsibility: Obtain floor mats and frames from one source of
a single Manufacturer.
TS 500 - 497
8) Utilize superior structural aluminum alloy 6063-T6 for rail connectors

Deliver materials to the site ready for use and fabricated in as large sections and
assemblies as practical, in unopened original factory packaging clearly labeled to
identify Manufacturer.
554.3.1.5 Project Conditions

1) Field measurements: Check actual openings for mats by accurate field
measurements before fabrication. Record actual measurements on final shop
drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
delay of work.
2) For recess application coordinate frame installation with concrete construction
to ensure recess and frame anchorage are accurate and that the base is level and
flat. Defer frame installation until building enclosure is complete and related
interior finish work is in progress.
554.3.2 Products
554.3.2.2 Materials
1) Aluminum - ASTM B 221, alloys 6063-T5, 6063-T6 for extrusions.
2) Architectural Bronze - ASTM B 455, copper/zinc alloy C38500 for extrusions.
3) Vinyl/ Acrylic - High-impact PVC alloy.
4) Flexible and prime PVC extrusions.
5) Tread insert options - refer to section 2.05.
a) Floor Mats
b) Mat Frames
It is recommended that the surface beneath the mat be finished with a
leveling screed to ensure optimum performance of the system.
i) SM - Tapered Vinyl Frame shall be 38.1mm wide, with tapered lead-
in edge for surface mounted applications. Frame color shall be black
or brown as offered by Manufacturer.
TS 500 - 498
ii) LB – Level Base Frame shall be a 3/4" deep recessed frame in 6063-
T5 aluminum alloy (optional architectural bronze) with ¼” wide
exposed surface. Black or brown vinyl fillers shall be furnished as
required when standard 2" tread spacing cannot be maintained. Frame
color shall be supplied in mill (standard) or one of 7 optional colors
as offered by Manufacturer. (Custom colors are available.) Engineer
to choose from anodized or heavy-duty powder coat finish. Note: Mill
finish frames in contact with concrete to be primer coated. Installer
shall use recommended latex screed to ensure level base.
iii) TNG - Tapered Angle Frame - Shall be a 12.7mm deep recessed
frame in 6063-T5 aluminum alloy. Frame color shall be supplied in
standard mill or one of 7 optional colors as offered by Manufacturer.
(Custom colors are available.) Engineer to choose from anodized or
heavy-duty powder coat finish. Note: Mill finish frames in contact
with concrete
iv) TA – Surface Mounted Aluminum Frame shall be a 38.1mm wide
6063-T5 aluminum alloy and permanently positions mat for surface
mounted applications. Frame color shall be supplied in mill
(standard) or one of 7 optional colors as offered by Manufacturer.
(Custom colors are available.) Engineer to choose from anodized or
with concrete to be primer-coated.
v) THFR- Threshold Frame shall be supplied in 6063-T6 aluminum
alloy. For surface/ recess installations to provide a flush transition
from the entryway door threshold to the mat surface. The frame does
not require a leveling screed. Engineer to choose from anodized or
with concrete to be primer-coated.
vi) PS - Pipe-Stem Frame as supplied in 6063-T5-aluminum alloy creates
a receiver for surrounding commercial carpet. Frame color shall be
supplied in standard mill or one of 7 optional colors as offered by
manufacturer. (Custom colors are available.) Engineer to choose from
anodized or heavy-duty powder coat finish. Note: Mill finish frames
in contact with concrete to be primer-coated.
554.3.3 Execution
1) Examination
Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is
to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely
completion.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2) Preparation
TS 500 - 499
Manufacturer shall offer assistance and guidance to provide a template of

irregular shaped mat assemblies to ensure a proper installation.
3) Installation
a) Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's
recommendations.
b) Set mat at height recommended by Manufacturer for most effective
cleaning action.
c) Coordinate top of mat surface with bottom of doors that swing across to
provide ample clearance between door and mat.
4) Cleaning
It is important to the life cycle of the entrance mat that a maintenance schedule
be developed which includes regular vacuuming and extraction that correctly
matches the amount of traffic the mat incurs.
5) Protection
a) After completing required frame installation and concrete work, provide
temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recess, and cover frames with
plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic
has ended and project is near time of substantial completion.
b) Defer installation of floor mats until time of substantial completion of
Project.

Quantity of each type and configuration of furniture are not measured but all
furniture shown on the Drawing are measured as the “Lump Sum” except following
items:

Item Number
554(1) 850mm x 850mm, Automatic Ticket Vending Machine Each
554(2) 1200mm x 700mm, Point of Sale Each
554(3) T=300mm x L=2000mm x H=1000mm, Automatic Ticket Gate Each
TS 500 - 500
T=300mm x L=2000mm x H=1000mm, Automatic Ticket

554(4) Each
Gate, Wide Gate Type for Wheel Chair
554(5) 700mm x 1400mm, Desk Each
554(6) 800mm x 700mm, 1-Seter Armchair Each
554(7) 750mm x 1800mm, Table Each
554(8) 450mm x 450mm, Chair Each
554(9) 400mm∅ Chair, Matrix Medium Back Chair Each
554(10) 700mm x 1800mm Desk Each
554(11) 700mm x 1600mm, Cabinet Each
554(12) 450mm x 1600mm, Shelf Each
554(13) 450mm x 1200mm Seating Each
554(14) 450mm x 600mm, Locker Each
554(15) 900mm x 1800mm, Bed Each
554(16) 700mm x 2100mm, 3-Seater Sofa Each
554(17) 720mm x 1550mm, 2-Seater Sofa Each
554(18) 670mmm x 720mmm, 1-Seater Sofa Each
554(19) 480mm x 720mm, H=130mmm, Center Table Each
554(20) 700mm x 600mm, Chair Each
Dept OCC Description Unit of

Item Number
D554(1)a Furniture Lump Sum
Dept WS Description Unit of

Item Number
D554(1)b Furniture Lump Sum
Dept LRS Description Unit of

Item Number
D554(1)c Furniture Lump Sum
TS 500 - 501
Dept TC Description Unit of

Item Number
D554(1)d Furniture Lump Sum
TS 500 - 502
555 SIGNAGES
The Work
installation onsite of signs, signages, including all accessories and support/anchorage
555.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required signs, signages, including
all accessories and support/anchorage provisions, as shown on the Drawings and/or
as specified herein.
555.1.2 Description
The Contractor shall install a system of informational signs at various stations and
locations on the platforms and parking areas. The actual positioning of the signs and
the wording of each sign shall be designed by the Engineer in consultation with the
Contractor before the works of providing and erecting the signs is commenced.
Supplier/Manufacturers, Quality assurance, Materials, Technical data, samples and
method of Fabrication, assembly and installation and schedule for each type of
signage, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
555.1.3 Specifications
Signs shall be designed in accordance with the relevant and applicable sections of
the BNBC:
1) Painted signs of pavements, such as standard Handicap Parking signs;
2) Billboard signs at entrances to parking areas;
3) Illuminated signs in the station buildings and on platforms; and
4) Dynamic electronic information board with voice support.
The Contractor shall install the signs in accordance with international standards, with
paint that shall remain visible for at least eight years before requiring repainting. The
Contractor shall ensure that the signs are painted professionally, using templates, so
that the images are complete, positive representations of the standards. The
Contractor shall provide any necessary barriers and restraints so that the signs are not
walked on before they are completely dry.
TS 500 - 503
555.1.5 Painted Signs on Pavements

Signs shall be designed and located according to BR traffic control requirements.
Paint shall be road marking paint to relevant international standards
555.1.6 Billboard Signs

Billboard signs shall be erected by the Contractor at the entrances to the car parking
area (2 signs), at the entrance to the auto-rickshaw parking area (1 sign) and at the
entrance to the rickshaw parking area (1 sign), all adjacent to the Station Buildings.
Billboard signs shall also be placed at the egress points from the same parking areas
(5 signs).
Signs shall be 1.2m wide by 600mm deep, of framed sheet metal construction, each
supported by two 38 mm dia., GI pipes with fittings, set in concrete 300 x 300 x
500mm deep. Signs shall be erected to line and level, as directed by the Engineer and
so that they will not come into contact with vehicles.
Sheet metal shall be painted with an approved primer and two top coats to form a
background for the wording of the sign. Color shall be as directed by the Engineer.
Wording shall be applied with stencils to provide lettering of true shape, in vertical
form and of widths in accordance with the above standard.
Wordings, in letters 100 mm high, shall consist of text in two lines, as appropriate,
as below;
1) “ENTRANCE/CAR PARKING”
2) “ENTRANCE/STATION PLAZA”
3) “ENTRANCE/PUV”.
555.1.7 Illuminated Signs

Illuminated signs shall be erected in the Station Buildings, and on all platforms. Signs
shall be directional, such as “ EXIT → ” , or locational such as “ TICKET
OFFICE”. Positions and details of signs shall be determined during a walkthrough
with representatives of the Employer, the Engineer and the Contractor. Total number
of signs is estimated at 60. Maximum number of characters in a sign is estimated at
26 (2 signs), but the majority of the signs shall contain no more than ten (10)
characters.
The Contractor shall supply and erect the signs and arrange for appropriate energy
sources.
TS 500 - 504

Quantity of each type and configuration of furniture are not measured but all
furniture shown on the Drawing are measured as the “Lump Sum” but the rate of the
following items shall be included electrical work:
1) Wayfinding and Time table Signage (Refer to Drawing for detail)
a) Signage suspension
b) Analog clock, LED lamps and 4 No. of LED indicators 96 corners.
c) Electrical wiring from designated distribution board to signage including
switches.
2) Electronics Directional Signage (Refer to Drawing for detail)
a) Signage suspension
b) 6 No of Ballast 40w lighting fixtures
switches.
3) Station Name Signage (Refer to Drawing for detail)
a) Signage fixing fasteners including all necessary accessories.
b) 6 No of 40w lighting fixtures
switches.

Item Number
Passenger Information Signage
sHG-01: Wayfinding and Time Table, Both side Desplay,
P555(1)a Each
Overall size: H=360 x W=6990mm, Depth 250mm
eWD-02: Station Name, Wall and/or Surface mout tpye,
P555(1)b Each
Overall size: H=600 x W=3600mm, Depth 150mm
TS 500 - 505
eHG-03: Directional Sign, Both side Display, Overall

P555(1)c Each
size: H=340 x W=6990mm, Depth 250mm
pST-01: Floor Mounted Billboard Signage, Both side
P555(1)d Display, Above Floor Overall size: H=1990 x Each
W=2650mm, Depth120mm
Wall Mounted Sign
WS555(1)a WS1-01: Entrance Each
WS555(1)b WS1-02: Exit Each
WS555(1)c WS2-01: Ramp (UP) Each
WS555(1)d WS2-02: Ramp (DOWM) Each
WS555(1)e WS2-03: No Smoking Each
WS555(1)f WS2-04: Fire Hose Each
WS555(1)g WS2-05: Fire Extinguisher Each
WS555(1)h WS2-06: Rest Room (MALE) Each
WS555(1)i WS2-07: Rest Room (FEMALE) Each
WS555(1)j WS2-08: Rest Room (PWD) Each
WS555(1)k WS2-09: Infant Facility (G. A.D & B. F. RM) Each
WS555(1)l WS2-10: Bus/Bus Stop Each
WS555(1)m WS2-11: Taxi/Taxi Stop Each
WS555(1)n WS3-01: Caution (HGH VOLTAGE) Each
WS555(1)o WS3-02: Emergency Each
WS555(1)p WS4-01: Counter Service Each
WS555(1)q WS5-01: Station Name, Platform Area Each
Door Sign
DS555(1)a DS1-01: Station Staff Room and Pantry Each
DS555(1)b DS1-02: Station Manager Office Each
DS555(1)c DS1-03: Distribution Board Room Each
DS555(1)d DS1-04: SER (Signal Equipment Room) Each
DS555(1)e DS1-05: Railway Electrical Room Each
DS555(1)f DS1-06: Station Electrical Room Each
DS555(1)g DS1-07: Communication UPS Room Each
DS555(1)h DS1-08: Signal UPS Room Each
DS555(1)i DS1-09: Domestic Water Tank Room Each
DS555(1)j DS1-10: Fire Water Tank & Pump Room Each
DS555(1)k DS1-11: Training & Maintenance Shop Each
TS 500 - 506
DS555(1)l DS2-01: BMS Room Each

DS555(1)m DS2-02: Security Room Each
DS555(1)n DS2-03: OCS Room Each
DS555(1)o DS2-04: AFC UPS Room Each
DS555(1)p DS2-05: Communication Room Each
DS555(1)q DS2-06: Customer Service Each
DS555(1)r DS2-07: Cleaner's Room Each
DS555(1)s DS2-08: Storage Room Each
DS555(1)t DS2-09: First Aid Room Each
DS555(1)u DS2-10: G. A.D (Gender and Development) Each
DS555(1)v DS2-11: B. F. R ( Breast Feeding Room) Each
DS555(1)w DS2-12: AFC Room Each
DS555(1)a DS3-01: Restroom (FEMALE) Each
DS555(1)y DS3-02: Restroom (MALE) Each
DS555(1)z DS3-03: Restroom (PWD) Each
DS555(1)aa DS3-04: No Entry Each
DS555(1)ab DS3-05: Fire Exit Each
DS555(1)ac DS4-01: Restricted Area Each

Item Number
555(18) Signages (To include Door Signs, Wall Mounted Signs, Lump Sum
Hanging Signs, Emergency Exit Signs, Directional Signs, Free-
Standing Billboard, Station Name, Wayfinding Time & Table,
etc., including Support Frames / Accessories)

Number
Signages (To include Door Signs, Wall Mounted Signs,
Hanging Signs, Emergency Exit Signs, Directional Signs, Free-
D555(34) Lump Sum
Standing Billboard, Station Name, Wayfinding Time & Table,
etc., including Support Frames / Accessories)
TS 500 - 507
556 WALK-THROUGH METAL DETECTOR (SECURITY SYSTEM) - Not Used
TS 500 - 508
557 ELEVATORS
The Work
The works in this section specifies the requirements for the design, supply, installation
and maintenance of electro-hydraulic elevators.
1) Elevator Design.
Elevator shall be designed the approve Elevator Manufacturer based on the
Elevator General Drawing and Specification of this Section.
2) Factory Inspection.
Factory Inspection shall be carried out by the Engineer. The timing of Factory
Inspection will be determined by the Engineer.
3) Dimensions
The dimensions indicated on the drawing for hoist way pit and machine rooms and
rough openings for entrances are fixed dimensions.
4) Definitions
a) All items in this Specification shall have the meaning defined in the “Safety
Code for Elevators, Dumb-waiters, Escalators and Moving Walks”, as
approved by the Philippine National Standards.
b) In all cases where device or part of the equipment is herein referred to in the
singular number, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many such
devices as are required to complete the installation.
c) Control Center: a remote-control center located in the transit maintenance
depot at Valenzuela which monitors all control systems.
5) Codes
a) Elevator work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the
Philippine Electrical Code regulations pursuant to local Factories Act and any
other code which may govern the requirements of the installation.
b) The elevators shall conform to the National Building Code Part 10, Vertical
Access for the Handicapped.
6) System Description
a) All elevators shall have automatic operation and shall be accessible to
handicapped as well as general public.
b) Elevators shall operate as selective collective systems except for those
elevators having no intermediate landings which shall operate as two-stop
systems.
c) Elevators shall have the capability of restrictive use with remote control of the
enable/disable function. Keyed switches shall provide local priority over the
remote command.
d) All elevators shall be available for access by firefighters.
TS 500 - 509
e) Elevator cabs shall have glazed panels except for elevated station entrances
station platform elevators which will have glazed doors only.
7) Contractor’s Submittals
Before commencing Work, contractor’s drawing shall be submitted to the Engineer,
for review. Drawings shall indicate the complete layout of the elevators plant, loads
to be carried on building structure hoist way and entrances.
8) Permits and Inspection
The Contractor shall obtain and pay for necessary city municipal inspection and
permits, fees and licenses for the elevator in conformance with the General
Conditions and make such tests as are called for by their regulations. The tests shall
be made in the presence of DOTR or its authorized representatives.
9) Maintenance Program
a) A detailed maintenance program, showing functions to be performed and their
scheduled frequency shall be provided in accordance with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer’s Manual (OEMM)
b) Instruction and maintenance data shall be submitted in accordance with the
OEMM.
Maintenance Data shall include:
i) Description of elevator system’s method of operation and control,
including hydraulic system and special or non-standard features provided;
ii) Parts catalogues giving complete list of repair and replacement parts with
identifying numbers;
iii) Legible schematic wiring diagrams covering electrical equipment as
supplied and installed, including changes made in final work, with
symbols listed corresponding to identify markings on both machine room
and elevator equipment.
10) Temporary Facilities
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary power and other
utilities and all temporary hoisting equipment required for the installation of
elevators.
Products
557.2.1 Elevator Equipment

1) Quantity and Type
Rated Load 9000 kg. (Type 1200)
6000 kg. (Type 800)
Rated Speed 38.5 m/min.
Landings Served As indicated
Total Travel As indicated
TS 500 - 510
Operation Two stop automatic and selective collective automatic

Car Dimension As indicated
Car Door Single or two speed as indicated
Machine Location As indicated
Power Supply 400 Volts, three-phase, 60 hertz
Signals Car and hall registration lights, alarm, car lantern and car position indicator
for all elevators
2) Additional Features
Sound isolation features:
Low oil control, Emergency car lighting, Telephone cabinet with telephone handset,
Car fan, Car exit hatch, Fire detection alarm, and P.A. Speaker.
557.2.2 Piping
All necessary pipes and fittings to connect the power unit to the jack unit shall be supplied
and installed in accordance with the requirements of the Specification. All underground
piping shall be adequately protected against corrosion.
557.2.3 Electric Circuit Wiring

1) Furnish and install complete necessary insulated wiring to connect all parts of the
equipment.
2) Insulated wiring shall have a flame retarding and moisture resisting outer cover and
shall run in metal conduit, metallic tubing or wire ducts.
3) Travelling cables between car and hoist way shall have flame retarding and
moisture resisting outer cover. They shall be flexible and be suitably suspended to
relieve strains in the individual conductors.
4) All insulated conductor and conduit or tubing as well as fittings, including metal
boxes, troughs and ducts shall comply with the requirements of the Philippine
Electrical Code.
557.2.4 Two- Stop Automatic Operational

1) A flush mounted operating station shall be furnished in the cat containing push-
button, emergency alarm button, door open button and a key operated light/fan
switch. The emergency call button shall be connected to an alarm bell.
2) At each landing a single call push-button shall be provided.
3) Operation shall be arranged so that momentary pressure of car button for the
opposite terminal dispatches the car to that terminal.
4) Calls registered by momentary pressure of landing buttons at any time shall remain
registered until car stops in response to that call at that landing.
5) If no calls are registered the car shall home to the ticket concourse level and park
with its doors closed.
TS 500 - 511
557.2.5 Wiring
1) A flush mounted operating station shall be furnished in the car containing push-
buttons numbered to correspond to landings served, emergency alarm button,
emergency stop button, a door open button, and a key operated light/fan switch.
The finish mounted operating stations shall meet ADA (Americans with
Disabilities Act).
2) At each terminal landing a single push-button shall be provided and at each
intermediate landing a button fixture shall be provided containing UP and DOWN
push-buttons. Push buttons shall meet ADA.
3) When a call is registered by momentary pressure on a car or landing button, the
button shall become illuminated and remain illuminated until the call is answered.
4) Operation shall be automatic by means of the car and landing buttons. Stops
registered by the momentary actuation of the car buttons shall be made irrespective
of the number of buttons actuated or the sequence in which the buttons are actuated.
5) Stops registered by the momentary actuation of the landing buttons shall be made
in order in which the landings are reached in each direction of travel after the
buttons have been actuated. All stops shall be subject to the respective car or
landing buttons being actuated sufficiently in advance of the arrival of the car at
that landing to enable the stop to be made. The direction of travel for an idle car
shall be established by the first car or landing button actuated.
6) UP landing calls shall be answered while the car is travelling in the up direction
and DOWN landing calls shall be answered while the car is travelling down. The
car shall reverse after and proceed to answer car calls and landing calls registered
in the opposite direction of travel. If no other calls are registered the car shall home
to the ticket concourse landing and park with its doors closed.
7) When a car stops for landing call and car button is then actuated within a
predetermined time interval for a landing corresponding to the direction the car was
travelling, it shall proceed in the same direction regardless of other landing calls
registered.
8) In case of power failure, the landing doors shall be programmed to close
automatically, powered by a suitable battery pack provided and installed by the
Contractor.
557.2.6 Cylinder and Plunger

1) All elevators will be indirect type with back or side plunger.
2) The cylinder shall be constructed of steel pipe of sufficient thickness to withstand
the effect of corrosion failure for a period of 30 years and suitable for a working
pressure of 2.75 Mpa. The top of the cylinder shall be equipped with a seal and a
means of collecting any oil seepage. No cathodic protection is to be provided.
3) The plunger shall be constructed of selected steel tubing or pipe of proper diameter
machined true and smooth with a fine polished finish. The plunger shall be
provided with a stop ring welded to the bottom to prevent the plunger from leaving
TS 500 - 512
the cylinder. The plunger shall be secured to the car frame by means of a suitable
platen connection.
4) The plunger and cylinder shall be installed plumb and must operate freely with a
minimum friction.
557.2.7 Pumping Unit

The pumping unit shall be of integral design and shall include an electrical motor
connected to a pump, a hydraulic control system, a storage tank necessary piping
connection and a controller, all compactly designed as a single self-contained unit. The
motor and pump assembly shall be mounted on a rubber isolated inner base.
Refer to Section 615 of this Specification.
557.2.8 Pump
The pump shall be appositive displacement screw type to give smooth operation and shall
be especially designed and manufactured for elevator service.
557.2.9 Motor
The motor shall be of the alternating current, three-phase, 400volt squirrel cage induction
type and shall be of a design especially adapted to electro-hydraulic requirements.
Hydraulic Control System
1) The hydraulic control system shall be of compact design for the required pressures.
The control valve shall be a manifold with up, down and check valve connections.
A control section including solenoid valves will direct the main valve and control
up and down starting, transition from full speed to leveling speed, up and down
stops, pressure relief and manual lowering. Down speed and up and down leveling
shall be controlled at the main valve sections. All functions shall be fully adjustable
for maximum smoothness. All control systems shall be factory adjusted.
2) The manual lowering feature shall permit lowering the elevator at slow speed in
the event of power failure or for adjusting purposes.
557.2.10 Storage Tank

Oil storage capacity shall be equal to volume of oil required to lift elevator to top terminal
plus reserve of not less than 45 liters.
557.2.11 Low Oil Control

A control device shall be provided that shall automatically cause up-travelling cars to
descend to lower terminal landing if reservoir oil level is insufficient. Control shall
prevent car from being returned to service until oil reservoir is refilled.
557.2.12 Leveling Devices

The elevator shall be provided with an automatic leveling device which will bring the car
to a stop within 6.0mm of the landing level regardless of load or direction of travel.
TS 500 - 513
Landing level shall be maintained within the leveling zone irrespective of the hoistway
doors being open or closed.
557.2.13 Piping
Pipe of adequate size and thickness shall be installed between the pumping unit and the
cylinder heard. A shut off valve shall be provided in the machine room for maintenance
and adjusting purposes.
557.2.14 Controller
1) An electro-magnetic or solid- state controller shall be provided including necessary
starting switches together with all relays, switches and required hardware.
Overload relays shall be provided to protect the motor.
2) Controller shall be capable of accepting a remote-control input consisting on one
single pole normally open dry relay contact rated for 1.0 amp continuous current at
250 volts AC maximum, which shall cause all hall station call buttons to become
inoperative, cars to park with doors closed and car operating panels operative.
Normal operation to resume when remote contact opened.
3) Controller shall provide one single pole normally open dry relay contact with a
maximum closed-circuit resistance of 5 ohms to indicate an elevator common
trouble condition. By convention a closed relay contact shall indicate a trouble
condition. The SCADA shall monitor this trouble indication output with one two-
wire input circuit, which shall have a maximum closed circuit of 100 milliamps and
a maximum open circuit voltage of 30 volts DC. Four adjacent terminal block
connections shall be provided in the elevator controller.
4) Common trouble condition relays shall indicate the following trouble conditions:
a) Emergency stop button activated;
b) Low oil reservoir detector activated;
c) Car stall alarm activated;
d) Pit emergency stop switch activated.
e) Power failure (emergency cab lighting activated); and
f) Landing door interlock and car door lock open after 60 to 120 seconds
adjustable time.
5) Each remote elevator monitor, and control function shall be associated with
terminal blocks capable of accepting 12 AWG stranded copper wires.
6) Each terminal connection shall be clearly identified on a name-tag consisting of
three-layer plastic, white/black/white with 4.75mm high etched lettering giving
black letters on a white background.
7) The remote elevator monitors and control functions shall be interfaced with
SCADA located in the Station Telecommunications Room.
8) The speaker and microphone shall be connected to the wires from the cross connect
panel in the electronic Equipment Box.
TS 500 - 514
9) Each monitor function (switch or relay contact) connection to SCADA shall be

electrically isolated. No common connections or connection to ground shall be
permitted.
10) The Contractor shall be responsible for the full integration of the elevator control
and monitoring systems with SCADA including all necessary wiring, terminations
and connections.
11) Controllers located in areas protected by sprinkler systems shall be EEMAC ‘3’
construction.
557.2.15 Car Stall Protective Circuit

A protective circuit shall be provided which will stop the motor and the pump and return
the car to its lowest landing in the event the car does not reach its designated landing
within a predetermined time interval. This circuit shall permit a normal exit from the car
but prevent operation of the elevator until the trouble has been corrected.
557.2.16 Muffler
A blow-out proof muffler to minimize transmission of fluid pulsations shall be furnished
in the piping system between the pump and the cylinder.
557.2.17 Sound Reducing Enclosure

1) The lower area of the power unit where the pump and valve are installed shall be
enclosed with sheet steel panels lined with sound-deadening material.
2) For submersible pump unit, the acoustical lining described above is not required.
557.2.18 Hoistway Operating Devices

Normal terminal stopping devices shall be provided. Emergency terminal stopping
device if required shall be furnished and the controller switches and circuitry arranged
accordingly.
557.2.19 Car Platform

The car platform shall be of all steel construction and be equipped with an aluminum
threshold.
557.2.20 Car Frame

A suitable car frame fabricated from formed or structural steel shall be provided with
adequate bracing to supporting the platform and car enclosure. The car frame shall be
isolated from the platen plate by means of rubber isolation mounts. The buffer striking
plate on the underside of the car frame members must fully compress the spring buffers
mounted in the pit before the plunger reaches its down limit of travel. Rubber tired roller
guide or guide slippers shall be mounted on top and bottom of the car frame to engage
the guide rails. Car side panels shall be glazed, except elevators entrances Type A
entrance doors for station entrances shall be glazed.
TS 500 - 515
557.2.21 Guides
Steel elevator guide rails shall be furnished and erected plumb and securely fastened to
the building structure.
557.2.22 Door Operations

1) Doors on the car and at the hoistway entrances shall be operated by means of a
power operator mounted on top of the car. The motor shall have positive control
over door movement for smooth operation. The car door shall have a full height
safety shoe to cause instant reopening should contact be made with any obstruction
during the closing cycle.
2) Door operation shall be automatic at each landing, with door opening being
initiated as the car arrives at the landing and closing taking place after a time
interval. A car door electric contact shall prevent starting the elevator away from
the landing unless the car door is in its closed position.
3) A positive interlock shall be provided for each hoistway entrance which shall
prevent operation of the hydraulic unit unless all doors for that elevator are closed
and shall maintain the doors in their closed position while the elevator is away from
the landing.
557.2.23 Light Ray Device

Two horizontal light rays shall be projected across the elevator car entrance which will
prevent the doors from closing as long as either light ray is interrupted or safety shoe is
activated. After a step is made, the door shall remain open for a predetermined interval,
unless closing is initiated sooner by registration of car call.
557.2.24 Car Enclosure

1) The car shell walls shall be glazed as shown on the drawing. Unglazed walls shall
be furniture steel or wood core with minimum 0.911mm sheet steel backing both
sides and edges finished to plain color semi-gloss enamel. Walls shall have a
removable panel with laminated low glare surface. Where walls contain doors, the
wall return panels shall be formed stainless steel, finished to semi-gloss enamel.
The floor shall be designed to accept rubber floor sheet or tile.
2) Steel handrails that conform to ADA requirements shall be provided on side and
rear walls that do not contain doors. Handrails shall be finished with aliphatic
urethane coating, shop applied. Colors will be custom red or green to match the
station identification color.
3) The car entrance shall be provided with single or two speed slide door of hollow
metal construction finished with aliphatic urethane coating finish, custom color.
The car entrance soffit, jamb and transom shall be formed stainless steel to match
adjacent wall finish.
4) Lighting shall consist of overhead recessed warm white fluorescent fixtures that
provide a maintained illumination level 100 lux minimum at car floor level.
5) Emergency exit in car canopy shall be in accordance with code.
TS 500 - 516
6) Ventilation shall consist of an exhaust type blower, canopy mounted and sound
isolated and equipped with a screen with openings 6mm x 6mm maximum.
7) Floor shall be designed to accept 3.175mm minimum thick resilient floor tile.
8) Interior finishes of elevator cab enclosures shall conform to the Flame Spread
Ratings and Smoke Developed Classifications of National Building Code. Color of
plastic laminate shall be as selected by the engineer from full color range available.
9) Recessed enclosures for operating for operating and control functions and
emergency telephone cabinet shall be airtight to the car exterior.
557.2.25 Car Direction Lanterns

Car direction of travel lanterns with audible signal to satisfy handicap code shall be
positioned on opening side of car door jamb.
557.2.26 Public Address

Provide a grille in the car roof and provide to install a public-address speaker 2 x 2 twisted
pair #8 wiring shall be supplied with the car traveling cable and all necessary
terminations and connections made to integrate the speaker with the building’s public
address system.
557.2.27 Fire Detection

Car position indicators shall be provided in the car travelling cable for connection to a
fire detection circuit. A smoke detector, as specified in Philippines Electrical Code shall
be installed in the cab and all terminations and connections made so as to integrate the
smoke detector with the building’s fire alarm system.
557.2.28 Car Position Indicator

Car position indicators shall be provided for all elevators and shall be mounted in a
horizontal row in the car operating panel or in the car door transom. They shall indicate
the location of the car relative to the landing by illumination of the indicator.
557.2.29 Car Operating Panel

1) The flush mounted operating panel shall contain call registration buttons for each
landing, emergency alarm button, emergency stop button, door open button and
key operated switches.
2) All opening, and emergency control function buttons shall be additionally
identified with symbol or letter braille plates to meet handicap requirements located
to the left of the buttons. Buttons shall say “T” for train (platform level) “C” for
concourse and “S” for street level.
3) To the right of the control function button shall be located and engraved and colored
floor identification legend, maximum of eight letters, as determined by the
Engineer.
4) Car operating panel shall be mounted to allow for use by handicapped persons in
accordance with Local Building Code.
TS 500 - 517
557.2.30 Emergency Car Lighting

1) Emergency car lighting shall be provided by a battery-operated emergency lighting
unit that is constructed in accordance with current codes. Emergency lighting unit
to be FM approved. Period of operation shall be 60 minutes minimum.
2) Battery shall have a minimum one-hour life under load, in the event of a power
failure.
557.2.31 Telephone Compartment

A telephone compartment, 350mm high x 200mm wide x 200mm deep (internally) shall
be provided in the car operating panel, with a hinged, stainless steel door. Necessary
wiring shall be included in the car travelling cable terminating in the elevator machine
room.
557.2.32 Sight Guards

The leading edge of hoistway door panel shall be provided with a sight guard of the same
finish as the door panel.
557.2.33 Elevator Lobby

1) A single flush mounted call button shall be furnished at each terminal and
directional arrow buttons of manufacturer’s standard design at all intermediate
landings. Buttons shall be provided with an extra set of normally open contacts to
be used to signal control center when elevator is shut down on restricted access
mode.
2) A keyed switch for elevator maintenance shall be provided to control power source
for “in service” control and shall be located at the lowest terminal station. This
switch shall have priority over the restricted access remote control system.
3) A keyed switch for elevators serving all stations shall be provided for fireman
access located at the grade or street level landing station. Firemen’s access keys for
all stations shall be common and shall have priority over other keyed switches and
the remote-control system.
4) A keyed switch shall be provided for hoistway access when the elevator is shut
down on restricted access mode and shall be located at the first station above the
lowest terminal station. This switch shall have priority over the remote control
system.
5) Lobby call box: space above the box to be used for a speaker, and below the box
for a microphone requiring 100 x 73 and 50 x 73mm respectively.
6) Exposed cover plate to accommodate switches, buttons and accessories shall be of
brushed stainless steel and incorporate a graphic sign reading IN CASE OF FIRE
USE STAIRS, etched in red. This plate shall be extended top and bottom to cover
area of speaker and microphone and provided with two studs each for the speaker
and microphone.
7) A speaker and microphone shall be supplied and mounted to the back of the face
plate.
TS 500 - 518
557.2.34 Terminal Limit Switches

Terminal limit switches shall be provided in the hoistway designed to automatically stop
the car at the terminal landings.
557.2.35 Illuminated Hall Buttons

Call registration lights shall be provided in each hall push button unit. When a button is
pressed it shall illuminate, signaling that the call has been registered. Each button shall
remain illuminated until the call has been answered.
557.2.36 Illuminated Car Buttons

Call registration lights shall be provided in each car button. When a button is pressed it
shall illuminate, signaling that the call has been registered. Each button shall remain
illuminated until the call has been answered.
557.2.37 Hoistway Entrances

1) A hoistway entrance shall be provided for each landing served, both front and rear
where applicable. Entrances shall consist of flush metal doors, baked enamel finish
of custom color, build-in hanger assembly, frames assembled for unit installation,
extruded aluminum sill, fascia, toe guard, hanger cover, header, hanger track
assembly and structural supports. Fascia plates shall be furnished and mounted both
front and rear of each hoistway where applicable.
2) Hoistway entrance frames shall be stainless steel.
3) Hoistway doors shall be flush type steel with aliphatic urethane finish of custom
color, for lobby side.
4) Sills, struts, headers, hanger covers, and unit frames shall be erected prior to the
erection of rough wall and set in proper relation to the car guide rails. Door panels
shall be installed after the walls finished.
557.2.38 Pit Emergency Stop Switch

An emergency stop switch shall be provided in the elevator pit, designed to cut off current
supply to motor and down direction valves and bring the car to rest independently of the
regular operating devices.
557.2.39 Work Light

A work light and outlet receptacle shall be provided on the car crosshead.
Execution
557.3.1 Elevator Installation

Elevator shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s directions and applicable
codes using experienced workmen.
TS 500 - 519
557.3.2 Jack Unit Excavation

1) Drilling of the jack unit hole shall be undertaken in any soil condition including
boulders, sand, water, quicksand or bedrock.
2) Supply and install sand backfill in jack hole after the cylinder has been set.
3) Remove all excess excavated material and debris accumulating from drilling of the
cylinder holes from the Work Site.
557.3.3 Guide Installation

The guides shall be erected plumb within 3mm and be properly located and supported so
as not to become distorted by eccentric loading. They shall be suitably bottomed in the
pit and extend to the underside of the overhead slab or grating.
557.3.4 Wiring Installation

All wiring necessary shall be installed and terminated to connect operating buttons,
switches and signals in the hoistway and all electrical equipment on the car to the elevator
control panel.
557.3.5 Hoistway Entrances Erection

The entrance structures shall be erected prior to the completion of the hoistway walls and
shall be set in proper relation to the elevator car guides. The hoistway entrance frames
and door panels complete with hangers shall be erected as building progress requires.
557.3.6 Painting
Unless otherwise specified, all exposed metal work furnished under this section shall
receive a minimum of one coat primer.
557.3.7 Maintenance Service

1) The contract Price shall include for full maintenance of elevator equipment starting
at the completion of installation and ending at the completion of the Warranty
period. This service shall consist of systematic monthly examinations of the
equipment including necessary adjustments, lubrication, cleaning, supplies and
parts except repairs made necessary by abuse, misuse, or other causes beyond the
control of the Contractor. All maintenance shall be done by the Contractor with
employees trained by the elevator manufacturer and during regular working hours
of the trade as far as possible. The Contractor shall repair or replace electrical and
mechanical parts of the elevator equipment whenever this is required and use only
genuine standard parts produced by the manufacturer of the equipment concerned.
2) The maintenance service Work shall also include the following which shall be
performed immediately prior to the end of maintenance staff:
a) A full manual clean down adjustment of the equipment, and submittal of all
associated forms to the regulatory agency having jurisdiction and of copies to
the Engineer.
TS 500 - 520
b) A full demonstration of the equipment to show The Employers qualified

maintenance staff how to troubleshoot and maintain the equipment;
c) A final handover inspection at which all maintenance records, including
monthly maintenance reports, for the maintenance period, shall be made for
the Employers review.
d) Evidence shall be submitted to the Employer upon request to show successful
experience in the complete maintenance of elevators, that competent
personnel are available to handle this service, That an adequate stock of parts
is available locally for replacement or emergency purposes and that qualified
personnel are available locally to ensure the fulfillment of this service without
unreasonable loss of time in reaching the elevator.
e) The full maintenance service shall be performed solely by the Contractor and
shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or other contractor.
f) Overtime callback service for minor adjustment of equipment shall be
available at all times. Reimbursements for the overtime premium portion of
such callback will be provided by the Employer.
g) In the case of a breakdown, the Contractor shall perform repairs with the
utmost diligence and promptness. The Service shall be performed at anytime
with no reimbursement made for overtime premium.
h) Maintenance documentation shall be maintained and be available for review
by the Employer at all times, preventive maintenance and servicing record,
failure records for each type of equipment item and corrective maintenance
records.
i) Maintenance personnel shall be dressed in uniforms and shall register their
presence with the Employers operating personnel prior to each inspection.
557.3.8 Maintenance Data Requirements

Maintenance documentation shall be maintained and be available for review by the
Employer at all times; preventive maintenance and servicing record, failure log which
identifies failure occurrence at the elevator, failure records for each type of equipment
item and corrective maintenance records.
557.3.9 Instruction Manuals

1) The Contractor shall provide four copies of the following in accordance with
GS100 – General Specifications, “Operating and Maintenance Data” spare parts
books; operating and maintenance manuals; approved Contractor’s drawings of
wiring and circuit diagrams, including schematic diagram; and descriptive
brochures on the controls.
2) Adequate ventilation shall be provided during use of volatile or noxious substances.
3) Waste materials and rubbish shall be removed from Work Site.
4) Cleaning operations shall be scheduled so that resulting dust and other
contaminants will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
TS 500 - 521
5) Grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials shall be
removed from interior and exterior finished surfaces.
6) Lighting reflectors, lenses and other lighting surfaces shall be cleaned.

Elevator shall be measured as the “Set” and rate shall be including the following items:
1) Design of Elevators
2) Provision of the production Drawings for Engineer’s approval.
3) Elevator Factory Inspection.
4) Temporary scaffolding in the Elevator shaft during installation.

Payment for Elevator shall be made the following manner:
1) 10% of accepted unit rate: Upon approval of manufacturing Drawings.
2) 60% of accepted unit rate: Upon delivery to Site or designated storage and securely
store to the satisfaction
3) 30% of accepted unit rate: Upon completion of installation, test/Commissioning
and accepted by the Engineer.
Station Building
Pay Item Number
Elevator for Calumpit Station, 1050Kg Capacity (14 Persons), 2
557(1) Set
Stops, Travel: 4.90m, Speed: 60m/min. (Furnished & Installed)
557(2) Elevator for Calumpit Station, 1050Kg Capacity (14 Persons), 2 Set
557(3) Elevator for Apalit Station, 1050Kg Capacity (14 Persons), 2 Stops, Set
Travel: 10.03m, Speed: 60m/min. (Furnished & Installed)
557(4) Elevator for San Fernando Station, 1050Kg Capacity (14 Persons), 2 Set
557(5) Elevator for San Fernando Station, 1050Kg Capacity (14 Persons), 2 Set
557(6) Elevator for Angeles Station, 1050Kg Capacity (14 Persons), 2 Set
TS 500 - 522
557(7) Elevator for Angeles Station, 1050Kg Capacity (14 Persons), 2 Set
557(8) Elevator for Clark Station, 1050Kg Capacity (14 Persons), 2 Stops, Set
557(9) Elevator for Clark Station, 1050Kg Capacity (14 Persons), 2 Stops, Set
557(10) Elevator for CIA Station, 1050Kg Capacity (14 Persons), 2 Stops, Set
557(11) Elevator for CIA Station, 1600Kg Capacity(21 Persons), 3 Stops, Set
Dept Building
Pay Item Number
Elevator for OCC Building (EL-1),1600Kg Capacity (21 Persons), 5 Set
D557(1)
Stops, Speed 60xm/min. (Furnished & Installed)
D557(2) Elevator for Dept Workshop Building (EL-1),1600Kg Capacity (21 Set
Persons), 2 Stops, Speed 60m/min. (Furnished & Installed)
D557(3) Elevator for Training Centre Building (EL-2), 1050Kg Capacity Set
(14 Persons), 2 Stops, Speer: 60m/min. (Furnished & Installed)
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 523
558 ESCALATORS
The Work
The works in this section specifies the requirements for the design, supply, installation
and maintenance of escalators.
1) Escalators Design.
Escalators shall be designed the approve Escalators Manufacturer based on the
Escalators General Drawing and Specification of this Section.
2) Factory Inspection.
Factory Inspection shall be carried out by the Engineer. The timing of Factory
Inspection will be determined by the Engineer.
General Description
558.2.1 Compliance to Basic Safety

In case rise is exceeding 10m, multi-drive (drive unit shall be more than 2 sets) system
and step link (instead of step chain) shall be applied for higher reliability. This is
preventing reverse movement of escalator steps for high rise. General
See the drawings and Particular Specifications for escalator locations, sizes, materials,
etc.
558.2.2 Material
1) Quality materials shall be provided throughout. JIS is cited for the level of quality
required. ISO or other equivalent standards shall be acceptable.
2) Cold-rolled steel sheet and plate (furniture steel for exposed work), stretcher-
leveled, cold-rolled commercial quality low carbon steel shall be compliant with
JIS G 3141 or equivalent.
3) Cold-rolled stainless steel sheet, plate and strip shall be type 304 or 430 compliant
with JIS G 4305 or equivalent. Available finish shall be hairline (180 grit).
4) Aluminum, applied to step shall be compliant with JIS H 2118 or equivalent,
applied to deck board shall be compliant with JIS H 4100 or equivalent.
Product
558.3.1 Main Specification
Items Details
Type S1000
Model SAJSE, SAJPE, ZAPE, ZASE
Driving system Terminal-drive system (Rise <10m), Multi-drive system (Rise => 10m)
Use Heavy Duty for station use
TS 500 - 524
Indoor
Semi-outdoor
Temperature for Semi-outdoor
- Minimum: -10C
- Operation: 0C to less than 35C
Wind pressure,
Environment - Escalators must not be exposed to direct wind pressure outside the following
ranges.
- 490N/m2 or less on the windward side
- 245N/m2 or less on the leeward side
Others,
- Measures are required for escalators installed within a 2-kilometer radius from
a shore, to protect them from direct exposure to salty wind.
Theoretical transport 9000 persons/hour
capacity (Practical
transport capacity) (1050persons/10min.)
Rated speed 0.5m/sec (30m/min)

Inclination 30˚
Motor capacity 5.5kW, 7.5kW & 11kW
Floor opening 1650mm
Escalator width 1550mm
Truss width 1500mm
Between moving
1240mm
handrails
Between skirt guards 1008mm
Step width 1004mm
Moving handrail
1000mm (at Top & Bottom)
height
Truss depth (FC) 915mm
Rail radius (Top
R1500mm (3 horizontal steps), Bottom curve: R1000mm
carrier side)
No. of
horizontal 30˚ 3.0, 1.5(for rise is less than 7m)
(flat) steps
3 phases,
Power supply
200V -50Hz, 200V to 220V -60Hz, 380 to 415V -50Hz, 380 to 440V -60Hz
Lighting power Single phase,

supply 100V - 50Hz, 100V to 127V - 60Hz, 220V to 240V- 50Hz, 220V to 230V - 60Hz
TS 500 - 525
Control system VVVF inverter control
Intermediate support Required if truss length exceeds 14.85m

(Truss depth: 915mm) (maximum support beam span 11m)
558.3.2 Truss
1) The escalator truss shall be designed to support the entire loads of escalator
equipment, full capacity load and the truss coverings, and shall have a factor of
safety and/or a deflection in accordance with the code requirements under full load
conditions.
2) The truss shall include all the frames, supports and reinforcements as necessary for
the support and fastening of the mechanical equipment of the escalators, and each
structural steel member such as steel angle and plate shall be welded. The truss
shall be divided into several sections, that is, a top truss, a bottom truss and one or
more center trusses, and divided truss sections shall be bolted each other to form a
complete rigid construction.
3) The truss shall bear on the supporting steel or concrete beams with shim packs.
4) The truss shall be painted with an anti-corrosive primer for indoor and marine paint
for semi-outdoor.
558.3.3 Oil Pan

1) Oil pan of oil-tight steel sheet construction shall be provided into the truss with the
entire length and appropriate width of truss and the pit spaces to collect any oil and
dirt dropping from step chains and steps. Steel sheet of oil pan shall be not less than
0.9mm.
2) Oil pan shall have sufficient strength of supporting the weight of maintenance
engineer.
558.3.4 Track
1) The track shall be constructed of steel to maintain permanently the proper rigidity
and shall be so installed and supported as to assure permanent alignment and
smooth operation of the running gear under all conditions.
2) The carriages and curved tracks for guiding the steps at the upper and lower
landings shall be formed from steel with smooth surface. The tracks at the lower
landing shall be designed to accommodate the movement of the carriage unit.
3) The track system shall be smooth for continuous support of the step chain wheel
from sprocket to sprocket. The transition between incline and the upper landing
level shall be accomplished by the curved track system with a minimum of
1000mm radius and between the lower landing level with a minimum of 1000 mm
radius.
TS 500 - 526
558.3.5 Drive Unit (Rise < 10m)

1) A driving unit shall have an accurately machined helical gear specially designed
for escalator service and shall operate smoothly and quietly. The driving machine
shall be mounted in the machinery space of the truss.
2) The machine shall be of high efficiency and driven by V-belts connected with a
motor. The machine shall be provided with a safety brake of electromagnetic type
and with a speed governor at input gear shaft and with a drive sprocket at the output
gear shaft.
558.3.6 Drive Unit (Rise >= 10m)

1) All escalators will be driven by at least one drive unit of its own. It will be
connected to the step link by chains. The step drive unit will be located within the
step pass of the center truss, below the top curve. Any additional required drive
units will be located in the center truss sections according to the increase of
escalator rise.
2) Every drive unit will be especially designed for escalator service, and will be
located at the slope of the truss or intermediately and supported rigidly within the
step pass, so as to assure permanently original alignment of the unit. The unit will
have the ease of removal from the truss. It also will operate smoothly and free from
noise, vibration, shock or excessive wear.
3) The drive unit is consisted of a motor, a reducer, two drive sprockets and two idler
sprockets, and two drive chains, a safety brake and a speed governor, and two drive
chain safety devices. They will be strong and compact in design that will provide
ready access to all working parts by removal of service steps.
4) Variable frequency drive with slow running (creep) speed, i.e. 0.12 to 0.19m/sec,
is to be provided from portable variable frequency controller.
5) Chain sprockets of the drive units are to distribute the load evenly on the sprocket
teeth and on the chain rollers.
6) Casted drive sprocket at each machine side over which step link will pass and
transmit motion from the drive machine to the steps.
558.3.7 Step
1) Steps shall be of the horizontal tread formation and one piece made by aluminum.
The vertical rise between treads shall not exceed 210mm for the 30 degree inclined
escalator and the depth of the tread in the direction of travel shall be not less than
400mm. The clearance between steps shall not exceed 3.0mm.
2) Step shall be designed and constructed to carry continuously an equally distributed
load corresponding to 6000N per square meter without permanent distortion.
3) Step shall be fastened to step chains axles and be removable without extensive
dismantling step chains and balustrades. Step shall be readily removable without
dismantling any parts of step drive system.
TS 500 - 527
4) Step treads shall be of wear resistant metal with closely spaced cleats and light
black grooves de-signed to provide a stable foot hold. Demarcation along both sides
of a step shall extrude from the step surface, thereby preventing passengers from
getting too close or coming into direct contact with the skirt guard. Painted and/or
non-extruded demarcation is not allowed.
5) Step risers shall be of the cleated type black-painted with vertical cleats arranged
to engage with corresponding cleats in the front end of the step tread so as to form
an interlocking unit to prevent the catching of soft vinyl shoes between the edges
of the step tread and riser.
6) Step risers shall be of the light black cleat type with vertical cleats arranged to
engage with corresponding cleats in the front end of the step tread so as to form an
interlocking unit to prevent the catching of soft vinyl shoes between the edges of
the step tread and riser.
558.3.8 Step Chain (Rise < 10m)

1) The step chains shall be of endless roller type, one located on each side of the steps.
The chains shall be made of high grade steel links with hardened pins and accurate
rollers designed to accurately engage the step sprockets to insure smooth and
vibration free operation.
2) Provision shall be made to prevent sagging or buckling of the chains and to prevent
the steps from coming in contact with each other and to also maintain substantially
contact distance between step axles of all exposed steps.
3) Each step chains shall be provided with automatic tension device at the lower
landing to maintain proper tension of the step chains under varying normal load
condition.
558.3.9 Step Chain Sprocket (Rise < 10m)

1) Each step driving unit shall be especially designed for escalator service. The top of
the step drive unit shall be rigidly mounted to the truss so as to assure and maintain
proper alignment of the unit and shall be removable and intact from the truss. On
the shaft of the top step drive unit, a ratchet wheel of the additional brake shall be
provided.
2) The bearings shall be of the self-aligning roller types and shall be dust-proof and
self-aligning and provided with ample mean for lubrication and adjustment for
wear.
3) The chain sprockets of the step drive unit shall be accurately machined to distribute
the load evenly on the sprocket teeth and on the chain rollers and shall be designated
for smooth operation.
4) The bottom of the step drive unit shall be mounted on the supporting carriage which
operate on the tracks located at each side of the truss and also be removable and
intact from the truss and shall be automatically maintain proper alignment and
tension on the step chains by means of compression springs.
TS 500 - 528
558.3.10 Step Link (Rise =>10m)

1) The steps and handrails of the escalators will be driven by two high-grade steel
links, one on each side of the step.
2) Step links will be of the endless toothed rack type located on each side of the steps.
The links will be made of laminated high-grade steel, designed to accurately engage
the drive chain so as to in-sure smooth operation. Provision will be made to prevent
sagging or buckling of the links and the prevention of steps from coming in contact
with each other, and to also maintain substantially constant distances between step
axles of all exposed steps.
3) Continuous link design will permit inspection and operation while running without
steps in place.
4) Step wheels are designed to operate quietly and smoothly, to ensure their rotation
and prevent flat spots.
5) Step wheels will be designed and mounted such that no measurable movement of
the step from side to side or front to back (rocking or tilting) is possible by an
average individual passenger moving his/her weight in either direction upon the
step (eccentric loading).
558.3.11 Step Link Sprockets (Rise =>10m)

1) Motor, it is associated equipment and graces, will be in an assembly.
2) The machine will be installed in the step pass of the inclined truss, below the upper
transition curvature, of well provided that maintenance can be carried out in
complete safety from the step area on the passenger side.
3) Motor(s) will be indirectly connected to a helical gear reducer and operational
brake will be located on the gear reducer. For link between the operational brake
and step, multiplex chains (including sprockets and step link) are used on each side
of the step.
558.3.12 Balustrade
558.3.12.1 Glass Balustrade

1) Interior Panel
Interior panels shall be made of flat tempered glass panels not less than 8.0mm in
thickness with-out posts and mullions. Interior panels shall be located under the
handrails. The shape of center grass panels shall be rectangle.
2) Guard Rail
Guard rails shall be made of stainless steel sheet not less than 1.5mm in thickness.
3) Skirt Guard Panel
Skirt guards shall be made of galvanized steel sheet not less than 2.0mm in
thickness and shall be made of low-friction paint finish on their exposed surfaces.
4) Deck Board
TS 500 - 529
Deck boards shall be made of stainless sheet not less than 1.5mm in thickness and
shall be made of anodized finish on their exposed surfaces.
558.3.12.2 Stainless Steel Panel Balustrade

1) Interior Panel
Interior panel shall be made of stainless steel sheet not less than 1.5mm in thickness
and shall be of hairline finish on their exposed surfaces.
2) Guard Rail
Guard rails shall be made of stainless steel sheet not less than 1.5mm in thickness
and shall be of hairline finish on their exposed surfaces.
3) Skirt Guard Panel
Skirt guards shall be made of galvanized steel sheet not less than 2.0mm in
thickness and shall be made of low-friction paint finish on their exposed surfaces.
4) Deck Board
Deck boards shall be made of stainless steel sheet not less than 1.2mm in thickness
and shall be made of hairline finish on their exposed surfaces.
558.3.13 Handrail
558.3.13.1 Rubber Handrail

The handrail shall be constructed of laminated canvases and synthetic rubber properly
vulcanized and be spliced to insure a strong and smooth splice.
558.3.13.2 Handrail Drive

Handrail drives shall be of traction type with pressuring rollers and sheave, and shall be
driven by the main step drive unit at the truss and so arranged that the handrail moves at
substantially the same speed and the same direction as the steps. Each handrail shall
operate on formed guides on the balustrades.
558.3.14 Comb Plate

1) The comb plate covered with slip-proof patterned stainless steel plate and black-
painted grooves shall be provided with yellow resin comb teeth at the front edge of
the comb plate. The comb teeth shall be so arranged that the cleats of the step treads
shall pass between them with minimum clearance.
2) The comb teeth shall be made in sections so that any damaged or worn section can
be readily replaced without dismantling entire comb plate.
558.3.15 Landing Plate and Manhole Cover

Landing plate shall be furnished to cover the area of the landing. The landing plate shall
consist of cover plates and reinforced backing steel plates. The cover plates shall be made
of stainless steel plate with slip-proof surface, and black-painted grooves. Manhole
TS 500 - 530
covers at the top and bottom landings shall be removable for access to the driving
machines and pits.
558.3.16 Lubrication
All moving parts of the escalator shall be provided with suitable bearings and provisions
for lubrication. The step chains, the handrail chain and the drive chain shall be lubricated
automatically by oilers.
558.3.17 Controller
558.3.17.1 VVVF Control

1) A controller shall include an inverter, circuit breaker, switches, contactors and
relays. The control circuit shall be driven by AC of electric power. The controller
shall be permanently mounted and accessible for service. Escalator shall not stop
suddenly in case instant power failure happens (max. 0.10msec).
2) A Regenerative Converter
The regenerative converter transmits the power generated when the escalator runs
downward with a certain passenger load or more to other facilities in the building.
It has the effect of reducing energy consumption.
3) Automatic Operation with Post
Sensor posts located on both sides of the landing and boarding areas incorporate
traditional beam sensors, with or without directional indicators allowing or denying
passenger entry. The escalator shall be remained stationary on stand-by.
4) Post-free Automatic Operation
As the sensors embedded in the handrail inlet cap detect passengers and control
automatic operation. The escalator operates at a low speed in stand-by, and
gradually increases speed to the rated speed after detecting a passenger approaching
the boarding area.
558.3.18 Electrical Wiring

All necessary wiring shall be provided and installed for the proper operation of the
equipment. The entire wiring system shall be tested for insulation ground. Poly-vinyl
chloride (PVC) cables shall be applied and fixed to truss members at suitable intervals.
558.3.19 Illumination
558.3.19.1 Step Demarcation Lighting

Lighting below the horizontal (flat) steps can be provided to enhance passenger safety
on boarding and landing and to give visual effect. The light source shall be LED.
TS 500 - 531
558.3.19.2 Fault Indicator (LED)

Fault indicator displays the fault code if a fault occurs on the escalator. The color of the
lamp indicated next to the fault code notifies the operation manager of whether the
operation can be resumed. The indicator displays the operation speed in normal operation.
558.3.20 Safety Device
558.3.20.1 Features
1) Emergency Stop Button (E-STOP)
A button to immediately stop the escalator in emergency situations.
2) Drive Chain Safety Device (DCS)
A safety device that operates to stop the escalator if the drive chain breaks or
stretches beyond an allowable limit.
3) Step Chain Safety Device (SCS) (Rise < 10m)
A safety device that stops the escalator if the step chain breaks or stretches beyond
an allowable limit.
4) Step link Safety Device (SLS) (Rise => 10m)
A step link safety device will be provided at each turnmatic track and will be
provided with an electric contact. The electric contact will open and cause the
safety brake to be applied if either or both of the step link elongate excessively or
break
5) Handrail Guard Safety Device (HGS)
a) Inlet Guard
A guard made of soft rubber, which fits over the outside of the moving handrail
where it enters the balustrade to keep a person’s fingers or hand, or any foreign
object away from the moving handrail opening.
b) Inlet Guard Switch
A safety device that stops escalator when physical contact is made with the inlet.
6) Speed Governor (GOV)
A safety device that stops the escalator before the operating speed exceeds 120%
of the rated speed or if the operation speed becomes unusually slow.
7) Comb-Step Safety Switch (CSS)
A safety device that stops the escalator if a foreign object becomes trapped in the
gap between the step and comb.
8) Electromagnetic Brake
A safety device that stops the escalator in the case of power failure, or if any safety
device or the emergency stop button has been activated.
9) Overload Detection Device
TS 500 - 532
A safety device that stops the escalator if overload has been detected.
10) Skirt Guard Safety Device (SSS)
A safety device to stop the escalator if a shoe or other item becomes trapped in the
gap between the step and skirt guard.
11) Step Motion Safety Device (CRS)
A safety device to stop the escalator when a step has been dislocated on its riser
side due to an object caught between the skirt guard and the step, or between the
steps, or if an abnormality has been observed in the step motion.
12) Handrail Speed Safety Device (HSS)
A safety device that operates to stop the escalator if the moving handrails fail to
synchronize with the steps due to slippage, loosening or breakage of the moving
handrails.
13) Step Level Device (SRS)
A safety device that operates to stop the escalator if the horizontal level of a step
has dropped.
14) Missing Step Device (SMS)
A safety device that stops the escalator if it detects a missing step(s) before it is
visible to passengers.
15) Three Elements (3E)
A safety device that stops the escalator if any of the three abnormal conditions is
detected: open phase (wire breakage), phase reversal or overload.
16) Door Open Switch (DOS)
A safety switch that stops the escalator when the floor plate is opened.
Measurement of Payment

Escalator shall be measured as the “Set” and rate shall be including the following items:
1) Design of Elevators
2) Provision of the production Drawings for the Engineer’s approval.
3) Elevator Factory Inspection.

Payment for Escalator shall be made the following manner:
1) 10% of accepted unit rate: Upon approval of manufacturing Drawings.
2) 60% of accepted unit rate: Upon delivery to Site or designated storage and securely
store to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
TS 500 - 533
3) 30% of accepted unit rate: Upon completion of installation, test/Commissioning

and accepted by the Engineer.
Station
Unit of
Measurement
Item Number
558(1)a Escalator for Calumpit Station, Rise=4.90m (Furnished & Installed) Set
558(1)b Escalator for Calumpit Station, Rise=7.54m (Furnished & Installed) Set
558(2) Escalator for Apalit Station, Rise=10.03m (Furnished & Installed) Set
Escalator for San Fernando Station, Rise=5.40m (Furnished &

558(3)a Set
Installed)
Escalator for San Fernando Station, Rise=7.54m (Furnished &

558(3)b Set
Installed)
558(4)a Escalator for Angeles Station, Rise=5.40m (Furnished & Installed) Set
558(4)b Escalator for Angeles Station, Rise=7.54m (Furnished & Installed) Set
558(5)a Escalator for Clark Station, Rise=5.40m (Furnished & Installed) Set
558(5)b Escalator for Clark Station, Rise=7.54m (Furnished & Installed) Set
558(6)a Escalator for CIA Station, Rise=15.20m (Furnished & Installed) Set
558(6)b Escalator for CIA Station, Rise=6.21m (Furnished & Installed) Set
558(6)c Escalator for CIA Station, Rise=9.20m (Furnished & Installed) Set
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 534
559 SURFACE WATER DISPOSAL
The Work
The works in this section shall consist of onsite surface water disposal, in accordance
Engineer.
559.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required onsite surface water
disposal, as specified herein.

1) Collecting and Disposing of Surface Water
2) De-watering the Site
559.1.3 General
1) The Contractor shall provide at all times adequate facilities for the draining of
the Site. He shall construct and maintain all temporary surface drains.
The drains are to be of sufficient size to safely carry away all anticipated
surface water, considering the locality and time of year.
The Contractor shall at his own expense remove all water which may arise or
be brought into trenches or excavations and shall keep the level of such sub-
soil or accumulated water below the bottom of any permanent works by the use
of sumps and pumps or suitable well-point apparatus.
2) Should the Contractor intend using well points or deep well pumps for
dewatering the Site, shall comply with the following requirements:
a) Before employing a well point or deep-well pump system, the Contractor
shall provide full details to the Engineer for his approval.
b) Preliminary Site trials shall be conducted to determine the final layout of
the system and to verify its effectiveness. Based upon these trials, the
Contractor shall determine the spacing and depth of the points, as well as
the number of stages required.
c) The manner of installation of the well points shall not cause weakening or
subsidence of the surrounding area.
d) Measuring devices to determine the water head and the flow rate shall be
incorporated into the system for control purposes.
e) Where auxiliary sand drains are installed, they shall be considered an
integral part of the system.
TS 500 - 535
f) The system shall provide for sufficient valves in leaders and pipes to
maintain control over separate sections of the system.
g) Adequate filters shall be provided to prevent loss of ground resulting from
pumping. The test shall be carried out at the beginning of pumping by
collecting pumped water in a tank to check amount of fines settling to the
bottom of the tank and random checks shall be carried out, upon request
of the Engineer, to ensure that the filters around the wells are working
properly.
3) If pumping is required, the Contractor is to make provision for satisfactory
disposal of water without causing flooding. The Contractor will be held solely
responsible for any loss or damage caused by such flooding.
4) The system shall ensure that excessive having of the base of the excavation
does not occur and water removed by pumps shall be discharged well clear of
the excavation.
5) An adequate margin of pumping capacity shall be provided.
6) Ensure that the system can be operational in the event of power cuts,
breakdowns and during maintenance.
7) The system shall include a detailed contingency plan to deal with danger to the
works and adjacent area in the event of excessive rainfall.
8) Except as may be provided for emergencies, the dewatering system shall work
continuously until completion underground construction.
9) In the event of a complete breakdown in the system after completion of exterior
walls but prior to ground level slab, provision shall be available to flood the
structure to prevent excessive external pressure on the structure.
10) Any temporary dewatering pipes which are left in place after the concreting of
the floor slab must incorporate an acceptable
11) The Contractor shall dispose of surface water in such a manner as not to cause
any damage, nuisance or injury. All sumps are to be sunk clear of any
permanent work and shall be refilled by the Contractor after completion of the
permanent work. The pumping operations shall be conducted so as to avoid
undermining any part of the Work.
12) The Contractor shall desilt all surface drains before discharging water into
public drains.
13) The acceptance of the Contractor's dewatering system by the Engineer shall no
way relief the Contractor of his responsibility for any changes required in the
system in the course of the work.

Quantity of Surface Water Disposal is measured as the “Lump Sum” and rate shall
be included the following works and items:
TS 500 - 536
1) Cast iron roof drains with Stainless Steel trainer

2) Rainwater pipes including supports and necessary accessories.
3) Reinforced concrete Catch Basins and drain pipe between catch basin to main
drain channel.
4) Other necessary works to complete the all works.

The quantity measured as provided in Method of Measurement shall be paid for at
the contract unit price per cubic meter of surface water removed, which price and
payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials
and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals to complete the work prescribed
in this section.
Item Number
559(1)a 150mm Dia. Cast Iron Roof drain with Stainless Steel trainer Each
559(1)b 150mm Dia. Stainless steel Downspout Meter
559(1)b 200mm x400mm x600mm, Reinforced Concrete Catch basin Each
559(1)d Drain pipe between catch basin to main drain channel. Meter

Number
D559(2)a 150mm Dia. Cast Iron Roof drain with Stainless Steel trainer Each
D559(2)b 150mm Dia. Stainless steel Downspout Meter
D559(2)b 200mm x400mm x600mm, Reinforced Concrete Catch basin Each
D559(2)d Drain pipe between catch basin to main drain channel Meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 537
560 CONCRETE PAVING
The Work
installation onsite of concrete paving, including all anchorage provisions, in
560.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required concrete paving, as
560.1.2 Scope
This section shall consist of a pavement of Portland Cement Concrete Type1 (ASTM
Designation C-150 latest revision), with or without reinforcement and concrete ramp
constructed on the prepared base in accordance with this Specifications and in
conformity with the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross sections shown on the
Drawings.
560.1.3 Summary
1) Includes but not limited to:
a) Prepare pavement sub-base as described in the Drawings and these
Specifications to receive pavement base and paving.
b) Furnish and install pavement base as described in the Drawings and these
Specifications.
c) Furnish and install Portland cement concrete paving as described in the
Drawings and these Specifications.
560.1.4 References
American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM):
ASTM D 1557-02, “Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Modified Effort.”
560.1.5 Submittals
Shop Drawings: Joint layout plan for written approval before starting work on this
section.

Pre-Installation Conferences:
TS 500 - 538
1) Participate in pre-installation conference.

2) Schedule paving pre-installation conference after surveying and staking of
parking areas and installation of sleeves, but before installation of base and
paving.

Project Environmental Requirements:
Do not perform work during unfavorable conditions as specified below:
1) Temperature below 10 deg C.
2) Presence of free surface water.
3) Over-saturated base and sub-base materials.
560.1.8 Concrete
Concrete with a 28-day ultimate compressive strength of 20.7 Mpa with a maximum
size of coarse aggregate of 50mm.
1) Portland cement: shall conform to Portland cement ASTM C150 Type 1 (Not
Type 1P)
2) Aggregate: well-graded, clean, hard particles of gravel or crushed rock. Use
additives.
3) Water: clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic
materials or other deleterious substances
4) Reinforcing Steel : structural grade ASTM A615 deformed bars, new and free
from rust, oil, grease, defects or kinks
5) Joint Filler: preformed joint filler of poured mixed asphalt and rubber filler
conforming to ASTM D 1751
6) Concrete Curing Materials shall be any of the following:
a) Burlap: AASHTO M182 having a weight of 14 ounces or more per square
yard when dry
b) Impervious Sheeting: ASTM C 171
c) Liquid Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309 Type ID or Type 2.
Compound shall be free of paraffin or petroleum
560.1.9 Concrete for Concrete Proportions and Consistency, Formworks, Methods of

Placing Concrete Compaction, Finishing and Curing Concrete
560.1.9.1 Joints
1) Weakened Plane Joints
TS 500 - 539
With the use of a power-driven saw, cut a groove in the pavement at locations
shown in the Drawings, to a minimum depth of 5 mm and a maximum of 50
mm within 24 hours after the concrete was placed.
2) Transverse Expansion Joints
Use pre-molded expansion joint fillers for transverse expansion joints as
detailed and shown in plans.
560.1.9.2 Surface Finish

Use proper tools for pavement finishing.
560.1.9.3 Curing and Protection

Immediately after the finishing operations, exposed concrete surfaces shall be cured
by one of the following methods as the Contractor may elect:
1) Mat Method: The entire exposed surface
2) Surface shall be covered with two or more layers of burlap. Mats shall overlap
each other at least 150mm. The mat shall be thoroughly wetted with water prior
to placing on concrete surface and shall be kept continuously in a saturated
condition and in an intimate contact with concrete for not less than 7 days.
3) Impervious Sheeting Method: The entire exposed surface shall be wetted with
a fine spray of water and then covered with impervious sheeting material.
Sheets shall be laid directly to the concrete surface with the light-colored side
up and overlapped 12 inches when a continuous sheet is not used. The curing
medium shall not be less than 450mm wider than the concrete surface to be
cured and shall be secured weighted down by heavy wood planks or by placing
a bank of moist earth along edges and laps in the sheets. Sheets shall be
satisfactory repaired or replaced if torn or otherwise damaged during curing.
The curing method shall remain on the concrete surface to be cured for not less
than 7 days.
4) Membrane-Curing Method: The entire exposed surface shall be covered with a
membrane-forming curing compound. Where Type 1 curing compound is used,
concrete surface shall be shaded from direct rays of the sun for a period of 3
days immediately after spraying. Curing compound shall be applied in two
coats by hand-operated pressure sprayers at coverage of approximately 200
square feet per gallon for both coats. The second coat shall be applied in a
direction approximately at right angles to the direction of application of the
first coat. Apply an additional coat to all surfaces showing discontinuity,
pinholes or other defects. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall
within 3 hours after curing compound has been applied shall be re-sprayed by
the same method stated above at no additional cost to the Employer.
5) Expansion joint openings shall be sealed at the top by inserting moistened paper
or fiber rope, or by covering with strips of waterproof paper prior to the
application of the curing compound, in a manner to prevent the curing
compound entering the joint. These surfaces should be adequately protected for
TS 500 - 540
7 days from pedestrian and vehicular traffic and any area damaged by
subsequent construction within the 7-day during period shall be re-sprayed at
no additional cost to the Employer.
560.1.9.4 Opening to Traffic

Preclude any or all kinds of traffic over the concrete pavement for a period of ten
(10) days or longer if the Consultant deems it necessary. Maintain satisfactory
barricades to exclude all traffic on the area. Repair of damage due to traffic shall be
at the expense of the Contractor.

Concrete paving is measured as the “Square Meters”.

Item Number
Refer to Section 502

Number
Refer to Section 502
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 541
561 FLAGPOLES
The Work
flagpoles, including all accessories and support/ anchorage provisions, in accordance
Engineer.
561.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required flagpoles, including all
accessories and support/ anchorage provisions, as shown on the Drawings and/or as
specified herein.
561.1.2 Description
Fixed high dimensional, ground set, uniform conical taper, seamless tube flag pole.
561.1.3 Submittals
1) Shop Drawings: Flagpole, including base and finial ball, showing construction
and installation.
2) Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Flagpole
561.1.4 Applicable Publications

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent reference.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
561.1.5 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

A167-96 Stainless and Heat-resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip
B209-96 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy-Sheet and Plate
B241/B241M-96 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless
Extruded Tube
TS 500 - 542
561.1.7 Materials
1) Aluminum, Extruded: ASTM B241, alloy 6063 T6.
2) Aluminum, Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy ll00.
3) Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Class 302 or 304.
561.1.8 Fabrication
Fabricate flagpole of seamless extruded aluminum tube, uniform conical taper of
approximately 1 in 70 (one inch in every 6 feet). Taper shall not exceed 50 percent
of outside diameter of pole. When flagpoles are shipped in more than one section,
provide self-aligning sleeves for field joint.
561.1.8.1 Base
Aluminum plate or stainless steel, of stock design similar to that shown.
561.1.8.2 Finial Ball

2mm (0.0747 inch) thick spun aluminum sphere, with seams of ball welded flush and
watertight. Mount ball on threaded rod to fit truck. Diameter of ball shall be
approximately same as pole butt diameter.
561.1.8.3 Truck
Equip pole with extra heavy, revolving, non-fouling, ball bearing type truck with cast
aluminum body. Fit truck with two cast aluminum, nylon bushed sheaves on stainless
steel axles.
561.1.8.4 Halyards
Two sets of 9mm (3/8 inch) diameter, nylon braided rope having not less than two
bronze swivel snaps for each halyard.
561.1.8.5 Cleats
Two aluminum cleats of 230mm (nine inch) minimum length. Secure cleats to pole
with two 9mm (3/8 inch) flat head aluminum machine screws.
561.1.9 Finish
1) Finish exposed surfaces of flagpoles.
2) Flagpole shaft: Satin brushed aluminum, then heavily waxed.
3) Finial ball: Gold anodized aluminum, then heavily waxed.
4) Base and cleats: Finish to match flagpole.
5) Stainless Steel (base): As recommended by flagpole manufacturer.
TS 500 - 543
Set flagpoles in concrete base. Provide galvanized, corrugated steel sleeve or tube of
length shown welded to steel base plates for installation in concrete. Wrap top of
sleeve with two layers of asphalt felt for distance of 600mm (2 feet) down. Fill space
between pole and metal sleeve to within two inches of top with fine dry sand and fill
balance of space with waterproof compound as shown.
561.1.11 Lightning Rod

Weld lightning ground rod of 19mm (3/4 inch) diameter galvanized steel to base
plate at bottom of sleeve or tube, and to steel support plate at grade.

Flagpole is measured as the “Set” and the rate shall be included the following items:
1) Tapered aluminum flagpole and anchors including all necessary accessories as
shown on the Drawing.
2) Concrete foundation of the size as shown on the Drawing including mortar
plaster finishing.

Stations Description Unit of Measurement
Building Pay
Item Number
561(1) 220mm Dia. bottom and 83mm Dia. top Aluminum taper Set
Flagpole
Depot Building Description Unit of Measurement

Pay Item
Number
D561 220mm Dia. bottom and 83mm Dia. top Aluminum taper Set
Flagpole.
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 544
562 WIRE NET FENCING
The Work
installation onsite of wire net fencing, including all support/anchorage provisions, in
562.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required wire net fencing,
including all support/anchorage provisions, as shown on the Drawings and/or as
specified herein.
562.1.2 Scope
1) Furnish materials and equipment and perform labor required to complete the
construction of fences (with matching gates) and all accessories.
2) See drawings for location and extent of work required.
562.1.3 Submittals
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings and secure Engineer’s approval.
562.1.5 Concrete Hollow Blocks

Please refer to the pertinent Sections at TS 400.
562.1.6 Concrete Post

Reference Section 405: “Concrete Structures”.
562.1.7 Wrought Iron Grilles

16mm square bars with 12mm square bars electrically-welded to 50mm x 75mm (2”
x 3”) Ga.# 12 tubular steel frame, painted finish.
TS 500 - 545
562.1.8 Fence Gates

Fence gates shall be the type shown on the Drawings. Latch end member of gate
frames shall be extended sufficiently above the top member. Gate shall be attached
to the gate frame by method standard with the manufacturer except that welding will
not be permitted. Latches shall be arranged for pad-locking so that the padlock will
be accessible from both sides of the gate regardless of the latching arrangements.
Gates shall be installed at the locations shown on the Drawings. Hinged gates shall
be mounted to swing as indicated. Gates including its accessories shall be installed
as recommended by the manufacturer. Hinge pins, and hardware shall be welded or
otherwise secured to prevent removal.
562.1.9 Accessories
1) Bolt; stainless steel schedule 40.
2) Hinge; Hub Type with 2 sets Bar-Bearing per Hinge (Heavy Duty) – 4 inches
dia., 3 pieces for vehicular gate and 2 pieces for pedestrian gate or as indicated
in the Drawings.
3) Welding Electrodes: Approved for manual shielded metal arc welding as
required E - 6013 for general welding and the attachment of the fence wire
fabric to the frame body/assembly.
562.1.10 Site Preparation

The Contractor shall perform such clearing and grubbing as may be necessary to
construct the fence to the required grade and alignment. Fence shall generally follow
the contour of the ground. Grading shall be performed where necessary to provide a
neat appearance.
562.1.11 Laying of Concrete Hollow Blocks

Concrete hollow blocks shall be set plumb and true to line with level horizontal joints.
Cells of concrete hollow block shall be laid with full mortar coverage on horizontal
and vertical face shells. Joints of exterior concrete hollow blocks that will be exposed
shall be cut flush and tooled finish with a 6.0mm deep "V" joint for horizontal and
vertical joints.
562.1.12 Erection of Post

The post shall be erected vertically in position inside the formwork of the foundation
block prior to the placing of concrete and shall be adequately supported by bracing
to prevent movement of the post during the placing and setting of the concrete. The
posts shall be erected to the height and location shown on the Drawings, or as ordered
by the Engineer.
Vertical tolerance of the Post shall be within 1/1000.
TS 500 - 546
562.1.13 Installation of Wrought Iron Bar Grilles

Wrought iron bars shall be installed as per manufacturer’s installation procedure.
562.1.14 Painting
Please refer to section on “Painting”.

Stainless-steel and Metal Wire net fences is measured as the “Square Meters” and
the rate shall be included the following items:
1) Steel pipe for post, horizontal bottom bar and top bars including reinforced
concrete post foundations.
2) H=500mm spike with barbed wire on top of the Fence
3) Net fences gate including gate posts and foundation.
4) Lock set and Hinges of Net fences gate shall be galvanized steel.

Item Number
562(3) H=2000mm Stainless Steel Webnet Fencing (ø 2mm,
mesh aperture 40mm) and H=500mm spike with barbed Square meter
wire

Number
D562(2) H=2000mm Stainless Steel Webnet Fencing (ø 2mm, Square meter
mesh aperture 40mm) and H=500mm spike with
barbed wire
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 547
563 SOFTSCAPE
Description
softscape, including all anchorage provisions, in accordance with this Specification
General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required softscape, as shown on
The Work

The intent of this section is to:
1) Carry out the transplanting or planting of all Trees Palms, Bamboo and Plants
marked on the Site/or as identified by the Drawings or by Engineer.
2) Transport all trees Palms, Bamboo and plants to the temporary Site nursery.
3) Establish the Nursery Area.
4) Maintain all Trees Palms, Bamboo and Plants in a healthy vigorous growing
condition ready for Employer use.
The work of this section includes, but is not limited to the following:
a) Imported screened soil for backfill mix.
b) Backfill mix preparation.
c) Transplantation.
d) Planting operations.
e) Maintenance.
f) Warranty.
563.3.2 Quality Assurances
563.3.2.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies

Perform Work in accordance with all applicable laws, codes, and regulations
required by authorities having, jurisdiction over such work and provide for all
inspections and permits required by Local Authorities in furnishing, transporting and
installing materials.
TS 500 - 548
563.3.2.2 Samples and tests

Engineer reserves the right to take and evaluate samples of materials for conformity
to Specifications at any time.
The Contractor shall furnish samples upon request by the Engineer.
Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the Site at the Contractor's
expense.
563.3.3 Personnel
563.3.3.1 Qualified Horticulturalist

The Contractor shall employ a qualified Horticulturalist to supervise:
1) Transplantation.
2) Planting operations.
3) Maintenance.
563.3.3.2 Nursery staff

The Contractor shall employ in connection with the Work under the Contract only
such persons as are careful, skilled and experienced in the horticultural trade.
563.3.4 Machinery and Equipment

1) The Contractor shall supply at his own cost and expense all machinery and
equipment necessary for the proper completion of the Work under the Contract.
2) The Engineer reserves the right to determine whether the machinery and
equipment is suitable for the transplanting or planting of all Trees, Palms,
Bamboo and other Plants.
563.3.5 Submittals
563.3.5.1 Transplanting Schedule

Provide a copy of projected transplanting schedule to Engineer prior to beginning
any transplanting operations.
563.3.5.2 Schedule of Transplanted or Planted Plants

Provide a schedule of all Trees/Palms, Bamboo and other Plants transported and
established in the temporary Site Nursery.
1) For all Trees, the schedule shall include the tree species, the height and overall
spread of canopy and the trunk caliper measured at 300mm above ground.
2) For all Palms the list should include the Palms the species and height.
3) For all Bamboo and other Plants the list should include the species and height.
TS 500 - 549
563.3.5.3 Personal Resumes

Provide resumes for the qualified Horticulturist and a list of the Nursery Staff
personnel and their experience and qualifications, prior to beginning any
transplanting.
563.3.5.4 Machinery/Equipment
Provide a list of all machinery and equipment with their performance capacities,
which will be utilized in the cutting of the root balls, and the lifting and transporting
of all Trees and palms; prior to beginning any transplanting or planting operation.
563.3.5.5 Maintenance Schedule

Provide a schedule of all procedures to be followed in maintaining the containerized
Trees, Palms, Bamboo and other Plants in optimum growing conditions and
appearance.
The schedule shall address any specific requirements for each species and include:
1) Fertilizer application - type of fertilizer, rate of application and timing.
2) Hormone treatment - type of hormone, trimming.
3) Watering - type of irrigation.
563.3.5.6 Imported Screened Soil for Backfill

1) Prior to commencing transplanting operation, furnish the source of any
imported screened soil to the Engineer.
2) Take representative soil from the area under consideration and submit samples
for analysis.
3) Submit test results to the Engineer for approval.
4) Include in the Tender Proposal the cost of all labor, material and equipment
required to place and prepare the backfill mix. Do not include the anticipated
cost of amendments. A variation for the cost of the required amendment
materials, delivered to the Site, will be issued based on the soil analysis results.
563.3.6 Site Conditions
563.3.6.1 Co-ordination
Co-ordinate and co-operate with other trades to enable the work to proceed as rapidly
and efficiently as possible.
563.3.6.2 Underground Utilities and Obstructions

Verify the location of all underground utilities and other obstructions prior to starting
work. Any obstructions found which are not documented shall be reported to the
Engineer.
TS 500 - 550
Damage caused by the Contractor to any known utility line or other underground
obstruction caused by the Contractor shall be repaired by the Contractor at the
Contractor’s expense. The Contractor shall report damage to any known utilities to
the Engineer.
563.3.7 Warranty
563.3.7.1 Plant Material

All plant materials relocated under this Specification shall be warranted in writing,
from the date of transplantation or planting to the completion of the Contract and the
Taking Over Certificate against defective, unsound or diseased conditions that may
appear. Payment for the maintenance of the Trees, Palms, Bamboo and other Plants
while in the Temporary Nursery shall be included in the Contract.
The Contractor shall give written notice to the Engineer of the death of any warranted
plant materials during the warranty period, and give written details of the subject
plant material including Tree species, height and spread of the Tree and caliper of
the trunk - measured 300 mm above ground.
The subject plant material shall be replaced within the time of the warranty period
with new material of the same size and condition, and installed according to the
Specifications. The expense of replacement as well as the removal from the Site of
the dead plant material shall be borne by the Contractor. Replacement shall be of a
size closely approximating the site of the plant if normal growth had occurred since
the original planting.
Replacement shall be subject to all requirements of the Specifications.
563.3.7.2 Liability
The liability under the warranty shall include the repair of to the Employer’s property
caused by the failure of the work performed under this section. All the provisions of
the section apply to work performed to satisfy the requirements of the Warranty.
Products
563.4.1 Growing Media
563.4.1.1 Imported Screened Soil for Backfill Mix

Natural, fertile, soil free from stones, noxious weeds, seeds (especially nut grass or
local variants), roots and subsoil in any quantity.
563.4.1.2 Soil Amendment

1) Mushroom compost: To be salinity stabilized and fully spent.
2) Imported topsoil
3) Nitrogen stabilized hardwood shavings.
4) Compost.
TS 500 - 551
5) Sawdust Fines.
6) Fine bark Fines.
7) Sandy Loam.
8) Peat.
9) Black soil
10) Double washed course river sand.
563.4.1.3 Fertilizer
N-P-K as recommended by soil analysis, uniform in composition, free-flowing and
suitable for application with approved equipment, delivered to the site in un-opened
containers, each fully labeled, conforming to the applicable fertilizer laws, and
bearing the name or mark of the manufacturer.
1) Plant Tablets: Agriform 2lgm tablets (l0-l0-5)
2) Liquid fertilizer shall be approved organic liquid fertilizer.
3) Slow release fertilizer shall be Osmocote or an approved equivalent.
563.4.2 Tree Materials

Tree heights shall refer to the tree trunk height, not the overall height of the tree
Measurement of the trunk height shall be the distance between the top of the tree
head.

Water: Potable water in the nursery or designated areas will be the responsibility of
the Contractor.
563.4.4 Accessories
1) Tree paint
Cabot Tree seal or approved equal.
Sealant for roots shall be an approved horticultural sealer.
2) Filter cloth
3) Tree roots underground support system
Tree roots underground support system shall consist of trunk belt, root ball
shoulder pat and slid anchors as shown on the Drawings and approved by the
Engineer.
4) Surface water collection drain system
Surface water collection drain system shall consist of 0.3mm thick vapor briar
file and 45mm thick polystyrene formed drain board as show on the drawing
or approved by the Engineer.
TS 500 - 552
5) Tree Circle
Tree Circle shall be of the Cast Iron and size of tree circle shall be selected by
the Engineer.
Execution
563.5.1 Inspection
Prior to commencing Work, meet with the Engineer and all other concerned parties
on the Site to review the Work under this section. Request this meeting, in writing,
two weeks prior to scheduled meeting time.
563.5.2 Tree Pruning

1) Prior to Transplantation, large trees as identified by the Engineer, shall be
pruned to reduce the crown, pruning shall also be carried out for reasons of
safety or to improve the health of trees.
2) The Contractor shall nominate branches to be removed. Following approval by
the Engineer, the approved branches shall be trimmed as specified.
563.5.3 Equipment
All tools should be appropriate for the Work to be carried out and shall be surface
sterilized with ethylated spirits after use on trees which are known or suspected to be
diseased.
563.5.4 Appearance
The general description of the Work to be done is to be interpreted in relation to the
shape, size, character and condition of each individual tree.
All operations shall be carried out so as to leave a well-balanced tree of natural shape
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
563.5.5 Inspection
The estimate of work needed will normally have been based on judgment made from
ground level. The Contractor shall make a careful inspection of each tree during the
course of his work and shall report any additional defects or weaknesses which may
be revealed.
563.5.6 Removal of Branches

All final cuts shall be made into living wood to allow healing by the growth tissue.
Cuts shall be made in such a manner as to prevent the formation of moisture holding
pockets.
All final cuts to be made into living wood immediately above the "branch bark ridge".
TS 500 - 553
All vertical or near vertical branches shall be cut off neatly just above the nearest
suitable live growth. The branch shall be sawn off at an angle no greater than is
necessary to ensure rapid shedding of water.
Large cuts must be carefully pared to give a clean and smooth surface which will
allow rapid healing.
Heavy branches shall be removed in sections and undercut to avoid tearing the bark.
The sections shall be lowered by slings to avoid damage of the tree and its
surroundings.
563.5.7 Repair of Bark Wounds

Unclosed bark wounds shall be pared back to undamaged live tissue, badly cut
stumps to be re-cut.
563.5.8 Removal of Dead Wood from the Crown

The Contractor shall remove all dead, diseased and dying branch wood, and broken
stumps, throughout the crown. Final cuts to be made into living wood where possible.
563.5.9 Crown Thinning

The density of the crown is to be reduced as directed by the Engineer by the cutting
back of branches from the inner section of the crown, so as to leave the tree with a
natural and well-balanced shape.
563.5.10 Crown Lifting

Limbs or small branches shall be removed as directed by the Engineer.
563.5.11 Cavity Filling: Water Pockets in Forks

Water pockets in forks shall be thoroughly cleaned, dried and filled with non-ridged
filler to be approved by the Engineer; the top of the filling being sloped to give a
rapid run-off for moisture. Where it is impossible to reach the bottom of narrow water
pockets they may be tapped with an auger, the water drained away and the auger hole
plugged with a hardwood level dipped in wound dressing.
563.5.12 Digging and Transportation Procedures

1) The excavated root ball size shall follow the guidelines hereafter described.
However each Palm, Tree, Bamboo and other Plants specimen shall be
examined prior to transplanting by the qualified Horticulturalist and the
Engineer and amendments made to these guidelines as dictated by the nature
of each specimen and Site conditions.
GUIDELINES FOR EXCAVATED ROOT BALL SIZE
PALMS
HEIGHT ROOTBALL DIAMETER
l-3 m 1.5m
3-5 m 2m
TS 500 - 554
5 m* 2.5m
TREES
TRUNK CALIPER ROOTBALL DIAMETR
(measured 300 mm above ground)
100-150 mm 2m
150-250 mm 2.3m
250-450 mm 2.6m
450-600 mm 3m
600-750 mm 3.5m
PANDANUS
HEIGHT ROOTBALL DIAMETER
Up to 4 m 1.5m
Over 4 m 2m
2) The cutting of the root ball shall be done manually or by means of a chain
trenching machine or mechanical tree spade. The cut will be 150 mm longer on
each side to allow all the damaged roots to be trimmed and sealed. Under no
circumstances shall the initial cutting of the root ball perimeter be done with a
backhoe or excavator. Any Palms dug in this manner will be rejected.
3) Undercut the root ball horizontally by hand sufficient to enable lifting.
563.5.13 Lifting and Transporting or Planting of Trees/Palms

1) The root ball shall be thoroughly watered before lifting is carried out.
The entire Tree shall be watered to prevent dehydration during the entire
transport operation.
2) Use only nylon "endless slings" or canvas slings for lifting. Trees with
disfiguration from chain or rope damage will rejected or require an extended
warranty period depending on the severity of the damage as determined by the
Engineer.
3) The root ball of tree shall be wrapped with sufficient material to minimize bare
rooting and ensure secure packing of the roots during lifting. The lifting method
proposed shall be submitted in writing for approval by the Engineer.
4) The lifting of the Tree/Palm shall be done by means of a crane.
5) Transport the Trees to the temporary Site Nursery.
563.5.14 Tree Planting: Preliminary

1) All large trees, as identified by the Engineer, shall be planted in planting holes
lined with filter cloth.
2) Planting holes shall be excavated to dimensions dictated by root ball
dimensions. Holes shall be irregular in shape and large enough to allow a
minimum of 300mm of backfill beneath and round the root ball.
3) Line tree planting hole with filter cloth in accordance with instructions.
TS 500 - 555
Lap joints 100 minimum and return up side of planting hole. Securely peg filter
cloth around the edges of planting hole.
4) Place tree topsoil mix. Do not disturb filter cloth during placement of mix.
Install trees as specified.
563.5.15 Planting Operations

1) Palms, Trees, Bamboo and other Plants shall be planted immediately after
digging and transportation.
2) Planting holes shall be excavated to dimensions dictated by the root ball
dimensions. Holes should be irregular in shape and large enough to allow a
minimum of 399mm of backfill mix beneath and around the root ball.
563.5.16 Watering
Before planting begins, thoroughly water the root ball and planting holes.
Water the plants immediately after planting, and thereafter as required to maintain
growth rates free of stress.
563.5.17 Setting Palms/Trees

1) Palms/Trees shall be centered and set on compacted backfill mix that has been
puddled and settled.
Ensure that all palms/trees are set to their natural growing levels flush with the
surrounding soil levels.
2) Use backfill mix as specified to backfill. Set plant plumb and brace rigidly in
position until backfill mix has been tamped solidly around root ball. When
backfilled within 150mm of finish grade, water thoroughly, saturating root ball
and evenly distribute planting tablets per manufacturer's instructions. Continue
filling pit to finish grade with backfill mix. Saturate the backfill by hand
watering during planting to expel any remaining air pockets. Form saucer berm
around base of tree to retain water.
563.5.18 Hormone Treatment

Apply root including hormone to root ball surface per manufacturer's instructions.
Guying: Immediately after planting, guy all trees as shown on details if support is
required.
Tree roots underground support system and Surface water collection drain system
shall be installed in strict accordance with the approved manufacturer’s installation
instructions.
563.5.19 Planting Maintenance

1) Maintain all Trees, Palms, Bamboo and other Plants in optimum growing
condition and appearance.
TS 500 - 556
2) Maintenance as specified below shall coincide with the delivery of the first
transplanted materials to the Site nursery and shall continue to the completion
of the Contract and the Taking Over Certificate is issued.
a) Irrigate all plants as required to ensure active growth keeping area moist
but not saturated. Regulate irrigations as necessary to avoid erosion and
gullying.
b) Apply maintenance period fertilizer in accordance with the manufacture’s
recommendations and the maintenance schedule.
c) Exercise proper caution and take measures necessary to avoid plant burn.
d) Apply root inducing hormone in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and the maintenance schedule.
e) Keep planting area free of weeds and undesirable grasses.
f) No chemical weed killer will be used unless authorized by the Engineer.
g) Inspect all plants for disease or insect damage weekly. Treat affected
material immediately and notify the Engineer.
h) Remove damaged or diseased growth from Palms and Trees.
i) Treat cuts larger than 12mm diameter with specified tree paint.
j) Immediately remove any dead plants. Replace shall be as specified under
Warranty.
k) Tighten, repair guys, and reset to proper grades or upright position any
plants that are not in their proper growing position.

Softscape works are measured as follows:
1) Quantity of Tree Plantings of each height are measured as the “Each” and rate
shall be included all works and items specified hereinbefore.
2) Ground covering (Grass) is measured as the “square meter”
3) Plant Pot Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete with low-height plant/shrub is
measured as the “Number”

Amount of interim payment shall be determined by percentage of actual progress of
lump sum price approved by the Engineer.
TS 500 - 557

Item Number
563(1) 10m High Tree planting Each
563(4) Ground covering Square Meter
563(5) Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Plant Pot including low
Set
height plant/shrub

Number
D563 Softscape Square meter
- END OF SECTION -
TS 500 - 558
564 HARDSCAPE (External Works) AND RELATED FACILITIES
The Work
installation onsite of hardscape, including all anchorage provisions, in accordance
Engineer.
564.1.1 General
equipment and services necessary to complete the required hardscape, as shown on
564.1.2 Termite Control
Termite Control shall be carried out whole Station area.

Quantity of Hardscape are measured as the “Lump Sum” and rate/amount shall be
included the following:
1) Driveway paving, and Pavement markings rates shall be included all works
based on the requirements of the Philippines standards (DPWH Standard
Specifications for Highway, Bridge and Airport, 2013)
2) Walkway paving
3) Road Signs
4) 90 x 90 x 90mm Granite brock Walkway Paving and Precast Curb Stone and
Median Barrier.
5) Street Light and Exterior furniture.
6) Termite Control for whole Station area and depot facilities areas.
TS 500 - 559


Item Number
564(1) Driveway Paving Square Meter
564(2) Median Barrier Square Meter
564(3) 90 x 90 x 90mm Granite brock Walkway Paving Square Meter
564(4) Street Lights Set
564(5) Exterior Furniture Set
564(6) Pavement Marking Pedestrian lines and Parking Bay Square Meter
Curb Stone [Refer to TS504(1)]
Pavement Marking Warning Signs, W7-4, Size 1200mm x
800mm, Including Post [Refer to TS129(1)b]
Premixed Reflectorized Pavement markings [Refer to
TS130(1)]

Number
564(1) Driveway Paving Square Meter
564(2) Median Barrier Square Meter
564(3) 90 x 90 x 90mm Granite brock Walkway Paving Square Meter
564(4) Street Lights Set
564(5) Exterior Furniture Set
564(6) Pavement Marking Pedestrian lines and Parking Bay Square Meter
Curb Stone [Refer to TS504(1)]
Pavement Marking Warning Signs, W7-4, Size 1200mm x
Each
800mm, Including Post [Refer to TS129(1)b]
Premixed Reflectorized Pavement markings [Refer to
130(1) Square Meter
TS130(1)]
TS 500 - 560

CP N-02 Vol.2 Sec.6 IB Technical Specifications 500

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CP N-02 Vol.2 Sec.6 IB Technical Specifications 500

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Procurement of Works

TS 500 ARCHITECTURAL ................................................................................................................................ 40

LIST OF ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................................ 40

DEFINITION OF TERMS .................................................................................................................................. 44

GENERAL PROVISION ..................................................................................................................................... 58

501 ARCHITECTURAL COMPOSITE BUILDING SYSTEM (CBS) ................................................. 75

502 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE FINISHES................................................................................. 82

502.1.3 Environmental Conditions ..................................................................................................................... 82

503 GRAVEL WASHOUT FINISH.......................................................................................................... 88

504 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PAVERS ................................................................................... 92

504.2.4 Edge Restraints ...................................................................................................................................... 96

505 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE ACCESSORIES ..................................................................... 100

506 METAL FABRICATIONS ............................................................................................................... 112

507 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES ............................................................................... 132

507.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 133

508 FURRING AND METAL LATH ..................................................................................................... 137

509 ROUGH CARPENTRY .................................................................................................................... 145

509.2.8 Fire-Retardant Treatment .................................................................................................................... 148

510 FINISH CARPENTRY ..................................................................................................................... 153

511 CABINETRY ..................................................................................................................................... 160

511.3.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 163

512 METAL ROOF PANELS AND ACCESSORIES ........................................................................... 165

513 INSULATED METAL PANELS ..................................................................................................... 171

513.3.2 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 173

514 WATERPROOFING ........................................................................................................................ 176

515 DAMP-PROOFING .......................................................................................................................... 192

515.1.2 Scope ................................................................................................................................................... 192

516 SPRAYED AND AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS ............................................... 194

517 FIRESTOP ......................................................................................................................................... 205

517.1.5 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 208

518 FIREPROOFING .............................................................................................................................. 219

518.4.2 Bases of Payment ................................................................................................................................ 223

519 INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING ............................................................................................... 224

520 RIGID INSULATION ....................................................................................................................... 239

521 SEALANT .......................................................................................................................................... 249

522 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE MATERIAL ...................................................................................... 259

522.2.7 Annex to Classification ....................................................................................................................... 263

523 TENSILE MEMBRANE ROOF STRUCTURE (TMRS).............................................................. 268

524 ROOF ACCESSORIES .................................................................................................................... 273

524.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 274

525 WOODEN DOORS ........................................................................................................................... 276

526 METAL DOOR AND FRAMES (AND WINDOWS) .................................................................... 281

527 METAL LOUVERS .......................................................................................................................... 305

528 ALUMINUM & GLASS DOORS AND WINDOWS ..................................................................... 310

529.1.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................................................ 331

530 GLAZING .......................................................................................................................................... 336

530.4.4 Storage ................................................................................................................................................. 344

531 GLASS DOORS ................................................................................................................................. 347

532 ROLL-UP SHUTTER DOORS ........................................................................................................ 352

532.1.7 Warranty .............................................................................................................................................. 353

533 ACCESS DOORS .............................................................................................................................. 360

534 FINISH HARDWARE ...................................................................................................................... 364

534.1.4 Codes and Standards............................................................................................................................ 364

535 PLASTICS ......................................................................................................................................... 367

536 INTERIOR/EXTERIOR STONE .................................................................................................... 372

536.2.2 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 373

537 TILES (CERAMIC, QUARRY AND TERRAZZO TILE) ........................................................... 379

537.4.2 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................................. 386

538 RESILIENT FLOORING ................................................................................................................. 388

539 CARPET TILES ................................................................................................................................ 393

540 LIGHT GAUGE METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS ......................................................................... 399

541 DRYWALL BOARD SYSTEM........................................................................................................ 401

542 GYPSUM BOARD ............................................................................................................................ 403

542.1.9 Sequencing .......................................................................................................................................... 406